Bomba

Operating and Assembly Instruction
Progressive Cavity Pump
Commission-no. Type
874659 - 874660 BN 10-6L
Read instructions before Always keep instructions

beginning any work! handy on the worksite.
Original Instructions
Issue 03.01.2020
Index
1 Safety ....................................................................................................................................................
Safety....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................11
1.1 Notes on these instructions
1.2 Safety and warning notes
1.3 Designated use
1.4 Foreseeable misuse
1.5 Structure of warning notes
1.5.1 Warning levels
1.5.2 Warning symbols
1.6 Qualification of the personnel
1.7 Tasks, notes for the owners, operators and technicians
1.8 Personal protective equipment
1.9 Safety and protective devices
2 Description of the machine ................................................................................................................... 5

machine...................................................................................................................
2.1 General description
2.2 Mode of action and pumping principle of the machine
2.3 Constructive design
3 Technical Data ......................................................................................................................................

Data......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................66
3.1 Data sheet ................................................................................................................................ 8
3.2 Characteristic Curves ............................................................................................................. 11
4 Transport, Intermediate storage, Disposal ..........................................................................................

Disposal.......................................................................................... 12
..........................................................................................12
4.1 Safety
4.2 Transport
4.2.1 Dimensions, weight and center of gravity
4.2.2 Symbol
4.2.3 Lashing points (AP) for lifting devices
4.2.4 Unpacking the machine
4.3 Temporary storage/corrosion protection
4.4 Disposal
5 Assembly / Installation ........................................................................................................................ 15

Installation........................................................................................................................
5.1 Mounting tools / lifting gear
5.2 Space requirement
5.2.1 Dimension for stator replacement
5.3 Assembly of the complete mounted machine
5.4 Power supply of the machine
5.5 Pipelines
5.5.1 Suction and pressure connection
5.5.2 Pipeline dimensions
5.5.3 Residue-free pipelines
5.5.4 Tension-free assembly
Index
5.6 Dimensional Drawing............................................................................................................. 17
6 Commissioning / De-Commissioning ..................................................................................................

De-Commissioning.................................................................................................. 17
..................................................................................................17
6.1 Commissioning report............................................................................................................ 17
6.2 Measures before commissioning............................................................................................ 18
6.2.1 Checking pipelines
6.2.2 Protective devices on the pump
6.2.3 Electrical / hydraulic connections
6.2.4 Direction of rotation check
6.2.5 Additional devices - optional
6.3 Initial commissioning/repeated commissioning
6.3.1 Avoiding dry running of the pump
6.3.2 Pressure in the suction and pressure connection
6.4 De-commissioning
6.4.1 Switching off the pump
6.4.2 Emptying the pump
6.4.3 Dismantling the pump
6.4.4 Preservation/storage of the pump
7 Maintenance ....................................................................................................................................... 23
Maintenance.......................................................................................................................................
7.1 Preventative measures
7.1.1 Machine down-time
7.2 Lubrication
7.2.1 Joint grease
7.3 Inspection
8 Malfunctions, causes, rectification ...................................................................................................... 25

rectification......................................................................................................
9 Dismantling / Reassembly .................................................................................................................. 27

Reassembly..................................................................................................................
9.1 Dismantling / Reassembly of the machine............................................................................. 27
9.1.2 Dismantling
9.1.3 Reassembly
9.4 Single acting mechanical seal ................................................................................................ 56
9.4.1 Safety
9.4.2 Application conditions and material version
9.4.3 Design
9.4.4 Commissioning
9.4.5 Monitoring during operation
9.4.6 Dismantling of mechanical seal
9.4.7 Reassembly of mechanical seal
9.6 Sectional drawing shaft sealing.............................................................................................. 60
10 Spare parts ......................................................................................................................................... 62

parts.........................................................................................................................................
10.1 Order template for spare parts............................................................................................... 64
Index
10.2 Sectional drawing ................................................................................................................... 67

10.2.1 Parts list ..................................................................................................................... 67
11 Special tools ....................................................................................................................................... 69
12 Related documents .............................................................................................................................

documents............................................................................................................................. 70
.............................................................................................................................70
12.1 Accessories ............................................................................................................................ 72
12.1.1 Accessories TSE ....................................................................................................... 72
12.2 Technical Information............................................................................................................. 92
12.4 Warranty Card........................................................................................................................ 95
12.5 Terms and Conditions ............................................................................................................ 96
13 Appendix .............................................................................................................................................
Appendix............................................................................................................................................. 98
.............................................................................................................................................98
13.1 Manufacturer's documents / suppliers
13.1.1 Gearbox ................................................................................................................... 100
13.1.2 Motor ....................................................................................................................... 340
Subsidiaries
1
Safety
1.1 General notes
 Always keep the operating and maintenance instructions close by the machine.
 If problems cannot be solved with reference to the operating and maintenance instructions,
please contact the manufacturer.
Observe the following points in addition to these operating and maintenance instructions:
• Prohibition, warning and mandatory signs, warning notes on the
machine
• Relevant laws and ordinances
• Statutory provisions on accident prevention
• Corresponding harmonized standards and regulations
1.2 Safety and warning notes
 Comply with safety and warning notes for safe and efficient use of the product.
Signal words for specific dangers and (possible) consequences are explained below. These
are supplemented by symbols (pictograms) if necessary.
1.2.1 Warning notes
NOTICE
Caution for machine!
Possible danger.
Material damage can occur.
CAUTION
Caution for people and machine!

Possible danger.
Minor injury or damage to property can occur.
WARNING
Warning for people!

Possible danger.
Death or serious injury can occur.
DANGER
Danger for people!

Possible danger.
Immediate risk of sever or fatal injury.
Ausgabe Dokument Blatt

issue
C / 11.10.2005 document OM.SAF.01us sheet
1 (4)
1
1
Safety
1.2.2 Danger symbols
Warning: Warning: Warning: Warning:

Suspended load. Tipping over. Hand injuries. Dangerous electri-
cal voltage.
Warning: Warning: Warning: Warning:

Pull-in hazard. Excess pressure. Risk to the environ- Hot surfaces.
ment.
1.2.3 Information symbols
NOTICE
Observe operating Ensure environ- Disconnect power Wear eye protection.

and maintenance mental protection. plug before opening.
instructions.
Wear gloves.
 Instruction to act/take measures
• List item

issue
2 (4)
2
1
Safety
1.3 Dangers that can be caused by the machine
SEEPEX machines are built in accordance with the state of the art.
Nevertheless, there is a residual risk, because the machine works with:
• Mechanical movements that pose a danger
• Electrical voltages and currents
We have used design measures and applied safety technology to minimize the risk to the
health of people posed by this danger.
1.4 Qualification of the personnel

This handbook is intended for:
• Owner
• Operators
• Setters
• Maintenance personnel
1.5 Authorized people

People authorized to undertake operation, set up and maintenance are instructed and trained
specialists employed by the owner/manufacturer.
Detailed technical knowledge is essential for performing any work on the machine.
The owner is responsible for:

• Personnel training
• Compliance with safety regulations
• Compliance with operating and maintenance instructions
The operator must:
• Have received instruction
• Read and understood the relevant parts of the operating instructions before starting work
• Know the safety devices and regulations
1.5.1 Tasks and information for the owner/operators

 Regularly check and maintain the machine, replacing all parts in good time which no longer
guarantee safe operation.
 It is essential to comply with the procedure described in the operating instructions for shut-
ting down the machine.
• On completion of work, attach all safety and protective devices and make sure they are
functioning.
1.5.2 Safety notes for maintenance, inspection and assembly work

 Do not work on the machine or system unless it is stationary and depressurised.
 Switch off the master switch and pull out the power plug before starting work on live com-
ponents.
 Comply with the procedure for shutting down the machine as described in the Shut-down
chapter.
 Decontaminate (de-toxify) machines that are used for pumping media that can be harmful
to health.
 Refer to the Initial start-up chapter before repeated start-up of the machine.

issue
3 (4)
3
1
Safety
1.6 Personal protective equipment
 Wear personal protective equipment and/or additional equipment for your own safety.
 Avoid/limit risks by the use of collective technical protective equipment or by organisational
measures at work.
1.7 Safety and protective devices

 Prior to start-up, bolt SEEPEX machines onto a concrete foundation so as to ensure stability.
 Starting and stopping devices must be clearly recognisable. Take appropriate measures to
avoid defects.
• No protective device is necessary for checking and/or setting the shaft seal.
• Hot surfaces are identified with a danger symbol on the machine.
1.8 Foreseeable misuse

Serious personal injury and damage to property can be caused by:
• Incorrect use
• Incorrect installation or operation of the machine
• Impermissible removal of necessary protective equipment
1.9 Designated use

• Only use SEEPEX machines if they are in perfect condition and in compliance with the
oper-ating and maintenance instructions.
• Do not start up the machine unless the system in which the machine is installed is in
accor-dance with the provisions of the applicable guidelines and statutory regulations.
• Equivalent sustained sound pressure level at workplaces of operating personnel C75 dB
(A). Cavitation-free operation of the machine and screwed connection to concrete founda-
tion are essential.
• SEEPEX machines are components that are exclusively intended for pumping media in
accordance with the technical data (chapter 3.0). Written approval must be obtained from
the manufacturer before other media are pumped.
• Refer to the information on the type plate and the operating instructions for technical data
(chapter 3.0), and comply with them.
• The operating instructions are assigned to the SEEPEX machine based on the
commission number.
Commission No.
Type SEEPEX Inc.

511 Speedway Drive
Year of Manufacture Enon , Ohio 45323
USA
Tag No. [email protected]
ATEX Designation
Similar illustration
1.10 Warranty
• Warranty in accordance with our terms and conditions of delivery and order confirmation.
• It is a condition of the machine warranty that the machine must correspond to the listed
operating instructions in accordance with the type plate/data sheet.
• All wearing parts are excluded from the warranty.
• These operating instructions are subject to copyright. Reproduction is not permitted and will
be punished. Contravention will be pursued through the courts.

issue
4 (4)
4
2
Description of the pump
2.1 General description

seepex pumps are members of the group of rotating displacement pumps.
• Characteristic features
– Special configuration/arrangement of the rotor and stator pumping elements.
– Motion sequence
2.2 Mode of action and pumping principle of the seepex pump

• Seal lines are created by the geometrical configuration/contact between both pumping ele-
ments.
• Seal lines provide total separation between the suction and pressure sides.
Result:
– Increased suction lift capability of the pump
– High pressure build-up irrespective of the rotation speed
2.3 Constructive design
No. Designation
ANT Drive
200 Lantern
307 Plug-in shaft
400 Coupling rod
SEA Shaft seal
500 Suction casing
600 Rotor
RTE Rotating unit
601 Stator
700 Pressure branch

issue A / 10.06.2008 document OM.DES.01us sheet 1 (1) 5
6
3
Technical data
3.1 Data sheet
3.2 Characteristic Curves

issue B / 04.01.2010 document OM.TED.01us sheet 1 (1) 7
8
Progressive cavity pump
BN 10-6L / A1-J0-L8-F0-GA
Application data U 495 SLB002
Conveyed product inorganic sludge

Remark TAG: PP-601A / PP-601B
Flowability flowable
Viscosity low viscosity (< 500 cP/mPas)
Solids content 2%
Size of solids not specified
2% of soda diluted
Density unknown, 1 kg/dm³ assumed
Product temperature 32°F - 113°F
pH value 10.5-11
Kind of operation continuous
Operating hours 8 h/day
Location indoor, dry atmosphere
Altitude of installation up to 1000 m assumed
Surrounding temperature normal (32-113°F)
Performance data
Capacity Pressure Speed
17.6 USGPM 36.3 psi 151 rpm min
26.4 USGPM 36.3 psi 223 rpm max
Starting torque 90 lb.ft
Req. operating power at pump shaft 1.3 HP
Inlet pressure flooded suction (up to 0,5bar)
NPSHr 7.75 ft
Tolerances according to SEEPEX standards.

Materials and executions
Installation horizontal
Direction of rotation counter clockwise (left)
Lantern - Design with cover plates
Lantern - Material EN-JL 1040 (gci-25)
Lantern - Flange diameter 160 mm
Suction casing - Design standard
Suction casing - Material EN-JL 1040 (gci-25)
Pressure branch - Design standard
Pressure branch - Material EN-JL 1040 (gci-25)
Position of branch position 1
Suction connection 3" ANSI B16.5 Class 150 RF
Pressure connection 2½" ANSI B16.5 Class 150 RF
Joint - Design pin joint with joint sleeve, grease filled
Joint - Material standard
Joint - Universal joint sleeve: material NBR - Perbunan
Joint - Joint Grease joint grease SEEPEX 30321
Coupling rod - Design standard
Coupling rod - Material 1.4404 / AISI 316L
Rotor - Design standard
Rotor - Material 1.0503 (C45) / AISI 1045
Rotor - Coating ductile chromium coating
Stator - Design standard, with TSE, sensor sleeve 1.4404
Stator - Material NBR - Perbunan
Shaft sealing mechanical seal
Code GA - single acting mechanical seal
Shaft diameter 45 mm
Make SEEPEX
Type GA Q1Q1 VGG
Casing - material 1.4408 / ASTM A351 grade CF8M
Casing - connection standard NPT
Plug-in Shaft - Design standard
Plug-in Shaft - Material 1.4404 / AISI 316L
Plug-in Shaft - Drilling diameter 30
Plug-in Shaft - Drilling depth 55
Bolting - Design standard
9
Painting - Number of colors single-colored standard
Painting - Painted components complete combination
Painting - Color Standard Enamel (SEEPEX Blue)
Painting - Surface protection std. surface protection C2 (NDFT 95 µm)
Drive
Drive Type Gear motor at freq. inv.
Type Gearmotor
Make Nord
Model SK12F-100LP/4
Mounting position M1
Ratio (i) 8.56
Speed 207 rpm
Flange diameter 160 mm

Shaft diameter 30 mm
Shaft length 55 mm
Shaft drawing 716/0050-006B4
Norm Min Max

Speed 207 rpm 151 rpm 223 rpm
Motor speed 1770 rpm 1291 rpm 1911 rpm
Frequency 60 Hz 44 Hz 65 Hz
Rated output 3 HP
Rated speed 1770 rpm
Starting direct on frequency inverter
Efficiency class premium efficiency
Winding protection TW - Thermostat
Voltage 3 x 230/460 V
Frequency 60Hz
Thermal class F
Enclosure IP55
TSE
Design standard design, complete
- sensor sleeve fitted to the stator of the
pump with integrated temperature sensor
- connection head (IP55)
- separate TSE control device suitable for
mounting inside a control panel
Voltage 110-115 V / 50-60 Hz
Temperature coefficient NTC
Material sensor sleeve 1.4404 / AISI 316L
Material connection head aluminium
Packing
Type of packing crate (US)
Documentation
10
11
12
4
Transport, Intermediate storage, Disposal
4.1 Safety
CAUTION
Damage to property/injuries due to incorrect transport.

Slight injury or damage to property can occur.
¾ Comply with the safety notes and transport notes on the packaging.
¾ Use suitable means of transport, lifting devices and tools.
¾ Use protective equipment.
4.2 Transport
4.2.1 Dimensions, weight and centre of gravity

¾ Note the dimensional drawing (chapter 5.6).
4.2.2 Symbol
• Meaning of symbol
Top Fragile Against moisture Centre of gravity Lashing points

item protect
4.2.3 Lashing points (AP) for lifting devices
WARNING
Warning of suspended load.

¾ Use the lashing points (AP) for lifting devices.
¾ Note the centre of gravity (dimensional drawing chapter 5.6).
Lifting machine Industrial trucks
AP AP
4.2.4 Unpacking the machine

¾ Comply with the symbols and notices on the packaging.
¾ Remove the screwed connection between the machine and packaging.
¾ Remove the machine with a lifting machine/industrial truck.

issue
A / 29.08.07 document
OM.TRA.01us sheet
1 (2)
13
4
Transport, Intermediate storage, Disposal
4.3 Temporary storage/corrosion protection
• All SEEPEX machines have corrosion protection applied as standard prior to transport.
NOTICE
Damage to property if corrosion protection is missing.
Property damage can occur due to corrosion.
¾ Temporary storage must be in a dry, enclosed, frost-free room in order to provide protec-
tion against ambient influences.
¾ Contact SEEPEX regarding the necessary corrosion protection for temporary storage.
4.4 Disposal
NOTICE
Environmental protection.
Material damage can occur.
¾ Drain the pumping medium and dispose of it in accordance with the regulations.
¾ Dispose of the machine with regard to its composition and existing regulations.

issue
A / 29.08.07 document
OM.TRA.01us sheet
2 (2)
14
5
Assembly / Installation
5.1 Mounting tools / lifting gear
CAUTION
Pump falling over.

Slight injury or damage to property can occur.
 Adhere to the lifting tool’s starting point.
 Pay attention to the dimensions, weight and centre of gravity of the pump.
 Use suitable mounting tools/lifting gear.
5.2 Space requirement

The required space should be determined by considering the following factors:
• Dimensions and weight.
• Requisite transport and lifting equipment.
• Pipe routing – dismantling (dimension for stator replacement).
5.2.1 Dimension for stator replacement (P)

 Refer to the dimensional drawing.
5.3 Assembly of the complete mounted pump

 Assemble according to technical data (chapter 3.).
 Note dimensional drawing.
Tension-free mounting of the pump

 Balance unevenness with suitable supports.
• Applies to mounting on foundations/load-bearing elements.
• Total areas of all pump bearing areas are resting on the surface.
Correct position of the drives

• All drives are set up ready for operation and mounted.
• Correct displacements of the drive during transport/installation of the pump by adjusting/fix-
ing the drive.
CAUTION
Safety protection devices.

Slight injury or damage to property may result.
 Connect safety protection devices and activate.

issue C / 06.07.2007 document OM.INS.01us sheet 1 (2) 15
5
Assembly / Installation
5.4 Power supply of the SEEPEX pump
DANGER
Line voltage and line frequency.

 Note type plate on the pump.
 Pay attention to manufacturer’s directions (chapter 13.).
 Pay attention to safety regulations.
5.5 Pipelines
5.5.1 Suction and pressure connection

• Refer to the dimensional drawing for the position, nominal width and standard.
• Note direction of rotation/flow direction.
5.5.2 Pipeline dimensions

• Adhere to specifications regarding pressure in the pressure respectively suction connec-
tion.
• Note technical data (chapter 3.).
• Nominal width of suction pipe = nominal width of suction connection of pumps.
5.5.3 Residue-free pipelines
NOTICE
Damage to property through assembly residue.
No claims under guarantee if violated.
 Keep all pipelines free of foreign objects.
 Remove weld spatters, screws, steel chips etc.
5.5.4 Tension-free assembly

 Assemble pipelines and other components in a tension-free manner on the pump.

issue C / 06.07.2007 document OM.INS.01us sheet 2 (2) 16
18
6
Commissioning / De-commissioning
Master Copy
6.1 Commissioning report
Send commissioning report online to From:

www.seepex.com\
Must be specified with every order!
Commission: Model: Contact person: .............................................
Tel.: ................................................................
_________________________ _____________________ Fax: ...............................................................
E-mail: ...........................................................
Customer Service: Address of plant:

6((3(;,nc. .......................................................................
6SHHGZD\'ULYH .......................................................................
(QRQ2KLR .......................................................................
[email protected] .......................................................................
.......................................................................
Delivery date:
Date of installation:
Assembly check carried out on:
Please enter operational data:

Conveying liquid:
Temperature:
Fuse level/motor protection or power
consumption
Frequency control no
yes If yes:
Supplied by SEEPEX
Supplied by customer
Frequency:
Speed:
Power
consumption:
________________________________ _______________________________________
Place, date Signature / company stamp
Ausgabe
issue
B / 17.03.2006 Dokument
document
OM.COM.05us Blatt
sheet
1 (1)
19
20
6
6.2 Measures before commissioning
 Note the technical data (chapter 3.).
6.2.1 Checking pipelines

 Check flange screwed connections (SCH).
SCH
 Check threaded connections (G).

G
NOTICE
Ensure the liquid can flow through without obstruction.
Malfunction and/or irreparable damage to the pump.
 Open all shut-off elements before switching on the pump.
6.2.2 Protective devices on the pump
DANGER
Missing protective device.

Danger of pulling in and crushing.
 Equip the pump with a protective device. Protective devices provided for preventing con-
tact with surfaces or moving parts must be regarded as suitable if contact is not possible
in a test involving a testt finger, with regard to the penetration possibility, strength and shock
resistance.
 Comply with national protection regulations.
 In pumps with an open suction flange/feed hopper, attach touch protection. These safety
clearances protect those persons who are attempting to reach danger areas without addi-
tional help and under the conditions defined for various situations of reaching up, reaching
under or reaching through
In shaft seals, touch protection is only necessary if there are components on the rotating
shaft.
6.2.3 Electrical/hydraulic connections
DANGER
Dangerous voltage.
 Observe safety regulations.
 Disconnect the pump from all sources of energy.
 Prevent electrical connections from being switched on again.
Ausgabe Dokument
issue
B / 18.10.2005 document
OM.COM.01XVBlatt
sheet
1 (4)
21
6
6.2.4 Direction of rotation check
flow direction
 The pump direction of rotation determines
the flow direction of the pumping medium.
 Note the direction of rotation arrow on the
type plate.
counter clockwise clockwise
6.2.5 Additional devices - optional

 Refer to additional devices (chapter 12.1).
6.3 Initial commissioning/repeated commissioning

 Start up the pump.
NOTICE
Dry running of the pump.
 Fill the suction casing with liquid in order to lubricate the pumping elements.
6.3.1 Avoid dry running of the pump
NOTICE
High temperature between rotor and stator.
Stator material burned.
Complete failure of the pump
 Make sure that the suction-side conveying capacity does not cavitate.
 If this cannot be guaranteed on the machine side, assemble a SEEPEX dry running
protection (DRP).
6.3.2 Pressure in the suction and pressure connection
CAUTION
High pressure.
Malfunction and/or irreparable damage to the shaft seal or pump.
 Maintain pressure in the suction connection in accordance with the technical data
(chapter 3.).
 Assemble an oil-filled contact pressure gauge to monitor and deactivate the pump.
6.4 De-commissioning
Protect the pump and additional devices against the following:
• Frost
• Deposit of solids
• Sedimentation from the liquid
• Corrosion of parts that come into contact with the medium

issue
B / 18.10.2005 document
OM.COM.01us sheet
2 (4)
22
6
6.4.1 Switching off the pump
DANGER
Dangerous voltage.
6.4.2 Emptying the pump
CAUTION
Liquid draining out.

Minor injury or damage to property can occur.
 Wear suitable protective clothing.
 Refer to the technical data (chapter 3.) for the corresponding configuration of the pump
housing.
To drain the pump:

 If the pump housing has screwed plugs, remove the screwed plugs.
 Drain using a connection branch (suction casing, pressure branch) if the pump housing is
coated or the housing does not have screwed plugs.
 Drain the residual liquid from the pump housing.
 Drain the pipelines on the suction and pressure sides, or shut off behind the pump connec-
tions.
6.4.3 Removing the pump
WARNING
Risk of pump tipping or falling.

 Support the drive unit to guarantee stability.
Pipeline dismantling
 Remove flange bolts (SCH) and flange

seals (DFL).
with/without base plate SCH
 Remove bolts (SCH) from the pump feet. DFL
SCH

issue
B / 18.10.2005 document
OM.COM.01us sheet
3 (4)
23
6
Pipeline dismantling
 Remove threaded connections (G).

with/without base plate G
 Remove bolts (SCH) from the pump feet.
SCH
6.4.4 Preservation/storage of the pump
NOTICE
Damage to property due to lack of corrosion protection.
Property damage can occur due to corrosion.
 Contact SEEPEX to discuss suitable preservation measures.
– State the commission number of the pump.

issue
B / 18.10.2005 document
OM.COM.01us sheet
4 (4)
24
7
Maintenance
7.1 Preventive measures
The maintenance personnel must have these operating instructions, follow them and also
require corresponding qualifications.
DANGER
Dangerous voltage.
7.1.1 Pump down-time
NOTICE
Pump down-time.
Production failure due to wear.
 Acquisition of a set of wearing parts and a set of gaskets.
7.2 Lubrication
1 2 3
No. Denomination Lubricant Lubricant change in Fill volume

operating hours
1 Pin joint SEEPEX special grease 10,000 h 19 cm3
(30321)
2 Pin joint SEEPEX special grease 10,000 h 19 cm3
(30321)
3 Drive Refer to manufacturer's documentation (chapter 13._)
Rotor/stator Conveying medium --- ---
Shaft seal Conveying medium --- ---
7.2.1 Joint grease
NOTICE
Other grease types.
Malfunction and/or irreparable damage to the joints or the pump.
 Exclusively use SEEPEX special grease.

issue
A / 18.10.2005 document
OM.WTG.04us sheet
1 (2)
25
7
Maintenance
7.3 Inspection
Component Interval Action

Joints Every 10,000 operating hours Renew joint grease
Shaft seal Every week Visual check for leaks
Drive unit Every 3,000 operating hours, Comply with manufacturer's
at least every 6 months documentation

issue
A / 18.10.2005 document
OM.WTG.04us sheet
2 (2)
26
8
Malfunctions, causes, rectification
Refer to technical data (chapter 3.) for application range of the pump.
Malfunction Causes Rectification
Pump seized / pump does not pump

Conveying capacity is not achieved
Pressure head is not reached
Pump is loud when running

Pump pumping unevenly
Pump does not start up
Premature stator wear

Pump is not sucking
Motor gets too hot
Shaft seal is leaky

X X X Static friction between sta- Apply lubricant (liquid soap)
tor/rotor too great. between stator and rotor.
X Incorrect direction of rota- Check direction of rotation
tion. and swap over motor con-
nections if necessary.
X X X X X Suction pipe or shaft seal Eliminate leaks.
leaking.
X X X X Suction head too great. Check the suction head, if
necessary increase pipe
cross section on suction
pipe and use a larger filter,
open suction-side valve
fully.
X X X Viscosity of conveying Check/adapt (data sheet).
product too great.
X X X Pump rotation speed Correct rotation speed (data
incorrect. sheet).
X X Avoid air bubbles in the
conveying product.
X X X X X Pressure head too great. Check pressure head with
pressure gauge, reduce
pressure head by using
larger pressure pipe
crossed section or shorten-
ing the pressure pipe.
X X X X X Pump running partially/ Check there is adequate
completely dry. conveying product avail-
able on the suction side.
Dry running protection DRP.
X X Check coupling. If necessary, move pump in
relation to drive, check wear
on coupling gear, re-adjust
coupling if necessary.
X X Rotation speed too low. Increase rotation speed for
low-viscosity media/large
suction volume.

issue
B / 11.09.2007 document
OM.REC.01us sheet
1 (2)
27
8
Malfunctions, causes, rectification
Malfunction Causes Rectification
Pump seized / pump does not pump

Conveying capacity is not achieved
Pressure head is not reached
Pump is loud when running

Pump pumping unevenly
Pump does not start up
Premature stator wear

Pump is not sucking
Motor gets too hot
Shaft seal is leaky

X X X Rotation speed too high. Reduce rotation speed for
high-viscosity media, risk
of cavitation.
X Joint play too large. Check mounting of cou-
pling rod bushing.
X X X X X Foreign objects in pump. Dismantle pump, remove
foreign bodies, replace
defective parts.
X X X X Stator/rotor worn. Dismantle pump and
renew defective parts.
X X X X Joint parts worn. Renew joint parts, use
SEEPEX pin joint grease.
X X X X Suction pipe blocked. Clean the suction pipe.
X X X X X Temperature of pumping Check temperature, use
liquid too high. an undersize rotor.
X X X X X Gland packing too firm/ Loosen packing gland or
worn. tighten. Renew unusable
packing rings.
X X X X Solid content and/or grain Reduce pump speed,
size too great. install screen with permit-
ted mesh width. Increase
liquid proportion.
X X X X Sedimentation/gumming of Rinse through and clean
solids when pump station- the pump immediately.
ary.
X X X X X Conveying product hard- Heat the pump.
ens when the temperature
drops below a certain limit.
X X X X Stator swollen and unable Select a suitable stator
to withstand conveying material, use an under-
product. size rotor.
X X Bearings in pump drive Renew bearings.
housing or drive unit
defective.
X Mechanical seal defective. Check sliprings and O-
rings for wear/resistance,
renew if necessary.

issue
B / 11.09.2007 document
OM.REC.01us sheet
2 (2)
28
9.1 Dismantling
All work steps and tools required for dismantling are specified in this chapter.
3-D ANIMATIONS
In addition to your SEEPEX operating and assembly instructions, 3-D anima-

tions of the individual dismantling steps are available.
Start animations
 For printed operating and assembly instructions, scan the

adjacent QR code.
29
30
9.1 Dismantling
9.1 Dismantling
9.1.1 Keep tools ready for the dismantling
Recommended tools
Keep the listed tools ready (not part of the delivery scope):
Illustration Denomination
Hammer
Set allen keys
Set ring spanners size 10 - size 30
Set fork spanners size 10 - size 30
Metal saw (WH)
Screwdriver (WS)
Chisel (WM)
Recommended special tools
Special tools are not part of the delivery scope.

 Order special tools using the order form ( chapter 11).
Chain wrench (W2)
Assembly mandrel (W4)
Drift (W5)
A / 07.11.2019 - OM.MAI.BN.02EN 2/28
31
9.1 Dismantling
Mounting lever (W9)
Dismantling tool (W10)
Recommended auxiliary materials

Keep the auxiliary materials listed available (not included in the scope of delivery):
 Lubricant (GM)
NOTICE
Damage to property due to inadequate lubricants (GM).
Damage to components. Contamination of the conveying medium.
 Observe resistance to the materials used and the conveying medium.
 Use suitable lubricants (GM) only.
9.1.2 Prepare pump for dismantling

 Follow the instructions in the chapter Shut-down ( chapter 6).
9.1.3 Dismantle pump
Risk of injury due to lack of stability of

pump. Crushing of body parts due to the pump or
pump parts tipping or falling down.
Design with base plate

 Fasten base plate (GPU) to secure pump.
– Recommendation: Fasten to suitable base
using a screw fitting (SCH).
Design without base plate

 Fasten lantern (200) to secure the pump.
A / 07.11.2019 - OM.MAI.BN.02EN 3/28
32
9.1 Dismantling
9.1.3.1 Dismantle pressure branch (700)

Design without stator support
 Prop up stator (601) with the support (S).

 Dismantle screw fitting (604, 606).
 Remove pressure branches (700) and
tensioning screws (602).
Design with stator support
 Prop up stator (601) with support (S).

 Dismantle screw fitting (604, 606).
 Remove pressure branch (700) and tie bolts
(602) together with stator support (607).
 Dismantle screw fittings (604, 606).

 Remove tie bolts (602) from stator support (607).
9.1.3.2 Dismantle stator (601)
 Raise/reposition splash ring (310) to remove

plug-in shaft pin (309).
 Eject plug-in shaft pin (309).

– Use a suitable tool (WS).
A / 07.11.2019 - OM.MAI.BN.02EN 4/28
33
9.1 Dismantling
 Turn tool (WS) upwards as locking device for the

stator removal.
Dismantle the dry-running protection device (TSE) (optional)

Damage to the pump sided parts of the dry-running protection device
(TSE) when dismantling stator.
 Dismantle pump sided parts of the dry-running protection device (TSE) before
dismantling stator.
– Refer to chapter Options and Additional accessories ( chapter 12.1).
 Turn stator (601) to remove it.

– Apply lubricant (GM) into the opening
between rotor (600) and stator (601) for
easier dismantling.
– Use tool (W2).
 Support rotor (600) with support (S).
9.1.3.3 Dismantle suction casing (500)
 Put a protective cover (SH) on the rotor (600).

 Prop up rotor (600) with support (S).
 Dismantle screw fitting (506, 507, 509).
 Remove suction casing (500) and casing gasket
(501).
 Remove tool (WS).
A / 07.11.2019 - OM.MAI.BN.02EN 5/28
34
9.1 Dismantling
9.1.3.4 Dismantle rotating unit (RTE)

Dismantle flush connection (SSU) (optional)
 Remove flush connection (SSU) from the casing

of the shaft sealing (SEA).
 Assemble tool (W10) as contact surface

for mounting lever (W9).
 Pull off rotating unit (RTE) with shaft seal (SEA)

from output shaft of drive (ANT).
– Use tool (W9).
 Dismantle tool (W10).
A / 07.11.2019 - OM.MAI.BN.02EN 6/28
35
9.1 Dismantling
 Remove splash ring (310) and shaft seal casing

(SEA) from plug-in shaft (307).
– See dismantling of shaft seal (SEA)
( chapter 9.4).
9.1.3.5 Dismantle rotor (600), coupling rod (400) and plug-in shaft (307)
Dismantle holding band (406, 407)
 Parts can be ejected at speed.

Risk of injury to eyes. Wear safety goggles.
 Disconnect holding band loop (SCL).
– Use suitable tools (WH).
 Press out parts of the holding band loop (SCL).
 Remove holding band (406, 407).
Separate joint - rotor side
 Pull back universal joint sleeve (405).
 Slide retaining sleeve (401) off rotor (600).

– Use a suitable tool (WM).
A / 07.11.2019 - OM.MAI.BN.02EN 7/28
36
9.1 Dismantling
 Eject coupling rod pins (402).

– Use tool (W5).
 Bend the coupling rod (400).

 Knock guide bushing (403).
– Use tool (W5).
 Remove rotor (600) and retaining sleeve (401)

from coupling rod (400).
 For easier dismantling, apply lubricant (GM) to

the interior of the universal joint sleeve (405) and
the outer surface of the coupling rod (400).
 Remove universal joint sleeve (405) from
coupling rod (400).
Separate joint - drive side
 For easier dismantling, apply lubricant (GM) to

the interior of the universal joint sleeve (405) and
the outer surface of the coupling rod (400).
 Remove universal joint sleeve (405) from
coupling rod (400).
A / 07.11.2019 - OM.MAI.BN.02EN 8/28
37
9.1 Dismantling
 Push retaining sleeve (401) off the plug-in shaft

(307).
– Use a suitable tool (WM).
 Remove retaining sleeve (401).
 Eject coupling rod pins (402).

– Use tool (W5).
 Bend the coupling rod (400).

 Knock guide bushing (403).
– Use tool (W5).
 Remove coupling rod (400) from plug-in shaft

(307).
A / 07.11.2019 - OM.MAI.BN.02EN 9/28
38
9.1 Dismantling
9.1.3.6 Dismantle drive (ANT)
 Dismantle screw fitting (210, 212, 213).

 Remove drive (ANT).
A / 07.11.2019 - OM.MAI.BN.02EN 10/28
39
9.2 Reassembly
All work steps and tools required for reassembly are specified in this chapter.
3-D ANIMATIONS
In addition to your SEEPEX operating and assembly instructions, 3-D anima-

tions of the individual assembly steps are available.
Start animations
 For printed operating and assembly instructions, scan the

adjacent QR code.
40
9.2 Reassembly
9.2 Reassembly
9.2.1 Keep tools ready for assembly
Recommended tools
Keep the listed tools ready (not part of the delivery scope):
Hammer
Set allen keys
Set ring spanners size 10 - size 30
Set fork spanners size 10 - size 30
Screwdriver (WS)
Pliers (WFZ)
Centre punch (WK)
Spirit level (WW)
Cartridge gun (WF)
Belt shears (WBS)
Recommended special tools
Special tools are not part of the delivery scope.

 Order special tools using the order form ( chapter 11).
A / 07.11.2019 - OM.MAI.BN.02EN 12/28
41
9.2 Reassembly
Chain wrench (W2)
Mounting tool (W3)
Assembly mandrel (W4)
Drift (W5)
Recommended auxiliary materials

Keep the auxiliary materials listed available (not included in the scope of delivery):
 Lubricant (GM)
 Anti-seize graphite petroleum (GC)
 SEEPEX joint grease (GF)
NOTICE
Damage to property due to inadequate lubricants (GM).
Damage to components. Contamination of the conveying medium.
 Observe resistance to the materials used and the conveying medium.
 Use suitable lubricants (GM) only.
9.2.2 Prepare components parts for assembly
9.2.2.1 Prepare rotor (600) for assembly

 Remove any damage.
 Clean rotor (600).
Malfunction of the joints. Malfunction and/

or destruction of the joints. Renew coupling rod pin
(402) and guide bushings (403) together.
 Drive in guide bushings (403)
(Depth X = 2/3).
– Use tool (W4).
A / 07.11.2019 - OM.MAI.BN.02EN 13/28
42
9.2 Reassembly
9.2.2.2 Prepare coupling rod (400) for assembly
 Clean coupling rod (400).

or destruction of the joints
 Check coupling rod bushings (404) for wear.
– In the event of wear, replace coupling rod
(400), including the coupling rod bushings
(404).
9.2.2.3 Prepare plug-in shaft (307) for assembly

 Remove any damage.
 Clean plug-in shaft (307).

or destruction of the joints. Renew coupling rod pin
(402) and guide bushings (403) together.
 Drive in guide bushings (403)
(depth X = 2/3).
– Use tool (W4).
9.2.2.4 Prepare holding band (406, 407)

 Use prefabricated double-band holding bands only.
 Check the holding band (406, 407)

– Bent-over holding band (406, 407) is in
contact with holding band loop (SCL) to
avoid damaging universal joint sleeve (405).
– Press on holding band (406, 407) using tool
(WFZ) if necessary.
A / 07.11.2019 - OM.MAI.BN.02EN 14/28
43
9.2 Reassembly
9.2.3 Assemble pump
Risk of injury due to lack of stability of

pump. Crushing of body parts due to the pump or
pump parts tipping or falling down.
Design with base plate

 Fasten base plate (GPU) to secure pump.
Design without base plate

 Fasten lantern (200) to secure the pump.
9.2.3.1 Assemble drive (ANT)
 Clean flange bearing surfaces (FLS), centering

surface (ZD) and output shaft of the drive (ANT).
 Assemble drive (ANT) with screw fitting (210,
212, 213) on lantern (200).
9.2.3.2 Assemble rotor (600), coupling rod (400) and plug-in shaft (307)
 Determine rotor material for subsequent securing of the retaining sleeve:
• Rotor material unhardened without groove on

rotor head.
• Rotor material hardened with groove on rotor

head.
A / 07.11.2019 - OM.MAI.BN.02EN 15/28
44
9.2 Reassembly
Connect rotor (600) and coupling rod (400)
 Slide retaining sleeve (401) onto coupling rod

(400).
 Fill interior of joint head with SEEPEX joint
grease (GF).
– Use tool (WF).
 Slide rotor (600) onto coupling rod (400).
 Insert coupling rod pin (402).
 Knock the guide bushings (403) in.

– Use tool (W5).
 Slide retaining sleeve (401) onto rotor (600).

– Use tool (W4).
A / 07.11.2019 - OM.MAI.BN.02EN 16/28
45
9.2 Reassembly
Secure retaining sleeve (401) - rotor-side
Design for rotor material unhardened
 Secure retaining sleeve (401) at a distance of

180° by means of material deformation at rotor
(600).
– Use a suitable tool (WK).
Design for rotor material hardened

180° by means of material deformation.
Assemble universal joint sleeve (405) - rotor-side
 For simpler assembly of the universal joint

sleeve (405), moisten the outer surface of
coupling rod (400) with SEEPEX joint grease
(GF).
 Fill interior of universal joint sleeve (405) with
SEEPEX joint grease (GF).
– Filling grade SEEPEX joint grease (GF) find
in the document Maintenance
( chapter 7).
– Use tool (WF).
 Slide universal joint sleeve (405) onto joint.
Damage of universal joint sleeve due to

sharp tools. Leak in universal joint sleeve.
 Ventilate inner area of joint by lifting the universal
joint sleeve (405).
A / 07.11.2019 - OM.MAI.BN.02EN 17/28
46
9.2 Reassembly
Assemble holding band - rotor-side
 Slide holding bands (406, 407) loosely onto

universal joint sleeve (405).
 Tighten holding band (406, 407) - rotor-side

– Insert holding band (406, 407) into
tool (W3).
– Clamp holding band firmly using eccentric
lever (EX).
– Turn crank (KUL) until the holding band
(406, 407) is tensioned and is in contact with
holding band loop (SCL).
– Carefully pull the holding band (406, 407)
together until it is in contact with the
universal joint sleeve around the circumfer-
ence.
Correct
The holding band (406, 407) has drawn in the out
shape of the universal joint sleeve and is firmly
seated.
False
Holding band (406, 407) too loose, can slip off.
Incorrect
The holding band (406, 407) is too tight, universal
joint sleeve will be damaged/sheared off.
A / 07.11.2019 - OM.MAI.BN.02EN 18/28
47
9.2 Reassembly
 Cant up the holding band (406, 407).

 Swivel mounting tool (W3) approx. 60°
upwards.
 Loosen crank (KUL) by a half turn.
 Swivel cutting lever (SH) forward until the pres-
sure piece is lying behind the holding band loop
(SCL).
Shear off holding band (406, 407) for material

design stainless steel, corrosion-resistant steel
Universal joint sleeve can be damaged by
hammering and striking. Joint grease (GF) can leak
out. Avoid hammering or striking the universal joint
sleeve.
 Refer to the technical data ( chapter 3) for the
material design.
 Shear off holding band (406, 407) below holding
band loop (SCL).
– Strike cutting lever (SH) with the palm of your
hand.
 Straighten the holding band (406, 407) carefully
if it lifts up at the sheared-off end.
Cut off holding band (406, 407) for material

design stainless steel, heat-resistant steel
sleeve.
material design.
 Cut off holding band (406, 407) below holding
band loop (SCL).
– Use tool (WBS).
 File down and deburr any projecting edges.
A / 07.11.2019 - OM.MAI.BN.02EN 19/28
48
9.2 Reassembly
 The holding band (406, 407) must lie in the

groove of the universal joint sleeve (405).
 Replace the holding band (406, 407) if the
holding band (406, 407) slips back through the
loop.
Connect coupling rod (400) and plug-in shaft (307)
 For easier assembly of the universal joint sleeve

(405), lubricate the outer surface of coupling rod
(400) with SEEPEX joint grease (GF).
 Slide holding bands (406, 407) and universal
joint sleeve (405) onto coupling rod (400).
 Fill interior of joint head with SEEPEX

joint grease (GF).
– Use tool (WF).
 Slide the retaining sleeve (401) and plug-in shaft
(307) onto the coupling rod (400).
 Insert coupling rod pin (402).
A / 07.11.2019 - OM.MAI.BN.02EN 20/28
49
9.2 Reassembly
 Knock the guide bushings (403) in.

– Use tool (W5).
 Slide retaining sleeve (401) onto plug-in shaft

(307).
– Use tool (W4).
Secure retaining sleeve (401) - drive side
Design for rotor material unhardened

180° by means of material deformation at plug-in
shaft (307).
Design for rotor material hardened

180° by means of material deformation.
A / 07.11.2019 - OM.MAI.BN.02EN 21/28
50
9.2 Reassembly
Assemble universal joint sleeve (405) - drive side
 Fill the inside of universal joint sleeve (405) with

SEEPEX joint grease(GF).
– For filling grade of SEEPEX joint grease
(GF), refer to the maintenance document
( chapter 7).
– Use tool (WF).
 Slide universal joint sleeve (405) onto joint.
Damage of universal joint sleeve due to

sharp tools. Leak in universal joint sleeve.
 Ventilate inner area of joint by lifting the universal
joint sleeve (405).
Assemble holding band - drive-side
 Slide holding bands (406, 407) loosely onto

universal joint sleeve (405).
 Tighten holding band (406, 407) - drive-side.

– Insert holding band (406, 407) into
tool (W3).
– Clamp holding band firmly using eccentric
lever (EX).
– Turn crank (KUL) until the holding band
(406, 407) is tensioned and is in contact with
holding band loop (SCL).
– Carefully pull the holding band (406, 407)
together until it is in contact with the
universal joint sleeve around the circumfer-
ence.
A / 07.11.2019 - OM.MAI.BN.02EN 22/28
51
9.2 Reassembly
Correct
The holding band (406, 407) has drawn in the out
shape of the universal joint sleeve and is firmly
seated.
False
Holding band (406, 407) too loose, can slip off.
Incorrect
The holding band (406, 407) is too tight, universal
joint sleeve will be damaged/sheared off.
 Cant up the holding band (406, 407).

 Swivel mounting tool (W3) approx. 60°
upwards.
 Loosen crank (KUL) by a half turn.
 Swivel cutting lever (SH) forward until the pres-
sure piece is lying behind the holding band loop
(SCL).
Shear off holding band (406, 407) for material

design stainless steel, corrosion-resistant steel
sleeve.
material design.
 Shear off holding band (406, 407) below holding
band loop (SCL).
– Strike cutting lever (SH) with the palm of your
hand.
 Straighten the holding band (406, 407) carefully
if it lifts up at the sheared-off end.
A / 07.11.2019 - OM.MAI.BN.02EN 23/28
52
9.2 Reassembly
Cut off holding band (406, 407) for material

design stainless steel, heat-resistant steel
sleeve.
material design.
 Cut off holding band (406, 407) below holding
band loop (SCL).
– Use tool (WBS).
 File down and deburr any projecting edges.
 The holding band (406, 407) must lie in the

groove of the universal joint sleeve (405).
 Replace the holding band (406, 407) if the
holding band (406, 407) slips back through the
loop.
9.2.3.3 Assemble rotating unit (RTE)
 Slide shaft seal casing (SEA) onto plug-in shaft

(307).
– See chapter Shaft seal reassembly
( chapter 9.4).
 Moisten inner surface of splash ring (310) and

outer surface of plug-in shaft (307) with anti-
seize graphite petroleum (GC) for easier
assembly of the splash ring (310).
 Slide splash ring (310) onto plug-in shaft (307).
– Observe fitting position of splash ring (E)
(lettering „SEA“).
A / 07.11.2019 - OM.MAI.BN.02EN 24/28
53
9.2 Reassembly
 Moisten output shaft of drive (ANT) with anti-

seize graphite petroleum (GC) for easier
assembly of the rotating unit (RTE).
 Push rotating unit (RTE) onto output shaft of the
drive (ANT).
Assemble the flush connection (SSU) (optional)
 Assemble flush connection (SSU).
9.2.3.4 Assemble suction casing (500)
 Fit rotor (600) with protective cover (SH).

 Push casing gasket (501) onto the shaft seal
casing (SEA).
 Assemble and align suction casing (500) with
screw fitting (506, 507, 509).
– Use spirit level (WW).
 Tighten screw fitting (506, 507, 509).
 Prop up rotor (600) with support (S).
 Remove protective cover (SH) from rotor (600).
9.2.3.5 Assemble stator (601)
 Insert tool (WS) and turn downwards as locking

device for stator assembly.
A / 07.11.2019 - OM.MAI.BN.02EN 25/28
54
9.2 Reassembly
 Moisten outer surface of rotor (600) and inner

surface of stator (601) with lubricant (GM) for
easier assembly of the stator (601),
 Prop up stator (601) with support (S).
 Slide the stator (601) onto the rotor (600)
by turning it.
– Use tool (W2).
 Remove tool (WS).

 Moisten the plug-in shaft pins (309) with anti-
seize graphite petroleum (GC) and insert in plug-
in shaft (307).
 Note position of splash ring (310).

 Insert splash ring collar at a distance of 0.5 mm
from the lantern (200).
Assemble dry-running protection device (TSE) (optional)

 Observe the chapter Options and additional accessories ( chapter 12.1).
9.2.3.6 Assemble pressure branch (700)

Design without stator support
 Insert tie bolts (602) loosely into the suction

casing (500).
A / 07.11.2019 - OM.MAI.BN.02EN 26/28
55
9.2 Reassembly
 Push pressure branch (700) onto the stator

(601).
 Insert tie bolts (602) loosely in the pressure
branch (700).
 Remove the support (S).
 Assemble screw fitting (604, 606).

 Tighten tie bolts (602) evenly.
Design with stator support
 Assemble tie bolts (602) using screw fittings

(604, 606) on stator support (607).
 Insert tie bolts (602) together with stator support

(607) loosely into suction casing (500).
 Push pressure branch (700) on to the stator

(601).
 Insert tie bolts (602) loosely in the pressure
branch (700).
A / 07.11.2019 - OM.MAI.BN.02EN 27/28
56
9.2 Reassembly
 Assemble screw fitting (604, 606).

 Tighten tie bolts (602) evenly.
 Remove the support (S).
A / 07.11.2019 - OM.MAI.BN.02EN 28/28
57
58
9
Dismantling / Reassembly
9.4 Single acting mechanical seal
9.4.1 Safety
WARNING
Shaft seal is leaky.

Leakage may escape into the atmosphere.
 Take safety measures to protect persons and the environment.
 Wear suitable protective clothing.
 Dispose of leakage appropriately.
 Note applicable regulations when handling hazardous substances.
9.4.2 Operating conditions and material combination

• Adjust to the relevant application
– Refer to technical data (chapter 3).
9.4.3 Design
• Single acting mechanical seal
307
SEA
333
9.4.4 Commissioning
NOTICE
Dry running of the mechanical seal.
Damage to property may result.
 The mechanical seal must be laid in liquid medium before being commissioned.
Circulation, flushing and/or flushing pipe

• Additional flushing or circulation pipes are not required where shaft sealing lies in medium.
• Flushing pipes may be possible under special circumstances and after speaking to SEEPEX.
NOTICE
Shaft seal is not leakage free.
Damage to property through leakage.
 Components which come into contact with leakage must be corrosion-resistant or other-
wise suitably protected.
Adjust shaft seal

 It is absolutely vital to adjust at the application site in a manner appropriate for the operating
conditions.
 Refer to the sectional drawing of the shaft seal for setting measurements.
 Set the setting measurements of the shaft seal to the plug-in shaft (307).

issue
B / 29.06.2009 document
OM.SEA.02us sheet
1 (3)
59
9
9.4.5 Monitoring during operation
NOTICE
Shaft wear.
Damage to property may result.
 Conduct a daily visual inspection. 307
 Install a new shaft seal (SEA).
 Possibly replace the plug-in shaft (307).
SEA
333
9.4.6 Dismantling of the mechanical seal

Refer to data sheet (chapter 3.1) and sectional drawing of the shaft seal (chapter 9._) for
design.
With axial locking device
 Clean plug-in shaft (307), remove edges/

burrs. 372 330
 Moisten plug-in shaft (307) with lubricant
(thinned liquid soap).
 Pull mechanical seal casing (333) from the
plug-in shaft (307). 307 333 330G
 Loosen the axial locking device of the me-
chanical seal (330/372); pull mechanical
seal (330) from the plug-in shaft (307).
 Push counter ring of the mechanical seal
330G 333
(330G) with seal out of the mechanical
seal casing (333).
Without axial locking device
 Clean plug-in shaft (307), remove edges/

330
burrs.
 Moisten plug-in shaft (307) with lubricant
(thinned liquid soap).
 Pull mechanical seal casing (333) from the
plug-in shaft (307).
 Pull the mechanical seal (330) from the
plug-in shaft (307).
 Push counter ring of the mechanical seal
330G 333
(330G) with seal out of the mechanical
seal casing (333).

issue
B / 29.06.2009 document
OM.SEA.02us sheet
2 (3)
60
9
9.4.7 Reassembly of mechanical seal
Shaft sealings are high-quality precision parts.
Their installation is therefore to be undertaken with care.
Careful handling and the utmost of cleanliness are prerequisites.
 Assembly aids such as oil/grease are not permitted.
With axial locking device
 Clean the mechanical seal casing (333).

330G 333
 Moisten the seal with lubricant (thinned liq-
uid soap).
 Attach the counter ring and seal using
even pressure into the mechanical seal
casing (333).
 Clean the plug-in shaft (307), remove edg-
es/burrs. 372 330
 Adjust the set collar (372) in accordance

with sectional drawing of shaft seal
(chapter 9._).
 Stick the set screw in and determine.
– Use "medium-strength" adhesive.
 Moisten plug-in shaft (307) and elastomer
parts of the mechanical seal (330) with lu-
bricant (thinned liquid soap).
 Slide mechanical seal (330) onto the plug-
in shaft (307) until the installation edge has
been reached.
Without axial locking device
 Clean the mechanical seal casing (333).

330G 333
 Moisten the seal with lubricant (thinned liq-
uid soap).
 Attach the counter ring and seal using
even pressure into the mechanical seal
casing (333).
 Clean the plug-in shaft (307), remove edg-
330
es/burrs.
 Adjust mechanical seal (330).
– Note sectional drawing of shaft seal
(chapter 9._).
307 333 330G
 Moisten plug-in shaft (307) and elastomer
parts of the mechanical seal (330) with lu-
bricant (thinned liquid soap).
 Slide mechanical seal (330) onto the plug-
in shaft (307) until the installation edge has
been reached.

issue
B / 29.06.2009 document
OM.SEA.02us sheet
3 (3)
61
62
63
64
10
Spare parts
10.1 Spare parts list
10.2 Sectional drawing and parts list

issue
B / 29.03.2011 document
OM.SZG.02us sheet
1 (1)
65
66
10
Spare parts
Version for copying
10.1 Spare parts list
Spare parts can be ordered online or requested from Type: BN 05-24 to 300-6L
www.seepex.com\
Sender:
Request Order
Must be included in every order or enquiry!

Commission: Type: Contact: .........................................................
Tel.: ................................................................
_________________________ _______________________ Fax: ...............................................................
E-mail: ...........................................................
Customer Service: Delivery address:
6((3(;,nc. .......................................................................
6SHHGZD\'ULYH .......................................................................
(QRQ2KLR .......................................................................
[email protected] .......................................................................
.......................................................................
No. Quantity Component Material Comment
Minor set of wearing parts
301 1 Set of packing rings according to data sheet (chapter 3.1)

311 1 Rinse ring
330 1 Mechanical seal according to data sheet (chapter 3.1)
601 1 Stator
Major set of wearing parts

307 1 Plug-in shaft
330 1 Mechanical seal according to data sheet (chapter 3.1)
400 1 Coupling rod with coupling
rod bushings
402 2 Coupling rod pin
403 4 Guide bushing
405 2 Universal joint sleeve
406 2 Holding band, large
407 2 Holding band, small
600 1 Rotor
601 1 Stator
__________________________________ _______________________________________

issue
E / 19.08.2010 document
OM.WPS.02us sheet
1 (2)
67
10
Spare parts
Version for copying
No. Quantity Component Material Comment
Set of gaskets

310 1 Splash ring according to data sheet (chapter 3.1)
330 1 Mechanical seal
501 1 Casing gasket
503 3 Sealing ring
511 2 O-ring/cleaning cover
517 2 Sealing ring
706 1 Sealing ring
Plug-in shaft & shaft seal
301 Set of packing rings according to data sheet (chapter 3.1)

307 Plug-in shaft
309 Plug-in shaft pin
310 Splash ring according to data sheet (chapter 3.1)
330 Mechanical seal according to data sheet (chapter 3.1)
Coupling rod & joint parts
400 Coupling rod with coupling

rod bushings
401 Retaining sleeve
402 Coupling rod pin
403 Guide bushing
405 Universal joint sleeve
406 Holding band, large
407 Holding band, small
401-407 Complete set of joint parts
Conveying elements
600 Rotor
601 Stator
Miscellaneous parts
501 Casing gasket

098 Pin joint grease 1 cartridge = 300 g (approx. 315 cm³)
Grease quantity according to maintenance
(chapter 7._)
__________________________________ _______________________________________

issue
E / 19.08.2010 document
OM.WPS.02us sheet
2 (2)
68
70
Parts List
Lista de partes
Liste des pièces
US ES FR
range BN serie BN série BN
sectional drawing no. Plano seccional nº plan no.
062-004C1 062-004C1 062-004C1
denomination Denominación désignation
Qty. Item Qty. / Item Ud. / Pos. Qté. / Poste
1 200 lantern linterna lanterne
1 202 type plate placa de características plaque signalétique
4 210 hexagon bolt tornillo hexagonal vis
211 hexagon bolt tornillo hexagonal vis
4 212 spring washer arandela grower rondelle frein
4 213 hexagon nut tuerca hexagonal écrou
2 240 cover plate chapa cobertera tôle de protection
4 242 socket screw tornillo cabeza cilíndrico vis à tête cylindrique
4 243 lock washer arandela de seguridad rondelle protégée
1 307 plug-in shaft eje enchufable arbre à broche
1 309 plug-in shaft pin pasador eje enchufable cheville pour arbre à broche
1 310 splash ring aro deflector bague de projection
1 400 coupling rod tornillo alimentador barre d' accouplement
2 401 retaining sleeve casquillo cardan douille d' articulation
2 402 coupling rod pin pasador del eje cardan axe d' articulation
4 403 guide bushing casquillo director douille de guidage
2 404 coupling rod bushing casquillo del cardan chemise d' axe
2 405 universal joint sleeve mangón manchette
2 406 holding band abrazadera collier de serrage
2 407 holding band abrazadera collier de serrage
1 500 suction casing cuerpo de aspiración carter d' aspiration
1 501 casing gasket junta del cuerpo étanchéité du carter d' aspiration
3 502 screwed plug tapón roscado bouchon de vidange
3 503 sealing ring anillo retén joint d' étanchéité
4 506 hexagon bolt tornillo hexagonal vis
4 507 fan type lock washer arandela blocante rondelle à dents chevauchantes
extérieures
2 °) 510 cleanout tapa de registro couvercle de nettoyage
2 °) 511 gasket junta étanchéité
8 °) 512 hexagon bolt tornillo hexagonal vis
2 °) 516 screwed plug tapón roscado bouchon de vidange
2 °) 517 sealing ring anillo retén joint d' étanchéité
1 600 rotor rotor rotor
1 601 stator estator stator
4 602 tie bolt tornillo de sujección tirant
8 606 washer arandela rondelle
1 607 trestle soporte intermedio pied
1 700 pressure branch brida de presión bride de refoulement
1 705 screwed plug tapón roscado bouchon de vidange
1 706 sealing ring anillo retén joint d' étanchéité
Document SL.062.004usesf Issue C/29.11.2018

71
Parts List
Lista de partes
Liste des pièces
US ES FR
range BN serie BN série BN
sectional drawing no. Plano seccional nº plan no.
062-004C1 062-004C1 062-004C1
denomination Denominación désignation
Qty. Item Qty. / Item Ud. / Pos. Qté. / Poste
SEEPEX joint grease SEEPEX grasa de SEEPEX graisse d' articulations
098
articulaciones
type and filling quantity: Tipo y cantidad de llenado : sommaire pour type et quantité:
see operating and assembly Ver el manual de operacion y voir instructions de montage et
instruction montaje. de fonctionnement
Wearing parts and sealings: Partes de desgaste y sellado pièces d'usure et étanchéités:
Tools: Herramientas: Outils:
shaft sealing para sellado dispositif d' etanchéité
see sectional drawing de eje ver plano seccional del voir vue éclatée
mechanical seal cierre mecánico. garniture mécanique
drawn displaced proyección detallada plan separé
°) option Opcional option
Document SL.062.004usesf Issue C/29.11.2018

72
11
Special tools
Version for copying
Spare parts can be ordered online or requested from Sender:

www.seepex.com\
Must be specified with every order!
Commission: Mark tool! Contact: .........................................................
Tel.: ................................................................
__________________________ X Fax: ...............................................................
E-mail: ...........................................................
Customer Service: Delivery address:

6((3(;,nc. .......................................................................
6SHHGZD\'ULYH .......................................................................
(QRQ2KLR .......................................................................
[email protected] .......................................................................
.......................................................................
For installation of: Packing gland Stator Coupling rod

bushings
Tool no. W1 W2 W14

Chain pipe wrench +
Denomination: Packing lever Pressing tool
replacment chain
Order no. PKZ KRZ PWZ
For installation of: Rotating unit

Holding band Joint Joint Plug-in shaft
Tool no. W3 W4 W5 W10
Denomination: Mounting tool Assembly mandrel Drift Dismantling tool

Order no. MHB MTD DHS AZV
For installation of: General
Tool no. W9
Denomination: Mounting lever
Order no. MHL

issue
A / 21.09.2006 document
OM.STO.02us sheet
1 (1)
73
74
12
Related documents
12.1 Additional components
12.2 Technical information
12.3 Manufacturer's documents shaft seal

issue
B / 12.01.2010 document
OM.ZUG.01us sheet
1 (1)
75
76
SEEPEX dry-running protection device (TSE) - design: Standard
1. Functioning of the dry-running protection device (TSE)
Figure similar
Item Designation Item Designation

SGR Control device 653 Thermistor sensor
601 Stator ANT Drive
650 Connection head
• The temperature in the stator (601) is continuously compared with the set shut-off
temperature at the TSE control device (SGR).
• The temperature in the stator (601) is measured using a thermistor sensor (653) in
the connection head (650).
• Two relays switch in parallel within the TSE control device (SGR) on reaching the
shut-off temperature.
– An error message is triggered and the drive (ANT) of the pump can be shut off
using potential-free change-over contacts.
• Automatic restart of the pump is prevented by a necessary acknowledgement of the
error message.
Document ZU.TSE.STD.01EN Issue A / 13.09.2018 1/19

77
2. Technical data of the dry-running protection device (TSE)
2.1. Structural design connection head (650)
Figure similar
Item Designation Item Designation

650 Connection head 654 Clamping screw
651 O-ring 655 Rubber ring
652 Screw socket 656 Sensor sleeve
653 Thermistor sensor
Thermistor sensor
• The temperature is measured at the stator through an NTC resistor

(thermistor sensor) with a protective sleeve.
– Permissible temperature range: 0-150 °C
– Standard resistor: 10 k at 25 °C
• For more thermistor sensor resistance values (  chapter 9. ).

78
2.2. TSE control device
 Install TSE control device (SGR) on the basis of the IP protection in a suit-
able casing (e.g., switch cabinet).
 Install TSE control device (SGR) on DIN rail or

with screw connection on mounting plate in the
switch cabinet.
Types: – SGRTSE 230 V ACB

– SGRTSE 115 V ACB
– SGRTSE 24 V ACB
– SGRTSE 24 V DCB
Relay output: 2 potential-free changeover contacts
(K1, K2), switching capacity 500 VA at
110-230 V resistive load
Input: NTC thermistor sensor 10 k at 25 °C,
with sensor breakage guard at -25 °C
Temperature range: 0 to 150 °C
Power consumption: maximum 4 VA
Sensor circuit: – Open-circuit voltage maximum 2.5 V DC
– Short-circuit current maximum 0.5 mA DC
Display at the device: – Malfunction (dry running)
– Shut-off temperature
Operation at the device: – Setup shut-off temperature
– Reset alert
Protection: – Casing IP 40
– Terminals IP 20
Ambient temperature: 0 to 50 ° C

79
3. Connect TSE control device
DANGER
Risk of fatal injury from electrical current.
There is an immediate danger of fatal electric shock as a result of contact with
live parts.
 Disconnect the control device from all energy sources before working on
terminals.
 Ensure that residual voltage is not present at any electrical connections of the
pump.
3.1. Check line voltage

 Check the line voltage/nominal voltage according to type plate of the control device
before connecting and commissioning.
– Permissible mains voltage variations of the nominal device voltage
+/- 10 %.
NOTICE
Mains power failure.
 Install the thermistor sensor leads shielded.
 Ground the shield on one side.
3.2. Terminal connections
1, 3 Operating voltage
11, 13 Operating hours counter of potential-
free contact
12, 13 Button (NO) - external fault reset
14, 15 Thermistor sensor
5, 6, 7 Relay output K1 (malfunction
message)
8, 9, 10 Relay output K2 (malfunction
message)

80
3.3. Connecting button (NO) (optional)
 Connect button (NO) to terminal 12 and 13 of the

TSE control device (SGR).
 After dry running, release TSE control device
(SGR) with button (NO).
– Note chapter Operation of the dry-running
protection device ( chapter 5. ).
3.4. Use relay function
Actual temperature > shut-off temperature Malfunction (dry-running)

Contact 6, 5 and 9, 8 closed
Contact 6, 7 and 9, 10 open
• Relays K1 and K2 are in parallel and they work together.

– K1: Switch-off condition integrated in motor contactor control.
– K2: optional connection to the fault sensor or process computer (reserve).
3.5. Connect thermistor sensor
 Connect the connection cable of thermistor

sensor of the connection head (650) to terminals
14 and 15 of the TSE control device (SGR).
Similar illustration
3.6. Connect operating voltage
 Connect operating voltage to terminals 1 and 3

of the TSE control device (SGR).
– See technical data of TSE control device
(SGR) (  chapter 2.2. ).
– Note the regulations of the local power
supply company and country-specific regula-
tions.

81
4. Commissioning the dry-running protection device (TSE)
NOTICE
Conveying product temperature different from technical pump data ( chapter 3).
Malfunction and/or irreparable damage to the pump can occur.
 Consult with SEEPEX.
4.1. Note the fitting position of the dry-running protection device (TSE)
• The dry-running protection device (TSE) is always installed on the suction side
during delivery.
Installation of the dry-running protec-

tion device (TSE) on the pressure side.
 Note the fitting position of the dry-running protec-
tion device (TSE).
– The drilling for the dry-running protection
device (TSE) in the stator (601) should
always be on the suction side.
counter clockwise rotating pump
clockwise rotating pump

Figures similar
Check the functionality
 Switch on TSE control device.

– Digital display lights up.
 TSE control device starts self-test.

– Currently set shut-off temperature is displayed.
 Keep (stator temp.) button pressed.

 Read temperature value.
• Functionality is present if the display is in accordance with the existing

temperature.
 In the case of any discrepancies and functional failures, see chapter
Malfunctions, Causes and Rectification ( chapter 8).

82
Set the switch-off temperature
Determining stator operating temperature
• Shut-off temperature is set at 50 °C when delivered.

• During commissioning, maintain shut-off temperature of 50 °C.
 Commission the pump for 30 to 60 minutes to stabilise the stator operating

temperature.
 Hold (stator temp.) button with the pump running.

– Read operating temperature to set the final shut-off
temperature.
 Set shut-off temperature at the TSE control device.

– Set shut-off temperature 10 °C higher than the displayed or maximum
operating temperature during operation.
Fine adjustments
• Confirm modification of the corrected shut-off temperature within 10

seconds with button (P) , otherwise TSE control device will change without
saving the corrected shut-off temperature.
 Press button (P) briefly.

– Setup mode is displayed.
– The display shows alternating "SET" and the category
temperature set last.
 Increase shut-off temperature.

– Value changes initially by +1 °C at a time, after approx. 3 s
in +10 °C steps.
 Reduce shut-off temperature.

– Value changes initially by -1 °C at a time, after approx. 3 s
in -10 °C steps.

– Operating mode is displayed.
– Adjusted shut-off temperature is transmitted to the perma-
nent memory and shown on the display.

83
Change the temperature unit
• Changing the temperature unit from °C (degree Celsius) to °F (Fahrenheit):
 To change the temperature unit from °C to °F, press (▲) button

for 10 s.
 Yellow LED next to the symbol °C or °F lights up.
5. Operation of the dry-running protection device (TSE)
5.1. Call operating hour counter
• The TSE control device includes an operating hour counter.

 Activate operating hour counter.
– Bridge terminal 11 and 13.
• The operating hours can be called on the service level. The access to the
service level is possible only after a code number has been entered.
 Press (P) button for approx. 5 s, until display “CodE” appears.

– The display shows alternating "CodE" and “100”.
 Using the arrow keys (▼/▲) set code “33”.

– Code will be acknowledged.
– Access into the service level.
Display alternating: “¯Hi¯” and “value” • No function

– Change to next parameter/display value.
Display alternating: “bh.Hi” and “value” • Operating hour counter

(displayed value x 10000)

– Change to next parameter/display value.

84
Display alternating: "bh.Lo" and “value” • Operating hour counter

(displayed value x 1)

– Change to the operating mode.
5.2. Release TSE control device after dry running
 The installed relays switch off and remain locked in this position if the set
shut-off temperature at the TSE control device is exceeded.
– Red LED lights up and signals an alert.
 Acknowledge alert/release relay:

– Press button on the TSE control device or external button (closer) on terminal 12 and
13 for at least 1 s, in order to release TSE control device.
 Shut-off operating voltage at the TSE control device (terminal 1 and 3).
– Press external contact (button, closed for at least 1 s).
6. Functional failure
Thermistor sensor or wire break. Short-circuit in the thermistor

sensor or in the line. Overshooting or undershooting of the measuring range (-
25-150 °C). Alert (Err I) is displayed and drive of the pump shuts off.
 Inspection of the TSE control device and sensor circuit including thermistor
sensor.
6.1. Thermistor sensor performance check
 Remove thermistor sensor supply line from the

connection head (650).
Figure similar

85
 Connect resistor measuring unit (MTT) to

Figure similar
 Determine electrical resistance and compare with temperature of the pump:
Ttemperature °C 0 10 20 25 30 40 50 60
Resistor  32650 19900 12490 10000 8057 5327 3603 2488
Ttemperature °C 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140

Resistor  1752 1255 950 678 510 389 301 235
• For more thermistor sensor resistance values (  chapter 9. ).

• In the case of discrepancies in the resistor value > 10 % of the set value, there is a
defect in the thermistor sensor.
– Replace thermistor sensor (  chapter 7. /8. , Dismantling/Assembly of Dry-
running protection device).
• In the case of correct values, there is a defect in the thermistor sensor supply line
or the connection terminals.
– Check connections.
6.2. Performance check TSE control device
 Disconnect thermistor sensor supply line from

terminals 14 and 15 of the TSE control device
(SGR).
Figure similar

86
 Connect commercially available carbon film or

metal film resistor (R) in accordance with the
following values to terminals 14 and 15 of the
TSE control device (SGR):
Resistor  10000 5600 2200 1000 560 220

Switching temperature 25 39 63 87 107 143
°C
 Switch on TSE control device.

– Digital display lights up.
 Keep (stator temp.) button pressed and read temperature

value.
– Read value must correspond with the switching tempera-
ture allocated to the resistor used.
 In the case of a display deviation of more than 5-10 °C or in the case of no display,
replace TSE control device.
7. Dismantle pump-sided parts of dry-running protection device (TSE)

 Follow the instructions in the chapter Shut-down (  chapter 6).
NOTICE
Adjusting the sensor sleeve (656) assembled at the factory.
Damage caused by incorrect readings of the dry-running protection device (TSE).
 Retain the location and position of the sensor sleeve (656).
 The pump-side parts of the dry-running protection device (TSE) should be assembled / dismantled only
by SEEPEX trained personnel.

87
7.1. Dismantle connection head (650) and thermistor sensor (653)
 Loosen screw (SCH) on the cover of the connec-

tion head (650).
 Open the cover of the connection head (650).
 Loosen connection wires of the thermistor

sensor (653) on the terminal board of the
 Loosen fixing screw (FS) on the connection head

(650).

88
 Remove connection head (650) from screw

socket (652).
 Dismantle screw socket (652) together with two

O-rings (651) from stator (601).
 Remove clamping screw (654).
 Remove thermistor sensor (653) together with

rubber ring (655) from sensor sleeve (656).

89
8. Assemble pump-sided parts of dry-running protection device (TSE)
NOTICE
Adjusting the sensor sleeve (656) assembled at the factory.
Damage caused by incorrect readings of the dry-running protection device (TSE).
 Retain the location and position of the sensor sleeve (656).
 The pump-side parts of the dry-running protection device (TSE) should be assembled / dismantled only
by SEEPEX trained personnel.
 Remove the transport locks (STP) (if available)

from sensor sleeve (656).
 Mount the clamping screw (654) and rubber ring

(655) onto the sensor sleeve (656) and tighten
slightly.
 Insert the thermistor sensor (653) through the

opening of the clamping screw (654) down to the
bottom of the sensor sleeve (656).

90
 Tighten the thermistor sensor "finger tight" (653)

using clamping screw (654) and rubber ring
(655).
 Assemble screw socket (652) together with two

O-rings (651) on stator (601).
 Install connection head (650) on screw socket

(652).
– Route connection wires of the thermistor
sensor (653) from below through the
opening in the terminal board.
 Fix connection head (650) with fixing screw (FS)

on screw socket (652).

91
 Secure connection wires of the thermistor

sensor (653) on the terminal board of the
– Note the structural design connection head
(  chapter 2.1. ).
 Close the cover of the connection head (650).

 Tighten screw (SCH) on the cover of the connec-
tion head (650).

92
9. Thermistor sensor resistor values

NTC thermistor sensor with stainless steel protective sleeve:
Standard resistor: 10 k at 25 °C
Temperature °C Resistor  Temperature °C Resistor 

-20 97080 16 15000
-19 91610 17 14320
-18 86490 18 13680
-17 81690 19 13070
-16 77180 20 12490
-15 72950 21 11940
-14 68980 22 11420
-13 65240 23 10920
-12 61730 24 10450
-11 58430 25 10000
-10 55330 26 9573
-9 52400 27 9167
-8 49650 28 8777
-7 47060 29 8407
-6 44620 30 8057
-5 42330 31 7723
-4 40160 32 7403
-3 38110 33 7097
-2 36190 34 6807
-1 34370 35 6530
0 32650 36 6267
1 31030 37 6017
2 29500 38 5777
3 28050 39 5547
4 26690 40 5327
5 25390 41 5117
6 24170 42 4917
7 23010 43 4727
8 21920 44 4543
9 20880 45 4370
10 19900 46 4200
11 18970 47 4040
12 18090 48 3890
13 17250 49 3743
14 16460 50 3603
15 15710 51 3467

93

52 3340 90 915,3
53 3217 91 887,7
54 3099 92 861
55 2986 93 835,3
56 2878 94 810,3
57 2774 95 786,7
58 2675 96 763,3
59 2579 97 741
60 2488 98 719,3
61 2400 99 698,7
62 2316 100 678,3
63 2235 101 659
64 2157 102 640
65 2083 103 622
66 2011 104 604
67 1942 105 587
68 1876 106 571
69 1813 107 555
70 1752 108 539,7
71 1693 109 525
72 1636 110 510,3
73 1582 111 496,7
74 1530 112 483
75 1479 113 470
76 1431 114 457,3
77 1384 115 445
78 1340 116 433,3
79 1297 117 421,7
80 1255 118 410,7
81 1215 119 400
82 1177 120 389,3
83 1140 121 379,3
84 1104 122 369,7
85 1070 123 360
86 1036 124 350,6
87 1004 125 341,7
88 973,7 126 333,1
89 944 127 324,7

94

128 316,5 140 235,27
129 308,6 141 229,70
130 300,93 142 224,30
131 293,47 143 219,00
132 286,32 144 213,90
133 279,17 145 208,87
134 272,03 146 204,03
135 265,7 147 199,33
136 259,3 148 194,77
137 253 149 190,33
138 246,93 150 185,97
139 241,03

95
96
Electrical Connection of Frequency Inverters
1.0 Connection of the drive motor to a frequency inverter
NOTICE
 Heed the technical information and information in the manufacturer’s operating instructions
when installing and commissioning the frequency inverter.
 Perform the connection of the frequency inverter and motor in accordance with the table.
 An incorrect motor connection causes considerable reduction in motor performance.
The pump may possibly not start, or it might cause the drive to overheat.
Details motor type place Line voltage of the Output voltage of the Motor connection
(nominal motor voltage / circuit frequency inverter frequency inverter
arrangement)
230 V ▲ / 400 V Y 1 x 230 V AC 3 x 0 to 230 V Delta ▲
230 V ▲ / 400 V Y 3 x 400 V AC 3 x 0 to 400 V Star Y
400 V ▲ / 690 V Y 3 x 400 V AC 3 x 0 to 400 V Delta ▲
1.1 Standard three phase current squirrel cage motors with PTC thermistors
Delta connection (▲) Star connection (Y)

W2 U2 V2 W2 U2 V2
U1 V1 W1 U1 V1 W1
L1 L2 L3 PTC L1 L2 L3 PTC
Motor terminal board Motor terminal board
1.2 Self ventilated and force ventilated motors
 Self ventilated motors must be equipped with a PTC temperature monitoring device for
speed control by means of a frequency inverter.
 Force ventilated motors may be loaded with nominal torque for the complete speed range.
 Connect force ventilators to a separate terminal board on the fan cover.
 Heed type plate details of the force ventilator or see separate terminal connection
diagram.
1.3 Setting up the frequency inverter
 The power output of the frequency inverter must correspond to the motor power.
- Where applicable the power of the inverter can be customized to the motor rating by
adjusting the parameters.
 The pump requires a higher torque to start (breakaway torque).
- This required torque can only be achieved by frequency inverters, which make 1.5
times the rated current for the motor available for at least 30s.
- The operating torque is approximately constant throughout the whole speed range
where the conveying pressure remains constant.
 Head the following frequency inverter characteristic curves (Item 1.3.1, 1.3.2).
- The quadratic characteristic curve, which is frequently designated the pump and
ventilator characteristic curve, is not suitable for progressive cavity pumps
Document TI.FRU.01us Issue C/14.04.09

97
Electrical Connection of Frequency Inverters
1.3.1 Linear voltage / frequency characteristic curve up to mains frequency
U [%]
100
50
f
½ f mains f mains
(f = 50/60 Hz)
Mains
1.3.2 Linear voltage / frequency characteristic curve up to levels above the mains frequency
U [%]
100
50
f
½ f mains f mains f max.
(f = 50/60 Hz)
mains
1.3.3 Linear voltage / frequency characteristic curve with the installation of a magnetic bias
(StartBoost)
 If problems arise when starting the pump which make a higher breakaway torque
necessary, these should be resolved by the adjustment of a magnetic bias. In the case of
the magnetic bias the drive is supplied with current by the frequency inverter at just 0Hz.
NOTICE
Magnetisation current set too high

Damage to the motor due to overheating.
 Heed the frequency inverter manufacturer’s instructions when setting the magnetic bias.
U [%]
f
f mains f max.
(f mains= 50/60 Hz)
Document TI.FRU.01us Issue C/14.04.09

98
Warranty Card
Warranty Card
Complete and return to validate warranty

Please complete this card and return it to seepex Inc. By using this card, the valid warranty
period will commence at the pump “start-up” date. If this card is not completed the warranty
coverage period will commence on the date the pump is shipped from the seepex factory.
This card must be completed and mailed no later than one year from the date of shipment.
Client
User Entity: ................................. Address of plant: ........................................

Contact Person: ................................. ........................................
Phone Number: ................................. ........................................
Fax Number: ................................. ........................................
E-mail Address: ................................. ........................................
Technical Pump Data
Pump Model: .................................

Pump Commission: .................................
Performance Data
Pumped Product: .................................

Diff. Pressure: ................................. Flow Rate: .................................
Temperature: ................................. Viscosity: .................................
Solids Size: ................................. Solids %: .................................
Inquiry
Was the appearance of the pump acceptable? ....... Yes ....... No

Did the pump suffer any freight damage? ....... Yes ....... No
Did the pump perform as expected? ....... Yes ....... No
Did you receive: - Data Sheets? ....... Yes ....... No
- O&M Manuals? ....... Yes ....... No
Did you local seepex distributor contact your to arrange a start-up?....... Yes ....... No
other comments
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
Name of person completing card (please print)
Date: ................................ Signature: ..............................
A / 20.02.2012 -OM.WRC.02US
99
100
TERMS & CONDITIONS OF SALE AND/OR REPAIR
10.19
The following terms and conditions shall apply to an 4.0 CANCELLATION 7.0 WARRANTIES & LIABILITY LIMITATIONS
order for all or any part of the articles covered by the
accompanying offer unless a specific exception is 4.1. After acceptance, orders may be canceled only 7.1.
included therein. Acceptance of any order by SEEPEX with the express approval of SEEPEX Inc. In the event a. New Articles: SEEPEX Inc. warrants articles of
Inc. is expressly made conditional upon Buyer’s accep- of an approved cancellation, the customer shall remain our manufacture against defects in material and/
tance of SEEPEX Inc. Terms and Conditions of Sale responsible for payment for all work performed and/ or workmanship for a period of three (3) years
and/or Repair. All prior or future terms, conditions or or material expenses incurred by SEEPEX Inc. as of the from date of delivery, provided that the articles
negotiations (whether written or oral) by Buyer will time of cancellation. SEEPEX Inc. reserves the right to have been installed, maintained, and operated in
therefore be considered void and inapplicable unless cancel the order if SEEPEX Inc. determines, in its sole strict accordance with SEEPEX Inc. recommenda-
otherwise agreed in writing. SEEPEX Inc. reserves discretion, that the customer’s financial condition tions and instructions.
the right, in its sole discretion, to refuse any order, renders the customer unable or unlikely to pay for the
unconditionally, for any reason including but not lim- order as agreed. b. Repair Work: Defined herein as work and ser-
ited to: expiration of the validity of the offer, errors in vices performed by SEEPEX Inc. SEEPEX Inc. war-
the offer, unacceptable payment risks, conflicts with 5.0 RETURN rants all repair work and services that it performs
contractual commitments made to other potential against defects in workmanship and/or materials
customers and the chance that a customer may try 5.1. No credit will be allowed for returns unless SEEPEX for a period of three (3) years from the date of
to enforce an implied warranty or merchantability of Inc. has authorized such returns in writing in advance. delivery of the repaired articles.
the products offered. A copy of this authorization must be returned with the
item as the packing slip. All returns are subject to re- c. All Orders: All warranty claims shall be submit-
1.0 PRICES stocking charges and to the SEEPEX Inc. Return Goods ted promptly in writing to SEEPEX Inc. Any war-
Authorization (RGA) Policy, which is available on www. ranty replacement and/or repair shall be made
1.1. Any prices quoted shall only be valid for orders seepex.com, and is incorporated herein by reference. Ex-Works SEEPEX Inc. plant (Enon, Ohio USA).
placed within 30 days from the date of issue of the SEEPEX Inc. will only issue credits for items that are SEEPEX Inc.’s warranty obligation shall be limited
offer. Prices are Ex-Works SEEPEX Inc. plant (Enon, Ohio covered under warranty or can be resold. Items that to the replacement and/or repair only of defective
USA) in U.S. dollars, unless otherwise agreed. SEEPEX are specially produced for a specific customer, includ- material and/or workmanship.
Inc. reserves the right to correct typographical or ing but not limited to: special hoppers, baseplates,
clerical errors. electrical panels, gear reducers and electric motors 7.2. In no event shall SEEPEX Inc. be liable for any
are specifically excluded from consideration for credit. incidental or consequential loss or damage of whatever
2.0 TERMS Any items not received in good, clean and uncontami- kind of nature including but not limited to loss of busi-
nated condition or items that cannot be put back into ness income or profits, or damage resulting from delay
2.1. All orders are subject to approval by the SEEPEX stock will not be accepted. Any elastomer material with in manufacture or delivery, loss of use or damage to
Inc. Credit Department. Unless otherwise agreed, if over three (3) years of fabrication will not be accepted any installation into which the article may be installed,
payment for the invoice due is not made in full within for return and/or credit. Customers must pay for all whether arising out of contract or tort.
thirty (30) days after shipment, late fees of eigh- freight associated with any return, including parts or
teen percent (18%) per year (equivalent to a nominal equipment that may be considered to be covered by the 7.3. SEEPEX Inc. shall not be liable for any loss or
monthly interest rate of 1.5%) will be applied on the limited warranty protection clause below. If an item is damage resulting from delay and/or late delivery due
unpaid balance until paid in full. The terms and condi- deemed to be covered under warranty, the value of the to causes beyond our reasonable control. Notwith-
tions herein set forth are based upon tariffs, taxes, item, and freight associated with the replacement of standing anything herein to the contrary, SEEPEX Inc.’s
foreign exchange rates, delivery, and other conditions the item, will be reimbursed by the issuance of a credit liability to customer on any cause of action shall be
in effect on the date of the customer’s order. In the to the customer’s account. Outstanding RGA’s that limited to the amount paid by the customer on the sub-
event that such tariffs, taxes, foreign exchange rates, have declined repair will be scrapped automatically ject order. SEEPEX Inc. makes no warranties, express or
delivery, and/or other conditions should change prior after ninety (90) days if no other written instructions implied, with respect to articles or products manufac-
to delivery of the goods, SEEPEX Inc. reserves the right are provided. tured or provided by any party other than SEEPEX Inc.,
to charge such increased duties, taxes, or charges to except to transfer to the customer, where permissible,
the customer. 6.0 SHIPMENT any warranty provided to SEEPEX Inc. by the original
manufacturer. On any claims for repairs and/or re-
2.2. Unless the order includes the appropriate exemp- 6.1. placement under such warranty, all costs incurred by
tion certificates and/or licenses, duties and taxes a. Handling Charge: Customer shall be responsible SEEPEX Inc., which are not underwritten by the original
levied by Federal, State, or other governments are re- for making all arrangements for shipment of manufacturers, shall be borne by the customer. Except
quired to be charged automatically at the rate imposed the order with a suitable carrier. In the event as provided herein, SEEPEX Inc. expressly disclaims all
at time of importation/shipment. Any change in law, that customer requests that SEEPEX Inc. make representations, promises, or warranties, express or
regulations, or Government practice which causes a arrangements for shipment, then customer implied, with respect to any products, articles, work, or
variation of any kind in the applicable charges from the agrees to pay to SEEPEX Inc., in addition to the services, including any warranties of merchantability
amounts stated in the offer shall result in an equiva- applicable shipping charges, a handling charge in and of fitness for a particular purpose. All warranties
lent change in the price quoted. the amount of 10% of the shipping charges with a made by SEEPEX Inc. shall be void where the goods have
minimum $5.00 to a maximum charge of $150.00, been subject to misuse, neglect, damage or alteration.
2.3. Until payment is made in full, SEEPEX Inc. shall with special services requiring additional charges. SEEPEX Inc. shall be held free and harmless from any
retain the right, without notice, to repossess and/ dispute or claim anywhere arising from and relating to
or retain the items, and/or dispose of them, for its b. New Articles: Where shipping instructions dic- infringement of patent, design, trademark, or copy-
benefit and hold the customer responsible for any tate no specific routing, SEEPEX Inc. will utilize its right of items, sold or repaired under this contract.
loss. Customer agrees to enter into any agreements, best judgement in determining routing but shall
contracts, or notices required confirming such rights. not be liable for any charges once the goods have 8.0 PROPERTY RIGHTS AND RISKS
reached their agreed upon point of delivery. If
2.4. Except where prohibited by law, all products and changes are made at customer’s request in a) the 8.1. SEEPEX Inc. disclaims any liability or responsibil-
services paid with a credit card will be subject to a 2.5% agreed upon point of delivery, or b) in the rout- ity whatsoever with regard to loss or damages to the
convenience fee added to the price of the order. This ing selected by SEEPEX Inc. and if such changes customer’s property while in the possession, custody
fee will not exceed our cost of acceptance and will not involve additional costs to be incurred, such costs or control of SEEPEX Inc. for requested repairs or other
apply to orders placed through an online platform. shall be borne exclusively by the customer, unless services, and the customer expressly agrees to indem-
otherwise agreed in writing. nify and hold SEEPEX Inc. harmless against any and all
3.0 SECURITY claims for such loss or damage.
c. Repair Work: All items for which the customer
3.1. In order to secure any obligations due to SEEPEX requests repair or other services by SEEPEX 9.0 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
Inc. from the customer, the customer grants to SEEPEX Inc. shall be delivered to and picked up from the
Inc. a security interest in: SEEPEX Inc. plant (Enon, Ohio USA) unless other- 9.1. Any hazardous materials or the existence of
wise agreed in writing. All costs of delivery shall any hazards relative to the condition of any product
a. The merchandise covered by the customer’s be paid by the customer unless otherwise agreed tendered to SEEPEX Inc. for service or repair work must
order (s), and to in writing prior to shipment. Items returned to be disclosed by customer in writing in the RGA Request
SEEPEX Inc. must be returned in good, clean and Form, whether or not required to be disclosed per
b. All property and funds of the customer now uncontaminated condition. Any cost of cleaning federal law on the MSDS sheet. Customer shall defend,
or hereafter in SEEPEX Inc.’s possession, and in or decontamination will be charged back to the indemnify and hold SEEPEX Inc. harmless from and
all additions and proceeds of such merchandise customer’s account at the standard service rate. against any and all claims of injury or damage, includ-
and/or property. The customer hereby authorizes SEEPEX Inc. has the right to refuse acceptance of ing attorney’s fees, caused by any hazardous condition
SEEPEX Inc. to sign alone any financing statement any dirty or contaminated shipment that may be or material on or about products accepted for service/
or statements and to do all and any other things suspected of being hazardous. repair. This obligation includes but is not limited to
which may be necessary to perfect such security claims of bodily injury or death suffered by SEEPEX Inc.
interest. d. All Orders: On collect freight shipments, cart- employees, or by other parties.
age charges from plant to carrier are the respon-
sibility of the customer. Title to articles passes
to customer upon delivery to carrier acting as
customer’s agent subject to any right of retention
by SEEPEX Inc. All claims for shortage in, and dam-
ages in, shipment or otherwise must be reported
to carrier immediately upon receipt with copy or
report to ourselves within five (5) business days.
SEEPEX Inc.
511 Speedway Drive
Enon, Ohio 45323
USA
T +1 937 864-7150
[email protected]
www.seepex.com
101
102
13
Appendix
13.1 Manufacturer's documents / suppliers
• available
Ausgabe
issue
B / 19.06.2008 Dokument
document
OM.MDS.01us Blatt
sheet
1 (1)
103
104
High Performance
Intelligent Drivesystems
AC Vector Drives
B1000
Operating & Instruction Manuals
For Gear Units
100200112 105
NORD DRIVESYSTEMS
Spanning the Globe to Serve You
Since 1965, NORD Gear has grown to global proportions on

the strength of product performance, superior customer service, and
intelligent solutions to a never-ending variety of industrial challenges.
All mechanical and electrical components of a drive are available

from NORD Gear. Our products cover the full range of drive
equipment: helical in-line, helical shaft-mount, helical bevel, helical
worm gearboxes, motors and AC drives from 1/6 hp to 250 hp,
with torques from 90 lb-in to 900,000 lb-in.
But NORD Gear does far more than manufacture the world’s finest
drive components. We provide our customers with optimum drive
configurations for their specific purposes, providing each and every
one of them with truly complete and efficient systems at a price/quality
ratio unmatched in today’s fast-changing markets.
NORD Gear makes its wide range of products easily available through
a global network that provides all customers with prompt delivery and
expert support services to consistently exceed customer expectations.
We are firmly committed to being totally responsive to the ideas and
specifications of every customer, anywhere in the world.
106
TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETAIN FOR FUTURE USE WWW.NORD.COM
TITLE Document Number & Hyperlink

General Instructions U10000
Safety Notes U10020
Storage & Commissioning U10040
Unit Installation U10060
Solid Shaft Connections U10250
Keyed Hollow Shaft U10270
Shaft Fixing Kit U10280
Hollow Shaft With Shrink Disc U10290
NORD GRIPMAXX™ U10310
Reducer Mounting Footed & Flange Mount Gear Units U10500
Clincher™ Shaft-Mount With Rubber Buffers U10580
Right Angle Shaft-Mount with Torque Arm (D) U10600
90.1 Helical-bevel shaft-mount with Bottom Mount Torque Arm (K) U10620
Helical & Bevel Reducer Lubrication U10750
VL2 & VL3 Extended Bearing Lubrication U10760
Helical Worm Reducer Lubrication U10770
Minicase™ (SM) Worm Reducer Lubrication U10790
Minicase™ (SMI/SMID) Worm Reducer Lubrication U10800
FLEXBLOC™ Worm Reducer Lubrication U10810
Expansion Chambers Installation & Maintenance Manual U10830
Helical & Bevel Reducer Lubrication Types U11000
Conveyor Drive Lubrication Information U11001
Helical Worm Reducer Lubrication Types U11020
Minicase™ (SM) Worm Reducer Lubrication Types U11040
Minicase™ (SMI/SMID) Worm Reducer Lubrication Types U11050
FLEXBLOC™ Worm Reducer Lubrication Types U11060
Standard In-Line Footed Oil Fill Quantities U11500
Standard In-Line Flanged Oil Fill Quantities U11600
Helical In-Line Footed Oil Fill Quantities U11700
Helical In-Line Flanged Oil Fill Quantities U11800
CLINCHER™ Oil Fill Quantities U11900
90.1 Helical-Bevel Footed Oil Fill Quantities U12000
90.1 Helical-Bevel Flanged Oil Fill Quantities U12100
92 Series Helical-Bevel Footed Oil Fill Quantities U12200
92.1/93.1 Series Helical Bevel Oil Fill Quantities U12205
92 Series Helical-Bevel Flanged Oil Fill Quantities U12300
Helical-Worm Footed Oil Fill Quantities U12400
Helical-Worm Solid Shaft/Flanged Oil Fill Quantities U12500
Helical-Worm Hollow Shaft Oil Fill Quantities U12600
Nordbloc Footed Oil Fill Quantities U12700
NORD Gear Limited NORD Gear Corporation

Toll Free in Canada: 800.668.4378 Toll Free in the United States: 888.314.6673
09.02.16 www.nord.com/docs 107
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Nordbloc Flanged Oil Fill Quantities U12800

TITLE Document Number & Hyperlink
Nordbloc.1 Footed Oil Fill Quantities U12900
Nordbloc.1 Flanged Oil Fill Quantities U13000
Minicase™ (SM) Footed Oil Fill Quantities U13100
Minicase™ (SMI) Footed Oil Fill Quantities U13150
Minicase™ Flanged (SM) Oil Fill Quantities U13200
Minicase™ Flanged (SMI) Oil Fill Quantities U13250
FLEXBLOC™ Oil Fill Quantities U13300
Standard In-Line Oil Plug & Vent Locations U14000
Helical In-Line Oil Plug & Vent Locations U14100
CLINCHER™ Oil Plug & Vent Locations U14200
92 Series Helical-Bevel Oil Plug & Vent Locations U14300
92.1/93.1 Series Helical-Bevel Oil Plug & Vent Locations U14305
90.1 Helical-Bevel Oil Plug & Vent Locations U14400
Helical-Worm Oil Plug & Vent Locations U14500
Nordbloc Oil Plug & Vent Locations U14600
Nordbloc.1 Oil Plug & Vent Locations U14700
Minicase™ (SMI) Worm Oil Plug & Vent Locations U14750
FLEXBLOC™ Vent Locations U14800
Standard In-Line Parts List Drawings U15000
Helical In-Line Parts List Drawings U15100
CLINCHER™ Parts List Drawings U15200
CLINCHER™ VL2 & VL3 Parts List Drawings U15210
90.1 Helical-Bevel Parts List Drawings U15300
90.1 Helical-Bevel VL2 & VL3 Parts List Drawings U15310
92 Series Helical-Bevel Parts List Drawings U15400
92.1/93.1 Series Helical-Bevel Parts List Drawings U15415
Helical-Worm Parts List Drawings U15500
Nordbloc™ Parts List Drawings U15600
Nordbloc.1 parts list U15705
Troubleshooting U19000
Motors - AC Induction, Single and Polyphase U30000
Motor Brakes Installation & Maintenance U35000
Fast Acting Brake Rectifiers [GPE, GPU & PMG] U35100
Current sensing relay U35200
NEMA/IEC/SERVO Inputs Adapters & Their Couplings U45100
NEMA or IEC Input Adapter Lubrication Options U45250
NEMA or IEC Input Adapter with Grease Fitting U45255
Solid Input Shaft [W] U45300
Motor Mount Platform [MK] U45400
Sugar Scoop U45500
NSD tuph Touch-Up Kit U65100

BIM TO USER MANUAL
CROSS REFERENCE
Old BIM TITLE New User Manual
(No Longer
Terms Available)
& Conditions of Sale Document Numbers & Hyperlinks
Terms
BIM 1010 - Unicase Helical In-Line Gearboxes U10000 - General Instructions
Installation & Maintenance Instructions U10020 - Safety Notes
U10040 - Storage & Commissioning
U10060 - Unit Installation
U10250 - Solid Shaft Connections
U10500 - Reducer Mounting Footed & Flange Mount Gear Units
U10750 - Helical & Bevel Reducer Lubrication
U11000 - Helical & Bevel Reducer Lubrication Types
U11700 - Helical In-Line Footed Oil Fill Quantities
U11800 - Helical In-Line Flanged Oil Fill Quantities
U14100 - Helical In-Line Oil Plugs & Vent Locations
U15100 - Helical In-Line Parts Lists Drawings
BIM 1011 - NORDBLOC Helical Gearboxes U10000 - General Instructions
U12700 - Nordbloc™ Footed Oil Fill Quantities
U12800 - Nordbloc™ Flanged Oil Fill Quantities
U14600 - Nordbloc™ Oil Plugs & Vent Locations
U15600 - Nordbloc™ Parts Lists Drawings
BIM 1012 - Standard Helical In-Line Gearboxes U10000 - General Instructions

U11500 - Standard In-Line Footed Oil Fill Quantities
U11600 - Standard In-Line Flanged Oil Fill Quantities
U14000 - Standard In-Line Oil Plugs & Vent Locations
U15000 - Standard In-Line Parts Lists Drawings
BIM 1013 - NORDBLOC.1 Helical Gearboxes U10000 - General Instructions

U12900 - Nordbloc.1™ Footed Oil Fill Quantities
U13000 - Nordbloc.1™ Flanged Oil Fill Quantities
U14700 - Nordbloc.1™ Oil Plugs & Vent Locations
BIM 1020 - Unicase Shaft Mount Gearboxes U10000 - General Instructions

U10580 - CLINCHER™ w/ Rubber Buffer
U11900 - CLINCHER™ Oil Fill Quantities
U14200 - CLINCHER™ Oil Plugs & Vent Locations
U15200 - CLINCHER™ Parts Lists Drawings

BIM TO USER MANUAL
CROSS REFERENCE
Old BIM TITLE New User Manual
(No Longer Available) Document Numbers & Hyperlinks
BIM 1030 - Unicase Helical Worm Gearboxes U10000 - General Instructions
U10770 - Helical-Worm Reducer Lubrication
U11020 - Helical-Worm Reducer Lubrication Types
U12400 - Helical-Worm Footed Oil Fill Quantities
U12500 - Helical-Worm Solid Shaft/Flanged Oil Fill Quantities
U12600 - Helical-Worm Hollow Shaft Oil Fill Quantities
U14500 - Helical-Worm Oil Plugs & Vent Locations
U15500 - Helical-Worm Parts LIsts Drawings
BIM 1031 - MINICASE Worm Gearboxes U10000 - General Instructions
U10770 - Helical Worm Reducer Lubrication
U11040 - Minicase™ Worm Reducer Lubrication Types
U13100 - Minicase™ Foot Mount Oil Fill Quantities
U13200 - Minicase™ Flange Mount Oil Fill Quantities
BIM 1033 - SI Design FLEXBLOC Worm Gearboxes U10000 - General Instructions
U10770 - Helical Worm Reducer Lubrication
U11060 - FLEXBLOC™ Worm Reducer Lubrication Types
U13300 - FLEXBLOC™ Oil Fill Quantities
U14800 - FLEXBLOC™ Oil Plugs & Vent Locations
BIM 1040 - 92 & 90.1 Helical-Bevel U10000 - General Instructions
U12000 - Bevel Footed Oil Fill Quantities
U12100 - Bevel Flanged Oil Fill Quantities
U12205 - 92 Series Helical-Bevel Footed Oil Fill Quantities
U14300 - 92 Series Helical-Bevel Oil Plugs & Vent Locations
U14400 - 90.1 Helical-Bevel Oil Plugs & Vent Locations
U15300 - 90.1 Helical-Bevel Parts Lists
U15400 - 92 Series Helical-Bevel Parts Lists Drawings
BIM 1001 - Hollow Shrink Disc Shaft Installation & Maintenance Instructions U10290 - Hollow Shaft with Shrink Disc
BIM 1002 - Keyed Shaft & Fixing Element U10270 - Keyed Hollow Shaft
Installation & Maintenance Instructions U10280 - Shaft Fixing Kit
BIM 1003 - Expansion Chambers U10830 - Expansion Chambers
Installation & Maintenance Instructions Installation & Maintenance Manual
BIM 1009 - Inputs U45100 - NEMA IEC Inputs & Their Couplings
U45250 - NEMA or IEC Input Adapter Lubrication Options
U45300 - Solid Input Shaft [W]
U45400 - Motor Mount Platform
U45500 - Sugar Scoop
BIM 1004 - Motors U30000 - Motors - AC Induction, Single and Polyphase
BIM 1014 - Motor Brakes U35000 - Motor Brakes Installation & Maintenance
BIM 1092 - Current Sensing Brake Relay [IR] U35200 - Current Sensing Relay
BIM 1095 - Fast Brake Rectifier [GPE & GPU] U35100 - Fast Brake Rectifier
BIM 9002 - GRIPMAXX™ U10310 - NORD GRIPMAXX™

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
RETAIN FOR FUTURE USE U10000 - 1 of 2
1. Importance of the operating instructions 3. Obtaining detailed operating instructions

These operating instructions are intended to provide general One can receive the detailed installation and maintenance
information and safety guidelines. It is the responsibility of instructions by entering a serial number (or NORD order
the buyer, machine builder, installer and user of the NORD number) at the appropriate location on the NORD web site.
product to make sure that all the proper safetynotes and op-
erating instructions have been reviewed and understood. If i. Record the serial number from your gearmotor, gear
the contents of this instruction or any applicable operating reducer, or motor nameplate, or record the serial number
instructions are not understood, please consult NORD. found on your order confirmation.
ii. Go to www.nord.com/docs to download the appropriate
WARNING operating instructions.
Electric motors, gearmotors, electrical brakes, variable EXAMPLE: www.nord.com/docs

frequency drives, and gear reducers contain potentially
dangerous high-voltage, rotating-components and
surfaces that may become hot during operation. All work
involved in the transport, connection, commissioning and
maintenance of any NORD product must be carried out by
qualified and responsible technicians.
2. Inspect incoming freight

Before accepting shipment from the freight company,
thoroughly inspect the NORD equipment for any shipping
and handling damage. If any goods called for in the bill of
lading or express receipt are damaged, or if the quantity is
short, do not accept until the freight express agent makes an
appropriate notation on your freight bill or express receipt. If
any concealed loss or damage is discovered later, notify your
freight carrier or express agent at once, and request a formal
review of your claim.
4. Intended use
Claims for loss or damage in shipment must not be deducted
from the NORD invoice, nor should payment of the NORD NORD is a supplier of electric motors, gearmotors, reduc-
invoice be withheld awaiting adjustment of such claims, as ers, electromechanical brakes, mechanical variators, and
the carrier guarantees safe delivery. NORD will try to assist in electrical variable frequency drives that are intended for
collecting claims for loss or damage during shipment; how- commercial installations on larger systems and machines.
ever, this willingness on our part does not remove the trans-
portation company’s responsibility in reimbursing you for col-
lection of claims or replacement of material. WARNING
NORD does not accept any liability for damage or injury
caused by:
• Inappropriate use, operation or adaptation of
the drive system.
• Unauthorized removal of housing covers, safety
and inspection covers, guarding, etc.
• Unauthorized modifications to the drive system.
• Improper servicing or repair work on the drive system.
• Damage caused during shipment or transportation.
• Disregard of the important Safety Notes or
Operating Instructions.

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
5. Notes concerning warranty and liability 6. Checklist for installation and operation
All units are supplied according to the terms described in  Verify that the purchased NORD product has been
our standard “Conditions of Sale.” The unit limited war- supplied with the expected accessories & options. Check
ranty is also defined in our “Conditions of Sale” and is the received goods and packing slip to make sure items
located in the back of our product catalogs as well as the are properly received.
back of your order invoice.  Make sure that you have all of the required Operating
Instructions for your NORD electric motor, gearmotor,
All NORD Safety Notes and all related NORD Operating reducer, electromechanical brake, mechanical variable
instructions shall be considered up-to-date at the time in speed drives, or electrical variable frequency drives.
which they were compiled by the buyer, machine builder,
installer or user. NORD reserves the right to incorporate  Consult NORD if you feel you are missing any
technical modifications and information updates to any documentation or if you have questions.
safety/operating instructions that are within the scope
of providing additional knowledge or clarification, com-
municating design changes, or product enhancements.
Information updates may include any NORD product, or
subsequent products purchased and supplied by NORD;
No specific claims can be derived from the information or
illustrations and descriptions contained in the safety notes
or related operating instructions.
WARNING
NORD assumes no liability for personal injury, equipment
damage or malfunctions resulting from failure to
comply with any installation safety notes. The appli-
cable national, regional, and local work regulations
and safety requirements must also be complied with.
Failure to comply with any safety notes or regulations
may result in serious injury, damage to property, or even
death.

SAFETY NOTES
1. Safety & information symbols 3. Observe published performance range

& nameplate data
All work including transportation, storage, installation, elec-
trical connection, commissioning, servicing, maintenance and NOTICE
repair must be performed only by qualified specialists or
personnel. It is recommended that repairs to NORD Products Observe the data on all reducer nameplates and verify
are carried out by the NORD Service Department. Instructions published ratings for the NORD item/s in question. Do
related to operational safety will be emphasized as shown. not operate any NORD equipment outside the published
performance range. Failure to comply may result in
Symbol Meaning damage to the drive unit, driven machine, or the
environment.
Danger, Caution or Warning - Severe risk or danger
of personal injury or death by working around dan-
gerously high electrical voltage or moving machinery. U.S. Nameplate
Proper safety precautions must be taken.
NORD GEAR CORPORATION-USA / WWW.NORD.COM
Notice - Care must be taken to avoid the possibility
SK  Model/Type
of damaging the drive unit, driven machine, or the
NOTICE environment. S/N  Serial Number
RATIO SF  Gear Ratio
Important Note - Useful note or tip to help assure
trouble-free operation.
TORQUE LB-IN  Service Factor
120094630
SPEED RPM  Torque Rating
MTG POS
Material Disposal Note - Important note concerning
FOR GEAR
LUBRICATION
 Output Speed RPM
suggested material disposal.
DRIVESYSTEMS SEE MANUAL
 Mounting Position
European Nameplate
2. Safety warnings Getriebebau NORD
GrbH&Co KG
DRIVESYSTEMS D - 22934 Bargteheide
DANGER Type SK
• All work involved in the transport, connection, No.

commissioning and maintenance of any NORD  Model/Type
085 0157-0
i=
product must be carried out by qualified and respon- n2= min -1  Serial Number
sible technicians. All applicable national, regional,
 Gear Ratio
Siehe Wartungsanleitung
See maintenance instructions
and local work regulations and safety requirements Voir instructions d entretien
must also be complied with. NORD assumes no  Speed
liability for personal injury, accidental death, or
equipment damage and malfunctions resulting from 4. Transportation and handling
failure to comply with installation or operating
instructions, safety notes, or any work regulations Make sure that all eyebolts and lifting lugs are tight and
and laws! lift only at designed points. Protect the mounting surface
from possible damage during transportation.
• Gear unit installation and maintenance work may
only be performed when no power is available to
the prime mover or motor. Electric motors,
WARNING
electrical brakes, and variable frequency drives, Do not attach other machinery or loads to the NORD
contain potentially dangerous high-voltage. Prior to assembly, the supplied lifting bolts are not designed
installation or maintenance, shut down the power at for this purpose and may result in drive damage or
the circuit breaker or power switch. While working personal injury.
on the drive, make sure the power from the prime
mover is isolated or secured on “lock-out” to prevent If the gearmotor or assembly is equipped with two sus-
accidental start-up and to safeguard against injury! pension eye bolts, then both locations should be used for
transportation and placement of the unit; in this case the
• Surfaces of motors and gear units may become hot tension force of the slings must not exceed a 45° angle.
during operation or shortly after start-up. In some
instances additional protection against accidental In some instances it may be appropriate to use additional
contact may be necessary. Use caution to avoid burns lifting straps or slings in order to assure safe transportation
or serious injury! of the assembly. Always use sufficiently rated handling
equipment and ensure that adequate safety measures
are taken to protect personnel from injury during trans-
portation. Once the NORD assembly is properly installed,
remove the transportation fixtures.
SAFETY NOTES
7. DISPOSAL
Components Material
MATERIAL DISPOSAL
Gear wheels, shafts, rolling bearings, Steel
Properly dispose of all used gear units and internal parts parallel keys, snap rings, spacers,
shims, etc.
in accordance with all local regulations. In particular, all
lubricants must be properly collected and disposed. Gear housing and housing Cast iron or Aluminum
components (depending on type and size)
For confirmation of specific materials used in a specific Worm gears Bronze alloy
reducer or gearmotor assembly, please consult NORD with Radial seals, sealing caps, and rubber Elastomers with some steel
the appropriate unit identification or serial number. components
Coupling components Plastic or Elastomer with Steel
Housing gaskets and flat oil seals Asbestos-free sealing or gasket
material (various types used)
Gear Oil Mineral, SHC-Synthetic or
PG-Synthetic (can vary)

STORAGE & COMMISSIONING
1. Storage 2. Commissioning
Prior to gear unit start-up, complete the following:
IMPORTANT NOTE
• Please check your gear unit for a vent and if applicable to
For storage periods longer than 9 months, or for storage your product, remove the sealing plug to activate.
in less than desirable conditions, please consult NORD for
recommendations. NOTICE
Storage for up to 9 months is possible, so long as the follow- To prevent build-up of excessive pressure, sealed vents
ing conditions are observed: must be activated as shown prior to gear unit start up.
Excessive pressure may cause damage to internal gearbox
• Store the gear unit in its actual mounting position in components and leakage.
accordance with the specified oil fill-level, in a clean and
dry temperature controlled area. Avoid temperature
fluctuations within the range of 0°C and 40°C (32°F to
104°F) and avoid relative humidity conditions in excess
of 60%.
• Protect all exposed or unpainted shaft and flange surfaces
with an anti-corrosion agent or grease.
Sealed vent Activated vent
• Store in a location free from shock and vibration, to avoid
false brinelling of bearing elements and raceways. • Check the lubricant and be sure the gear unit is filled with
the proper oil type, to the proper level, as determined by
• Whenever possible, rotate the shafts periodically, by hand the mounting position.
if necessary, to help prevent brinelling (bearing damage)
and to help keep the shaft seals pliable.
• Avoid direct exposure to the sun or UV light and aggressive
IMPORTANT NOTE
or corrosive materials in the environment (ozone, gases, Some smaller gear units are supplied as maintenance free/
solvents, acids, caustic solutions, salts, radioactivity, etc. lubricated for life gear units. Oil level may not be checked
on some of these units.
• Check the condition of all shaft seals and all assembled

flange gasket areas. If any change is detected in the
shape, color, hardness or permeability, or if any leaks are
detected, the corresponding shaft seals and/or gaskets
must be replaced.
• Remove all anti-corrosive metal protectant from

otherwise bare metal surfaces. Follow product manufac-
turers directions and warnings during surface protection
removal.
• Check the resistance of all motor and brake windings to

verify the integrity of the winding insulation and inspect
all terminal box openings and wire connection areas to
verify that all components are dry and free of corrosion.

STORAGE & COMMISSIONING
3. Long-Term Storage 4. Commissioning After Long-Term Storage
By taking special precautions, problems such as seal leakage • Please check your gear unit for a vent and if applicable to
and reducer failure due to the lack of lubrication, improper your product, remove the sealing plug to activate.
lubrication quantity, or contamination can be avoided. The
following precautions will protect gear reducers during peri-
ods of extended storage: NOTICE
To prevent build-up of excessive pressure, sealed vents
• Store the gear unit in its actual mounting position in
must be activated as shown prior to gear unit start up.
accordance with the specified oil fill-level, in a clean and
Excessive pressure may cause damage to internal gearbox
dry temperature controlled area. Avoid temperature
components and leakage.
fluctuations within the range of 0°C and 40°C (32°F to
104°F) and avoid relative humidity conditions in excess
of 60%.
• Fill the reducer full with oil that is compatible with the
product normally used or recommended during service.
• Apply grease to all unpainted or unprotected shafts,

bores, keyways, flange surfaces, tapped holes, and to the Sealed vent Activated vent
exterior of all oil seals.
• Remove all anti-corrosive metal protectant from
• Store in a location free from shock and vibration, to avoid
otherwise bare metal surfaces. Follow product manufac-
false brinelling of bearing elements and raceways. turers directions and warnings during surface protection
• Once every few months rotate the input shaft removal.
approximately 10-20 revolutions to redistribute the • Drain the reducer and refill it with the proper type and
weight of gears and shafts and to prevent brinnelling of amount of lubricant.
the bearings and drying of the seal track.
• Observe start-up and initial operation to make sure there
• Avoid direct exposure to the sun or UV light and aggressive are no seal or gasket leaks, or unusual sounds, vibration or
or corrosive materials in the environment (ozone, gases, heat rise during operation.
solvents, acids, caustic solutions, salts, radioactivity, etc.)
• Check the resistance of all motor and brake windings to
verify the integrity of the winding insulation and inspect
all terminal box openings and wire connection areas to
verify that all components are dry and free of corrosion.

UNIT INSTALLATION
1. Installation site Table 1: Recommended Straightness and Flatness of

Customer-Supplied Support Foundation
Drives must be properly installed if they are to produce the
rated torque. Improper installation may lead to oil leaks, re- Above To & General Tolerance on
duced life, or even catastrophic failure. NORD gear drives Including Straigtness & Flatness
and motors are intended to be installed at a suitable mount- (in) (in) ISO 2768-2, Tolerance Class K
ing site under the following conditions: 0.00 0.39 +/- 0.002 in
0.39 1.18 +/- 0.004 in
• Unimpeded airflow to and around the units.
1.18 3.9 +/- 0.008 in
• Accessibility to oil drain, level and breather plugs. 3.9 11.8 +/- 0.016 in
• On brakemotors, allow adequate space for removing the 11.8 39 +/- 0.024 in
fan guard and replacing and adjusting the brake. 39 118 +/- 0.031 in
• Mounting surfaces must be flat, torsionally rigid, and
dampened against vibration. Above To & General Tolerance on
Including Straigtness & Flatness
• Unless special measures are taken, the immediate vicinity (mm) (mm) ISO 2768-2, Tolerance Class K
around the gear drive or motor should not be exposed 0 10 +/- 0.05 mm
to any aggressive or corrosive substances, contaminated air, 10 30 +/- 0.1 mm
ozone, gases, solvents, acids, alkalis, salts, radioactivity, etc.
30 100 +/- 0.2 mm
2. Mounting position 100 300 +/- 0.4 mm
300 1000 +/- 0.6 mm
Reducer mounting position charts illustrate the standard 1000 3000 +/- 0.8 mm
mounting positions for horizontal and vertical mounting.
All gear units are assembled with the oil fill-level, oil-drain Straightness: Based upon the length of the corresponding line.
and vent plugs installed in their proper locations, according Flatness: Based upon the longer lateral surface or the
to the customer-specified mounting position. For mounting diameter of the circular surface.
orientations other than shown consult NORD Gear.
NOTICE IMPORTANT NOTE
Improper oil levels may lead to premature component The responsibility for the design and construction of the
wear and diminished service life. The gear reducer may support foundation is with the user. The foundation
not receive proper lubrication if the unit is not mounted must be adequate to withstand normal operating loads
in the position for which it is designed. Observe and possible overloads while maintaining alignment to
the mounting position designated on the reducer attached system components under such loads. Motors
nameplate, or specified in the order acknowledgement. and drive components mounted on prefabricated base
Consult NORD prior to changing mounting position in plates can become misaligned during shipment. Always
the field. While it is often possible to simply relocate check alignment after installation.
the oil fill-level and vent locations, and adjust the oil
fill amount, in some cases, different mounting positions 4. Steel foundation
may lend themselves to different internal construction An engineered structural steel foundation should be
features. designed to provide adequate rigidity and prevent loads
from distorting the housing or causing misalignment of inter-
3. Reducer mounting nal gears and shafts. When foot-mounting the gear reducer,
a base plate or sole plate with suitable thickness (generally
• The support foundation must be straight, Ievel and flat. equal or greater than the thickness of the drive feet) should
Whether the gear unit is foot-mounted or flange- be securely bolted to steel supports and extend under the
mounted, NORD recommends that the straightness and entire gear drive assembly. When flange-mounting the gear
flatness of the customer-supplied support foundation unit, the bulk head plate must be engineered to minimize
follow Table 1. buckling distortions and support the cantilevered weight of
• The gear unit must be properly aligned with the driven the gear unit or gear motor.
shaft of the machine in order to prevent additional
stress or load forces from being imposed upon the gear
unit. NOTICE
• To facilitate oil drainage it may be desirable to elevate Do not weld on the gear unit or use the gear unit as an
the gear box foundation above the surrounding earth or ground connection for any welding procedure
support structure. as this may cause permanent damage to the bearings
• All bolting surfaces must be clean and free from and gears.
contamination and corrosion.

UNIT INSTALLATION
5. Concrete foundation Table 2B: Tightening Torque for Metric Reducer Mounting Bolts
If a concrete foundation is used, allow the concrete to set Above
firmly before bolting down the gear drive. Grout structural
steel mounting pads and bolts of sufficient size into the ISO Grade 8.8 ISO Grade 10.9 ISO Grade 12.9
concrete, to adequately distribute the load stress onto the
concrete foundation. (mm) (lb-ft) (Nm) (lb-ft) (Nm) (lb-ft) (Nm)
M4 2.4 3.2 3.5 4.7 4.1 5.5
Figure 1: Concrete Foundation M5 4.7 6.4 6.9 9.3 8.1 11
M6 8 11 12 16 14 19
M8 20 27 29 39 34 46
M10 39 53 58 78 67 91
M12 68 92 100 135 110 155
M14 107 145 159 215 180 250
M16 170 230 247 335 290 390
M18 240 325 343 465 400 540
M20 339 460 487 660 570 770
 Grouted Structural M22 465 630 664 900 770 1,050
Steel Mounting Pads M24 583 790 848 1,150 960 1,300
M27 848 1,150 1,217 1,650 1,440 1,950
 Mounting Bolts M30 1,180 1,600 1,660 2,250 1,950 2,650
 Concrete Foundation M36 2,050 2,780 2,884 3,910 3,470 4,710
M42 3,297 4,470 4,639 6,290 5,560 7,540
6. Bolt connections for footed & flange mounted units
M48 4,940 6,700 7,010 9,500 8,260 11,200
NORD footed reducers and flange-mount reducers (with B5
flange) have clearance designed into the mounting holes to • Calculated tightening torques are based on a conventional
allow for some minor adjustments in alignment. BoIt size, 60°, clean and dry (un-lubricated) thread, with thread-
strength and quantity should be verified to insure proper friction and head-friction equal to 0.15.
torque reaction capacity whatever the mounting arrange-
ment. Tightening torque for gear reducer mounting bolts, • When using metric-fasteners, NORD recommends a
and recommended fastener grades, are provided in Table 2. minimum ISO Grade 8.8 bolt.
Table 2A: Tightening Torque for Inch Reducer Mounting Bolts 7. Mounting the prime mover
Thread Size When the motor is not flange mounted or integrally mounted
to the gearbox, it is important to properly secure and
Grade SAE 5 /
ASTM A449
Grade SAE 8 align the gear drive with respect to the driven machine
before attempting to align the prime mover or motor.
(in) (lb-ft) (Nm) (lb-ft) (Nm)
1/4-20 7.1 9.6 10.0 13.6 A. After the main gear drive is properly aligned and bolted in
5/16-18 16 21 22 30 place, align the prime mover with respect to the reducer
input shaft.
3/8-16 28 37 39 53
1/2-13 69 93 98 132 B. Use shims under the feet of the prime mover as needed,
5/8-11 138 188 195 264 and secure in place with the proper mounting bolts. Dowel
pins may be field-installed to help prevent misalignment
3/4-10 247 334 348 472
and ensure proper realignment if removed for service.
7/8-9 396 537 558 757
1-8 592 802 833 1,130
1 1/8-7 - - 1,233 1,672 IMPORTANT NOTE
1 1/4-7 - - 1,717 2,327
When using a high speed coupling connection between
1 3/8-6 - - 2,267 3,073 the prime mover and the reducer, check alignment
1 1/2-6 - - 2,983 4,045 per the coupling manufacturers recommendations. If
1 3/4-5 - - 4,458 6,045 the coupling is misaligned, the reducer alignment or
shimming is incorrect. Re-align the gear reducer and
• Calculated tightening torques are based a conventional re-check the high-speed coupling alignment before re-
60°, clean and dry (un-lubricated) thread, with thread- aligning the motor.
friction and head-friction equal to 0.15.
• When using inch-fasteners, NORD recommends a minimum
Grade SAE 5 (ASTM A-449) for sizes up to 1-8 UNC, and
Grade SAE 8 for all larger sizes.

SOLID SHAFT CONNECTIONS
1. Solid shaft diameter tolerance

Reducer input and output shaft extensions have a diameter
tolerance as specified in Table 1. NOTICE
Table 1: Solid Shaft Diameter Tolerance DO NOT DRIVE or HAMMER the coupling hub, pulley,
Above To & Tolerance sprocket, or gear into place. An endwise blow to the
Including reducer shaft can generate damaging axial forces and
ø (in) ø (in) (in)
cause damage to the reducer housing, bearings or internal
0.375 1.750 +0.0000 / -0.0005 components.
1.750 7.500 +0.0000 / -0.0010
Above To & Tolerance ISO 286-2
Including WARNING
ø (mm) ø (mm) (mm) Fit Class
10 18 +0.012 / +0.001 k6 To avoid serious injury the user must provide suitable
18 30 +0.015 / +0.002 k6 safety guards for all rotating shafts and shaft compo-
30 50 +0.018 / +0.002 k6 nents such as couplings, chain drives, belt drives, etc. All
50 80 +0.030 / +0.011 m6
80 120 +0.035 / +0.013 m6 guarding must adhere to local regulations and safety
120 180 +0.040 / +0.015 m6 standards.
180 190 +0.046 / +0.017 m6
3. Installing interference-fit hubs to the reducer shaft
2. Fitting drive elements onto the reducer solid shaft
Solid input and output shaft extensions are provided with a Prior to installing any interference-fit hubs to the reducer
drill and tap feature as indicated in Table 2. When installing shaft, consult with the manufacturer to determine proper
drive elements such as coupling hubs, pulleys, sprockets, or assembly and fit. Interference-fits usually require heating the
gears, NORD recommends using the threaded hole in the coupling, sprocket or gear hub, per the manufacturer’s rec-
end of the shaft, along with a suitable assembly device fitted ommendations. Coupling hub installation typically follows
into the threaded hole. ANSI/AGMA 9002-A86. Always make sure the reducer shaft
seals are protected from the heat source. Apply uniform heat
to the drive element hub to prevent distortion. NORD does
not recommend heating the drive element hub beyond 212°F
to 275°F (100°C to 135° C).
WARNING
Typical Assembly When using heat to mount a drive element hub, do not
Device
use open flame in a combustible atmosphere or near
flammable materials. Use suitable protection to avoid
Table 2: Solid Shaft End - Threaded Holes burns or serious injury.
Above To & Tap Size & Depth
Including
ø (in) ø (in) (in) IMPORTANT NOTE
0.375 0.500 10-24 x 0.43 in
0.500 0.875 1/4-20 x 0.59 in When using external chain or belt drives, make sure
0.875 0.938 5/16-18 x 0.71 in the reducer is sized so that the shaft and bearings have
0.938 1.100 3/8-16 x 0.87 in adequate capacity. To avoid unnecessary bearing loads
1.100 1.300 1/2-13 x 1.10 in and additional shaft deflection, mount all power take-off
1.300 1.875 5/8-11 x 1.42 in
1.875 3.500 3/4-10 x 1.73 in devices (sprockets, pulleys, etc.) so that the applied load
3.500 7.500 1-8 x 2.63 in center is as close to the gear housing as possible and check
5.125 8.875 1 1/4 - 7 x 3.15* component alignment and tension of any belts or chains
6.000 8.875 1 3/8 - 6 x 3.46** per the manufacturer’s recommendation. Do not over
Above To & Tap Size & Depth tighten the belts or chains.
Including
ø (mm) ø (mm) (mm)
10 13 M4 x 10 mm
13 16 M5 x 12.5 mm
16 21 M6 x 16 mm
21 24 M8 x 19 mm
24 30 M10 x 22 mm
30 38 M12 x 28 mm
38 50 M16 x 36 mm
50 85 M20 x 42 mm
85 130 M24 x 50 mm
130 225 M30 x 60 mm*
130 225 M36 x 74 mm**
* Only used on the SK9096.1 Helical-Bevel Gear Unit.
** Only used on the SK10382.1 & SK11382.1 CLINCHER™ gear units.

SOLID SHAFT CONNECTIONS
4. Coupling installation 5. Installing sheaves (pulleys), sprockets and gears

The performance and life of any coupling depends upon how To avoid unnecessary bearing loads and additional shaft de-
well it is installed. Coupling hubs are typically mounted flush flection, mount all power take-off devices (sprockets, pulleys,
with the shaft ends, unless specifically ordered for overhung gears, etc.) so that the applied load center is as close to the
mounting. Shaft couplings should be instaIIed according to gear housing as possible, as shown in Figure 2.
the coupling manufacturer’s recommendations for gap, an-
gular and paraIIeI aIignment. To help obtain critical shaft Figure 2: Sprocket or Gear Mounting
alignment coupling hubs may be installed to the machine
shafts prior to final shimming or tightening of the founda-
tion bolts. Proper coupling alignment aIIows for thermaI and
mechanicaI shaft movement during operation and ensures
that only torque (no radial load) is transmitted between the
mating shafts. Sprocket Hub
Sprocket
Coupling gap and angular alignment

The shaft gap must be sufficient to accommodate any antici- Preferred Mounting of Sprocket or Gear
pated thermal or mechanicaI axiaI movement. When setting
the coupling gap, insert a spacer or shim stock equal to the Align the driver sheave or sprocket with the driven sheave
required spacing or gap between the coupIing hub faces. or sprocket by placing a straight-edge length-wise across
Measure the clearance using feeler gauges at 90-degree in- the face of the sheaves or sprockets. AIignment of bushed
tervals, to verify the angular alignment. sheaves and sprockets should be checked only after bushings
have been tightened. Check horizontal shaft alignment by
Parallel (or offset) alignment placing one leg of a square or a level vertically against the
Mount a dial indicator to one coupIing hub, and rotate this face of the sheave or sprocket.
hub, sweeping the outside diameter of the other hub. The
paraIIeI or offset misalignment is equal to one-half of the Always check component alignment and tension any belts or
total indicator reading. Another method is to rest a straight chains per the manufacturer’s recommendation. The ideal
edge squarely on the outside diameter of the hubs at 90° belt or chain tension allows proper wrap of the driver and
intervals and measure any gaps with feeler gauges. The maxi- driven wheels, while maintaining the lowest possible tension
mum gap measurement is the paraIIeI or offset misalignment. of the belts or chain, so that no slipping occurs under load
conditions. Check belt or chain tension frequently over the
Check alignment first 24 to 48 hours of operation.
After both angular and paraIIeI alignments are within speci-
fied Iimits, tighten aII foundation boIts securely and re-check
critical aIignment. If any of the specified Iimits for aIignment
IMPORTANT NOTE
are exceeded, realign the coupIing.
When using external chain or belt drives, make sure
the reducer is sized so that the shaft and bearings have
adequate capacity. To avoid unnecessary bearing loads
and additional shaft deflection, mount all power take-off
devices (sprockets, pulleys, etc.) so that the applied load
center is as close the gear housing as possible and check
component alignment and tension of any belts or chains
per the manufacturer’s recommendation. Do not over
tension the belts or chains.
6. Outboard pinion gear alignment

Align outboard pinion gears and adjust the gear tooth clear-
ance according to the manufacturer’s recommendations,
checking for acceptable outboard pinion tooth contact. The
foundation boIts may have to be Ioosened and the gear unit
moved slightly to obtain proper gear tooth contact. After
the unit is moved to correct tooth contact, the prime mover
may need to be realigned.

KEYED HOLLOW SHAFT
1. Keyed hollow shaft design 3. Keyed hollow-shaft bore tolerances

NORD uses high quality carbon steel to manufacture Standard keyed hollow-shaft bore tolerances are shown in
hollow-shafts. Upon request, NORD can provide alternate the following table.
materials, such as stainless steel. NORD hollow shafts are
designed with a bore relief (reduced contact area) between Table 1 - Keyed hollow bore tolerances
the mating shafts. Above To and Including Bore Diameter
Tolerance
The bore relief provides a cavity to hold an anti-seize assem- ø [in] ø [in] ø [in]
bly paste. It also acts as a design feature intended to help
prevent corrosion and to facilitate gearbox removal from the 0.4375 1.6250 +0.0010 / -0.0000
solid shaft. 1.6250 3.2500 +0.0012 / -0.0000
3.2500 7.0000 +0.0014 / -0.0000
NORD furnishes dual keys designed to be used in each of the
bore land areas, as opposed to supplying a single long key. Above To and Including Bore Diameter
The dual keys are intended to simplify assembly onto the Tolerance
machine’s solid shaft.
ø [mm] ø [mm] ø [mm]
10 18 +0.018 / -0.000
18 30 +0.021 / -0.000
30 50 +0.025 / -0.000
50 80 +0.030 / -0.000
Bore Land Bore Relief Bore Land 80 120 +0.035 / -0.000
120 180 +0.040 / -0.000
180 190 +0.035 / -0.000
Metric hollow bore tolerances per ISO286-2, Class H7
IMPORTANT NOTE 4. Suggested solid shaft (machine shaft) tolerances

If a single shaft key or dual shaft keys are supplied by NORD recommends a close fit of the customer-supplied solid
others, the key/s must engage the full bore-land length at shaft or machine-shaft, for the following reasons:
each end of the hollow shaft.
• To help minimize the potential for fretting and corrosion.
• To help prevent excessive free play in the shaft connection
2. Key and keyway dimensions that could lead to excessive load stress on the driven
system, the gear drive, or both.
Unless otherwise indicated, inch keys and keyways follow the
ANSI B17.1 standard and metric keys and keyways follow the Table 2 - Suggested solid shaft tolerances
DIN6885-1 standard. Inch bores will typically utilize square
keys but in some instances the larger hollow shaft bore sizes Above To and Shaft Diameter Tolerance
utilize the alternate rectangular key shown in the ANSI B17.1 Including Uniform Load Shock Load
standard.
ø [in] ø [in] ø [in] ø [in]
Key slots for the solid machine shaft should be made with a 0.4375 0.8750 +0.0000 / -0.0005 +0.0000 / +0.0005
Class 2, transitional-fit class (slightly loose to slightly tight). 0.8750 4.5000 +0.0000 / -0.0010 +0.0000 / +0.0010
Key slots in the female shaft are designed to be a low clear- 4.5000 7.0000 +0.0000 / -0.0012 +0.0000 / +0.0015
ance fit. These suggested practices should allow for easier
assembly with the mating solid shaft, without allowing exces- Above To and Shaft Diameter Tolerance
sive clearance which could cause keys to work loose during Including
reducer operation. Uniform Load  Shock Load 
ø [mm] ø [mm] ø [mm] ø [mm]
10 18 +0.000 / -0.011 +0.012 / +0.001
IMPORTANT NOTE 18 30 +0.000 / -0.013 +0.015 / +0.002
30 50 +0.000 / -0.016 +0.018 / +0.002
If the key fit is too tight, light filing of the key sides and
50 80 +0.000 / -0.019 +0.021 / +0.002
hand-fitting of the keys may be required.
80 120 +0.000 / -0.022 +0.025 / +0.003
120 180 +0.000 / -0.025 +0.028 / +0.003
180 190 +0.000 / -0.029 +0.033 / +0.004
 Uniform load: Mating shaft diameter tolerance per ISO286-2, class h6
 Shock load: Mating shaft diameter tolerance per ISO286-2, class k6

KEYED HOLLOW SHAFT
As indicated in Table 2, different solid shaft tolerances are D. Fit the shaft key/s into place on the machine shaft.
suggested depending upon the load type. Depending upon the key slot design on the machine shaft,
it may be necessary to stake or Loctite® the key/s into place
• If the machine load conditions are considered “Uniform” so they do not slide axially while fitting the reducer to the
a clearance fit is allowed. shaft.
• If the machine load conditions are considered to have
“Shock Load” a light clearance to interference fit condi- E. Lift the gear unit assembly into place and align it carefully
tion is suggested. with respect to the machine shaft.
F. Fit the gear unit assembly onto the machine shaft using a
Typically the machine builder will have good knowledge as to suitable pulling device.
the load type. As an alternate method to classify load type,
one could follow the “Mass Acceleration Factor Selection G. Secure the reducer onto the machine shaft in an axial
Method” that is discussed in NORD’s product catalog/s. direction, to prevent the reducer from shifting or walking
out of place during operation.
Straightness, roundness, and diameter tolerance variations
of both shafts should be controlled as accurately as possible.
When mating, solid shaft design features are not controlled, NOTICE
reducer installation may be very difficult without ordering
special hollow-bore design features to accomodate. Do not use excessive force or try to hammer the gear unit
into place. The housing, shafting, bearings or gear wheels
may become damaged.
NOTICE
7. Securing the reducer onto the machine shaft
The supporting solid shaft or driven machine shaft must
be of adequate size and strength to withstand normal There are slight shaft oscillations during operation in any ro-
operating loads and peak loads without damage to itself tating shaft equipment or any shaft-mounted reducer assem-
or any of the system components. bly. Therefore it is important to secure the reducer in an axial
direction onto the machine shaft, to prevent the reducer
from shifting or walking out of place during operation.
5. Suggested solid-shaft mating shaft surface finish
Possible methods to secure the reducer axially to the machine
Controlling the mating shaft surface finish helps to assure shaft include:
proper fit and assembly while minimizing the possibility of
corrosion and fretting. NORD recommends that the mat- • Using commercial set collars, retaining rings, or snap rings.
ing solid shaft surface should be at least 125 micro-inches
• Using the optional “NORD Fixing Element Kit”
(3.2 microns) or smoother.
(see U10280).
6. Assembly to the machine shaft The NORD Fixing Element Kit includes all of the necessary
A. Clean and remove any dirt, grease, or rust-preventative parts to secure the shaft by using a tapped hole in the end of
coatings from both the reducer hollow shaft and the the mating male shaft.
machine shaft.
B. Make sure the edges of both the reducer hollow shaft and Loctite® is a registered trademark of Loctite Corporation
machine shaft are free from any nicks or burrs. If nicks U.S.A. and Henkel.
or burrs are present remove them using an abrasive
material such as an emery cloth.
C. Before installing the gear reducer onto the machine
shaft, apply an anti-seize compound or anti-corrosive
lubricant to the mating shafts as shown in Figure 1.
Assembly and subsequent dismantling will be aided by the
anti-seize agent.
Figure 1 – Application of anti-seize to the mating shafts
Apply to solid shaft Apply to bore land area

SHAFT FIXING KIT
1. Shaft fixing kit - basic design 3. Assembly

The NORD Fixing Kit provides a method for securing the A. If using a Type 1 assembly, secure the appropriate snap-
reducer in an axial direction, after the keyed-hollow shaft ring into the bore of the reducer. With Type 2 assembly, no
reducer is mounted onto the machine shaft. The fixing kit snap-ring is required.
prevents the reducer from shifting or walking out of place
B. Draw the hollow bore gear reducer onto the machine
during operation. NORD offers a variety of standard fixing
shaft as instructed in U10270. Remember to apply a
kits, based upon bore size, as shown on Page 2 of this manual.
suitable assembly paste or anti-seize compound to the
Figure 1 – Fixing kit components mating shafts.
C. Install the retaining washer over the end of the hollow
SNAP-RING SCREW bore.
RETAINING D. Secure the appropriate cap-screw into the machine shaft

WASHER and tighten the screw based upon the assembly type, as
noted below. Then install the protective plug over the
PLUG screw hole.
Type 1 - Screw tightening
LOCK
WASHER
Tighten until lightly snug and secure the screw with a thread-
locking compound to prevent the screw from backing out.
IMPORTANT NOTE NOTICE

For installation of the keyed-hollow bore reducer to the Over tightening the retaining screw may cause the snap
machine-shaft, see user manual U10270. ring to be pulled out of its seating groove, causing dam-
age to the hollow-bore or snap ring.
2. Assembly types
Type 2 - Screw tightening
There are two types of assembly methods commonly used for
securing the fixing kit. Follow the cap screw manufactures guidelines and tighten
Figure 2 – Fixing kit assembly methods the screw to the proper torque, based upon the bolt grade
and material. For reference tightening torque values, also see
manual U10060, Table 2.
Type 1
4. Disassembly
The machine-shaft is located against a fixed snap-ring
located inside the bore of the reducer. When using Type 2 assembly, it is possible to design a simple
disassembly tool to allow easier removal of the hollow-bore
reducer. The solid shaft is shouldered to rest against the hol-
low-bore of the reducer. The machine shaft is supported in
both of the hollow bore land areas, but the overall length is
reduced compared to Type 1 assembly.
Figure 3 – Disassembly Tool
Type 2 REDUCER KEY SNAP-RING

SHAFT
The machine shaft is shouldered and is pulled tight against
the hollow-shaft; the snap-ring is no longer required.
JACKING
BOLT
MACHINE THRUST JACKING

SHAFT WASHER NUT
NOTICE
IMPORTANT NOTE
The maximum edge break on the solid machine shaft must
not exceed the values shown on Page 2 of this manual.
For suggestions on how to construct a disassembly tool for
Otherwise the load-bearing capacity of the snap-ring will
a particular reducer and bore size, please consult NORD’s
be reduced and may result in failure.
application engineering department.

SHAFT FIXING KIT
5. Standard fixing kit size offerings

NORD offers a variety of standard fixing kit sizes as shown by the following tables.
Table 1 - Standard fixing kit size offerings
Shaft Bolt Allowable Thrust Max. Edge Shaft Bolt Allowable Thrust Max. Edge
Bore Size Groove  Ring  Break  Bore Size Groove  Ring  Break 
lb lb in N N mm
[in] [N] [N] [mm] [mm] [lb] [lb] [in]
730 520 0.02
0.500 10-32
[3255] [2300] [0.5]
16 M5 Not applicable 
1800 560 0.04 8370 5600 1.0
0.750 1/4-20 20 M6
[7905] [2500] [1] [1900] [1300] [0.04]
2900 1000 0.04 12400 7300 1.0
1.000 3/8-16 25 M10
[13020] [4600] [1] [2800] [1600] [0.04]
5100 1000 0.04 17515 7200 1.0
1.188 7/16-14 30 M10
[22630] [4700] [1] [3900] [1600] [0.04]
5100 1000 0.04 29140 8700 1.5
1.250 7/16-14 35 M12
[22630] [4700] [1] [6500] [1900] [0.06]
6500 1400 0.06 41850 10900 2.0
1.375 5/8-11 40 M16
[29140] [6400] [1.5] [9400] [2400] [0.08]
6900 1500 0.06 46810 10700 2.0
1.438 5/8-11 45 M16
[30690] [6500] [1.5] [10500] [2400] [0.08]
7800 1500 0.06 62775 19000 2.0
1.500 5/8-11 50 M16
[34875] [6700] [1.5] [14100] [4300] [0.08]
9900 1900 0.08 74865 29200 2.0
1.625 5/8-11 60 M20
[44020] [8400] [2] [16800] [6600] [0.08]
10500 1800 0.08 87110 30300 2.5
1.688 5/8-11 70 M20
[46810] [8200] [2] [19600] [6800] [0.10]
11100 1900 0.08 115630 56000 2.5
1.938 5/8-11 80 M20
[49600] [8400] [2] [26000] [12600] [0.10]
14100 2700 0.08 130200 56000 3.0
2.000 5/8-11 90 M24
[62775] [12100] [2] [29300] [12600] [0.12]
14100 2700 0.08 144305 55000 3.0
2.063 5/8-11 100 M24
[62775] [12100] [2] [32400] [12400] [0.12]
16800 2900 0.08 181350 71000 3.0
2.188 5/8-11 110 M24
[74865] [13000] [2] [40800] [16000] [0.12]
17400 2900 0.08 196850 70000 3.0
2.375 3/4-10 120 M24
[77190] [13000] [2] [44300] [15700] [0.12]
17400 2900 0.08 Upon request, additional hollow-bore sizes and fixing kit sizes may be offered.
2.438 3/4-10
[77190] [13000] [2]
19600 4700 0.10  This fixing kit is not supplied with a snap-ring.
2.750 3/4-10 A Type 2 machine shaft is required.
[87110] [21000] [2.5]
20900 4700 0.10
2.938 3/4-10  Thrust load-bearing capacity of the groove is based upon using
[93000] [21000] [2.5] a hollow-shaft material with a yield-strength of at least 45,000
27700 7000 0.12 psi (310 N/mm2).
3.188 3/4-10
[123225] [31200] [3]
3.438 3/4-10
29300 7000 0.12  Thrust load-bearing capacity of the snap-ring is based upon a
[130200] [31400] [3] typical snap-ring material with a yield-strength of at least
30900 7000 0.12 30,500 psi (210 N/mm2).
3.625 3/4-10
[137330] [31400] [3]
32400 6900 0.12  On the solid machine shaft, observe the maximum edge break
3.938 7/8-9 (radius or chamfer) shown. A larger edge break will result in
[144305] [30800] [3]
39000 16400 0.12 reduced load-bearing capacity of the snap-ring.
4.000 7/8-9
[173600] [73000] [3]
39000 16400 0.12
4.063 7/8-9
[173600] [73000] [3]
41500 16200 0.12 MAX SOLID
4.375 7/8-9
[184450] [72000] [3] SHAFT EDGE
41500 16200 0.12 BREAK 
4.438 7/8-9
[184450] [72000] [3]
44200 15700 0.12
4.750 7/8-9
[196850] [70000] [3]
48000 15500 0.12
4.938 7/8-9
[213900] [69000] [3]
Upon request, additional hollow-bore sizes & fixing kit sizes may be offered.

HOLLOW SHAFT WITH
SHRINK DISC
1. Shrink disc design concept 3. Safety

A shrink disc option is adaptable to many NORD hollow-bore
reducers. The shrink disc applies a high-capacity, zero back- NOTICE
lash, interference fit to the driven machine shaft. The dou-
ble tapered inner ring converts most all of the screw clamp- • The supporting solid shaft or driven machine shaft must
ing load into radial contact pressure, as the outer clamping be of adequate size and strength to withstand normal
discs are pulled together by proper tightening of the locking operating loads and peak loads without damage to
screws. As the inner ring is contracted, the clearance between itself or any of the system components.
the customer solid shaft and reducer shaft is absorbed. • The transmissible torque and the gripping capacity of
• In their relaxed state, shrink discs provide a generous the shrink disc may be reduced if shaft tolerances or
assembly clearance, thus eliminating the typical assembly clearances are larger than specified.
and disassembly challenges of using interference fits. • Excessive tightening torque can result in permanent
deformation of the inner ring and the reducer hollow
• Shrink discs also reduce solid machine shaft stresses by bore, making disassembly very difficult. Do not over
eliminating the need for shaft keys and keyways. tighten the shrink disc to compensate for excessive
• When properly applied, high shrink fits help eliminate clearance between the machine shaft and reducer bore.
shaft fretting corrosion and allow for easier shaft mounting • Observe the published ratings and safety factors
and dismounting. for both the reducer and shrink disc. Overload
conditions or excessively high torque can cause the
TAG: shrink disc connection to slip. In extreme cases localized
Shrink Disc Type Reducer Shaft
Customer Solid Shaft galling or welding of components may occur.
& Bolt Torque
4. Shrink disc shaft tolerances

Recommended solid shaft tolerances and reducer bore toler-
ances are shown in the table below.
Table 1: Shrink disc shaft tolerances

Do Not
Lubricate!! Above & To & Solid Shaft Reducer Bore Max. Assembly
Including Including Tolerance Tolerance Clearance
Inner Ring
ø [in] ø [in] ø [in] ø [in] [in]
(Ferrule) 0.7500 1.1250 +0.0000 / -0.0005 +0.0008 / -0.0000 0.0013
Locking Screws 1.1250 1.9375 +0.0000 / -0.0006 +0.0009 / -0.0000 0.0015
2.0000 3.1250 +0.0000 / -0.0007 +0.0011 / -0.0000 0.0018
Outer Clamping 3.1875 4.6875 +0.0000 / -0.0008 +0.0013 / -0.0000 0.0021
Discs 4.7500 7.0625 +0.0000 / -0.0009 +0.0015 / -0.0000 0.0024
7.1250 7.5000 +0.0000 / -0.0011 +0.0018 / -0.0000 0.0029
2. Solid (machine) shaft design guidelines Above To & Solid Shaft Reducer Bore Max. Assembly
Always use a solid shaft material of adequate strength and Including Tolerance Tolerance Clearance
ø [mm] ø [mm] ø [mm] ø [mm] [mm]
apply proper shaft fits in order to establish adequate clamp-
ing force during assembly and assure proper shaft release 18 30 +0.000 / -0.013 +0.021 / -0.000 0.034
30 50 +0.000 / -0.016 +0.025 / -0.000 0.041
during disassembly.
50 80 +0.000 / -0.019 +0.030 / -0.000 0.049
80 120 +0.000 / -0.022 +0.035 / -0.000 0.057
• Use solid shaft material with yield strength of at least 120 180 +0.000 / -0.025 +0.040 / -0.000 0.065
52,260 psi (360 N/mm2). 180 190 +0.000 / -0.029 +0.046 / -0.000 0.075
• The solid machine shaft should be machined according to Shaft/bore tolerances per ISO 282-6, Class h6/H7.
ISO 286-2, Class h6 fit tolerances, with a shaft finish of 125
Solid shaft finish should be 125 micro inches (3.2
micro inches (3.2 μm) or smoother, per Table 1.
micro meters) or smoother.
• The solid machine shaft must extend the full length of the
reducer hollow shaft.
IMPORTANT NOTE
Contact NORD when using a shrink disc in an application
where the shrink disc connection must simultaneously
transmit torque and thrust.

HOLLOW SHAFT WITH
SHRINK DISC
5. Installation
Table 2 - Shrink Disc Locking Screw Torque
WARNING Screw Size Wrench Size Tightening Torque
[mm] [Nm] [lb-in] [lb-ft]
Disconnect all power sources from the equipment before
M5 8 7 62 5.2
beginning this installation procedure. Gearmotors,
M6 10 12 106 8.9
variable frequency drives and gear reducers contain poten- M8 13 30 266 22
tially dangerous high voltage, rotating components and M10 17 59 522 44
surfaces that may become hot during operation. Handle M12 19 100 885 74
the components with care and avoid all sharp machined M16 24 250 2213 184
edges to prevent personal injury. M20 30 490 4337 361
M24 36 840 7435 620
NOTICE M30 46 1700 15050 1254
Do not tighten any of the shrink disc locking screws prior BOLT TIGHTENING PATTERN
to installing the reducer with shrink disc onto the machine
shaft. The inner ring of the shrink disc can become perma-
nently contracted or damaged at relatively low tightening
torque.
A. Inspect the gear unit received. Make sure the shrink disc
and extended hollow shaft projection is on the side of the
reducer where it was specified or ordered.
B. Loosen the shrink disc locking screws but do not take the
shrink disc completely apart. Remove and discard any
packaging material or transportation spacers that come K. Reset the torque wrench to the correct tightening torque
with the shrink disc. as indicated in Table 2. Make sure each locking screw has
C. Remove all burrs, rust, corrosion, lubricants, and foreign been properly tightened until the screws are no longer
matter from the surfaces of the solid shaft and hollow-bore. turning at the specified torque wrench setting. If necessary
D. Make sure the shrink disk is positioned onto the hollow repeat Steps G. & H.
shaft until the outer clamping ring is flush with the edge
of the hollow shaft. 6. Removal
E. To aid in assembly, it is acceptable to lightly grease the A. Loosen the shrink disc locking screws in a circular pattern
solid shaft, only in the area that will come in contact with by using ½ (180°) turns, until the shrink disc hub can be
the bronze-bushing side of the reducer hollow-shaft. The moved or until the shrink disc hub and reducer shaft will
reducer hollow shaft must be completely de-greased and return to their original fits.
free of lubricant, especially in the area of the shrink disc.
F. Position the gear reducer onto the solid machine shaft WARNING
and make certain the area under the shrink disc is
completely supported by the solid shaft. Do not completely remove the locking screws before the
G. After confirming the proper positioning of gear reducer outer clamping disks of the shrink disc are disengaged
and the shrink disc, hand tighten (3) or (4) equally spaced from the inner ring. A sudden release of the outer collars
locking screws to make sure the outer collars of the shrink will create high separating forces and could result in injury
disc are drawn together in a parallel fashion. Then hand- or even death.
tighten the remaining screws.
H. Refer to Table 2 for the specified tightening torques for B. Loosen the outer collars of the shrink disc from the tapered
the shrink disc locking screws. Using a properly set torque inner ring. This may require tapping the bolts with a soft
wrench using approximately ¼ (90°) turns; tighten the faced hammer or prying lightly between the outer collars.
locking screws, by working in a circular clockwise or C. Remove the gear reducer from the machine shaft.
counterclockwise sequence around the shrink disc.
I. Continue the tightening sequence (Step H.) even if some 7. Re-installation
locking screws initially require very low tightening torque
to achieve ¼ turns; do this for several passes until ¼ turns A. It may be possible to re-use the shrink disc. However the
can no longer be achieved. shrink disk should not be re-used if it becomes damaged
during removal, or excessively rusty or corroded. Shrink
J. Reset the torque wrench to approximately 3-5% over- discs must always be disassembled and thoroughly cleaned
torque and tighten the locking screws for 1 or 2 more before re-using.
passes. This procedure will compensate for relaxation of
the locking screws, since tightening of a given screw will B. After cleaning the shrink disc, lubricate between the
always tend to relax the adjacent screw. Without a slight taper of the outer clamping disks and the outside of the
overtorquing of the screws, an infinite number of passes inner ring using MOLYKOTE® G-Rapid Plus Paste
would be required to reach the desired tightening torque. (product of Dow Corning) or equivalent. In addition,
grease screw threads and head contact area with multi-
purpose grease.
NORD GRIPMAXX™
1. General information 2. GRIPMAXX™ assembly detail

The NORD GRIPMAXX™ keyless bushing system is adaptable
to most all NORD shaft-mounted reducers. The bushing sys- 5
tem offers interchangeable bushings to accommodate a large
range of driven machine-shaft sizes. 1
The unique design of the NORD GRIPMAXX™ bushing system

offers a number of distinct advantages as follows:
3*
• The NORD GRIPMAXX™ allows the machine builder to
utilize standard cold finished shaft stock, without the need 4 6
6
for additional shaft machining or shaft keys.
5
• It uses a NORD shrink disc to apply a high-capacity, zero Assembled GRIPMAXX™
backlash, interference fit to the driven machine shaft,
while eliminating the typical assembly and disassembly
challenges of using interference fits.
1
• The built in clearance between the customer shaft and
the bushing system helps to ensure easy installation and
removal of the gearbox. To help ensure easy removal, the 2
NORD GRIPMAXX™ bushings are prepared with a special
low-wear, corrosion-resistant hardened surface treatment,
that minimizes the formation of shaft corrosion and 4
fretting.
3
• The NORD GRIPMAXX™ is ideal for start-stop operation 5
and bi-directional loading because it does not depend on 6
3
keys or keyways that transmit torque, which can also can 3* 5 1
become loose or deform when subjected to these loading 1
conditions.
• Unlike the typical conical or tapered bushing kits, the Sideview of GRIPMAXX™
NORD GRIPMAXX™ design allows a tight fit against a
shouldered machine shaft.
[1] NORD Shrink Disc [4] Clamp Ring
• The torque bushing and support bushing are the same [2] Locking Screw [5] Gear Reducer Hollow Shaft
part and are fully interchangeable with one another. [3] Bushing (Torque Side) [6] Machine Shaft
[3*] Bushing (Support Side)
IMPORTANT NOTE
NORD recommends that the machine shaft have a yield
strength of at least 52,260psi (360N/mm2)
IMPORTANT NOTE
Observe the recommended machine shaft tolerances in
table 1, page 2.
NOTICE
The supporting solid shaft or driven machine shaft must
be of adequate size and strength to withstand normal
operating loads and peak loads without damage to
itself or any of the system components.

NORD GRIPMAXX™
3. Installation
F. Without taking the shrink disc [1] apart, loosen the
WARNING shrink disc locking screws [2]. Slide the shrink disk over
the reducer shaft [5] and slide the torque bushing [3]
Disconnect all power sources from the equipment onto the machine shaft, making sure it is seated
before beginning this installation procedure. Gear- completely.
motors, variable frequency drives and gear reducers
contain potentially dangerous high voltage, rotating G. Confirm the positioning of the shrink disc [1] and
components and surfaces that may become hot during torque bushing [3]. Do not tighten the shrink disc until
operation. Handle the components with care and avoid the machine shaft and torque bushing are in proper
all sharp or machined edges to prevent personal injury. position, or the reducer shaft will be damaged. Hand-
tighten 3 or 4 or locking screws [2] and make sure the
outer collars of the shrink disc are drawn together in
a parallel fashion and then hand-tighten the remaining
NOTICE screws.
Do not tighten any of the shrink disc locking screws prior
to installing the reducer with shrink disc onto the machine H. Refer to Table 2 for the specified tightening torques for
shaft. The inner ring of the shrink disc can become perma- the shrink disc locking screws. Using a properly set torque
nently contracted or damaged at a relatively low tighten- wrench using approximately ¼ (90°) turns; tighten the
ing torque. locking screws, by working in a circular clockwise or
counterclockwise sequence around the shrink disc.
Table 1 - Required Machined Shaft Tolerance I. Continue the tightening sequence (Step H.) even if some
Inch Machine Shaft Metric Machine Shaft locking screws initially require very low tightening torque
From To ISO 286-2 Over Including ISO 286-2
to achieve ¼ turns; do this for several passes until ¼ turns
Tolerance Tolerance can no longer be achieved.
h11(-) h11(-) J. Reset the torque wrench to approximately 3-5% over-
ø [in] ø [in] [in] ø [mm] ø [mm] [mm] torque and tighten the locking screws for 1 or 2 more
passes. This procedure will compensate for relaxation of
0.4375 0.6875 - 0.004 10 18 - 0.11
the locking screws, since tightening of a given screw will
0.7500 1.0625 - 0.005 18 30 - 0.13 always tend to relax the adjacent screw. Without a slight
1.1250 1.9375 - 0.006 30 50 - 0.16 overtorquing of the screws, an infinite number of passes
would be required to reach the desired tightening torque.
2.0000 3.1250 - 0.007 50 80 - 0.19
3.1875 4.6875 -0.008 80 120 -0.22 Table 2 - Shrink Disc Locking Screw Torque
4.7500 7.0625 -0.009 120 180 -0.25 Screw Size Wrench Size Tightening Torque
[mm] [Nm] [lb-in] [ft-lb]
M5 8 7 62 5.2
A. Carefully inspect the machine shaft [6] and remove all
M6 10 12 106 8.9
burrs, rust, corrosion, lubricants, and foreign matter
M8 13 30 266 22
from the shaft surface. Verify that the diameter is within
M10 17 59 522 44
the dimensional tolerances shown in Table 1.
M12 19 100 885 74
B. Inspect the gear unit received to confirm the correct M16 24 250 2213 184
position of the shrink disc [1]. Make sure the hollow M20 30 490 4337 361
shaft [5] projection is on the side of the reducer where
it was specified or ordered. BOLT TIGHTENING PATTERN
C. In addition to cleaning the machine shaft [6], remove all
dirt, grease or oils from the reducer hollow shaft [5],
bushings [3], clamp ring [4], and shrink disk [1]. Do not
apply lubricants, corrosion preventatives, anti-sieze
compounds or coatings to the mating surfaces of the
shaft, bushings, clamp collars or shrink disc.
D. Position the clamp ring [4] and support bushing [3*]
over the machine shaft [6], making sure the support
bushing is in its desired location. Then secure the sup-
port bushing [3*] with the clamp ring [4] and tighten
the clamp ring screw.
K. Reset the torque wrench to the correct tightening torque
E. Slide the gear reducer onto the machine shaft [6] until as indicated in Table 2. Make sure each locking screw has
the gear reducer stops against the secured support been properly tightened until the screws are no longer
bushing [3*]. turning at the specified torque wrench setting. If necessary
repeat Steps G. & H.

NORD GRIPMAXX™
5. Bushing kit removal 6. Re-installation
A. Loosen the shrink disc locking screws [2] in circular A. It may be possible to re-use the bushings
pattern by using ½ (180°) turns, until the shrink and shrink disc that are part of the NORD bushing
disc hub can be moved or until the shrink disc hub and system. However these components should not be
reducer shaft will return to their original fits. re-used if they are damaged during removal, or excessively
rusty or corroded.
WARNING B. Never re-use any of the bushing kit components without
prior cleaning. Shrink discs must always be disassembled
Do not completely remove the locking screws before the and thoroughly cleaned before re-using.
outer clamping disks of the shrink disc are disengaged
from the inner ring. A sudden release of the outer collars C. After cleaning the shrink disc, lubricate between the taper
will create high separating forces and may result in injury of the outer clamping disks and the outside of the inner
or even death. ring using MOLYKOTE® G-Rapid Plus Paste (product of Dow
Corning) or equivalent. In addition, grease screw threads
B. Loosen the outer collars of the shrink disc from the and head contact area with multipurpose grease.
tapered inner ring. This may require tapping the bolts
with a soft faced hammer or prying lightly between the TAG:
Shrink Disc Type Reducer Shaft
outer collars.
& Bolt Torque Customer Solid Shaft
C. Remove the gear reducer from the machine shaft.
Do Not
Lubricate!!
Inner Ring
(Ferrule)
Locking Screws
Outer Clamping
Discs

REDUCER MOUNTING
FOOTED & FLANGE MOUNT GEAR UNITS
1. Foot-mounted reducers Table 1 : Flange Centering Shoulder Tolerance

When installing the foot-mounted gear unit, observe the Including
flatness specifications and bolt tightening torque guidelines ø (in) ø (in) (in) Fit Class
provided in U10060 and make sure the mating mounting
1.969 3.150 +0.0005 / -0.0003 j6
surface and reducer feet are clean and free of debris. Use
of shims under the feet of the gear unit may be required in 3.150 4.724 +0.0005 / -0.0004 j6
order to align the output shaft to the driven equipment. 4.724 7.087 +0.0006 / -0.0004 j6
Make sure that all feet are supported so that the housing 7.087 9.055 +0.0006 / -0.0005 j6
will not distort when it is bolted down. Improper shimming 9.055 9.843 +0.0000 / -0.0011 h6
will cause mis-alignment and may reduce the life of the gear 9.843 12.402 +0.0000 / -0.0013 h6
unit or cause component failure. Dowel pins may be field- 12.402 15.748 +0.0000 / -0.0014 h6
installed to help prevent misalignment and ensure proper
15.748 19.685 +0.0000 / -0.0016 h6
realignment if removed for service.
19.685 21.654 +0.0000 / -0.0017 h6

Including
ø (mm) ø (mm) (mm) Fit Class
50 80 +0.012 / -0.007 j6
80 120 +0.013 / -0.009 j6
120 180 +0.014 / -0.011 j6
180 230 +0.016 / -0.013 j6
230 250 +0.000 / -0.029 h6
250 315 +0.000 / -0.032 h6
315 400 +0.000 / -0.036 h6
IMPORTANT NOTE 400 500 +0.000 / -0.040 h6
500 550 +0.000 / -0.044 h6
Gear units may be subjected to radial loads or side pull,
caused by external chain drives or belt drives. In these When installing the flange mounted gear unit, observe the
instances it is recommended that the mounting base be flatness specifications and bolt tightening torque guidelines
designed with a slide-plate adjustment to accommodate provided in U10060. Make sure the mating mounting surface
extra slack in the chain or the belt after the feet are and reducer flange are clean and free of debris. Use a straight
loosened. When using an external chain or belt drive, edge or parallel bar to check for high spots on the mating
make sure the reducer is sized so that the shaft and mounting surface and remove any raised material around the
bearings have adequate capacity. mounting holes.
2. Flange-mounted reducers (with B5 flange) Set the gear unit into place and tighten the bolts until they
are snug. Before final bolt-tightening check for any mate-
When using the B5 flange to mount the gear unit, the bulk rial gaps between the mating surfaces and if shimming is re-
head plate must be engineered to minimize buckling distor- quired, use “U” shaped shims at least 2 times the width of the
tions and support the cantilevered weight of the gear re- bolt. Avoid over shimming a very irregular surface as this will
ducer or gearmotor. When the mating hole is designed with make it very difficult to achieve proper alignment.
the proper fit, the flange pilot tenon provides a means of
accurately positioning the reducer while the hold-down bolts
are properly secured; once the reducer is secured, the tenon IMPORTANT NOTE
helps prevent movement of the reducer and it helps locate
the center of the reducer output shaft. The flange center- For heavy shock applications, it is advisable to field-in-
ing shoulder tolerance for standard units is listed in table 1. stall dowel pins through the mounting flange connec-
For units with NSD Tuph please see table 2 on the following tion (in addition to the mounting bolts). This will help
page. control flange movement or flange rotation and relieve
the mounting bolts from this additional stress.

REDUCER MOUNTING
FOOTED & FLANGE MOUNT GEAR UNITS
3. Flange-mounted reducers (with B14 flange) 4. Foot & flange reducer housings
When using the B14 flange to mount the gear unit, the bulk Some gear reducer housings are available with a foot and an
head plate must be engineered to minimize buckling distor- output flange. Units with a foot and a B5 Flange are desig-
tions and support the cantilevered weight of the gear reducer nated with the suffix XF after the primary model number and
or gearmotor. When properly installed, the output flange of units with a B14 face-flange are designated with the suffix
the reducer housing is designed to enable the permissible XZ after the primary model number. When a gear unit is
torques and radial forces to be reliably transmitted by the provided with both a foot and a flange, the foot is consider
bolt connections. The flange centering shoulder tolerance for the primary mounting surface. The flange is generally consid-
standard units is listed in table 1 on the previous page. For ered to be the secondary mounting option and it is intended
units with NSD Tuph please see table 2 below. that this surface be used for auxiliary add on elements that
place minimal load stress on the reducer housing.
NOTICE
To prevent overstress on the main gear unit housing, never
tighten the reducer mounting feet and the mounting
flange against one-another. Auxiliary add-on elements
that are mounted to the reducer flange, must not transmit
excessive force, torque or vibration to the main gear
housing.
IMPORTANT NOTE
When using the B14 flange-face for mounting, if dowel
pin holes are provided in addition to the threaded holes,
then it is advisable to also use the proper dowel pins, to
help control flange movement or flange rotation and
relieve the mounting bolts from this additional stress
This is especially important for heavy shock applications.
Table 2 : Flange Centering Shoulder Tolerance on NSD Tuph Units

Above To & Tolerance
Including
1.969 3.150 +0.0020 / +0.0013
3.150 4.724 +0.0021 / +0.0012
4.724 7.087 +0.0021 / +0.0011
7.087 9.055 +0.0022 / +0.0011
Above To & Tolerance

Including
ø (mm) ø (mm) (mm)
50 80 +0.052 / +0.033
80 120 +0.053 / +0.031
120 180 +0.054 / +0.029
180 230 +0.056 / +0.027

CLINCHER™ SHAFT-MOUNT
WITH RUBBER BUFFERS
1. Purpose of the built-in torque arm lug 3. Machine support

The preferred method of installing a shaft-mounted Clinch-
er™ reducer is to support the weight of the gear unit or WARNING
gearmotor assembly from the driven solid machine shaft.
In order to restrain the gearbox, react the torque, and keep It is the responsibility of the machine builder to design a
the gear unit from spinning around the shaft, the Clincher™ support bracket of adequate strength and rigidity, and
gear units have a built-in torque arm lug or tab cast into the supply an appropriate tightening bolt assembly. Failure
reducer housing. This torque tab is intended to be used in to do so may result in injury caused from a damaged or
conjunction with the NORD Rubber Buffers. broken torque-reaction assembly.
Figure 1: Built-in torque lug A single customer-supplied machine support bracket, of ad-
equate strength and rigidity, can provide adequate restraint
for both directions. This is because when the rubber buffer
system is used, the applied load forces are always parallel to
the retaining bolt and there are no twisting forces induced
onto the bolt in either the clockwise or counter-clockwise
direction. In some cases the customer may desire to supply
a rigid support on either side of the rubber buffers. In these
instances, longer assembly hardware is required.
2. Rubber buffers 4. Installation of the rubber buffers
When specified, NORD provides two rubber buffers that are A. Install the Clincher™ hollow bore reducer onto the
installed on either side of the gear unit’s integral torque lug. machine shaft. Line up the hole in the reducer’s torque-arm
When properly used in tandem, on either side of the torque- lug with the hole in the machine’s support bracket and
arm lug, the rubber buffers help isolate and absorb the load temporarily hold the reducer in place.
forces present in the system and increase the reducer’s service B. Properly secure the gear unit assembly to the driven shaft
life by reducing cumulative torsional shock loads. in an axial direction. If using the NORD Shaft Fixing Kit,
• The primary load force acts in the direction of driven shaft follow the instructions in User Manual U10280.
rotation, reacts the torque of the reducer, keeping the C. Install the rubber buffers on either side of the gear unit’s
gearbox from spinning on the shaft. torque-arm lug. Apply a thread locking compound to the
• Additional forces present themselves in the direction end of the fixing bolt. Then place the fixing bolt through
opposite of the shaft rotation, due to the typical slight the rubber buffers, torque-arm lug and rigid machine
out-of-round condition present in the machine shaft. This support bracket and loosely secure the nut onto the end
condition is the reason most shaft mounted-reducers have of the bolt.
a slight shaft-wobble, which is normal. D. Tighten the fixing bolt and nut until lightly snug until all
For further dampening it is possible to combine several of the free play is eliminated from the rubber buffer
rubber buffers in a row, on either side of the torque lug. assembly. Then snug the fixing bolt assembly by tightening
an additional 1/4 to 1/2 turn.
IMPORTANT NOTE
NOTICE
Please reference Table 1 on page 2 of this manual for
dimensional information. To help prevent damage to the rubber buffers, avoid
over-tightening.
NOTICE
IMPORTANT NOTE
Always mount at least one rubber buffer on either side
of the reducer’s torque-arm lug. When using rubber • A min. of (2) rubber buffers are required for each unit.
buffers in tandem, make sure equal numbers are used • For larger size CLINCHER’S™, NORD offers the heavy-duty
on both sides of the torque tab. Failure to do so will not rubber buffer (Option VG).
properly cushion the reducer and can result in excessive
binding, bearing stress, and damage to the reducer. • A metric fixing bolt is preferred for rubber buffer
assembly. NORD recommends a minimum ISO Grade
8.8 fixing bolt.

CLINCHER™ SHAFT-MOUNT
WITH RUBBER BUFFERS
Table 1: Rubber buffer assembly/typical dimensions

Standard Rubber Buffer Assembly Option (G) Heavy Duty Rubber Buffer Assembly Option (VG)
CM CM
CD
CM CD CM
dxI
FD dxI FD
CB
CB
CA
CA
FD = Force working on the A metric fixing bolt is preferred
rubber buffer for rubber buffer assembly. NORD
dxl = diameter x length recommends minimum ISO Grade
c = thickness 8.8 fixing bolt as a minimum.
SFD = Distance buffers
compress at force (FD)
Type Rubber CB CA CD CM Bolt FD SFD

Buffer P/N inch inch inch inch dxl lb inch
[mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [metric] [kN] [mm]
0.43 1.18 0.59 0.39 217 0.06
SK0182NB G 29603000 M10 x 70
[11] [30] [15] [10] [0.967] [1.5]
0.43 1.18 0.59 0.47 234 0.07
SK0282NB G 29603000 M10 x 70
[11] [30] [15] [12] [1.04] [1.7]
0.43 1.18 0.59 0.55 504 0.14
SK1282 G 29603000 M10 x 80
[11] [30] [15] [14] [2.24] [3.6]
0.43 1.18 0.59 0.55 402 0.11
SK1382NB G 29603000 M10 x 80
[11] [30] [15] [14] [1.79] [2.8]
SK2282 G 0.49 1.57 0.59 0.63 600 0.07
29604000 M12 x 90
SK2382 G [12.5] [40] [15] [16] [2.67] [1.8]
SK3282 G 0.49 1.57 0.59 0.71 935 0.11
29604000 M12 x 90
SK3382 G [12.5] [40] [15] [18] [4.16] [2.9]
SK4282 G 0.83 2.36 1.18 0.87 1661 0.29
29606000 M20 x 150
SK4382 G [21] [60] [30] [22] [7.39] [7.3]
SK5282 G 0.83 2.36 1.18 1.1 2133 0.37
29606000 M20 x 150
SK5382 G [21] [60] [30] [28] [9.49] [9.4]
SK6282 G 0.98 3.15 1.57 1.38 3779 0.36
29608000 M24 x 190
SK6382 G [25] [80] [40] [35] [16.81] [9.2]
SK7282 G 0.98 3.15 1.57 1.57 4676 0.45
29608000 M24 x 200
SK7382 G [25] [80] [40] [40] [20.8] [11.4]
SK8282 G 1.22 3.94 1.97 1.97 6382 0.64
29610000 M30 x 260
SK8382 G [31] [100] [50] [50] [28.39] [16.3]
SK9282 G 1.22 3.94 1.97 2.17 9777 0.98
29610000 M30 x 260
SK9382 G [31] [100] [50] [55] [43.49] [24.9]
Type Rubber CB CA CD CM Bolt FD SFD

Buffer P/N inch inch inch inch dxl lb inch
[mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [metric] [kN] [mm]
SK7282 VG 0.98 3.35 2.36 1.57 4676 0.48
29620850 M24 x 240
SK7382 VG [25] [85] [60] [40] [20.8] [12.2]
SK8282 VG 1.22 4.33 3.54 1.97 6382 0.76
29621100 M30 x 340
SK8382 VG [31] [110] [90] [50] [28.39] [19.3]
SK9282 VG 1.22 5.51 4.33 2.17 9777 0.83
29621400 M30 x 380
SK9382 VG [31] [140] [110] [55] [43.49] [21.2]
SK10282 VG 1.22 5.51 4.33 3.15 12670 1.08
SK10382 VG 29621800 M30 x 430
SK10382.1 VG [31] [140] [110] [80] [56.36] [27.4]
SK11282 VG 1.93 7.09 5.91 3.54 18185 1.52
SK11382 VG 29621800 M48 x 550
SK11382.1 VG [49] [180] [150] [90] [80.89] [38.5]
1.93 7.09 5.91 3.54 23720 1.98
SK12382 VG 29621800 M48 x 550
[49] [180] [150] [90] [105.51] [50.2]

RIGHT-ANGLE SHAFT-MOUNT
WITH TORQUE ARM (D)
1. Torque arm (D) 3. Machine support

The preferred method of installing a shaft-mounted reducer The user must supply a suitably strong and rigid mating ma-
is to support the weight of the gear unit or gearmotor as- chine support that provides load bearing capacity on both
sembly from the driven solid machine shaft. A torque arm sides of the torque-arm bracket.
is required in order to restrain the gearbox, react the load
torque, and keep the gear unit from spinning around the WARNING
shaft.
It is the responsibility of the machine builder to design a
The Torque-Arm (D) bracket is mounted to either side of the support bracket of adequate strength and rigidity, and
right-angle gear unit using mounting screws that thread into supply an appropriate tightening bolt assembly. Failure
the B14 flange-face of the reducer. The anchor hole of the to do so may result in injury caused from a damaged or
torque-arm bracket is supplied with a resilient rubber bushing. broken torque-reaction assembly.
4. Installation of a right-angle reducer with torque arm

A. Make sure the Torque-Arm (D) is mounted in the correct
position on the reducer. Assembled screw heads should
always sit flush with the torque arm.
• To reposition the torque-arm, remove the mounting
screws, relocate the torque-arm, and reassemble the
mounting screws as noted above.
• If the torque-arm was shipped loose, position the
torque-arm in the correct location on the gear unit, and
secure the torque-arm as noted above.
IMPORTANT NOTE
The side of the reducer that the torque arm is mounted IMPORTANT NOTES
on, and the angular position can be specified at time
of order. Consult the appropriate NORD catalog for • Torque arm mounting screws should be secured with
specific Torque Arm (D) mounting options and ordering a thread locking product (ex. Loctite® 242 or Loxeal®
guidelines. 54-03) and tightened per the table on page 2.
• Assembled screw heads should always sit flush with
2. Purpose of the built-in resilient rubber bushing the torque arm.
The resilient rubber bushing installed into the anchor hole • The support bracket should provide support on both
end of the torque-arm helps isolate and absorb all the load sides of the torque arm or be in the form of a U-shape.
forces present in the system and increase the reducer’s service • Do not force the torque-arm. The torque arm must
life by reducing cumulative torsional shock loads. remain at a right angle to the gear unit.
• The primary load force acts in the direction of driven shaft • If mounting holes do not align properly the machine
rotation, reacts the load torque of the reducer, and support may need to be moved.
prevents the gearbox from spinning on the shaft.
B. Install the right-angle hollow bore reducer onto the
• Additional forces present themselves in the direction machine shaft. Then line up the hole in the reducer’s
opposite of the shaft rotation, due to the typical slight torque-arm with the hole in the machine’s support
out-of-round condition present in the machine shaft. This bracket, and temporarily hold the reducer in place.
condition is the reason most shaft mounted-reducers have C. Apply a thread locking compound such as Loctite® 242 or
a slight shaft-wobble, which is normal. Loxeal® 54-03 to the end of the anchor bolt that is used to
secure the torque arm in place.
NOTICE D. Place the anchor bolt through the support bracket and
the reducer torque-arm. Attach the mating nut to the
Always make sure that the Torque Arm (D) has the
bolt and tighten the assembly until snug. At least one
resilient rubber bushing installed into the anchor hole
end of the torque arm. Failure to do so will not properly bolt diameter should protrude from the nut after assembly.
cushion the reducer and can result in excessive binding,
bearing stress, and damage to the reducer. NOTICE
Do not force misalignment of the torque-arm. The torque
arm must remain at a right angle to the gear unit or exces-
sive load may be placed on the reducer shaft and bearings.
E. Properly secure the gear unit assembly to the driven shaft

in an axial direction.
RIGHT-ANGLE SHAFT-MOUNT
WITH TORQUE ARM (D)
Table 1 - Torque Arm (D) with rubber buffer
• For all 90.1 Series Helical-Bevel gear units, NORD also offers a
bottom mount Torque Arm (K). See User Manual U10620.
• For the large 90.1 Series Helical-Bevel gear units sizes: SK9082.1,
SK9086.1, SK9092.1, and SK9096.1, please use the Torque Arm (K).
• A metric fixing bolt is preferred for fastening the Torque-Arm(D)

* Rubber Buffer to the machine support bracket.
Gear Unit Torque Arm Torque Arm Mounting Screw

Series
Type Rubber Anchor Anchor Qty Size Grade Torque Torque Torque
Buffer P/N Hole Size Bolt (Nm) (lb-ft) (lb-in)
Size
92.1/93.1 Series SK92072.1AD/SK93072.1AD 29602505 10.5 mm [0.41 in] M10 4 M8 x 25 8.8 27 20 35
Helical-Bevel SK92172.1AD/SK93172.1AD 29602505 10.5 mm [0.41 in] M10 4 M8 x 25 8.8 27 20 35
SK92372.1AD/SK93372.1AD 29602505 10.5 mm [0.41 in] M10 4 M10 x 30 8.8 53 39 35
92 Series SK92172AZD 29602505 10.5 mm [0.41 in] M10 8 M6 x 16 8.8 11 8 71
Helical-Bevel SK92372AZD 29602505 10.5 mm [0.41 in] M10 8 M8 x 25 8.8 27 20 71
SK92672AZD 29602505 10.5 mm [0.41 in] M10 8 M8 x 25 8.8 27 20 71
SK92772AZD 29603605 16.5 mm [0.65 in] M16 8 M8 x 25 8.8 27 20 71
90.1 Series SK9012.1AZD/SK9013.1AZD 29602505 10.5 mm [0.41 in] M10 7 M8 x 20 8.8 27 20 62
Helical-Bevel SK9016.1AZD/SK9017.1AZD 29602505 10.5 mm [0.41 in] M10 7 M8 x 20 8.8 27 20 62
SK9022.1AZD/SK9023.1AZD 29603605 16.5 mm [0.65 in] M16 7 M8 x 25 8.8 27 20 62
SK9032.1AZD/SK9033.1AZD 29603605 16.5 mm [0.65 in] M16 7 M10 x 30 8.8 53 39 62
SK9042.1AZD/SK9043.1AZD 29605205 25 mm [0.98 in] M24 7 M12 x 35 8.8 92 68 62
SK9052.1AZD/SK9053.1AZD 29605205 25 mm [0.98 in] M24 7 M12 x 35 8.8 92 68 62
SK9072.1AZD 29605205 25 mm [0.98 in] M24 7 M16 x 45 8.8 230 170 62
Helical-Worm SK02040AZD 29602505 10.5 mm [0.41 in] M10 4 M6 x 20 8.8 11 8 35
SK02050AZD/SK13050AZD 29602505 10.5 mm [0.41 in] M10 4 M8 x 20 8.8 27 20 35
MINICASE® SMI SK1SMI31AZD 29602505 10.5 mm [0.41 in] M10 4 M6 x 16 8.8 11 8 35
Series Worm SK1SMI40AZD/SK2SMI40AZD 29602505 10.5 mm [0.41 in] M10 4 M8 x 22 8.8 27 20 35
SK1SMI50AZD/SK2SMI50AZD 29602505 10.5 mm [0.41 in] M10 4 M8 x 22 8.8 27 20 35
SK1SMI75AZD 29602505 10.5 mm [0.41 in] M10 4 M12 x 30 8.8 92 68 35
MINICASE® SM SK1SM31AZD 29602505 10.5 mm [0.41 in] M10 4 M6 x 20 8.8 11 8 35
Series Worm SK1SM40AZD/SK2SM40AZD 29602505 10.5 mm [0.41 in] M10 4 M8 x 20 8.8 27 20 35
SK1SM50AZD/SK2SM50AZD 29602505 10.5 mm [0.41 in] M10 4 M8 x 20 8.8 27 20 35
SK1SM63AZD/SK2SM63AZD 29602505 10.5 mm [0.41 in] M10 4 M8 x 20 8.8 27 20 35
"FLECBLOC™ SK1SI31D 29602505 10.5 mm [0.41 in] M10 4 M6 x 16 8.8 11 8 35
SI Series SK1SI40D 29602505 10.5 mm [0.41 in] M10 4 M8 x 22 8.8 27 20 35
Worm"
SK1SI50D 29602505 10.5 mm [0.41 in] M10 4 M8 x 22 8.8 27 20 35
SK1SI63D 29602505 10.5 mm [0.41 in] M10 4 M10 x 25 8.8 53 39 35
SK1SMI75D 29602505 10.5 mm [0.41 in] M10 4 M12 x 30 8.8 92 68 35

90.1 HELICAL-BEVEL SHAFT-MOUNT
WITH BOTTOM MOUNT TORQUE ARM (K)
1. Torque arm (K) 3. Machine support

The preferred method of installing a shaft-mounted reducer The user must supply a suitably strong and rigid mating ma-
is to support the weight of the gear unit or gearmotor as- chine support that provides load bearing capacity on both
sembly from the driven solid machine shaft. A torque arm is sides of the machine support bracket.
required in order to restrain the gearbox, react to the load
torque, and keep the gear unit from spinning around the
shaft.
WARNING
Table 1 (Page 2) provides a list of Torque-Arm (K) part num- It is the responsibility of the machine builder to design a
bers available for the 90.1 Series Helical-Bevel gear units. The support bracket of adequate strength and rigidity, and
Torque Arm (K) is secured to the base of the reducer. On most supply an appropriate tightening bolt assembly. Failure
sizes there is an integral resilient rubber bushing located at to do so may result in injury caused from a damaged or
the fastening hole-end of the torque arm. On the larger sizes, broken torque-reaction assembly.
rubber buffers are used in conjunction with the torque arm
and when properly used they are applied in tandem, on ei- 4. Installation of the right-angle reducer
ther side of the torque arm lug. with torque arm (K)
A. Make sure the Torque-Arm (K) is mounted so that the
machine fastening hole is on the correct side of the reducer.
• The torque-arm can be repositioned on the as-received
unit by removing the fixing screws, re-position the
torque-arm in the correct location, and re-securing the
fixing screws to the proper tightening torque, as
indicated in Table 2 (Page 2).
• If the torque-arm was shipped loose, position the torque-
arm in the correct location on the gear unit, and secure
the torque-arm with the proper fixing screws & tighten-
ing torque, as indicated in Table 2 (Page 2).
B. Install the right-angle hollow bore reducer onto the
IMPORTANT NOTE machine shaft. Line up the hole in the reducer’s torque-
arm with the hole in the machine’s support bracket ,and
When ordering the Torque Arm (K) one can specify temporarily hold the reducer in place
which side of the reducer to mount the fastening hole
that bolts to the machine support bracket. Consult the C. Properly secure the gear unit assembly to the driven shaft
appropriate NORD catalog for specific Torque Arm (K) in an axial direction.
mounting options and ordering guidelines. D. Apply thread locking compound to the end of the fixing
bolt, then place the fastening bolt through the rigid
2. Purpose of the rubber bushing or rubber buffers machine support bracket and reducer torque-arm and
loosely secure the nut onto the end of the bolt.
Regardless if the Torque Arm (K) is supplied with the inte-
gral rubber bushing or whether separate rubber buffers are E. If the torque arm has an integral rubber bushing
required, the bushing/buffers help isolate and absorb all the follow step F and skip steps G-H. If the torque arm uses
load forces present in the system and increase the reducer’s rubber buffers skip forward to steps G-H.
service life by reducing cumulative torsional shock loads. F. Tighten the fixing bolt to the proper tightening torque as
indicated in Table 2 (Page 2).
• The primary load force acts in the direction of driven shaft
rotation, reacts the load torque of the reducer, and G. Install the rubber buffers on either side of the gear unit’s
prevents the gearbox from spinning on the shaft. torque-arm lug and place the fixing bolt through the
rubber buffers and torque-arm lug and into the rigid
• Additional forces present themselves in the direction machine support bracket.
opposite of the shaft rotation, due to the typical slight
H. Tighten the fixing bolt and nut lightly snug, until all the
out-of-round condition present in the machine shaft. This
free-play is eliminated from the rubber buffer assembly.
condition is the reason most shaft mounted-reducers have
Then snug the fixing bolt assembly by tightening an
a slight shaft-wobble, which is normal.
additional ¼ to ½ turn.
NOTICE NOTICE
Always make sure that the Torque Arm (K) is used in To prevent damage to the rubber buffers, avoid over-
conjunction with the required rubber bushing/s. Failure tightening.
to do so will not properly cushion the reducer and can
result in excessive binding, bearing stress, and damage
to the reducer.

90.1 HELICAL-BEVEL SHAFT-MOUNT
WITH BOTTOM MOUNT TORQUE ARM (K)
Torque Arm (K) with integrated bushing Torque Arm (K) with rubber buffer
Mounting Screws
FD
dxl
Fastening Hole
Available for Sizes SK9012.1 - SK9072.1 Available for Sizes SK9082.1 - SK90906.1
• For most all 90.1 series Helical-Bevel gear units, an optional • A metric fixing bolt is preferred for fastening the torque arm
tear-drop shaped side -mounted torque arm (D) is available. (K) to the machine support bracket.
See user manual U10600.
Type Torque Reducer Hardware Mounting Lock Rubber Fastening Fastening Bolt FD SFD
Arm Hex Head Cap Screws Screw Washer Buffer Hole Bolt Size dxl lb inch
P/N + Lock Washer P/N P/N P/N In [mm] [metric] [N] [mm]
SK9012.1...K M10 X 30 + A10

68190600 22010300 28560106 N/A 0.41 [10.5] M10 N/A N/A N/A
SK9013.1...K (Qty 3 Ea.)
SK9016.1...K M10 X 30 + A10

68190600 22010300 28560106 N/A 0.41 [10.5] M10 N/A N/A N/A
SK9017.1...K (Qty 3 Ea.)
SK9022.1...K M12 X 35 + A12

68290610 22012350 28560126 N/A 0.65 [16.5] M16 N/A N/A N/A
SK9023.1...K (Qty 3 Ea.)
SK9032.1...K M12 X 35 + A12

68390610 22012350 28560126 N/A 0.65 [16.5] M16 N/A N/A N/A
SK9033.1...K (Qty 3 Ea.)
SK9042.1...K M16 X 40 + A16

68490610 22016400 28560166 N/A 0.98 [25] M24 N/A N/A N/A
SK9043.1...K (Qty 3 Ea.)
SK9052.1...K M16 X 40 + A16

68590620 22016450 28560166 N/A 0.98 [25] M24 N/A N/A N/A
SK9053.1...K (Qty 3 Ea.)
M24 X 60 + A24
SK9072.1...K 68690620 22024060 28560246 N/A 0.98 [25] M24 N/A N/A N/A
(Qty 4 Ea.)
SK9082.1...K M24 x 65 + A24 5300 0.53

68819010 22024650 22024650 29610000 1.22 [31] M30 M30 x 260
SK9082.1...SHK (Qty 4 Ea.) [23.64] [13.5]
SK9086.1...K M24 x 65 + A24 6900 0.69
68819010 22024650 22024650 29610000 1.22 [31] M30 M30 x 260
SK9086.1...SHK (Qty 4 Ea.) [30.77] [17.6]
M36 x 90 + A36 10300 1.03
SK9092.1...SHK 68919010 22036900 28560366 29610000 1.22 [31] M30 M30 x 260
(Qty 4 Ea.) [45.71] [26.2]
M42 x 120 + A42 12,500 1.06
SK9096.1...SHK 69019000 22042120 28560426 29621800 1.93 [49] M48 M48 x 550
(Qty 4 Ea.) [55.56] [27.0]

HELICAL & BEVEL REDUCER LUBRICATION
1. Importance of proper lubrication 3. Lubrication replacement

Proper gearbox lubrication is essential in order to reduce If the gear unit is filled with mineral oil, the lubricant should
friction, heat, and component wear. Lubricants reduce heat be replaced at least after every 10,000 operating hours or
and wear by inserting a protective “fluid boundary” between after every two years. If the gear unit is filled with synthetic
mating parts and preventing direct metal to metal contact. oil, the lubricant should be replaced at least after every
Lubricants also help prevent corrosion and oxidation, mini- 20,000 operating hours or after every four years. Often gear
mize foam, improve heat transfer, optimize reducer efficiency, reducers are exposed to extreme ambient conditions, hostile
absorb shock loads and reduce noise. environments, wet conditions, or dirty and dusty operating
areas. Especially in these situations, it is important to estab-
Most NORD reducers are shipped from the factory with a lish a condition-based oil service interval.
pre-determined oil fiIl level in accordance to the specified
reducer size and mounting position. 4. Oil viscosity
Viscosity, or the oil’s resistance to shear under load, is often
2. Standard oil type considered the single most important property of any gear oil.
The following tables indicate the standard oil fill type used. • Often one will consider making a viscosity correction to
Please see user manual U11000 for more specific information the oil to improve the performance when operating the
and for optional helical and bevel gear lubricants: gear unit at low temperature or high temperature.
• In cases of extreme load conditions, gear pairs and antifric-
Serviceable Gear Units tion bearings may be more susceptible to sliding or scuffing
Helical In-line wear. In these operating conditions, it may also be ben-
Clincher Parallel-Shaft eficial to consider an increased lubrication viscosity and/or
a lubrication with improved antiwear additive packages.
Right-Angle Bevel Standard Oil Fill:
NORDBLOC® Series In-line ISO VG 220, Mineral Oil
NORDBLOC®.1 Series In-line
IMPORTANT NOTE
Standard Series In-line The user should consult with their primary lubrication
supplier before considering changes in oil type or viscosity.
IMPORTANT NOTE 5. Maximum oil sump temperature limit
For shipping purposes, the following large Clincher™ gear To prevent reducer overheating, the reducer’s maximum oil
units are supplied without oil: sump temperature limit must not be exceeded for prolonged
• Clincher™ Sizes SK11282, SK11382, SK11382.1 and periods of operation (up to 3 hours continuous operation
SK12382 depending upon reducer size).
Maintenance-free / Lubricated For Life Gear Units Oil Type Maximum Oil Temperature Limit
Clincher™ sizes SK0182NB, NORD AGMA 9005-D94
SK0282NB & SK1382NB Standard Oil Fill: Mineral 80-85°C (176-185°F) 95°C (203°F)
NORDBLOC® Sizes SK172, ISO VG220 SHC/PAO Synthetic 105°C (220°F) 107°C (225°F)
SK272, SK371F, SK372, SK373, Synthetic Oil
SK320 IMPORTANT NOTE
IMPORTANT NOTE Use caution when specifying gear reducers for high tem-
perature service. If there is concern about exceeding the
Maintenance-free units are supplied as sealed units with no allowable safe operating temperatures, please consult
vent-plug. Consult NORD prior to ordering if interested in NORD to discuss alternatives.
ordering any of the above sizes as serviceable gear units.
IMPORTANT NOTE
Consult the sticker adjacent to the fill plug to determine
the type of lubricant installed at the factory. Some units
have special lubricants designed to operate in certain
environments or intended to extend the service life or
service temperature range of the lubricant. If in doubt
about which lubricant is needed for a certain applica-
tion, please contact NORD Gear.

HELICAL & BEVEL REDUCER LUBRICATION
6. The importance of routine oil analysis 9. Drain and fill-level plugs

Routine oil analysis, sound lubrication practices, and good All reducer drain plugs are metric socket head cap screws. For
tracking of oil performance trends will help establish prop- easier identification, it is NORD’s standard practice to provide
er lubrication maintenance and change-out intervals. To a hex-head screw for the fill-level plug. For ease of draining
maximize equipment reliability, NORD Gear generally recom- the used oil from the gear reducer, use the socket head screw
mends a condition-based lubrication maintenance program. located at the lowest part of the gearbox.
One may take exceptions to this general recommendation
on sealed-for-life or maintenance-free gear units or smaller
and less costly gear units. In these instances, the replacement
cost of the gear unit is often small compared to the costs
associated with this type of oil analysis program.
Drain Plug Fill Level Plug
NOTICE 10. Vent plug locations
NORD suggests replacing the gear oil if oil analysis indicates Reducer venting allows for air pressure differences that occur
any of the following. Failure to replace the oil may cause during operation, between the inner space of the reducer
internal damage to gearbox and diminished performance: and the atmosphere, while ensuring leak-free operation. The
• Viscosity has changed by approximately 10% or more. AUTOVENT™ is standard for all vented gear units, unless oth-
erwise noted.
• Debris particles (silicon, dust, dirt or sand) exceed 25 ppm.
• Iron content exceeds 150-200 ppm. AUTOVENT™ - The AUTOVENT™ helps prevent bearing and
gear damage by behaving like a check valve to block the
• Water content is greater than 0.05% (500 ppm).
entry of foreign material and prevent lubrication contami-
• The total acid number (TAN) tests indicate a significant nation from dust particles, moisture and air-borne process
level of oxidative break-down of the oil, and a critical chemicals. The breather opens at approximately 0.3-0.9 psi
reduction in performance; If the TAN number measured during operation and closes tightly as the gearbox cools. This
changes by more than 5% over the new oil, then an option is perfect for humid conditions and wash-down envi-
oil change would be recommended. ronments, helping to maintain proper oil cleanliness, while
reducing foaming and oxidation.
7. Mounting position and oil fill quantity
Figure 1 AUTOVENT™ Types
All NORD Gear reducers are shipped from the factory with
a pre-determined oil fiIl level in accordance to the specified
reducer size and mounting position. For additional
information, please see the seperate mounting position
diagrams and the corresponding oil fill quantity tables for
the specified gear unit.
The gearbox nametag will indicate the mounting position

that was provided. For mounting orientations other than Type 1 Type 2 with transportation plug
shown in the mounting position charts, please consult NORD
Gear. Open Vent - An optional open vent can be supplied by NORD.
The open vent comes closed upon delivery with a transporta-
tion sealing plug (see Warning).
IMPORTANT NOTE
NOTICE
Actual oil volume can vary slightly depending upon the
gear case size, mounting and ratio. Prior to commissioning To prevent build-up of excessive pressure, sealed vents
the reducer, check the oil-fill level using the reducer’s oil- must be activated as shown prior to gear unit start up.
level plug and drain or add additional oil as needed. The Excessive pressure may cause damage to internal
minimum acceptable oil level is 0.15 in (4mm) below the oil components and cause leakage.
level hole.
8. Oil plug locations

All gear units are assembled with the oil fill-level, oil-drain
and vent plugs installed in their proper locations, according
to the specified mounting position. All standard plugs are
Sealed vent Activated vent
metric and utilize sealing gaskets between the head of the
plug and the reducer housing.
Filtered Vent - NORD may offer an optional filtered vent,
which allows gases to permeate, but does not allow dust and
debris to pass through the vent.

VL2 & VL3
EXTENDED BEARING LUBRICATION
1. VL2 – Spread Bearing Design
NORD offers reinforced output shaft bearings with

increased bearing distance. The lower bearing is
a oversized, double row spherical bearing, which
Oil Slinger (VL3) Quadrilip™ Sealing System
absorbs high overhung and thrust loads while provid-
ing a longer bearing service life. The spherical roller
bearing is especially useful in compensating for align- Spherical
Dry Cavity Roller Bearing
ment errors in long agitator shafts. The VL2 spread
bearing design is commonly used for shredders, Sight
Grease Fitting
Tube
mixers, overhead conveyors or applications requiring (VL3)
Output
increased bearing load carrying capacities. Included Removable Flange
Plug
with the VL2 design is a grease fitting for the lower
Grease Packed
bearing and a removable plug to allow excess grease to Double Lip Seal
purge from the bearing cavity. C
2. VL3 – Spread Bearing Design with Oil Safe Dry Cavity
The VL3 dry cavity design adds additional oil leak protective measures to the VL2 spread bearing design. NORD’s
QuadralipTM sealing system prevents oil from leaking from the gearbox into the VL2 flange. If in any case oil
does leak past the QuadralipTM seals, it would flow down to the oil slinger mounted onto the shaft. As the shaft
rotates, the oil will sling off into the dry cavity. A sight tube is provided for dry cavity inspection. At the bottom
of the spread bearing flange is greased packed, double lip seal.
3. Service Guidelines for the Extended Bearing Flange
The spherical roller bearing on the extended bearing housing should be re-greased with 0.75 to 1.0 ounces (20-25
grams) of grease after every 2,500 hours of service or at least every 6 months. Prior to re-greasing the screw plug
located opposite to the grease nipple should be unscrewed. After re-greasing the screw plug must be reinstalled
and tightened. The extended bearing is factory assembled with the proper amount and type of grease. The type
of grease supplied depends upon the type of oil specified at time of order.
Bearing Grease Options
Reducer Oil Type NLGI Grade Grease Thickener Grease Base Oil Ambient Temperature Range Manufacturer Brand/Type
MIN-EP NLGI 2 Li-Complex MIN -30 to 60ºC (-22 to 140ºF) Mobil Grease XHP222
PAO NLGI 2 Li-Complex PAO -40 to 80ºC (-40 to 176ºF) Mobil / Mobilith SHC 220
FG or FG-PAO NLGI 2 Polyurea FG-PAO -30 to 80ºC (-22 to 176ºF) Mobil SHC Polyrex 222
NOTICE
Grease compatibility depends upon the type of thickener or soap complex used, the base oil type
suspended within the thickener, and the type of additives used. The user should check with the
lubrication supplier before making substitutions in brand and type in order to assure compatibility and to
avoid causing possible damage to the extended bearing.

HELICAL-WORM REDUCER LUBRICATION
1. Importance of proper lubrication 4. Efficiency
Proper gearbox lubrication is essential in order to reduce Helical worm gears reach efficiencies up to 92% and are gen-
friction, heat, and component wear. Lubricants reduce heat erally much more efficient than worm-only gear units. How-
and wear by inserting a protective “fluid boundary” between ever, it is important to consider the following, when using
mating parts and preventing direct metal to metal contact. worm gears.
Lubricants also help prevent corrosion and oxidation, • Worm gears reach their peak rated efficiency, after they
minimize foam, improve heat transfer, optimize reducer ef- undergo a natural run-in process (up to 25 hours operating
ficiency, absorb shock loads and reduce noise. time at maximum rated load). Catalog published power
NORD helical-worm reducers are shipped from the factory and torque figures are based upon the rated efficiency
with a pre-determined oil fiIl level in accordance to the after the run-in is complete.
specified reducer size and mounting position. • Worm gears have naturally lower startup efficiencies com-
pared to operating efficiencies. As input speed increases
2. Standard oil type the enhanced hydrodynamic effects of the oil result in less
NORD helical worm gear reducers are filled with ISO VG 680 tooth friction and increased worm gear efficiency.
synthetic-hydrocarbon/polyalphaolefin (SHC/PAO) worm gear
oil. IMPORTANT NOTE
• SHC/PAO worm gear oils have good high and low
temperature stability, are compatible with most paint Worm gear reducers applied in cold temperature service,
and seal types, and are miscible with mineral oils. may require increased motor power for the following
• SHC/PAO worm gear oils also contain a small amount of reasons:
organic ester and other antiwear (AW) packages to • Lower operating temperatures, cause lubrication viscosity
offer improved lubrication conditions, especially in the to increase in both the gearbox and in the moving areas
worm mesh, where a sideways sliding motion prevails. of the driven machine.
• Worm-gears have naturally lower start-up efficiencies
Please see user manual U11020 for more specific information
compared to operating efficiencies.
and for optional helical worm lubricants.
• In extreme cases, one might need to consider increasing
the motor power and lowering the oil viscosity
NOTICE
5. Oil Viscosity
In worm gears avoid using extreme pressure (EP) gear oils Viscosity, or the oil’s resistance to shear under load, is often
containing sulfur-phosphorous chemistries; these additives considered the single most important property of any gear oil.
can react adversely with bronze worm gears, and acceler- • Often one will consider making a viscosity correction to
ate wear. the oil to improve the performance when operating the
gear unit at low temperature or high temperature.
IMPORTANT NOTE • In cases of extreme load conditions, gear pairs and antifric-
tion bearings may be more susceptible to sliding or scuffing
Consult the sticker adjacent to the fill plug to determine wear. In these operating conditions, it may also be ben-
the type of lubricant installed at the factory. Some units eficial to consider an increased lubrication viscosity and/or
have special lubricants designed to operate in certain en- a lubrication with improved antiwear additive packages.
vironments or intended to extend the service life or ser-
vice temperature range of the lubricant. If in doubt about
which lubricant is needed for a certain application, please
IMPORTANT NOTE
contact NORD Gear. The user should consult with their primary lubrication sup-
plier before considering changes in oil type or viscosity.
3. Lubrication replacement
The helical-worm gear oil should be replaced at least after 6. Maximum oil sump temperature limit
every 20,000 operating hours or after every four years. Often To prevent reducer overheating, the reducer’s maximum oil
gear reducers are exposed to extreme ambient conditions, sump temperature limit must not be exceeded for prolonged
hostile environments, wet conditions, or dirty and dusty op- periods of operation (up to 3 hours continuous operation de-
erating areas. Especially in these situations, it is important to pending upon reducer size).
establish a condition-based oil service interval.
Oil Type Maximum Oil Temperature Limit
NORD AGMA 9005-D94
Synthetic 105°C (220°F) 107°C (225°F)
IMPORTANT NOTE
Use caution when specifying gear reducers for high
temperature service. If there is concern about exceeding
the allowable safe operating temperatures, please consult
NORD to discuss alternatives.

HELICAL-WORM REDUCER LUBRICATION
7. The importance of routine oil analysis 10. Drain and fill-level plugs
Routine oil analysis, sound lubrication practices, and good All reducer drain plugs are metric socket head cap screws. For
tracking of oil performance trends will help establish prop- easier identification, it is NORD’s standard practice to provide
er lubrication maintenance and change-out intervals. To a hex-head screw for the fill-level plug. For ease of draining
maximize equipment reliability, NORD Gear generally recom- the used oil from the gear reducer, use the socket head screw
mends a condition-based lubrication maintenance program. located at the lowest part of the gearbox.
One may take exceptions to this general recommendation
on sealed-for-life or maintenance-free gear units or smaller
and less costly gear units. In these instances, the replacement
cost of the gear unit is often small compared to the costs
associated with this type of oil analysis program.
Drain Plug Fill Level Plug
NOTICE 11. Vent plug locations
NORD suggests replacing the gear oil if oil analysis indicates Reducer venting allows for air pressure differences that occur
any of the following. Failure to replace the oil may cause during operation, between the inner space of the reducer
internal damage to gearbox and diminished performance: and the atmosphere, while ensuring leak-free operation. The
• Viscosity has changed by approximately 10% or more. AUTOVENT™ is standard for all vented gear units, unless oth-
erwise noted.
• Debris particles (silicon, dust, dirt or sand) exceed 25 ppm.
• Iron content exceeds 150-200 ppm. AUTOVENT™ - The AUTOVENT™ helps prevent bearing and
gear damage by behaving like a check valve to block the
• Water content is greater than 0.05% (500 ppm). entry of foreign material and prevent lubrication contami-
• The total acid number (TAN) tests indicate a significant nation from dust particles, moisture and air-borne process
level of oxidative break-down of the oil, and a critical chemicals. The breather opens at approximately 0.3-0.9 psi
reduction in performance; If the TAN number measured during operation and closes tightly as the gearbox cools. This
changes by more than 5% over the new oil, then an option is perfect for humid conditions and wash-down envi-
oil change would be recommended. ronments, helping to maintain proper oil cleanliness, while
reducing foaming and oxidation.
8. Mounting position and oil fill quantity
Figure 1 AUTOVENT™ Types
a pre-determined oil fiIl level in accordance to the specified
reducer size and mounting position. For additional
information, please see the seperate mounting position
diagrams and the corresponding oil fill quantity tables for
the specified gear unit.
The gearbox nametag will indicate the mounting position Type 1 Type 2 with transportation plug
that was provided. For mounting orientations other than
shown in the mounting position charts, please consult NORD Open Vent - An optional open vent can be supplied by NORD.
Gear. The open vent comes closed upon delivery with a transporta-
tion sealing plug (see Warning).
IMPORTANT NOTE
NOTICE
gear case size, mounting and ratio. Prior to commissioning To prevent build-up of excessive pressure, sealed vents
the reducer, check the oil-fill level using the reducer’s oil- must be activated as shown prior to gear unit start up.
level plug and drain or add additional oil as needed. The Excessive pressure may cause damage to internal
minimum acceptable oil level is 0.15 in (4mm) below the oil components and cause leakage.
level hole.
9. Oil plug locations

All gear units are assembled with the oil fill-level, oil-drain
and vent plugs installed in their proper locations, according
to the specified mounting position. All standard plugs are Sealed vent Activated vent
metric and utilize sealing gaskets between the head of the
plug and the reducer housing. Filtered Vent - NORD may offer an optional filtered vent,
which allows gases to permeate, but does not allow dust and
debris to pass through the vent.

MINICASE (SM SERIES) WORM GEAR
®
LUBRICATION GUIDELINES
1. Importance of proper gearbox lubrication 4. Efficiency
Proper gearbox lubrication is essential in order to reduce It is important to consider the following, when using worm
friction, heat, and component wear. Lubricants reduce heat gears.
and wear by inserting a protective “fluid boundary” between
mating parts and preventing direct metal to metal contact. • Worm gears reach their peak rated efficiency, after they
Lubricants also help prevent corrosion and oxidation, undergo a natural run-in process (up to 25 hours operating
minimize foam, improve heat transfer, optimize reducer time at maximum rated load). Catalog published power
efficiency, absorb shock loads and reduce noise. and torque figures are based upon the rated efficiency
after the run-in is complete.
2. Maintenance free design
• Worm gears have naturally lower startup efficiencies com-
MINICASE® (SM series) worm gear reducers are designed to be pared to operating efficiencies. As input speed increases
maintenance-free and are supplied completely sealed. They the enhanced hydrodynamic effects of the oil result in less
are factory oil-filled with a pre-determined oil fiIl amount tooth friction and increased worm gear efficiency.
in accordance to the specified reducer size and mounting
position. The synthetic lubrication used is suitable for the life IMPORTANT NOTE
of the product so the MINICASE™ is inherently maintenance
free. Worm gear reducers applied in cold temperature service, may
3. Standard oil type require increased motor power for the following reasons:
• Lower operating temperatures, cause lubrication viscosity
The standard factory oil fill for MINICASE® (SM) worm gear to increase in both the gearbox and in the moving areas
reducers is ISO viscosity VG synthetic hydrocarbon/polyal- of the driven machine.
phaolefin (SHC/PAO oil) food grade oil suitable for NSF-H1
incidental contact and is a factory stocked lubricant. Food
grade oil suitable for NSF-H1 incidental contact is a factory
stocked option. • In extreme cases, one might need to consider increasing
the motor power and/or lowering the oil viscosity.
See user manual U11040 for specific information and for op-
tional MINICASE® (SM) worm lubrication types and options. 5. Maximum oil sump temperature limit
To prevent reducer overheating, the reducer’s maximum oil
NOTICE sump temperature limit must not be exceeded for prolonged
periods of operation (up to 3 hours continuous operation de-
In worm gears avoid using extreme pressure (EP) gear oils pending upon reducer size).
containing sulfur-phosphorous chemistries; these additives Oil Type Maximum Oil Temperature Limit
can react adversely with bronze worm gears, and acceler- NORD AGMA 9005-D94
ate wear. Synthetic 105°C (220°F) 107°C (225°F)
IMPORTANT NOTE
Use caution when specifying gear reducers for high tem-
perature service. If there is concern about exceeding the
allowable safe operating temperatures, please consult
NORD to discuss alternatives.

®
6. Oil Viscosity 7. Viscosity Index
The viscosity rating determines the operating oil’s resis- Viscosity index helps quantify the rate of oil viscosity change
tance to shear under load conditions. Some important vis- with respect to temperature changes. Oils with a reasonably
cosity considerations include the following: high viscosity index tend to be more stable in a changing
temperature environment. The ability of an oil to maintain
• Lightly loaded gears require lower viscosity oils than highly a small viscosity differential over the operating range of the
loaded gears. gearbox provides a more consistent lubricating film and bet-
• Lower viscosity will provide thin oil film, lower friction, ter wear performance.
higher mechanical efficiency, and better heat removal
conditions. Synthetic oils typically have a higher viscosity index than
• Higher viscosity will provide thicker oil film, and better mineral oils and polyglycol oils tend to have an exception-
resistance to sliding wear, scuffing wear, and galling at ally high viscosity index compared to other synthetic oils like
high pressure. polyalphaolefin or ester based products.
• Higher operating temperatures will cause a reduction

in viscosity and lower operating temperatures, cause an
increase in viscosity or a thickening of the oil.
The standard oil-fill is considered acceptable for most appli-
cations. In certain situations an oil viscosity change may be
beneficial.
• If the gear unit is exposed to frequent high load condi-
tions. A higher viscosity oil will have a higher film thickness
offering better overall resistance to oil shear, sliding wear
and scuffing wear in gears and roller element bearings.
• An oil viscosity correction or lubrication change may
improve the overall performance when operating the gear
unit at very low or high ambient temperature conditions.
IMPORTANT NOTE
The user should consult with their primary lubrication sup-
plier before considering changes in oil type or viscosity.

MINICASE (SMI/SMID) WORM GEAR
®
1. Importance of proper gearbox lubrication 5. Optional Vent Kits
Proper gearbox lubrication is essential in order to reduce MINICASE® (SMI/SMID) worm gear units are designed to op-
friction, heat, and component wear. Lubricants reduce heat erate sealed or vented. As a standard the modular worm
and wear by inserting a protective “fluid boundary” between gear units are factory oil filled and supplied with oil plugs in
mating parts and preventing direct metal to metal contact. the housing, making vent plugs optional. See user manual
Lubricants also help prevent corrosion and oxidation, U14750.
minimize foam, improve heat transfer, optimize reducer
efficiency, absorb shock loads and reduce noise. NORD can supply an AUTOVENT™ or an open vent with each
gear unit size. If a vent is desired the type must be speci-
2. Factory Oil-Filled / Maintence-Free fied at the time of order. Reducer vents are sealed with a
transportation plug that must be removed prior to gear unit
NORD modular worm gear units are inherently maintence- start-up.
free, factory oil filled, and supplied with a high-quality, long-
life, synthetic oil which is intend to be suitable for the life of Type Transportation Installation Part Number
the gear unit. Seal
Factory or
MINICASE® (SMI/SMID) worm gear units are assembled at the AUTOVENT™ Included 66093510
Field site
factory from stocked component parts. They are filled at time
of assembly in accordance to the specified reducer mounting Open Vent None Field Only 60693500
position. See user manuals U13150 and U13250 for more info. Factory or 22008004 (vent)
Open Vent Included
Field site 25308120 (gasket)
3. Standard Oil Types Unless noted by a seperate part number, vent kits include the housing gasket
MINICASE® (SMI/SMID) worm gear units are factory filled with
synthetic poly glycol oil. Food-grade polyglycol oil is option-
al. The specific oil type and viscosity grade are displayed on
the reducer nameplate. See user manual 11050 for specific
MINICASE® (SMI/SMID) worm lubrication types and options.
NOTICE NOTICE
In worm gears avoid using extreme pressure (EP) gear oils To prevent build-up of excessive pressure, sealed vents must
containing sulfur-phosphorous chemistries; these additives be activated as shown prior to gear unit start-up. Excessive
can react adversely with bronze worm gears, and acceler- pressure may cause damage to internal components and
ate wear. cause leakage.
4. Efficiency 6. AUTOVENT™
It is important to consider the following, when ordering The AUTOVENT™ helps prevent bearing and gear damage
worm gears. by behaving like a check valve to block the entry of foreign
• Worm gears reach their peak rated efficiency, after they material and prevent lubrication contamination from dust
undergo a natural run-in process (up to 25 hours operating particles, moisture and air-borne process chemicals. The
time at maximum rated load). Catalog published power breather opens at approximately 0.3-0.9 psi during operation
and torque figures are based upon the rated efficiency and closes tightly as the gearbox cools. This option is perfect
after the run-in is complete. for humid conditions and wash-down environments, helping
• Worm gears have naturally lower startup efficiencies to maintain proper oil cleanliness, while reducing foaming
compared to operating efficiencies. As input speed increases and oxidation.
the enhanced hydrodynamic effects of the oil result in less
tooth friction and increased worm gear efficiency. 7. Open Vent
A typical gearbox industry open vent option can also be sup-
IMPORTANT NOTE plied by NORD. This option allows free exchange of air and
does not build-up any back pressure inside the gear unit.
Worm gear reducers applied in cold temperature service, may This option is ideal for many operating conditions where the
require increased motor power for the following reasons: geared product is used in relatively clean and moisture-free
• Lower operating temperatures, cause lubrication viscosity to
environment.
increase in both the gearbox and in the moving areas of the
driven machine.

®
8. When to Use a Sealed or a Vented Unit 10. Oil Viscosity
There are many conditions that should be considered when de- The viscosity rating determines the operating oil’s resistance
ciding whether to use a sealed or vented unit. to shear under load conditions. Some important viscosity
considerations include the following:
1. If the duty cycle is intermittent, the run times are short, and
any build-up of internal pressure or temperature is relatively • Lightly loaded gears require lower viscosity oils than highly
low, the sealed unit option may be used. loaded gears.
2. If running continuous and under moderate to high load • Lower viscosity will provide thin oil film, lower friction, higher
conditions, worm gears can generate higher operating mechanical efficiency, and better heat removal conditions.
temperatures and a build-up of internal pressure. In these
instances a vent is strongly recommended. Consult NORD if • Higher viscosity will provide thicker oil film, and a better
operation at high load conditions is required. resistance to sliding wear, scuffing wear, and galling at high
pressure.
3. If running continuous at 4-pole electric motor speeds (1800
rpm at 60 Hz) or higher, then a vent option is usually • Higher operating temperatures will cause a reduc-tion in vis-
recommended. Consult NORD if operation at higher speeds cosity and lower operating temperatures, cause an increase
is required. in viscosity or a thickening of the oil.
4. Radial shaft seals produce a hydrodynamic pumping action The standard oil-fill is considered acceptable for most applica-
to help push lubricant back into the gear unit, causing a tions. In certain situations an oil viscosity change may be ben-
small amount of ingested air and a small pressure increase eficial.
(1-2 psi) that does not normally require a reducer vent; • If the gear unit is exposed to frequent high load conditions.
however when combined with continuous operation under A higher viscosity oil will have a higher film thickness offer-
high load (Condition 2), additional operating pressures will ing better overall resistance to oil shear, sliding wear and
result and a vent should be used. scuffing wear in gears and roller element bearings.
5. When the environment is contaminated with water, dirt, or • An oil viscosity correction or lubrication change may improve
other objects that may be ingested into the breather, in- the overall performance when operating the gear unit at
creased wear of bearings, gearing, and lubrication very low or high ambient temperature conditions.
breakdown can result. In these instances the sealed option
or an AUTOVENT™ should be considered.
IMPORTANT NOTE
9. Maximum Oil Sump Temperature Limit
The user should consult with their primary lubrication sup-
To prevent reducer overheating, the reducer’s maximum oil- plier before considering changes in oil type or viscosity.
sump temperature limit must not be exceeded for prolonged
periods of operation.
11. Viscosity Index
Viscosity index helps quantify the rate of oil viscosity change
NORD AGMA 9005-D94 with respect to temperature changes. Oils with a reasonably
Synthetic 105°C (220°F) 107°C (225°F) high viscosity index tend to be more stable in a changing tem-
perature environment. The ability of an oil to maintain a small
viscosity differential over the operating range of the gearbox
IMPORTANT NOTE provides a more consistent lubricating film and better wear
performance.
Use caution when specifying gear reducers for high temper-
ature service. If there is concern about exceeding the safe Synthetic oils typically have a higher viscosity index than min-
operating temperature limit, please consult NORD to discuss eral oils and polyglycol oils tend to have an exceptionally high
alternatives. viscosity index compared to other synthetic oils like polyalphao-
lefin or ester based products.

FLEXBLOC™ (SI/SID SERIES) WORM GEAR
1. Importance of Proper Lubrication 5. Optional Vent Kits
Proper gearbox lubrication is essential in order to reduce fric- FLEXBLOC™ (SI) worm gear units are designed to operate
tion, heat, and component wear. Lubricants reduce heat and sealed or vented. As a standard the modular worm gear units
wear by inserting a protective “fluid boundary” between are factory oil filled and supplied with oil plugs in the hous-
mating parts and preventing direct metal to metal contact. ing, making vent plugs optional. See user manual U14800 for
Lubricants also help prevent corrosion and oxidation, mini- vent locations.
mize foam, improve heat transfer, optimize reducer efficien-
cy, absorb shock loads and reduce noise. NORD can supply an AUTOVENT™ or an open vent with each
gear unit size. If a vent is desired the type must be speci-
2. Factory Oil-Filled / Maintence-Free fied at the time of order. Reducer vents are sealed with a
transportation plug that must be removed prior to gear unit
NORD modular worm gear units are inherently maintence- start-up.
free, factory oil filled, and supplied with a high-quality, long-
life, synthetic oil which is intend to be suitable for the life of Type Transportation Installation Part Number
the gear unit. Seal
Factory or
FLEXBLOC™ SI worm gear units are filled at time of assembly AUTOVENT™ Included 66093510
Field site
to a universal oil fill, allowing for many mounting position
possibilities. See user manual U13300. Open Vent None Field Only 60693500
3. Standard oil type Open Vent Included

Factory or 22008004 (vent)
FLEXBLOC (SI/SID) worm gear units are factory filled with
™
Unless noted by a seperate part number, vent kits include the housing gasket
synthetic poly glycol oil. Food-grade polyglycol oil is option-
al. The specific oil type and viscosity grade are displayed on
the reducer nameplate. See user manual 11060 for specific
FLEXBLOC™ (SI/SID) worm lubrication types and options.
NOTICE
In worm gears avoid using extreme pressure (EP) gear oils NOTICE
containing sulfur-phosphorous chemistries; these additives
can react adversely with bronze worm gears, and acceler- To prevent build-up of excessive pressure, sealed vents must
ate wear. be activated as shown prior to gear unit start-up. Excessive
pressure may cause damage to internal components and
cause leakage.
4. Efficiency
It is important to consider the following, when ordering worm 6. AUTOVENT™
gears. The AUTOVENT™ helps prevent bearing and gear damage
• Worm gears reach their peak rated efficiency, after they by behaving like a check valve to block the entry of foreign
undergo a natural run-in process (up to 25 hours operating material and prevent lubrication contamination from dust
time at maximum rated load). Catalog published power and particles, moisture and air-borne process chemicals. The
torque figures are based upon the rated efficiency after the breather opens at approximately 0.3-0.9 psi during operation
run-in is complete. and closes tightly as the gearbox cools. This option is perfect
• Worm gears have naturally lower startup efficiencies for humid conditions and wash-down environments, helping
compared to operating efficiencies. As input speed increases to maintain proper oil cleanliness, while reducing foaming
the enhanced hydrodynamic effects of the oil result in less and oxidation.
tooth friction and increased worm gear efficiency. 7. Open Vent
IMPORTANT NOTE A typical gearbox industry open vent option can also be sup-
plied by NORD. This option allows free exchange of air and
Worm gear reducers applied in cold temperature service, may does not build-up any back pressure inside the gear unit.
require increased motor power for the following reasons: This option is ideal for many operating conditions where the
geared product is used in relatively clean and moisture-free
• Lower operating temperatures, cause lubrication viscosity
environment.
to increase in both the gearbox and in the moving areas
of the driven machine.

8. When to Use a Sealed or a Vented Unit 10. Oil Viscosity
There are many conditions that should be considered when The viscosity rating determines the operating oil’s resis-
deciding whether to use a sealed or vented unit. tance to shear under load conditions. Some important vis-
cosity considerations include the following:
1. If the duty cycle is intermittent, the run times are short,
and any build-up of internal pressure or temperature is • Lightly loaded gears require lower viscosity oils than highly
relatively low, the sealed unit option may be used. loaded gears.
2. If running continuous and under moderate to high load • Lower viscosity will provide thin oil film, lower friction,
conditions, worm gears can generate higher operating higher mechanical efficiency, and better heat removal
temperatures and a build-up of internal pressure. In these conditions.
instances a vent is strongly recommended. Consult NORD if • Higher viscosity will provide thicker oil film, and better
operation at high load conditions is required. resistance to sliding wear, scuffing wear, and galling at
3. If running continuous at 4-pole electric motor speeds (1800 high pressure.
rpm at 60 Hz) or higher, then a vent option is usually • Higher operating temperatures will cause a reduction
recommended. Consult NORD if operation at higher in viscosity and lower operating temperatures, cause an
speeds is required. increase in viscosity or a thickening of the oil.
4. Radial shaft seals produce a hydrodynamic pumping The standard oil-fill is considered acceptable for most appli-
action to help push lubricant back into the gear unit, caus- cations. In certain situations an oil viscosity change may be
ing a small amount of ingested air and a small pressure beneficial.
increase (1-2 psi) that does not normally require a reducer
vent; however when combined with continuous operation • If the gear unit is exposed to frequent high load condi-
under high load (Condition 2), additional operating tions. A higher viscosity oil will have a higher film thickness
pressures will result and a vent should be used. offering better overall resistance to oil shear, sliding wear
and scuffing wear in gears and roller element bearings.
5. When the environment is contaminated with water, dirt,
or other objects that may be ingested into the breather, • An oil viscosity correction or lubrication change may
increased wear of bearings, gearing, and lubrication improve the overall performance when operating the gear
breakdown can result. In these instances the sealed unit at very low or high ambient temperature conditions.
option or an AUTOVENT™ should be considered.
9. Maximum Oil Sump Temperature Limit IMPORTANT NOTE
To prevent reducer overheating, the reducer’s maximum oil- The user should consult with their primary lubrication sup-
sump temperature limit must not be exceeded for prolonged plier before considering changes in oil type or viscosity.
periods of operation.
11. Viscosity Index
Viscosity index helps quantify the rate of oil viscosity change
NORD AGMA 9005-D94 with respect to temperature changes. Oils with a reasonably
Synthetic 105°C (220°F) 107°C (225°F) high viscosity index tend to be more stable in a changing
temperature environment. The ability of an oil to maintain
a small viscosity differential over the operating range of the
IMPORTANT NOTE gearbox provides a more consistent lubricating film and bet-
ter wear performance.
Use caution when specifying gear reducers for high tem-
perature service. If there is concern about exceeding the Synthetic oils typically have a higher viscosity index than
allowable safe operating temperatures, please consult mineral oils and polyglycol oils tend to have an exception-
NORD to discuss alternatives. ally high viscosity index compared to other synthetic oils like
polyalphaolefin or ester based products.

EXPANSION CHAMBERS
INSTALLATION & MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Installation Instructions Expansion Chamber Kit Dimensions & Parts List

Sometimes NORD requires the use of an oil expansion Kit Part Number: 28390390 - 0.7 Liter Oil Expansion Chamber
chamber when the motor or reducer input is mounted Kit P/N ØA B ØC D E F Units
vertically. Consult your NORD catalog for additional in- 28390390 3.94 1.97 0.53 0.20 8.50 19.69 inch
formation and application considerations. (0.7 Liter) 100 50 13.5 5 216 500 mm
Item Part Number Description

20 28300390 Overflow Tank - 0.7 Liter
21 28310020 Flexible Vent Hose Assembly -
Includes: Hose, metal gaskets &
2 Hollow Bolts (1 Bolt. - M12 X 1.5 and 1 Pc. - G1/4)
22 None Adapter Fitting
23 22012004 Normal Style Vent Plug (M12 X 1.5, DIN 910)
24 25312150 Vent Plug Gasket (12 X 15.5 X 1.5)
Kit Part Number: 28390400 - 2.7 Liter Oil Expansion Chamber

Kit P/N ØA B ØC D E F Units
28390400 5.91 4.92 0.69 0.20 15.22 27.56 inch
1. Secure the gear reducer in the proper mounting (2.7 Liter) 150 125 17.5 5 386.5 700 mm
position for the application and remove the vent
plug from the gear reducer. The hose assembly kit Item Part Number Description
(21) will be fitted to the reducer using the housing 20 28300400 Overflow Tank - 2.7 Liter
port provided. Flexible Vent Hose Assy -
21 28310030 Includes: Hose, metal gaskets &
2. When using the larger 2.7 and 5.4 liter chambers, 2 Hollow Bolts (2 Pcs. - G1/4)
screw the adapter fitting (22) into the reducer hous-
22 22024030 Adapter Fitting (M24 X 1.5 to G1/4)
ing port. Use all sealing gaskets provided.
3. Mount the overflow tank (20) at the highest
location from the reducer, as permitted by the
hose assembly kit (21). Typical mounting configu- Kit Part Number: 28390410 - 5.4 Liter Oil Expansion Chamber
rations are represented below. Use one of the input
Kit P/N ØA B ØC D E F Units
cover’s mounting bolts, to mount the chamber
28390410 7.09 3.54 0.69 0.20 15.18 31.50 inch
support leg to the reducer.
(5.4 Liter) 180 90 17.5 5 385.5 800 mm
Item Part Number Description

DRIVESYSTEMS
20 28300410 Overflow Tank - 5.4 Liter
DRIVESYSTEMS DRIVESYSTEMS
Flexible Vent Hose Assy -
21 28310040 Includes: Hose, metal gaskets &
2 Hollow Bolts (2 Pcs. - G1/4)
22 22030030 Adapter Fitting (M30 X 1.5 to G1/4)
4. Be sure to use the proper fittings. Assemble one
end of the vent-hose assembly (21) to bottom of the Please see page 2 for gearbox compatability
chamber and one-end to the reducer.
5. Secure the vent-plug (23) and gasket (24) that is sup-
plied with the kit to the top of the expansion chamber.
NOTICE
Remove the protective “rubber element” from the
supplied vent prior to use so that an open-vent is
formed on top of the overflow tank. Avoid using a
pressurized AUTOVENT™ breather on the overflow
tank since this may create an undesired pressure-vac-
uum in the overflow tank.

EXPANSION CHAMBERS
INSTALLATION & MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Expansion Chamber Compatability Chart

Helical In-line NORDBLOC™ NORDBLOC.1™ Clincher™ Helical-Bevel Part Number [lb]
SK 42/43 SK472/473 SK572.1/573.1* SK 4282/4382 SK 9042.1/9043.1
SK 52/53 SK572/573 SK672.1/673.1* SK 5282/5382 SK 9052.1/9053.1
SK 63 SK672/673 SK 6382
28390390 11.0
SK772/773
SK872/873
SK972/973
SK 62 SK 6282 SK 9072.1
28390400 13.2
SK 72/73 SK 7282/7382 SK 9082.1
SK 82/83 SK 8282/8382 SK 9086.1

SK 92/93 SK 9092.1 28390410 15.4
SK 102/103 SK 9096.1
* Need to additionally order part #28390380 which is sub-assembly shown below.
Sub-Assembly P/N 28390380 for NORDBLOC®.1 gear units with M10x1 air vent.
   
1x DIN 7643 1x DIN 7603A Cu 1x Ring 1xDIN

M10x1 10x16x1 10x14x5 9021 ø8,4
283 00380 253 10166 283 00370 227 10840
Assembly of the expansion unit at the gear unit. Types SK 572.1/573.1, SK 672.1/673.1
 For motor sizes 63, 71, 80, 90, Motor Sizes 63, 71 & 80: Motor Sizes 90,100 & 112:
100 & 112 Assembly vent-hose to port as Assembly vent-hose to port as
shown. shown.
• Motor attachment bolt
Vent Hose Sub-Assembly

88-106 lb-in



HELICAL & BEVEL REDUCER
LUBRICATION TYPES
Lubrication Tables – Helical and Bevel Gear Units
Standard Oil Lubricants
ISO Viscosity Oil Type Ambient Temperature Range Manufacturer Brand/Type Notes
MIN-EP 0 to 40ºC (32 to 104º) Mobilgear 600XP220 S
VG220 PAO-EP -35 to 60ºC (-31 to 140ºF) Mobil SHC Gear 220 S
FG -5 to 40ºC (23 to 104ºF) Fuchs FM220 S
Optional Oil Lubricants

PAO-EP -35 to 80ºC (-31 to 176ºF) Mobil SHC Gear 460 -
VG460
FG-PAO -35 to 80ºC (-31 to 176ºF) Mobil SHC Cibus 460 -
VG220 FG-PAO -35 to 60ºC (-31 to 140ºF) Mobil SHC Cibus 220 S
VG150 PAO-EP -35 to 25ºC (-31 to 77ºF) Mobil SHC Gear 150 -
Grease Options (applied to greased bearings and seal cavities)

NLGI Grade Grease Thickener Grease Base Oil Ambient Temperature Range Manufacturer Brand/Type Notes
Li-Complex MIN -30 to 60ºC (-22 to 140ºF) Mobil Grease XHP222 S
NLGI 2 Li-Complex PAO -40 to 80ºC (-40 to 176ºF) Mobil / Mobilith SHC 220 S
Polyurea FG-PAO -30 to 80ºC (-22 to 176ºF) Mobil SHC Polyrex 222 S
S Stocked Lubricants
 Standard product on serviceable gear units
 Standard product on maintenance free gear units
IMPORTANT NOTE
• The “Ambient Temperature” is intended to be an operation guideline based upon the typical properties of all the
lubricant. The viscosity and other properties of the lubricant change based upon load, speed, ambient conditions, and
reducer operating temperatures. The user should consult with their lubrication supplier & NORD gear before considering
changes in oil type or viscosity.
• To prevent reducer overheating, observe the maximum operating oil temperature limits:
Mineral Oil: 80-85 ºC (176 – 180 ºF).
Synthetic Oil: 105 ºC (225 ºF).
• In the following instances, please consult NORD for specific recommendations:
√ Gear units will operate in high ambient temperature conditions exceeding 40 ºC (104 ºF).
√ Gear units will operate in cold ambient temperature conditions approaching 0 ºC (32 ºF) or lower.
√ Lower than an ISO VG100 viscosity oil is being considered for a cold-temperature service.
√ Fluid grease is required for lubricating the gear unit.
• Observe the general lubrication guidelines outlined in user manual U10750.
Oil Formulation Codes Lubrication Notes

MIN-EP - Mineral Oil with EP Additive • Avoid using (EP) gear oils in worm gears that contain
PAO-EP - Synthetic Polyalphaolefin Oil with EP Additive sulfur-phosphorous chemistries, as these additives can
PAO - Synthetic Polyalphaolefin Oil react adversely with bronze worm gears and accelerate
PG - Synthetic Polyglycol Oil wear.
FG - Food-Grade Oil • Food grade lubricants must be in compliance with FDA 212
FG-PAO - Food-Grade, Synthetic Poyalphaolefin Oil CFR 178.3570 and qualify as a NSF-H1 lubricant. Please
FG-PG - Food-Grade, Synthetic Polyglycol Oil consult with lubrication manufacturer for more information.
• When making a lubrication change, check with the
lubrication supplier to assure compatibility and to obtain
recommended cleaning or flushing procedures.
• Do not to mix different oils with different additive pack-
ages or different base oil formulation types. Polyglycol (PG)
oils are not miscible with other oil types and should never
be mixed with mineral oil or polyalphaolefin (PAO)
synthetic oil.
HELICAL & BEVEL REDUCER
LUBRICATION TYPES
Oil Cross-reference Chart

ISO Oil Ambient Temperature
Viscosity Type Range
Shell Castrol
Mobilgear Omala Alpha Renolin Klüberoil
MIN-EP 0 to 25ºC (32 to 77ºF)
600XP150 S2 G 150 SP150 EP150 GEM 1-150N
Mobil SHC Omala Alphasyn Gearmaster Klübersynth
PAO-EP -30 to 25 ºC (-22 to 77 ºF)
Gear 150 S4 GX 150 EP150 SYN150/NA EG 4-150
Morlina Alphasyn Klübersynth
PAO -30 to 25ºC (-22 to 77ºF) Mobil SHC629 N/A
S4 B 150 T150 GEM 4-150N
Mobil Glygoyle Omala Alphasyn Renolin Klübersynth
VG150 PG -25 to 25ºC (-13 to 77ºF)
150 S4 WE 150 PG150 PG150 GH 6-150
Mobil DTE FM
FG 0 to 25ºC (32 to 77ºF) N/A N/A N/A N/A
150
Mobil SHC Cassida Klüberoil
FG-PAO -15 to 25ºC (5 to 77ºF) N/A N/A
Cibus 150 GL150 4 UH 1-150N
Mobil Glygoyle Klübersynth
FG-PG -25 to 25ºC (-13 to 77ºF) N/A N/A N/A
150 UH1 6-150
MIN-EP 0 to 40ºC (32 to 104º)
600XP220 S2 G 220 SP220 EP220 GEM 1-220N
PAO-EP -30 to 60 ºC (-22 to 140 ºF)
S4 B 220 T220 GEM 4-220N
Mobil Glygoyle Omala Alphasyn Renolin Klübersynth GH
VG220 PG -25 to 60ºC (-13 to 140ºF)
220 S4 WE 220 PG220 PG220 6-220
Mobil DTE FM
FG 0 to 40ºC (32 to 104ºF) N/A N/A Fuchs FM220 N/A
220
FG-PAO -25 to 60ºC (-13 to 140ºF) N/A N/A
Cibus 220 GL220 4 UH 1-220N
Mobil Glygoyle Cassida Klübersynth
FG-PG -25 to 60ºC (-13 to 140ºF) N/A N/A
220 WG220 UH1 6-220
600XP460 S2 G 460 SP460 EP460 GEM 1-460N
PAO-EP -20 to 80ºC (-4 to 176ºF)
PAO -20 to 80ºC (-4 to 176ºF) Mobil SHC 634 N/A
S4 B 460 T460 GEM 4-460N
Mobil Glygoyle Omala Alphasyn Klübersynth
VG460 PG -20 to 80ºC (-4 to 176ºF) N/A
460 S4 WE 60 PG460 GH 6-460
Mobil DTE Fuchs
FG 0 to 40ºC (32 to 104ºF) N/A N/A N/A
FM460 FM460
Cibus 460 GL460 4 UH 1-460N
Mobil Cassida Klübersynth
Glygoyle 460 WG460 UH1 6-460
Low-end service temperature limit may vary for a specific lubricant; Please also see the important notes on Page 1.

CONVEYOR DRIVE
LUBRICATION TYPES
Lubrication Tables – SK 9055 and SK 9155 Gear Units
MIN-EP 0 to 40ºC (32 to 104º) Mobilgear 600XP220 S
VG220 PAO -35 to 60ºC (-31 to 140ºF) Mobil SHC630 S
FG -5 to 40ºC (23 to 104ºF) Fuchs FM220 S

PAO -35 to 80ºC (-31 to 176ºF) Mobil SHC 634 -
VG460
FG-PAO -35 to 80ºC (-31 to 176ºF) Mobil SHC Cibus 460 -
VG220 FG-PAO -35 to 60ºC (-31 to 140ºF) Mobil SHC Cibus 220 S
VG150 PAO -35 to 25ºC (-31 to 77ºF) Mobil SHC629 -

Li-Complex MIN -30 to 60ºC (-22 to 140ºF) Mobil Grease XHP222 S
NLGI 2 Li-Complex PAO -40 to 80ºC (-40 to 176ºF) Mobil / Mobilith SHC 220 S
 Standard product on serviceable gear units
 Standard product on maintenance free gear units
IMPORTANT NOTE
reducer operating temperatures. The user should consult with their lubrication supplier & NORD gear before considering
Mineral Oil: 80-85 ºC (176 – 180 ºF).

MIN-EP - Mineral Oil with EP Additive • Avoid using (EP) gear oils in worm gears that contain
PAO-EP - Synthetic Polyalphaolefin Oil with EP Additive sulfur-phosphorous chemistries, as these additives can
PAO - Synthetic Polyalphaolefin Oil react adversely with bronze worm gears and accelerate
PG - Synthetic Polyglycol Oil wear.
FG - Food-Grade Oil • Food grade lubricants must be in compliance with FDA 212
FG-PAO - Food-Grade, Synthetic Poyalphaolefin Oil CFR 178.3570 and qualify as a NSF-H1 lubricant. Please
FG-PG - Food-Grade, Synthetic Polyglycol Oil consult with lubrication manufacturer for more information.
synthetic oil.
CONVEYOR DRIVE
LUBRICATION TYPES

Shell Castrol
600XP150 S2 G 150 SP150 EP150 GEM 1-150N
Mobilgear Omala Alphasyn Gearmaster Klübersynth
PAO-EP -30 to 25 ºC (-22 to 77 ºF)
SHC150 S4 GX 150 EP150 SYN150/NA EG 4-150
S4 B 150 T150 GEM 4-150N
VG150 PG -25 to 25ºC (-13 to 77ºF)
150 S4 WE 150 PG150 PG150 GH 6-150
Mobil DTE FM
FG 0 to 25ºC (32 to 77ºF) N/A N/A N/A N/A
150
Cibus 150 GL150 4 UH 1-150N
150 UH1 6-150
MIN-EP 0 to 40ºC (32 to 104º)
600XP220 S2 G 220 SP220 EP220 GEM 1-220N
PAO-EP -30 to 60 ºC (-22 to 140 ºF)
S4 B 220 T220 GEM 4-220N
VG220 PG -25 to 60ºC (-13 to 140ºF)
220 S4 WE 220 PG220 PG220 6-220
Mobil DTE FM
FG 0 to 40ºC (32 to 104ºF) N/A N/A Fuchs FM220 N/A
220
Cibus 220 GL220 4 UH 1-220N
220 WG220 UH1 6-220
600XP460 S2 G 460 SP460 EP460 GEM 1-460N
PAO-EP -20 to 80ºC (-4 to 176ºF)
PAO -20 to 80ºC (-4 to 176ºF) Mobil SHC 634 N/A
S4 B 460 T460 GEM 4-460N
VG460 PG -20 to 80ºC (-4 to 176ºF) N/A
460 S4 WE 60 PG460 GH 6-460
Mobil DTE Fuchs
FG 0 to 40ºC (32 to 104ºF) N/A N/A N/A
FM460 FM460
Cibus 460 GL460 4 UH 1-460N

HELICAL-WORM REDUCER
LUBRICATION TYPES
Lubrication Tables – Helical Worm Gear Units

VG680 PAO 0 to 60ºC (32 to 140ºF) Mobil SHC636 S

PAO 0 to50ºC (32 to 122ºF) Mobil SHC 634 -
VG460
FG-PAO 0 to50ºC (32 to 122ºF) Mobil SHC Cibus 460 -

Li-Complex PAO -40 to 80ºC (-40 to 176ºF) Mobil / Mobilith SHC 220 S
NLGI 2
IMPORTANT NOTE
reducer operating temperatures. The user should consult with their lubrication supplier & NORD Gear before considering

PAO - Synthetic Polyalphaolefin Oil • Avoid using (EP) gear oils in worm gears that contain
PG - Synthetic Polyglycol Oil sulfur-phosphorous chemistries, as these additives can
FG-PAO - Food-Grade, Synthetic Poyalphaolefin Oil react adversely with bronze worm gears and accelerate
FG-PG - Food-Grade, Synthetic Polyglycol Oil wear.
• Food grade lubricants must be in compliance with FDA 212
CFR 178.3570 and qualify as a NSF-H1 lubricant. Please
consult with lubrication manufacturer for more information.
synthetic oil.

HELICAL-WORM REDUCER
LUBRICATION TYPES

Shell Castrol
Morlina Klübersynth
PAO -35 to 25ºC (-31 to 77ºF) Mobil SHC627 N/A N/A
S4 B 100 GEM 4-100N
PG -25 to 25ºC (-13 to 77ºF) N/A N/A N/A
100 GH 6-100
VG 100
Mobil SHC Klüberoil
FG-PAO -35 to 25ºC (-31 to 77ºF) N/A N/A N/A
Cibus 100 4 UH 1-100N
100 UH1 6-100
S4 B 150 T150 GEM 4-150N
PG -25 to 25ºC (-13 to 77ºF)
150 S4 WE 150 PG150 PG150 GH 6-150
VG150
Cibus 150 GL150 4 UH 1-150N
150 UH1 6-150
PAO -15 to 40ºC (5 to 104ºF) Mobil SHC630 N/A
S4 B 220 T220 GEM 4-220N
PG -25 to 40ºC (-13 to 104ºF)
220 S4 WE 220 PG220 PG220 6-220
VG220
Cibus 220 GL220 4 UH 1-220N
220 WG220 UH1 6-220
PAO 0 to50ºC (32 to 122ºF) Mobil SHC 634 N/A
S4 B 460 T460 GEM 4-460N
PG 0 to50ºC (32 to 122ºF) N/A
460 S4 WE 60 PG460 GH 6-460
VG460
FG-PAO 0 to50ºC (32 to 122ºF) N/A N/A
Cibus 460 GL460 4 UH 1-460N
FG-PG 0 to50ºC (32 to 122ºF) N/A N/A
Morlina Klübersynth
PAO 0 to 60ºC (32 to 140ºF) Mobil SHC636 N/A N/A
S4 B 680 GEM 4-680N
Mobil Glygoyle Omala Klübersynth
PG 0 to 60ºC (32 to 140ºF) N/A N/A
680 S4 WE 680 GH 6-680
VG680
Cassida Klüberoil
FG-PAO 0 to 60ºC (32 to 140ºF) N/A N/A N/A
GL680 4 UH1-680N
FG-PG 0 to 60ºC (32 to 140ºF) N/A N/A
680 WG680 UH1 6-680

®
LUBRICATION TYPES
®
Lubrication Tables – MINICASE (SM series) Worm Gear Units

VG680 PG -20 to 40ºC (-4 to 104ºF) Klübersynth GH 6-680 S

VG680 FG-PG -25 to 80ºC (-13 to 176ºF) Klübersynth UH1 6-680 S

Li-Complex PAO -25 to 80ºC (-13 to 176ºF) Kluber / Petamo GHY133N S
NLGI 2
Aluminum FG -25 to 40ºC (-13 to 104ºF) Kluber / Klubersynth UH1 14-151 S
IMPORTANT NOTE
• Observe the general lubrication guidelines in User Manual U17900.
• Ambient temperature range is a guideline only. The allowed operating temperature range for the gear unit is depen-
dent upon assembly components used, their individual temperature limits, and the actual operating conditions.
• The selected oil type and viscosity is considered appropriate for most applications utilizing the specified NORD gear unit
type. Different oil types or viscosity grades may be recommended if the gear unit is exposed to frequent high load
conditions or operating under extreme low or high ambient temperature conditions.
Synthetic oil: 105 ºC (225 ºF).
• Consult NORD for recommendations in the following instances:
√ The gear unit is exposed to frequent high load conditions.
√ Ambient temperature conditions exceed 40 ºC (104 ºF) or approach 0 ºC (32 ºF) or lower.
√ Fluid grease is being considered or specified for lubricating the gear unit.
Oil Formulation Codes

PAO - Synthetic Polyalphaolefin Oil
NOTICE
PG - Synthetic Polyglycol Oil • Avoid using (EP) gear oils in worm gears that contain
FG-PAO - Food-Grade, Synthetic Poyalphaolefin Oil sulfur-phosphorous chemistries, as these additives can
FG-PG - Food-Grade, Synthetic Polyglycol Oil react adversely with bronze worm gears and accelerate
wear.
• Food grade lubricants must be in compliance with FDA
212 CFR 178.3570 and qualify as a NSF-H1 lubricant.
Please consult with lubrication manufacturer for more
information.
lubrication supplier to assure compatibility and to
obtain recommended cleaning or flushing procedures.
• Do not to mix different oils with different additive
packages or different base oil formulation types.
Polyglycol (PG) oils are not miscible with other oil types
and should never be mixed with mineral or polyaolpha-
olefin (PAO) oils.

®
LUBRICATION TYPES

Shell Castrol
Mobil Morlina Klübersynth
PAO -35 to 25ºC (-31 to 77ºF) N/A N/A
SHC627 S4 B 100 GEM 4-100N
Mobil Klübersynth
Glygoyle 100 GH 6-100
VG 100
Cibus 100 4 UH 1-100N
Mobil Klübersynth
Glygoyle 100 UH1 6-100
Mobil Morlina Alphasyn Klübersynth
PAO -35 to 25ºC (-31 to 77ºF) N/A
SHC629 S4 B 150 T150 GEM 4-150N
Mobil Omala Alphasyn Renolin Klübersynth
PG -25 to 25ºC (-13 to 77ºF)
Glygoyle 150 S4 WE 150 PG150 PG150 GH 6-150
VG150
Cibus 150 GL150 4 UH 1-150N
Mobil Klübersynth
PAO -35 to 40ºC (-31 to 104ºF) N/A
SHC630 S4 B 220 T220 GEM 4-220N
PG -25 to 40ºC (-13 to 104ºF)
VG220
Cibus 220 GL220 4 UH 1-220N
Mobil SHC Morlina Alphasyn Klübersynth
PAO -20 to 40ºC (-4 to 104ºF) N/A
634 S4 B 460 T460 GEM 4-460N
Mobil Omala Alphasyn Klübersynth
PG -20 to 40ºC (-4 to 104ºF) N/A
Glygoyle 460 S4 WE 60 PG460 GH 6-460
VG460
Cibus 460 GL460 4 UH 1-460N
FG-PG -5 to 40ºC (23 to 104ºF) N/A N/A
SHC636 S4 B 680 GEM 4-680N
Mobil Omala Klübersynth
PG -20 to 40ºC (-4 to 104ºF) N/A N/A
Glygoyle 680 S4 WE 680 GH 6-680
VG680
Cassida Klüberoil
FG-PAO -5 to 40ºC (23 to 104ºF) N/A N/A N/A
GL680 4 UH1-680N

®
LUBRICATION TYPES
Lubrication Tables – MINICASE® (SMI/SMID series) Worm Gear Units

VG680 PG -20 to 40ºC (-4 to 104ºF) Klübersynth GH 6-680 S

VG680 FG-PG -25 to 80ºC (-13 to 176ºF) Klübersynth UH1 6-680 S

Li-Complex PAO -25 to 80ºC (-13 to 176ºF) Kluber / Petamo GHY133N S
NLGI 2
Aluminum FG -25 to 40ºC (-13 to 104ºF) Kluber / Klubersynth UH1 14-151 S
IMPORTANT NOTE

NOTICE
wear.
information.
olefin (PAO) oils.

®
LUBRICATION TYPES

Shell Castrol
SHC627 S4 B 100 GEM 4-100N
Mobil Klübersynth
VG 100
Cibus 100 4 UH 1-100N
Mobil Klübersynth
PAO -35 to 25ºC (-31 to 77ºF) N/A
SHC629 S4 B 150 T150 GEM 4-150N
PG -25 to 25ºC (-13 to 77ºF)
VG150
Cibus 150 GL150 4 UH 1-150N
Mobil Klübersynth
PAO -35 to 40ºC (-31 to 104ºF) N/A
SHC630 S4 B 220 T220 GEM 4-220N
PG -25 to 40ºC (-13 to 104ºF)
VG220
Cibus 220 GL220 4 UH 1-220N
PAO -20 to 40ºC (-4 to 104ºF) N/A
634 S4 B 460 T460 GEM 4-460N
PG -20 to 40ºC (-4 to 104ºF) N/A
VG460
Cibus 460 GL460 4 UH 1-460N
SHC636 S4 B 680 GEM 4-680N
PG -20 to 40ºC (-4 to 104ºF) N/A N/A
VG680
Cassida Klüberoil
GL680 4 UH1-680N

LUBRICATION TYPES
Lubrication Tables – FLEXBLOC™ (SI/SID Series) Worm Gear Units

NORD uses a semi automated assembly process to produce the FLEXBLOC™ gear unit assemblies. During this process the gear
units are factory filled in accordance with the following table.
FG-PG -25 to 80ºC (-13 to 176ºF) Klübersynth UH1 6-680 Inch
VG680
PG -20 to 40ºC (-4 to 104ºF) Klübersynth GH 6-680 Metric
FG-PG -25 to 40ºC (-13 to 104ºF) Klübersynth UH1 6-220 Inch
VG220
PG -25 to 40ºC (-13 to 104ºF) Klübersynth GH 6-220 Metric

NLGI 2 Li-Complex PAO -25 to 80ºC (-13 to 176ºF) Kluber / Petamo GHY133N S
0 Aluminum FG -25 to 40ºC (-13 to 104ºF) Kluber / Klubersynth UH1 14-151 S
IMPORTANT NOTE

NOTICE
wear.
information.
olefin (PAO) oils.

LUBRICATION TYPES

Shell Castrol
SHC627 S4 B 100 GEM 4-100N
Mobil Klübersynth
VG 100
Cibus 100 4 UH 1-100N
Mobil Klübersynth
PAO -35 to 25ºC (-31 to 77ºF) N/A
SHC629 S4 B 150 T150 GEM 4-150N
PG -25 to 25ºC (-13 to 77ºF)
VG150
Cibus 150 GL150 4 UH 1-150N
Mobil Klübersynth
PAO -35 to 40ºC (-31 to 104ºF) N/A
SHC630 S4 B 220 T220 GEM 4-220N
PG -25 to 40ºC (-13 to 104ºF)
VG220
Cibus 220 GL220 4 UH 1-220N
PAO -20 to 40ºC (-4 to 104ºF) N/A
634 S4 B 460 T460 GEM 4-460N
PG -20 to 40ºC (-4 to 104ºF) N/A
VG460
Cibus 460 GL460 4 UH 1-460N
SHC636 S4 B 680 GEM 4-680N
PG -20 to 40ºC (-4 to 104ºF) N/A N/A
VG680
Cassida Klüberoil
GL680 4 UH1-680N

STANDARD IN-LINE FOOTED
OIL FILL QUANTITIES
Standard In-line footed lubrication

All Standard In-line reducers are shipped from NORD with
a pre-determined oil fill level in accordance to the specified
reducer size and mounting position. When filling these gear M6
units the oil must be measured and added until one estab-
lishes the proper fill quantity. For additional information M2
please refer to the “Oil & vent plug locations” documenta-
tion for your specified gear unit M1
IMPORTANT NOTE M5
For mounting orientations other than shown please consult
NORD Gear. Reducer modifications may be required. M4
M3
Type M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6
Quarts Liters Quarts Liters Quarts Liters Quarts Liters Quarts Liters Quarts Liters
SK0 / SK05 0.14 0.13 0.23 0.22 0.14 0.13 0.23 0.22 0.14 0.13 0.14 0.13
SK000 0.25 0.24 0.42 0.40 0.25 0.24 0.42 0.40 0.25 0.24 0.25 0.24
SK01 / SK015 0.23 0.22 0.40 0.38 0.23 0.22 0.40 0.38 0.23 0.22 0.23 0.22
SK010 / SK0105 0.40 0.38 0.63 0.60 0.40 0.38 0.63 0.60 0.40 0.38 0.40 0.38
SK20 / SK205 0.58 0.55 1.06 1.00 0.58 0.55 1.06 1.00 0.58 0.55 0.58 0.55
SK200 / SK2005 0.85 0.80 1.37 1.30 0.85 0.80 1.37 1.30 0.85 0.80 0.85 0.80
SK25 / SK255 0.53 0.50 1.06 1.00 0.53 0.50 1.06 1.00 0.53 0.50 0.53 0.50
SK250 / SK2505 1.27 1.20 1.59 1.50 1.27 1.20 1.59 1.50 1.27 1.20 1.27 1.20
SK30 / SK305 0.95 0.90 1.37 1.30 0.95 0.90 1.37 1.30 0.95 0.90 0.95 0.90
SK300 / SK3005 1.27 1.20 2.11 2.00 1.27 1.20 2.11 2.00 1.27 1.20 1.27 1.20
SK33 / SK335 1.06 1.00 1.69 1.60 1.06 1.00 1.69 1.60 1.06 1.00 1.06 1.00
SK330 / SK3305 1.90 1.80 2.96 2.80 1.90 1.80 2.96 2.80 1.90 1.80 1.90 1.80

STANDARD IN-LINE FLANGED
OIL FILL QUANTITIES
Standard In-line flanged lubrication

All Standard In-line reducers are shipped from NORD with
reducer size and mounting position. When filling these gear M6
units the oil must be measured and added until one estab-
lishes the proper fill quantity. For additional information M2
please refer to the “Oil & vent plug locations” documenta-
tion for your specified gear unit
M1
IMPORTANT NOTE M4 M5
NORD Gear. Reducer modifications may be required.
M3
SK0 F / SK05 F 0.14 0.13 0.23 0.22 0.14 0.13 0.23 0.22 0.14 0.13 0.14 0.13
SK000 F 0.25 0.24 0.43 0.41 0.25 0.24 0.43 0.41 0.25 0.24 0.25 0.24
SK01 F 0.23 0.22 0.40 0.38 0.23 0.22 0.40 0.38 0.23 0.22 0.23 0.22
SK010 F / SK0105 F 0.37 0.35 0.69 0.65 0.37 0.35 0.78 0.74 0.37 0.35 0.37 0.35
SK20 F 0.37 0.35 0.63 0.60 0.37 0.35 0.63 0.60 0.37 0.35 0.37 0.35
SK200 F / SK2005 F 0.69 0.65 1.00 0.95 0.69 0.65 1.16 1.10 0.69 0.65 0.69 0.65
SK25 F 0.53 0.50 1.06 1.00 0.53 0.50 1.06 1.00 0.53 0.50 0.53 0.50
SK250 F / SK2505 F 0.95 0.90 1.48 1.40 0.95 0.90 1.69 1.60 0.95 0.90 0.95 0.90
SK30 F 0.74 0.70 1.16 1.10 0.74 0.70 1.16 1.10 0.74 0.70 0.74 0.70
SK300 F / SK3005 F 1.32 1.25 1.59 1.50 1.32 1.25 1.90 1.80 1.32 1.25 1.32 1.25
SK33 F / SK335F 1.06 1.00 1.59 1.50 1.06 1.00 1.59 1.50 1.06 1.00 1.06 1.00
SK330 F / SK3305 F 1.69 1.60 2.64 2.50 1.69 1.60 3.06 2.90 1.69 1.60 1.69 1.60

HELICAL IN-LINE FOOTED
OIL FILL QUANTITIES
Helical In-line footed lubrication

The following NORD Gear reducers are shipped from the
factory with a pre-determined oil fill level in accordance
to the specified reducer size and mounting position. For M2
M6
additional information, please refer to the “Oil Plug & Vent
Locations” documentation for your gear unit.
M1
IMPORTANT NOTE
Actual oil volume can vary slightly depending upon the M5
M4
gear case size, mounting and ratio. Prior to commission-
ing the reducer, check the oil-fill level using the reducer’s
oil level plug and drain or add addition oil as needed. The
minimum acceptable oil level is 0.15 in (4mm) below the
oil level hole.

M3
SK02 0.21 0.20 0.79 0.75 0.79 0.75 0.69 0.65 0.63 0.60 0.63 0.60
SK 03 0.37 0.35 1.27 1.20 0.85 0.80 1.06 1.00 0.74 0.70 0.74 0.70
SK11E 0.26 0.25 0.53 0.50 0.69 0.65 0.53 0.50 0.42 0.40 0.42 0.40
SK12 0.26 0.25 0.85 0.80 0.90 0.85 0.79 0.75 0.58 0.55 0.58 0.55
SK 13 0.79 0.75 1.37 1.30 1.37 1.30 1.27 1.20 0.79 0.75 0.79 0.75
SK21E 0.63 0.60 1.27 1.20 1.37 1.30 1.06 1.00 1.06 1.00 1.06 1.00
SK22 0.53 0.50 2.01 1.90 2.22 2.10 1.90 1.80 1.48 1.40 1.48 1.40
SK 23 1.27 1.20 2.11 2.00 2.01 1.90 2.54 2.40 1.69 1.60 1.69 1.60
SK31E 1.16 1.10 2.11 2.00 2.32 2.20 1.80 1.70 1.59 1.50 1.59 1.50
SK32 0.95 0.90 2.64 2.50 3.28 3.10 3.28 3.10 2.11 2.00 2.11 2.00
SK 33N 1.85 1.75 3.17 3.00 3.59 3.40 4.23 4.00 2.43 2.30 2.43 2.30
SK41E 1.69 1.60 2.75 2.60 3.49 3.30 2.96 2.80 2.43 2.30 2.43 2.30
SK42 1.48 1.40 4.76 4.50 4.76 4.50 4.54 4.30 3.38 3.20 3.38 3.20
SK 43 3.17 3.00 5.92 5.60 5.49 5.20 6.97 6.60 3.80 3.60 3.80 3.60
SK51E 1.90 1.80 3.70 3.50 4.33 4.10 4.23 4.00 4.02 3.80 4.02 3.80
SK52 2.64 2.50 7.40 7.00 7.19 6.80 7.19 6.80 5.39 5.10 5.39 5.10
SK 53 4.76 4.50 9.19 8.70 8.14 7.70 9.19 8.70 6.34 6.00 6.34 6.00
SK62 6.87 6.50 15.9 15.0 13.7 13.0 16.9 16.0 15.9 15.0 15.9 15.0
SK 63 13.7 13.0 15.3 14.5 15.3 14.5 16.9 16.0 13.7 13.0 13.7 13.0
SK72 10.6 10.0 24.3 23.0 19.0 18.0 27.5 26.0 24.3 23.0 24.3 23.0
SK 73 21.7 20.5 21.1 20.0 23.8 22.5 28.5 27.0 21.1 20.0 21.1 20.0
SK82 14.8 14.0 37.0 35.0 28.5 27.0 46.5 44.0 33.8 32.0 33.8 32.0
SK 83 31.7 30.0 32.8 31.0 35.9 34.0 39.1 37.0 34.9 33.0 34.9 33.0
SK92 26.4 25.0 77.0 73.0 49.7 47.0 80.0 76.0 55.0 52.0 55.0 52.0
SK 93 56.0 53.0 74.0 70.0 62.0 59.0 76.0 72.0 52.0 49.0 52.0 49.0
SK102 38.0 36.0 84.0 79.0 70.0 66.0 108 102 75.0 71.0 75.0 71.0
SK 103 78.0 74.0 75.0 71.0 78.0 74.0 102 97.0 71.0 67.0 71.0 67.0

HELICAL IN-LINE FLANGED
OIL FILL QUANTITIES
Helical In-line flanged lubrication

factory with a pre-determined oil fill level in accordance M2
M1
IMPORTANT NOTE
M5
M4
oil level hole.

M3
SK02F 0.26 0.25 0.74 0.70 0.74 0.70 0.74 0.70 0.53 0.50 0.53 0.50
SK 03 F 0.58 0.55 1.00 0.95 0.95 0.90 1.27 1.20 0.95 0.90 0.95 0.90
SK11E F 0.32 0.30 0.53 0.50 0.53 0.50 0.48 0.45 0.42 0.40 0.42 0.40
SK12F 0.37 0.35 0.90 0.85 0.95 0.90 0.95 0.90 0.74 0.70 0.74 0.70
SK 13 F 1.06 1.00 1.37 1.30 1.37 1.30 1.27 1.20 1.06 1.00 1.06 1.00
SK21E F 0.53 0.50 1.27 1.20 1.37 1.30 0.63 0.60 0.95 0.90 0.95 0.90
SK22F 0.74 0.70 1.90 1.80 1.90 1.80 1.90 1.80 1.48 1.40 1.48 1.40
SK 23 F 1.48 1.40 2.75 2.60 2.43 2.30 2.96 2.80 2.96 2.80 2.96 2.80
SK31E F 0.95 0.90 1.90 1.80 1.74 1.65 1.37 1.30 1.32 1.25 1.32 1.25
SK32F 1.27 1.20 2.96 2.80 3.28 3.10 3.28 3.10 2.32 2.20 2.32 2.20
SK 33N F 2.32 2.20 3.17 3.00 3.59 3.40 4.44 4.20 2.43 2.30 2.43 2.30
SK41E F 1.27 1.20 2.43 2.30 2.85 2.70 2.11 2.00 2.01 1.90 2.01 1.90
SK42F 1.90 1.80 4.65 4.40 4.76 4.50 4.23 4.00 3.91 3.70 3.91 3.70
SK 43 F 3.70 3.50 6.02 5.70 5.28 5.00 6.45 6.10 4.33 4.10 4.33 4.10
SK51E F 1.90 1.80 3.70 3.50 4.33 4.10 3.17 3.00 4.02 3.80 4.02 3.80
SK52F 3.17 3.00 7.19 6.80 6.55 6.20 7.82 7.40 5.92 5.60 5.92 5.60
SK 53 F 5.49 5.20 8.88 8.40 7.40 7.00 9.40 8.90 7.08 6.70 7.08 6.70
SK 62 F 7.40 7.00 15.9 15.0 14.8 14.0 19.5 18.5 16.9 16.0 16.9 16.0
SK 63 F 14.3 13.5 14.8 14.0 16.4 15.5 19.0 18.0 14.8 14.0 14.8 14.0
SK 72 F 10.6 10.0 24.3 23.0 19.5 18.5 29.6 28.0 24.3 23.0 24.3 23.0
SK 73 F 23.2 22.0 23.8 22.5 24.3 23.0 29.1 27.5 21.1 20.0 21.1 20.0
SK 82 F 15.9 15.0 39.1 37.0 30.6 29.0 47.6 45.0 36.5 34.5 36.5 34.5
SK 83 F 32.8 31.0 35.9 34.0 37.0 35.0 42.3 40.0 35.9 34.0 35.9 34.0
SK 92 F 27.5 26.0 77.0 73.0 49.7 47.0 82.0 78.0 55.0 52.0 55.0 52.0
SK 93 F 56.0 53.0 74.0 70.0 62.0 59.0 78.0 74.0 52.0 49.0 52.0 49.0
SK 102 F 42.3 40.0 86.0 81.0 70.0 66.0 110 104 76.0 72.0 76.0 72.0
SK 103 F 73.0 69.0 82.0 78.0 82.0 78.0 105 99.0 71.0 67.0 71.0 67.0

CLINCHER™
OIL FILL QUANTITIES
CLINCHER™ lubrication
Unless otherwise noted below, the following NORD Gear
reducers are shipped from the factory with a pre-determined
oil fill level in accordance to the specified reducer size and
mounting position. For additional information, please refer M6
to the “Oil Plug & Vent Locations” documentation for your M2
gear unit.
M1
IMPORTANT NOTE
gear case size, mounting and ratio. Prior to commission- M4
oil level hole.

SK 0182NB 0.42 0.40 0.58 0.55 0.58 0.55 0.42 0.40 0.42 0.40 0.42 0.40
SK 0282NB 0.74 0.70 1.16 1.10 0.85 0.80 1.16 1.10 0.95 0.90 0.95 0.90
SK 1282 1.00 0.95 1.37 1.30 0.95 0.90 1.37 1.30 1.06 1.00 1.06 1.00
SK 1382NB 1.48 1.40 2.43 2.30 2.32 2.20 2.32 2.20 2.11 2.00 2.11 2.00
SK 1382 1.53 1.45 1.69 1.60 1.22 1.15 1.80 1.70 1.16 1.10 1.16 1.10
SK 2282 1.80 1.70 2.43 2.30 1.80 1.70 2.32 2.20 2.01 1.90 2.01 1.90
SK 2382 2.43 2.30 2.85 2.70 2.22 2.10 3.38 3.20 2.11 2.00 2.11 2.00
SK 3282 2.96 2.80 4.23 4.00 3.49 3.30 4.02 3.80 3.17 3.00 3.17 3.00
SK 3382 4.02 3.80 4.54 4.30 3.17 3.00 5.81 5.50 3.17 3.00 3.17 3.00
SK 4282 4.44 4.20 5.71 5.40 4.65 4.40 5.28 5.00 4.44 4.20 4.44 4.20
SK 4382 6.45 6.10 7.29 6.90 5.18 4.90 8.88 8.40 5.28 5.00 5.28 5.00
SK 5282 7.93 7.50 9.30 8.80 7.93 7.50 9.30 8.80 7.61 7.20 7.61 7.20
SK 5382 13.2 12.5 12.7 12.0 7.08 6.70 14.8 14.0 8.77 8.30 8.77 8.30
SK 6282 18.0 17.0 16.4 15.5 13.2 12.5 18.5 17.5 11.6 11.0 14.8 14.0
SK 6382 16.9 16.0 13.7 13.0 10.6 10.0 19.0 18.0 14.8 14.0 13.2 12.5
SK 7282 26.9 25.5 22.2 21.0 21.7 20.5 28.5 27.0 16.9 16.0 22.2 21.0
SK 7382 23.2 22.0 22.2 21.0 16.9 16.0 26.4 25.0 24.3 23.0 23.2 22.0
SK 8282 39.6 37.5 34.9 33.0 32.2 30.5 46.5 44.0 32.8 31.0 32.8 31.0
SK 8382 36.5 34.5 34.3 32.5 26.4 25.0 40.2 38.0 37.0 35.0 31.7 30.0
SK 9282 79.2 75.0 74.0 70.0 58.1 55.0 76.1 † 72.0 † 63.4 60.0 62.4 59.0
SK 9382 78.2 74.0 74.0 70.0 47.6 45.0 79.2 † 75.0 † 68.7 65.0 63.4 60.0
SK 10282 95.0 90.0 95.0 90.0 42.3 40.0 95.0 † 90.0 † 63.0 60.0 87.0 82.0
SK 10382 90.0 85.0 95.0 90.0 77.0 73.0 106 † 100 † 85 80.0 85.0 80.0
SK10382.1 80.3 76.0 84.5 80.0 75.0 71.0 98.2 93.0 76.1 72.0 70.8 67.0
SK 11282* 174 165 169 160 153 145 206 † 195 † 106 100 148 140
SK 11382* 169 160 164 155 148 140 222 † 210 † 164 155 143 135
SK11382.1* 134.2 127 140.5 133 124.7 118 205 194 131 124 118.4 112
SK 12382* 169 160 164 155 148 140 222 † 210 † 164 155 143 135
* For shipping purposes the larger Clincher ™ gear units are supplied without oil.
† Oil quantities shown are for the gearbox only. When the OT (oil tank) option is used, the oil must be filled to the level shown on the
dipstick which is located inside of the oil tank. Even when the gear unit is filled by NORD, the user MUST add more oil untill the oil is
filled to the proper level.

90.1 HELICAL-BEVEL FOOTED
OIL FILL QUANTITIES
90.1 Helical-bevel footed lubrication

reducers are shipped from the factory with a pre-determined M2
oil fill level in accordance to the specified reducer size and M6
mounting position. For additional information, please refer
to the “Oil Plug & Vent Locations” documentation for your
gear unit.
M1
IMPORTANT NOTE
M5
oil level hole.

SK 9012.1 0.74 0.70 1.80 1.70 2.01 1.90 2.22 2.10 1.16 1.10 1.59 1.50
SK 9013.1 1.43 1.35 2.22 2.10 2.27 2.15 2.91 2.75 1.06 1.00 1.90 1.80
SK 9016.1 0.74 0.70 1.80 1.70 2.01 1.90 2.22 2.10 1.16 1.10 1.59 1.50
SK 9017.1 1.37 1.30 2.11 2.00 2.22 2.10 2.85 2.70 1.06 1.00 1.80 1.70
SK 9022.1 1.37 1.30 3.06 2.90 3.49 3.30 4.02 3.80 1.80 1.70 2.96 2.80
SK 9023.1 2.32 2.20 3.38 3.20 3.80 3.60 4.97 4.70 2.32 2.20 3.06 2.90
SK 9032.1 1.90 1.80 5.71 5.40 6.45 6.10 7.19 6.80 3.17 3.00 4.86 4.60
SK 9033.1 3.28 3.10 6.02 5.70 6.66 6.30 8.45 8.00 3.59 3.40 5.07 4.80
SK 9042.1 2.85 2.70 9.51 9.00 10.6 10.0 11.3 10.7 5.49 5.20 8.14 7.70
SK 9043.1 5.28 5.00 10.7 10.1 11.6 11.0 14.1 13.3 6.02 5.70 8.56 8.10
SK 9052.1 6.87 6.50 16.9 16.0 20.1 19.0 22.7 21.5 11.6 11.0 16.4 15.5
SK 9053.1 10.6 10.0 18.0 17.0 21.1 20.0 25.9 24.5 12.2 11.5 17.4 16.5
SK 9062.1 10.6 10.0 29.1 27.5 33.8 32.0 38.0 36.0 19.0 18.0 25.4 24.0
SK 9072.1 10.6 10.0 29.1 27.5 33.8 32.0 38.0 36.0 19.0 18.0 25.4 24.0
SK 9082.1 18.0 17.0 54.0 52.0 66.0 63.0 76.0 72.0 34.9 33.0 49.1 46.5
SK 9086.1 30.6 29.0 77.0 73.0 90.0 85.0 108 102 51.0 48.0 66.0 62.0
SK 9092.1 43.3 41.0 166 157 180 170 182 172 85.0 80.0 95.0 90.0
SK 9096.1 74.0 70.0 198 187 205 194 268 254 115 109 161 152
Oil Levels shown apply to base models and gear units ending in LX, AX, & VX.

90.1 HELICAL-BEVEL FLANGED
OIL FILL QUANTITIES
90.1 Helical-bevel flanged lubrication

reducers are shipped from the factory with a pre-determined M2
oil fill level in accordance to the specified reducer size and M6
mounting position. For additional information, please refer
to the “Oil Plug & Vent Locations” documentation for your
gear unit.
M1
IMPORTANT NOTE M5
M4
oil level hole. VF Unit Shown
For mounting orientations other than shown please consult M3
SK 9012.1 1.06 1.00 2.01 1.90 2.01 1.90 2.32 2.20 1.27 1.20 1.80 1.70
SK 9013.1 1.53 1.45 2.43 2.30 2.22 2.10 2.96 2.80 1.11 1.05 1.90 1.80
SK 9016.1 1.06 1.00 2.01 1.90 2.01 1.90 2.32 2.20 1.27 1.20 1.80 1.70
SK 9017.1 1.53 1.45 2.43 2.30 2.22 2.10 2.96 2.80 1.11 1.05 1.90 1.80
SK 9022.1 1.69 1.60 3.70 3.50 3.70 3.50 4.44 4.20 2.43 2.30 2.96 2.80
SK 9023.1 2.43 2.30 3.70 3.50 4.02 3.80 5.60 5.30 2.32 2.20 3.59 3.40
SK 9032.1 2.22 2.10 5.07 4.80 6.76 6.40 7.50 7.10 3.49 3.30 5.39 5.10
SK 9033.1 3.91 3.70 6.02 5.70 7.08 6.70 9.09 8.60 3.80 3.60 5.60 5.30
SK 9042.1 4.76 4.50 10.6 10.0 10.6 10.0 12.2 11.5 6.87 6.50 8.66 8.20
SK 9043.1 6.87 6.50 11.1 10.5 12.6 11.9 15.5 14.7 7.08 6.70 9.83 9.30
SK 9052.1 7.93 7.50 17.4 16.5 21.1 20.0 24.8 23.5 12.2 11.5 19.0 18.0
SK 9053.1 13.7 13.0 19.0 18.0 22.7 21.5 28.0 26.5 13.7 13.0 18.0 17.0
SK 9062.1 12.7 12.0 29.1 27.5 34.9 33.0 40.7 38.5 20.1 19.0 27.5 26.0
SK 9072.1 12.7 12.0 29.1 27.5 34.9 33.0 40.7 38.5 20.1 19.0 27.5 26.0
SK 9082.1 22.2 21.0 57.0 54.0 70.0 66.0 85.0 80.0 40.2 38.0 55.0 52.0
SK 9086.1 38.0 36.0 82.0 78.0 96.0 91.0 113 107 56.0 53.0 80.0 76.0
SK 9092.1 42.3 40.0 137 130 163 154 185 175 87.0 82.0 96.0 91.0
SK 9096.1 85.0 80.0 198 187 204 193 272 257 119 113 165 156
Oil Levels shown apply to base models and gear units ending in AZ, AF, VZ, & VF.

92 SERIES HELICAL-BEVEL FOOTED
OIL FILL QUANTITIES
92 Helical-bevel footed lubrication

to the specified reducer size and mounting position. For
M1
IMPORTANT NOTE M2

oil level hole. M4

SK 92072 0.42 0.40 0.63 0.60 0.53 0.50 0.58 0.55 0.42 0.40 0.42 0.40
SK 92172 0.63 0.60 0.95 0.90 1.06 1.00 1.16 1.10 1.16 1.10 0.85 0.80
SK 92372 0.95 0.90 1.69 1.60 1.59 1.50 2.01 1.90 1.59 1.50 0.95 0.90
SK 92672 1.90 1.80 3.70 3.50 3.80 3.60 3.59 3.40 2.75 2.60 2.75 2.60
SK 92772 2.43 2.30 4.76 4.50 4.86 4.60 5.60 5.30 4.33 4.10 4.33 4.10
Oil Levels shown apply to base models and gear units ending in LX, AX, & VX.

92.1/93.1 SERIES HELICAL-BEVEL
OIL FILL QUANTITIES
92.1/93.1 Helical-bevel mount lubrication

IMPORTANT NOTE
reducer size & mounting position. For additional information,
gear case size, mounting and ratio. Prior to commissioning
please refer to the “Oil Plug & Vent Locations” documentation
the reducer, check the oil-fill level using the reducer’s oil
for your gear unit.
level plug and drain or add addition oil as needed.
For mounting orientations other than shown please

consult NORD Gear. Reducer modifications may be
required.
M2 M2
M6 M6
M1 M1
M5 M5
M4 M4
M3 M3
92.1 Series Foot or 93.1 Series Foot or

Flange Mount Flange Mount
92.1 Series Oil Fill
SK 920072.1 0.22 0.21 0.50 0.47 0.22 0.36 0.22 0.34 0.22 0.28 0.22 0.28
SK 92072.1 0.28 0.26 0.52 0.49 0.44 0.42 0.57 0.54 0.31 0.29 0.33 0.31
SK 92172.1 0.36 0.34 0.65 0.61 0.55 0.52 0.71 0.67 0.44 0.42 0.51 0.48
SK 92372.1 0.45 0.43 0.97 0.92 0.77 0.73 0.88 0.83 0.58 0.55 0.65 0.61
SK 92672.1 0.90 0.85 1.69 1.60 1.27 1.20 1.59 1.50 1.08 1.02 1.08 1.02
SK 92772.1 1.37 1.30 2.80 2.65 1.97 1.86 2.85 2.70 1.69 1.60 1.69 1.60
Oil levels shown apply to all foot & flange mounted units.
93.1 Series Oil Fill

SK 930072.1 0.30 0.28 0.69 0.65 0.22 0.56 0.22 0.54 0.22 0.39 0.22 0.39
SK 93072.1 0.41 0.39 0.98 0.93 0.83 0.79 1.08 1.02 0.52 0.49 0.66 0.62
SK 93172.1 0.63 0.60 1.24 1.17 0.99 0.94 1.29 1.22 0.69 0.65 0.90 0.85
SK 93372.1 1.06 1.00 2.08 1.97 1.74 1.65 2.26 2.14 1.18 1.12 1.42 1.34
SK 93672.1 1.90 1.80 3.41 3.23 2.86 2.71 4.02 3.80 2.13 2.02 2.59 2.45
SK 93772.1 2.87 2.72 4.89 4.63 3.91 3.70 6.13 5.80 3.10 2.93 3.43 3.25
Oil levels shown apply to all foot & flange mounted units.

92 SERIES HELICAL-BEVEL FLANGED
OIL FILL QUANTITIES
92 Helical-bevel flanged lubrication

M2
M1
IMPORTANT NOTE
M5
minimum acceptable oil level is 0.15 in (4mm) below the M4
oil level hole.
VF Unit Shown
M3
SK 92072 0.42 0.40 0.63 0.60 0.58 0.55 0.58 0.55 0.42 0.40 0.42 0.40
SK 92172 0.53 0.50 1.06 1.00 0.95 0.90 1.11 1.05 0.95 0.90 0.63 0.60
SK 92372 1.27 1.20 1.69 1.60 1.59 1.50 2.01 1.90 1.37 1.30 1.37 1.30
SK 92672 1.69 1.60 2.96 2.80 2.64 2.50 3.49 3.30 2.54 2.40 2.54 2.40
SK 92772 2.96 2.80 4.65 4.40 4.76 4.50 5.81 5.50 3.70 3.50 3.70 3.50
Oil Levels shown apply to gear units ending in AZ, AF, VZ, & VF.

HELICAL-WORM FOOTED
OIL FILL QUANTITIES
Helical-worm footed lubrication

IMPORTANT NOTE
oil level hole.

SK 02040 0.42 0.40 0.85 0.80 0.79 0.75 0.69 0.65 0.53 0.50 0.53 0.50
SK 02040.1 0.13 0.12 0.48 0.45 0.31 0.29 0.41 0.39 0.30 0.28 0.30 0.28
SK 02050 0.42 0.40 1.48 1.40 1.16 1.10 1.37 1.30 0.74 0.70 0.74 0.70
SK 13050 0.79 0.75 1.85 1.75 1.37 1.30 1.85 1.75 0.79 0.75 0.79 0.75
SK 12063 0.63 0.60 1.90 1.80 1.27 1.20 1.69 1.60 1.06 1.00 1.06 1.00
SK 13063 1.06 1.00 2.43 2.30 1.59 1.50 2.32 2.20 1.16 1.10 1.16 1.10
SK 12080 0.95 0.90 3.28 3.10 2.54 2.40 3.17 3.00 1.90 1.80 1.90 1.80
SK 13080 1.80 1.70 3.70 3.50 3.70 3.50 3.70 3.50 2.11 2.00 2.11 2.00
SK 32100 1.59 1.50 6.66 6.30 5.92 5.60 5.81 5.50 3.80 3.60 3.80 3.60
SK 33100 2.54 2.40 6.76 6.40 5.71 5.40 6.87 6.50 3.59 3.40 3.59 3.40
SK 42125 2.96 2.80 12.5 11.8 10.8 10.2 10.6 10.0 6.55 6.20 6.55 6.20
SK 43125 4.49 4.25 13.7 13.0 11.1 10.5 14.3 13.5 7.61 7.20 7.61 7.20

HELICAL-WORM SOLID SHAFT/FLANGED
OIL FILL QUANTITIES
Helical-worm solid shaft/flanged lubrication

IMPORTANT NOTE
oil level hole.

SK 02040 VF 0.53 0.50 0.85 0.80 0.79 0.75 0.63 0.60 0.53 0.50 0.53 0.50
SK 02040.1 0.13 0.12 0.48 0.45 0.31 0.29 0.41 0.39 0.30 0.28 0.30 0.28
SK 02050 VF 0.42 0.40 1.59 1.50 1.32 1.25 1.27 1.20 0.95 0.90 0.79 0.75
SK 13050 VF 0.79 0.75 1.90 1.80 1.59 1.50 1.80 1.70 1.11 1.05 0.95 0.90
SK 12063 VF 0.53 0.50 2.06 1.95 1.80 1.70 1.85 1.75 1.27 1.20 1.00 0.95
SK 13063 VF 1.06 1.00 2.43 2.30 2.01 1.90 2.32 2.20 1.43 1.35 1.16 1.10
SK 12080 VF 0.95 0.90 3.91 3.70 3.38 3.20 3.59 3.40 2.64 2.50 2.43 2.30
SK 13080 VF 1.69 1.60 4.02 3.80 3.70 3.50 4.12 3.90 2.85 2.70 2.64 2.50
SK 32100 VF 1.48 1.40 6.66 6.30 6.45 6.10 6.45 6.10 4.23 4.00 3.80 3.60
SK 33100 VF 2.80 2.65 7.61 7.20 6.76 6.40 8.03 7.60 4.54 4.30 4.02 3.80
SK 42125 VF 3.17 3.00 12.2 11.5 12.2 11.5 11.6 11.0 8.88 8.40 7.71 7.30
SK 43125 VF 4.97 4.70 15.9 15.0 13.7 13.0 16.9 16.0 9.51 9.00 8.14 7.70

HELICAL-WORM HOLLOW SHAFT
OIL FILL QUANTITIES
Helical-worm hollow shaft lubrication

factory with a pre-determined oil fi ll level in accordance
to the specifi ed reducer size and mounting position. For
IMPORTANT NOTE
gear case size, mounting and ratio. Prior to commissioning
the reducer, check the oil-fi ll level using the reducer’s oil
level plug and drain or add addition oil as needed. The
oil level hole.

AF Unit Shown
SK 02040 0.42 0.40 0.74 0.70 0.69 0.65 0.69 0.65 0.58 0.55 0.58 0.55
SK 02040.1 0.13 0.12 0.48 0.45 0.31 0.29 0.41 0.39 0.30 0.28 0.30 0.28
SK 02050 0.48 0.45 1.48 1.40 1.22 1.15 1.16 1.10 0.79 0.75 0.79 0.75
SK 13050 0.95 0.90 1.90 1.80 1.37 1.30 1.74 1.65 1.37 1.30 1.37 1.30
SK 12063 0.58 0.55 1.53 1.45 1.69 1.60 1.69 1.60 1.16 1.10 1.16 1.10
SK 13063 1.11 1.05 2.22 2.10 1.90 1.80 2.22 2.10 1.48 1.40 1.48 1.40
SK 12080 0.85 0.80 3.28 3.10 3.38 3.20 2.96 2.80 1.90 1.80 1.90 1.80
SK 13080 1.69 1.60 3.80 3.60 3.06 2.90 3.96 3.75 2.11 2.00 2.11 2.00
SK 32100 1.59 1.50 5.92 5.60 5.92 5.60 5.60 5.30 4.23 4.00 4.23 4.00
SK 33100 2.75 2.60 6.34 6.00 6.13 5.80 6.34 6.00 3.70 3.50 3.70 3.50
SK 42125 3.17 3.00 13.2 12.5 11.4 10.8 11.4 10.8 6.87 6.50 6.87 6.50
SK 43125 4.86 4.60 14.4 13.6 12.0 11.4 15.1 14.3 8.03 7.60 8.03 7.60
Oil Levels shown apply to gear units ending in AZ, AF.
NORD Drivesystems NORD Gear Corporation

Línea gratuita en Mexico: 800.836.9192 Línea gratuita en Estados Unidos: 888.314.6673
07.11.18 www.nord.com/docs
175
NORDBLOC FOOTED ®
OIL FILL QUANTITIES

NORDBLOC® footed lubrication

additional information, please refer to the “Oil Plug & Vent M2
IMPORTANT NOTE M6
M5
M4
oil level hole.

SK 172 0.37 0.35 0.53 0.50 0.53 0.50 0.53 0.50 0.53 0.50 0.53 0.50
SK 272 0.63 0.60 1.06 1.00 1.06 1.00 1.06 1.00 1.06 1.00 1.06 1.00
SK 273 0.66 0.62 1.16 1.10 1.16 1.10 1.16 1.10 1.16 1.10 1.16 1.10
SK 372 0.63 0.60 1.06 1.00 1.06 1.00 1.06 1.00 1.06 1.00 1.06 1.00
SK 373 0.58 0.55 1.16 1.10 1.16 1.10 1.16 1.10 1.16 1.10 1.16 1.10
SK 472 1.06 1.00 2.01 1.90 2.01 1.90 2.11 2.00 1.90 1.80 1.90 1.80
SK 473 1.37 1.30 2.64 2.50 2.22 2.10 2.54 2.40 2.22 2.10 2.22 2.10
SK 572 1.06 1.00 2.01 1.90 2.01 1.90 2.11 2.00 1.90 1.80 1.90 1.80
SK 573 1.37 1.30 2.64 2.50 2.22 2.10 2.54 2.40 2.22 2.10 2.22 2.10
SK 672 1.48 1.40 3.59 3.40 3.28 3.10 3.33 3.15 1.53 1.45 3.33 3.15
SK 673 1.90 1.80 4.02 3.80 3.38 3.20 3.59 3.40 3.06 2.90 3.17 3.00
SK 772 2.11 2.00 3.49 3.30 3.70 3.50 4.44 4.20 2.85 2.70 3.49 3.30
SK 773 2.64 2.50 4.76 4.50 3.91 3.70 4.86 4.60 3.49 3.30 3.49 3.30
SK 872 3.91 3.70 10.1 9.60 9.62 9.10 7.71 7.30 4.97 4.70 8.45 8.00
SK 873 6.55 6.20 8.88 8.40 7.93 7.50 9.62 9.10 7.93 7.50 7.93 7.50
SK 972 6.87 6.50 16.9 16.0 16.6 15.7 15.5 14.7 8.98 8.50 14.8 14.0
SK 973 11.6 11.0 16.7 15.8 13.7 13.0 16.9 16.0 14.1 13.3 13.7 13.0

NORDBLOC FLANGED ®
OIL FILL QUANTITIES

NORDBLOC® flanged lubrication

The following NORD Gear reducers are shipped from the M2
M6
IMPORTANT NOTE
M5
oil level hole.
M4
M3
Mounting
M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6
Position
SK 172 F 0.37 0.35 0.53 0.50 0.53 0.50 0.53 0.50 0.53 0.50 0.53 0.50
SK 272 F 0.63 0.60 1.06 1.00 1.06 1.00 1.06 1.00 1.06 1.00 1.06 1.00
SK 273 F 0.66 0.62 1.16 1.10 1.16 1.10 1.16 1.10 1.16 1.10 1.16 1.10
SK 372 F 0.63 0.60 1.06 1.00 1.06 1.00 1.06 1.00 1.06 1.00 1.06 1.00
SK 373 F 0.58 0.55 1.16 1.10 1.16 1.10 1.16 1.10 1.16 1.10 1.16 1.10
SK 472 F 1.06 1.00 2.01 1.90 2.01 1.90 2.01 1.90 2.01 1.90 1.59 1.50
SK 473 F 1.32 1.25 2.54 2.40 2.22 2.10 2.64 2.50 2.22 2.10 2.22 2.10
SK 572 F 1.06 1.00 2.01 1.90 2.01 1.90 2.01 1.90 2.01 1.90 1.59 1.50
SK 573 F 1.32 1.25 2.54 2.40 2.22 2.10 2.64 2.50 2.22 2.10 2.22 2.10
SK 672 F 1.22 1.15 3.59 3.40 2.85 2.70 2.96 2.80 1.32 1.25 2.85 2.70
SK 673 F 1.80 1.70 4.02 3.80 3.17 3.00 3.38 3.20 3.17 3.00 3.17 3.00
SK 772 F 1.69 1.60 3.49 3.30 3.70 3.50 3.49 3.30 3.28 3.10 3.28 3.10
SK 773 F 2.43 2.30 5.28 5.00 3.80 3.60 4.76 4.50 4.12 3.90 4.12 3.90
SK 872 F 3.70 3.50 9.51 9.00 8.35 7.90 8.14 7.70 4.12 3.90 7.61 7.20
SK 873 F 5.28 5.00 9.30 8.80 8.03 7.60 8.45 8.00 8.45 8.00 8.45 8.00
SK 972 F 6.87 6.50 15.9 15.0 13.7 13.0 14.3 13.5 6.87 6.50 12.7 12.0
SK 973 F 10.9 10.3 17.4 16.5 13.7 13.0 16.9 16.0 14.8 14.0 14.8 14.0

NORDBLOC .1 FOOTED ®
OIL FILL QUANTITIES

NORDBLOC®.1 Fill Quantities (Footed)

factory with a pre-determined oil fill level in accordance to M1 M2
the specified reducer size and mounting position. For oil plug
& vent locations please see U14700.
IMPORTANT NOTE
M6 M4
correct oil level should be located at the lower edge of the
oil level hole.

M3
SK 071.1 0.19 0.18 0.42 0.40 0.40 0.38 0.42 0.40 0.32 0.30 0.32 0.30
SK 072.1 0.17 0.16 0.34 0.32 0.22 0.21 0.24 0.23 0.19 0.18 0.21 0.20
SK 171.1 0.23 0.22 0.42 0.40 0.38 0.36 0.42 0.40 0.35 0.33 0.35 0.33
SK 172.1 0.29 0.27 0.62 0.59 0.44 0.42 0.48 0.45 0.34 0.32 0.41 0.39
SK 371.1 0.37 0.35 0.61 0.58 0.58 0.55 0.61 0.58 0.52 0.49 0.52 0.49
SK 372.1 0.48 0.45 1.10 1.05 0.79 0.75 1.10 1.00 0.63 0.60 0.69 0.65
SK 373.1 0.48 0.45 1.10 1.05 0.79 0.75 1.10 1.00 0.63 0.60 0.69 0.65
SK 571.1 0.51 0.48 0.91 0.86 0.85 0.80 0.97 0.92 0.72 0.68 0.72 0.68
SK 572.1 0.79 0.75 2.00 1.90 1.60 1.50 2.10 2.00 1.20 1.10 1.20 1.15
SK 573.1 0.79 0.75 2.00 1.90 1.60 1.50 2.10 2.00 1.20 1.10 1.20 1.15
SK 672.1 1.20 1.10 2.70 2.60 2.30 2.15 2.90 2.70 1.60 1.55 1.70 1.65
SK 673.1 1.20 1.10 2.70 2.60 2.30 2.15 2.90 2.70 1.60 1.55 1.70 1.65
SK 771.1 0.95 0.90 1.60 1.50 1.30 1.20 1.80 1.70 1.20 1.16 1.20 1.16
SK 772.1 1.40 1.30 4.00 3.80 2.50 2.40 3.40 3.20 1.70 1.60 2.60 2.50
SK 772.1 VL 2.10 2.00 4.00 3.80 2.50 2.40 3.40 3.20 1.70 1.60 2.60 2.50
SK 773.1 2.40 2.30 4.00 3.80 3.50 3.30 3.40 3.20 2.50 2.40 3.30 3.10
SK 773.1 VL 2.40 2.30 4.00 3.80 3.50 3.30 3.40 3.20 2.50 2.40 3.30 3.10
SK 872.1 3.10 2.90 8.20 7.80 4.90 4.60 6.80 6.40 2.60 2.50 4.20 4.00
SK 872.1 VL 5.30 5.00 8.20 7.80 4.90 4.60 6.80 6.40 2.60 2.50 4.20 4.00
SK 873.1 4.40 4.20 8.20 7.80 6.20 5.90 6.80 6.40 4.30 4.10 6.20 5.90
SK 873.1 VL 4.40 4.20 8.20 7.80 6.20 5.90 6.80 6.40 4.30 4.10 6.20 5.90
SK 972.1 4.80 4.50 13.00 12.00 7.90 7.50 12.00 11.50 4.40 4.20 7.90 7.50
SK 972.1 VL 9.00 8.50 13.00 12.00 7.90 7.50 12.00 11.50 4.40 4.20 7.90 7.50
SK 973.1 7.90 7.50 13.00 12.00 11.00 10.50 12.00 11.50 7.90 7.50 11.00 10.50
SK 973.1 VL 7.90 7.50 13.00 12.00 11.00 10.50 12.00 11.50 7.90 7.50 11.00 10.50

NORDBLOC .1 FLANGED ®
OIL FILL QUANTITIES

NORDBLOC®.1 Fill Quantities (Flanged)

M1
IMPORTANT NOTE
M5
correct oil level should be located at the lower edge of the
oil level hole.

M3
SK 071.1 F 0.19 0.18 0.42 0.40 0.40 0.38 0.42 0.40 0.32 0.30 0.32 0.30
SK 072.1 F 0.17 0.16 0.34 0.32 0.22 0.21 0.24 0.23 0.19 0.18 0.21 0.20
SK 171.1 F 0.23 0.22 0.42 0.40 0.38 0.36 0.42 0.40 0.35 0.33 0.35 0.33
SK 172.1 F 0.29 0.27 0.62 0.59 0.44 0.42 0.48 0.45 0.34 0.32 0.41 0.39
SK 371.1 F 0.37 0.35 0.61 0.58 0.58 0.55 0.61 0.58 0.52 0.49 0.52 0.49
SK 372.1 F 0.48 0.45 1.10 1.05 0.79 0.75 1.10 1.00 0.63 0.60 0.69 0.65
SK 373.1 F 0.48 0.45 1.10 1.05 0.79 0.75 1.10 1.00 0.63 0.60 0.69 0.65
SK 571.1 F 0.51 0.48 0.91 0.86 0.85 0.80 0.97 0.92 0.72 0.68 0.72 0.68
SK 572.1 F 0.79 0.75 2.00 1.90 1.60 1.50 2.10 2.00 1.20 1.10 1.20 1.15
SK 573.1 F 0.79 0.75 2.00 1.90 1.60 1.50 2.10 2.00 1.20 1.10 1.20 1.15
SK 672.1 F 1.20 1.10 2.70 2.60 2.30 2.15 2.90 2.70 1.60 1.55 1.70 1.65
SK 673.1 F 1.20 1.10 2.70 2.60 2.30 2.15 2.90 2.70 1.60 1.55 1.70 1.65
SK 771.1 F 0.95 0.90 1.60 1.50 1.30 1.20 1.80 1.70 1.20 1.16 1.20 1.16
SK 772.1 F 1.40 1.30 4.00 3.80 2.50 2.40 3.50 3.30 1.80 1.70 2.50 2.40
SK 772.1 VL F 2.10 2.00 4.00 3.80 2.50 2.40 3.50 3.30 1.80 1.70 2.50 2.40
SK 773.1 F 2.10 2.00 3.70 3.50 3.40 3.20 3.10 2.90 2.40 2.30 3.20 3.00
SK 773.1 VL F 2.10 2.00 3.70 3.50 3.40 3.20 3.10 2.90 2.40 2.30 3.20 3.00
SK 872.1 F 3.40 3.20 7.90 7.50 5.40 5.10 7.10 6.70 2.70 2.60 4.50 4.30
SK 872.1 VL F 5.30 5.00 7.90 7.50 5.40 5.10 7.10 6.70 2.70 2.60 4.50 4.30
SK 873.1 F 4.30 4.10 8.00 7.60 7.30 6.90 7.00 6.60 5.30 5.00 7.00 6.60
SK 873.1 VL F 4.30 4.10 8.00 7.60 7.30 6.90 7.00 6.60 5.30 5.00 7.00 6.60
SK 972.1 F 4.80 4.50 13.00 12.50 8.50 8.00 13.00 12.50 4.80 4.50 8.10 7.70
SK 972.1 VL F 9.00 8.50 13.00 12.50 8.50 8.00 13.00 12.50 4.80 4.50 8.10 7.70
SK 973.1 F 7.80 7.40 13.00 12.20 12.00 11.10 12.00 11.60 8.50 8.00 12.00 10.90
SK 973.1 VL F 7.80 7.40 13.00 12.20 12.00 11.10 12.00 11.60 8.50 8.00 12.00 10.90

®
OIL FILL QUANTITIES - FOOT HOUSING
MINICASE® (SM Series) Lubrication

NORD MINICASE® (SM Series) worm gear reducers and worm
gearmotors are inherently maintence free, factory oil filled,
and supplied with a high quality, long life synthetic gear oil
intended to be suitable for the life of the product. These gear
units are also supplied without oil service plugs or vents.
Related User Manuals

U10790 MINICASE® (SM Series) Worm – Lubrication Guidelines.
U11040 MINICASE® (SM Series) Worm – Lubrication Types.
IMPORTANT NOTE
oz ml oz ml oz ml oz ml oz ml oz ml
SK 1SM31 4.1 120 4.1 120 4.1 120 4.1 120 4.1 120 4.1 120
SK 1SM40 7.4 220 7.4 220 7.4 220 7.4 220 7.4 220 7.4 220
SK 2SM40 11.2 330 11.2 330 11.2 330 12.2 360 11.2 330 11.2 330
SK 1SM50 8.5 250 8.5 250 8.5 250 8.5 250 8.5 250 8.5 250
SK 2SM50 11.8 350 11.8 350 11.8 350 14.2 420 11.8 350 11.8 350
SK 1SM63 14.2 420 14.2 420 14.2 420 14.2 420 14.2 420 14.2 420
SK 2SM63 17.9 530 17.9 530 17.9 530 21.3 630 17.9 530 17.9 530
Oil levels shown apply to any foot-mount gear housings including those ending with no suffix or ending with LX or AX.

®
OIL FILL QUANTITIES - FOOT HOUSING
MINICASE® (SMI/SMID Series) Lubrication

NORD MINICASE® (SMI/SMID Series) worm gear reducers and
worm gearmotors are inherently maintence free, factory oil
filled, and supplied with a high quality, long life synthetic gear
oil intended to be suitable for the life of the product. For lubri-
cation types see user manual U11050.

worm gearmotors are equipped with oil plugs. Venting the
gear unit is optional as discussed in user manual U14750.

U10800 - MINICASE® (SMI/SMID Series) Worm –
Lubrication Guidelines.
Lubrication Types
Oil Plug Locations
IMPORTANT NOTE
MINICASE® (SMI Series) Gear Reducer Oil Fill - Foot Housing

SK 1SMI31 1.5 45 1.5 45 1.5 45 1.5 45 1.5 45 1.5 45
SK 1SMI40 2.7 80 2.7 80 2.7 80 2.7 80 2.7 80 2.7 80
SK 1SMI50 4.4 130 4.4 130 4.4 130 4.4 130 4.4 130 4.4 130
SK 1SMI63 9.1 270 9.1 270 9.1 270 9.1 270 9.1 270 9.1 270
SK 1SMI75 14.2 420 14.2 420 14.2 420 14.2 420 14.2 420 14.2 420
Oil fill level is universal and independent of mounting position
Oil levels shown apply to any foot-mount gear housings including those ending with no-suffix or LX or AX.
MINICASE® (SMID Series) Integral Gearmotor Oil Fill - Foot Housing

SK 1SMID31 2.0 60 3.6 105 2.4 70 1.7 50 2.4 70 2.4 70
SK 1SMID40 3.4 100 5.6 165 4.1 120 3.0 90 4.1 120 4.1 120
SK 1SMID50 5.9 175 8.8 260 6.6 195 5.4 160 6.6 195 6.6 195
SK 1SMID63 9.6 285 14.4 425 11.0 325 9.1 270 11.0 325 11.0 325
Oil levels shown apply to any foot-mount gear housings including those ending with no-suffix or LX or AX.

®
OIL FILL QUANTITIES - FLANGE HOUSING
MINICASE® (SM Series) Lubrication

NORD MINICASE® (SM Series) worm gear reducers and worm
gearmotors are inherently maintence free, factory oil filled,
and supplied with a high quality, long life synthetic gear oil
intended to be suitable for the life of the product. These gear
units are also supplied without oil service plugs or vents.

U10790 MINICASE® (SM Series) Worm – Lubrication Guidelines.
U11040 MINICASE® (SM Series) Worm – Lubrication Types.
IMPORTANT NOTE
VF Unit Shown
SK 1SM31 4.4 130 4.4 130 4.4 130 4.4 130 4.4 130 4.4 130
SK 1SM40 8.1 240 8.1 240 8.1 240 8.1 240 8.1 240 8.1 240
SK 2SM40 11.5 340 11.5 340 11.5 340 12.8 380 11.5 340 11.5 340
SK 1SM50 9.1 270 9.1 270 9.1 270 9.1 270 9.1 270 9.1 270
SK 2SM50 12.5 370 12.5 370 12.5 370 15.2 450 12.5 370 12.5 370
SK 1SM63 15.2 450 15.2 450 15.2 450 15.2 450 15.2 450 15.2 450
SK 2SM63 20.3 600 20.3 600 20.3 600 24.7 730 20.3 600 20.3 600
Oil Levels shown apply to flange-mount gear housings with model type ending in AZ, AF, VZ or VF.

®
OIL FILL QUANTITIES - FLANGE HOUSING
MINICASE® (SMI/SMID Series) Lubrication

worm gearmotors are inherently maintence free, factory oil
filled, and supplied with a high quality, long life synthetic gear
oil intended to be suitable for the life of the product. For lubri-
cation types see user manual U11050.

worm gearmotors are equipped with oil plugs. Venting the
gear unit is optional as discussed in user manual U14750.

Lubrication Guidelines.
Lubrication Types
U14750 - MINICASE® (SMI/SMID Series) Worm – VF Unit Shown
Oil Plug Locations
IMPORTANT NOTE
MINICASE® (SMI Series) Gear Reducer Oil Fill - Flange Housing

SK 1SMI31 1.5 45 1.5 45 1.5 45 1.5 45 1.5 45 1.5 45
SK 1SMI40 2.7 80 2.7 80 2.7 80 2.7 80 2.7 80 2.7 80
SK 1SMI50 4.4 130 4.4 130 4.4 130 4.4 130 4.4 130 4.4 130
SK 1SMI63 9.1 270 9.1 270 9.1 270 9.1 270 9.1 270 9.1 270
SK 1SMI75 14.2 420 14.2 420 14.2 420 14.2 420 14.2 420 14.2 420
Oil Fill is universal and independent of mounting position.
MINICASE® (SMID Series) Integral Gearmotor Oil Fill - Flange Housing

SK 1SMID31 2.0 60 3.6 105 2.4 70 1.7 50 2.4 70 2.4 70
SK 1SMID40 3.4 100 5.6 165 4.1 120 3.0 90 4.1 120 4.1 120
SK 1SMID50 5.9 175 8.8 260 6.6 195 5.4 160 6.6 195 6.6 195
SK 1SMID63 9.6 285 14.4 425 11.0 325 9.1 270 11.0 325 11.0 325

OIL FILL QUANTITIES
FLEXBLOC™ (SI/SID Series) Lubrication

NORD FLEXBLOC™ worm gear reducers are inherently maintence
free, factory oil filled, and supplied with a high quality, long life
synthetic gear oil intended to be suitable for the life of the product.
For lubrication types see User Manual U11060.
NORD FLEXBLOC™ worm gear reducers are equipped with oil

plugs. Venting the gear unit is optional as discussed in User Manual
U14800.

U10810 FLEXBLOC™ (SI/SID Series) Worm – Lubrication Guidelines
U11060 FLEXBLOC™ Worm (SI/SID Series) – Lubrication Types
U14800 FLEXBLOC™ Worm (SI/SID Series) – Oil Plug Locations
FLEXBLOC™ (SI Series) Gear Reducer Oil Fill

SK 1SI31 1.0 30 1.0 30 1.0 30 1.0 30 1.0 30 1.0 30
SK 1SI40 1.9 55 1.9 55 1.9 55 1.9 55 1.9 55 1.9 55
SK 1SI50 3.2 95 3.2 95 3.2 95 3.2 95 3.2 95 3.2 95
SK 1SI63 6.1 180 6.1 180 6.1 180 6.1 180 6.1 180 6.1 180
SK 1SI75 12.2 360 12.2 360 12.2 360 12.2 360 12.2 360 12.2 360
Oil Fill is universal and independent of mounting position.
FLEXBLOC™ (SID Series) Gear Reducer Oil Fill

SK 1SID31 1.7 50 3.0 90 2.4 70 1.7 50 2.4 70 2.4 70
SK 1SID40 3.0 90 5.1 150 3.7 110 2.7 80 4.1 120 4.1 120
SK 1SID50 5.7 170 6.8 200 5.7 170 5.1 150 6.1 180 6.1 180
SK 1SID63 9.8 280 12.2 360 9.8 290 8.1 240 10.5 310 10.5 310
Integral gear motors only available upon special request.

STANDARD IN-LINE
OIL PLUG & VENT LOCATIONS
Oil plug connections

All reducers are shipped from the factory with a pre-determined oil fill level in accordance to the specified reducer size and
mounting position. For mounting orientations other than shown please consult NORD Gear. New plug locations may be
required.
M1
B3/B5
M1
B3/B5
M6 M2 M2
B7/B5III V6/V3 M6 V6/V3
B7/B5III
SK 0
SK 01 SK 010
SK 20 SK 200
SK 25 SK 250
SK 30 SK 300
SK 33 SK 330
M4 M5 M4 M5
V5/V1 B6/B5II V5/V1 B6/B5II
M3
M3 B8/B5I
B8/B5I
= Vent
= Oil Plug

HELICAL IN-LINE

Prior to commissioning the reducer, check the oil-fill level using the reducer’s oil-level plug and drain or add additional oil as
needed. The minimum acceptable oil level is 0.15 in (4mm) below the oil level hole. For mounting orientations other than
shown please consult NORD Gear. New plug locations may be required.
M1 M1
B3/B5 B3/B5
M6 M6 M2
B7/B5III B7/B5III V6/V3
M2 M2
V6/V3 V6/V3 SK 02
SK 11E SK 12
SK 21E SK 22
SK 31E SK 32
SK 41E SK 42
SK 51E SK 52
M5 M5
B6/B5II B6/B5II
M4 M3 M4
V5/V1 B8/B5I V5/V1
M3
B8/B5I
M1
M1 B3/B5
B3/B5
*
M2
V6/V3
M6 M2 M6
B7/B5III V6/V3 B7/B5III
SK 62
SK 72
SK 03 SK 82
SK 13 SK 92
SK 23 = Vent SK 102
SK 33N SK 63*
SK 43 = Oil Level SK 73*
SK 53 SK 83* *
= Oil Plug SK 93*
SK 103*
M5
B6/B5II M5
M4 B6/B5II
V5/V1
M4
M3 V5/V1
B8/B5I
M3
B8/B5I
* Oil level for 3 stage gear units.

CLINCHER™

M1
H1
M1
H1 M2
M2
M6 H6 M6 H6
H3 H3
SK 1282 SK 2382
SK 2282 SK 3382
SK 3282 SK 4382
SK 4282 SK 5382
SK 5282
M5
M4 M4
H4
H5 H5
M3 M5
H2 H4
M3
H2
= Vent
= Oil Level
M1 = Oil Plug M1
H1 H1
M2 M2
M6 H6 M6
H3 H6
H3
SK 6282 SK 9282
SK 7282 SK 10282

SK 8282  SK 11282
SK 6382* SK 9382*
SK 7382*  SK 10382*

SK 8382* SK 11382*
* SK 12382*
* *
M4 M4
H5 M5 M5 H5 M5
H4 H4 H4
M3 M3
H2 H2


* Oil level for 3 stage gear units * Oil level for 3 stage gear units
  Oil fill level should be verified using the dip stick
located in the oil tank for the M4/H5 position.

CLINCHER™

M1
H1 M2
M6 H6
H3
SK 10382.1
SK 11382.1
M4
H5
M5
H4
M3
H2
 Oil fill level should be verified using the dip stick

located in the oil tank for the M4/H5 position.
= Vent
= Oil Level
= Oil Plug

92 SERIES HELICAL-BEVEL

Foot Mount Shaft/Flange Mount
M1
M1
B3
H1/B5I
M6 M6
V6 H6/V3
M2
SK 92072 SK 92072 H4/B5
SK 92172 M2 SK 92172
SK 92372 B6 SK 92372
SK 92672 SK 92672
SK 92772 SK 92772
M5
M4 V5
M4 M5 M6
B3I H3/B5II H5/V1 H6/V3
M3
B8 M3
H2/B5III
= Vent
= Oil Level
= Oil Plug

Oil plug locations

Prior to commissioning the reducer, check the oil-fill level using the reducer’s oil-level plug and drain or add additional oil
as needed. For mounting orientations other than shown please consult NORD Gear. New plug locations may be required.
92.1 Series 93.1 Series
M1
M1
M6 M6
SK 920072.1 SK 930072.1
SK 92072.1 SK 93072.1
SK 92172.1 M2 SK 93172.1 M2
SK 92372.1 SK 93372.1
SK 92672.1 SK 93672.1
SK 92772.1 SK 93772.1
M4 M5 M4 M5
M3 M3
= Vent
= Oil Level
= Oil Plug

90.1 HELICAL-BEVEL

Foot Mount Foot Mount M1

M1 B3
B3
M2 M2
M6 M6 B6
V6 B6
V6
SK 9012.1
SK 9016.1
SK 9022.1 SK 9013.1
SK 9032.1 SK 9017.1
SK 9042.1 SK 9023.1
SK 9052.1 SK 9033.1
SK 9072.1 SK 9043.1
SK 9082.1 SK 9053.1
SK 9086.1
SK 9092.1
SK 9096.1
M5
V5
M4 M5 M4
B3I V5 B3I
M3
M3
B8
B8
Shaft/Flange Mount Shaft/Flange Mount

M1
H1/B5I
M1
H1/B5I
M6
M6 H6/V3
H6/V3
SK 9012.1
SK 9016.1
SK 9022.1 M2
SK 9013.1 M2
SK 9032.1 H4/B5 H4/B5
SK 9017.1
SK 9042.1 SK 9023.1
SK 9052.1 SK 9033.1
SK 9072.1 SK 9043.1
SK 9082.1 SK 9053.1
SK 9086.1
SK 9092.1
SK 9096.1
M5
M4 M5 M4 H5/V1
H3/B5II H5/V1 H3/B5II
M3
M3 H2/B5III
H2/B5III
= Vent
H4/B5
= Oil Level
= Oil Plug
HELICAL-WORM

Foot Mount Shaft/Flange Mount

M1 M1
B3 H1/B5I
M6 M6
V6 H6/V3
M2
B6 M2
H4/B5
SK 02040 M4
M4
H3/B5II SK 02040
B3I
M5 M5
V5 H5/V1
M3
M3 H2/B5III
B8
= Vent
= Oil Level
= Oil Plug

HELICAL-WORM
Foot Mount Foot Mount

M1
B3 M1
B3
M2
B6
M6
M6 V6
V6
M2
B6
SK 02050
SK 12050 SK 13050
SK 12063 SK 13063
SK 12080 SK 13080
SK 32100 SK 33100
SK 42125 SK 43125
M5
M4 M5
V5 M4
B3I V5
B3I
M3
M3 B8
B8
Shaft/Flange Mount Shaft/Flange Mount

M1 M1
B3/B5 H1/B5I
M6
M6 H6/V3
B7/B5III
SK 02050
M2 SK 13050
SK 12050 V6/V3
SK 12063 SK 13063
SK 12080 SK 13080
SK 32100 SK 33100 M2
SK 42125 SK 43125 H4/B5
M5
B6/B5II B6/B5II
M4 M4
V5/V1 M5
H3/B5III H5/V1
M3
H2/B5III
M3
B8/B5I
= Vent
= Oil Level
= Oil Plug
NORDBLOC®

M1 M1
B3 H1/B5I
M6
M6 H6/V3
V6
SK 472 SK 472
SK 473 SK 473
SK 572 SK 572 M2
SK 573 M2 M2 SK 573 H4/B5
SK 672 B6
SK 672
M4 M4
SK 673 H3/B5II SK 673
B3I
SK 772 SK 772
SK 773 SK 773
SK 872 SK 872
SK 873 SK 873
SK 972 SK 972
SK 973 SK 973
M5 M5
V5 H5/V1
M3 M3
B8 H2/B5III
= Vent
= Oil Level
= Oil Plug

NORDBLOC®.1
needed. The correct oil level should be located at the lower edge of the oil level hole. For mounting orientations other than
M1 M1
B3/B5 B3/B5
M6
M6 B7/B5III B7/B5III
B7/B5III
M2 M2 M2
SK 071.1 V6/V3 V6/V3 SK 071.1 F V6/V3
SK 171.1 SK 171.1 F
SK 371.1 SK 371.1 F
SK 571.1 SK 571.1 F
SK 771.1 SK 771.1 F
M4 M5 M4 M5
V5/V1 B6/B5II B6/B5II V5/V1 B6/B5II
M3 M3
B8/B5I = Vent B8/B5I
= Oil Level
= Oil Plug
M1
B3/B5 M1
H1/B5I
M6
H6/V3
M6
B7/B5III
M2
V6/V3 V6/V3 M2
SK 072.1 SK 072.1 F H4/B5
SK 172.1 SK 172.1 F
M4 M4
V5/V1 H3/B5III M5
M5 H5/V1
B6/B5II B6/B5II
M3 M3
B8/B5I H2/B5III

NORDBLOC®.1
needed. The correct oil level should be located at the lower edge of the oil level hole. For mounting orientations other than
M1 M1
B3/B5 H1/B5I
M6 SK 372.1 M2 SK 372.1 F
V6/V3 M6
B7/B5III V6/V3
SK 572.1 H6/V3 SK 572.1 F
SK 672.1 SK 672.1 F
M2
H4/B5
SK 373.1 SK 373.1 F
SK 573.1 SK 573.1 F
SK 673.1 SK 673.1 F
M4
V5/V1 M4
M5 H3/B5III M5
B6/B5II H5/V1
M3 M3
B8/B5I H2/B5III
M1
B3/B5 M1
* H1/B5I *
= Vent
= Oil Level
= Oil Plug
*
*
M6 M2
B7/B5III SK 772.1 V6/V3 V6/V3 M6 SK 772.1 F
SK 773.1* H6/V3 SK 773.1 F*
SK 872.1 SK 872.1 F M2
SK 873.1* SK 873.1 F* H4/B5
SK 972.1 SK 972.1 F
SK 973.1*
* SK 973.1 F*
*
M4
M4 H3/B5III
V5/V1 M5
B6/B5II B6/B5II M5
* * H5/V1
M3
B8/B5I
M3
H2/B5III
* Oil fill level for three stage gear units.

MINICASE® (SMI/SMID) WORM GEAR
Oil Plug and Vent Locations
MINICASE® (SMI/SMID) reducers and gear motors are fitted with oil plugs to allow for optional venting of the gear unit. NORD
can supply either an AUTOVENT™ (valve-type) vent or an open vent. Vent options are available for most gear unit sizes and
positions as indicated by the table below. For more complete details on vent options and when to consider reducer venting,
see user manual U10800.
Vent Compatability by Unit Size & Mounting Position Vent Kit Part Numbers
M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 Type Transportation Installation Part Number
Seal
SMI/SMID 31    
Factory or
SMI/SMID 40     AUTOVENT™ Included 60693510
Field site
SMI/SMID 50     
Open Vent None Field Only 60693500
SMI/SMID 63      
SMI/SMID 75      Open Vent Included
Continuous Input speed ≤ 1800 rpm Unless noted by a seperate part number, vent kits include the housing gasket
Optional Vent Locations
P1 P2
NOTICE
M1 M3
M2 M4 To prevent build-up of excessive pressure, sealed vents
M6 M5 must be activated as shown prior to gear unit start-up.
Excessive pressure may cause damage to internal
components and cause leakage.
MINICASE® (SMI/SMID) Foot Housing MINICASE® (SMI/SMID) Flange Housing
P1 M1
P1 M1
M6 P1 M6 P1
P1
P1
SK 1SMI31 SK 1SMI31
SK 1SMI40 SK 1SMI40
SK 1SMI50 SK 1SMI50
SK 1SMI63 SK 1SMI63
M4 SK 1SMI75 M2 M4 SK 1SMI75 M2
P2 SK 1SMID31 P2 SK 1SMID31
P2 P2
SK 1SMID40 SK 1SMID40
P2 M5 P2 M5
M3
M3
= Vent
= Oil Plug
Vent locations
FLEXBLOC™ (SI?SID SERIES) reducers are fitted with oil plugs to allow for optional venting of the gear unit. NORD can supply
either an AUTOVENT™ (valve-type) vent or an open vent. Vent options are available for most gear unit sizes and positions
as indicated by the table below. For more complete details on vent options and when to consider reducer venting, see user
manual U10810.
Vent Compatability by Unit Size & Mounting Position Vent Kit Part Numbers
M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 Type Transportation Installation Part Number
Seal
SI/SID 31    
Factory or
SI/SID 40     AUTOVENT™ Included 66093510
Field site
SI/SID 50     
Open Vent None Field Only 60693500
SI/SID 63      
SI/SID 75      Open Vent Included
Continuous Input speed ≤ 1800 rpm Unless noted by a seperate part number, vent kits include the housing gasket
Optional Vent Locations
P1 P2
M1
NOTICE
M3
M2 M4 To prevent build-up of excessive pressure, sealed vents
M6 M5 must be activated as shown prior to gear unit start-up.
Excessive pressure may cause damage to internal
components and cause leakage.
FLEXBLOC™ (SI Series) Universal Housing
P1 M1
P1
M6 P1
SK 1SI31
M4 SK 1SI40 M2
SK 1SI50
SK 1SI63
P2
SK 1SI75 P2
M5
P2
M3
= Vent
= Oil Plug
STANDARD IN-LINE
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
SK 0 - SK 33 Helical Gear Unit

1 Output shaft 21 Plug 910 Terminal box cover gasket
2 Key 22 Gear case cover 911 Terminal board
3 Shaft seal 23 Pinion shaft bearing 914 Cable entry gland
5 Output shaft bearing, normal 24 Shim 916 Stator case
5A Output shaft bearing, reinforced 25 Hexagon bolt 918 Key
6 Output shaft bearing 26 Washer 924 Collar bolt
7 Seal 27 Spiral pin 925 Hexagonal nut
8 Vent screw 30 Seal 929 Bearing B
9 Shim 31 Shim 932 Endshield B
10 Driven gear 32 Seal 938 Second motor shaft end*
11 Key 900 Rotor with shaft,plain 939 Fan
12 Circlip 901 Rotor with shaft,gearcut 940 Fan cover
14 Driving pinion 902 End shield A 941 Key
15 Gear case 904 Shaft seal 942 Circlip
16 Pinion shaft, bearing 905 Bearing A 943 Key
17 Driven pinion 906 Bearing shim 947 Circlip
18 Key 907 Terminal box frame 948 Circlip
19 Driving gear 908 Terminal box cover 949 Oval flat-head bolt
20 Seal 909 Terminal box frame gasket 950 Oval flat-head bolt
* Optional Part
STANDARD IN-LINE
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
SK 010 - SK 330 Third Stage Reduction Gear

14 Driving pinion 55 Hexagon bolt 64 Shim
20 Seal 56 Washer 65 Driving gear
21 Plug 57 Seal 66 Driving pinion
27 Spiral pin 58 Seal 68 Gear case 3rd.-red.
30 Seal 59 Plug 69 Gear case cover
38 Key 60 Intermediate shaft, plain 70 Hexagon bolt
52 Spiral pin 61 Grooved ball bearing 71 Washer
53 Spiral pin 62 Grooved ball bearing 74 Seal
54 Intermediate shaft, gearcut 63 Key

STANDARD IN-LINE
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
SK 0 - SK 330 IEC Input

34 Socket head bolt 85 IEC adaptor 92 Shim
38 Key 86 Input shaft bearing 103 Coupling
80 Input shaft 87 Shaft seal 106 Set screw
81 Circlip 88 Input shaft bearing
83 Circlip 90 Pinion shaft

STANDARD IN-LINE
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
SK 0 - SK 330 Solid Shaft Input (W)

34 Socket head bolt 42 Grooved ball bearing, normal 46 Circlip
35 Shim 42A Grooved ball bearing, reinforced 47 Circlip
38 Key 43 Shaft seal 48 Input shaft, gearcut
40 Input bearing housing 44 Key 49 input shaft, plain
41 Grooved ball bearing 45 Circlip

HELICAL IN-LINE
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
28
918
6
CUT PINION PRESS-ON
SHAFT 919 PINION SHAFT
26
43
18
17
35
990
16
12
11
20 35
34
7
35
TYPE "AS" 8 34
10
25
24
22
21
TYPE "A"
5
SK 11E - SK 51E Foot Mount

5 Gear 16 Spacer 26 Flanged Eye Bolt
6 Pinion 17 Vent Plug 28 Gasket
7 Output Shaft 18 Seal 34 Drain Plug
8 Key 20 Key 35 Gasket
9 Oil Seal 21 Spacer 43 Gearcase
10 Oil Seal 22 Anti-Friction Bearing 918 Key
11 Snap Ring 24 Shim 919 Snap Ring
12 Anti-Friction Bearing 25 Snap Ring 990 Oil Level Plug

HELICAL IN-LINE
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
919
918
SK 11E - SK 51E Foot Mount

5 Gear 16 Spacer 26 Flanged Eye Bolt
6 Pinion 17 Vent Plug 28 Gasket
7 Output Shaft 18 Seal 34 Drain Plug
8 Key 20 Key 35 Gasket
9 Oil Seal 21 Spacer 43 Gearcase
10 Oil Seal 22 Anti-Friction Bearing 918 Key
11 Snap Ring 24 Shim 919 Snap Ring
12 Anti-Friction Bearing 25 Snap Ring

HELICAL IN-LINE
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
28
918
6 PRESS-ON
PINION SHAFT
919
CUT PINION
SHAFT 26
17
44 18
41 22
1
16
25
23
13*
12
35
24
990
20
35
34
7
8
TYPE "AS" 33 43
11
10
9 2
37
130
39
40
49
47
31
36
TYPE "A"
5
SK02 - SK52 Foot Mount

1 Gear 18 Seal 37 Anti-Friction Bearing
2 Pinion Shaft 20 Key 39 Snap Ring
5 Gear 22 Anti-Friction Bearing 40 Bore Plug
6 Pinion 23 Thrust Washer 41 Shim
7 Output Shaft 24 Shim 43 Gearcase
8 Key 25 Snap Ring 44 Snap Ring
9 Oil Seal 26 Flanged Eye Bolt 47 Shim
10 Oil Seal 28 Gasket 49 Snap Ring
11 Snap Ring 31 Anti-Friction Bearing 130 Shim
12 Anti-Friction Bearing 33 Key 918 Key
13 NILOS Ring* 34 Drain Plug 919 Snap Ring
16 Spacer 35 Gasket 990 Oil Level Plug
17 Vent Plug 36 Spacer
* Conditionally used part

HELICAL IN-LINE
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS

1 Gear 18 Seal 37 Anti-Friction Bearing
5 Gear 22 Anti-Friction Bearing 40 Bore Plug
6 Pinion 23 Thrust Washer 41 Shim
7 Output Shaft 24 Shim 43 Gearcase
8 Key 25 Snap Ring 44 Snap Ring
9 Oil Seal 26 Flanged Eye Bolt 47 Shim
10 Oil Seal 28 Gasket 49 Snap Ring
11 Snap Ring 31 Anti-Friction Bearing 130 Shim
12 Anti-Friction Bearing 33 Key 918 Key
13 NILOS Ring* 34 Drain Plug 919 Snap Ring
16 Spacer 35 Gasket
17 Vent Plug 36 Spacer

HELICAL IN-LINE
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
PRESS ON
PINION SHAFT
CUT PINION
SHAFT
28
918
6
919
25
24 26
23 17
22
18
21 27
1 15 19 30
32
14
16
13
12
11
35
20 990
8 7 33
TYPE "AS"
35
34
43
2
10 131
38
42 31
41
9
39 29 132
TYPE "A"
40
36 5
SK62 - SK102 Foot Mount 37
1 Gear 19 Bolt 35 Gasket

2 Pinion Shaft 20 Key 36 Spacer
5 Gear 21 Spacer 37 Anti-Friction Bearing
6 Pinion 22 Anti-Friction Bearing 38 Anti-Friction Bearing
7 Output Shaft 23 Thrust Washer 39 Snap Ring
8 Key 24 Shim 40 Bore Plug
9 Oil Seal 25 Snap Ring 41 Shim
10 Oil Seal 26 Flanged Eye Bolt 42 Thrust Washer
11 Snap Ring 27 Bolt 43 Gearcase
12 Anti-Friction Bearing 28 Gasket 131 NILOS Ring
13 NILOS ring 29 Spacer 132 NILOS Ring
14 Gasket 30 Input Cover 918 Key
15 Inspection Cover 31 Anti-Friction Bearing 919 Snap Ring
16 Spacer 32 Gasket 990 Oil Level Plug
17 Vent Plug 33 Key
18 Seal 34 Drain Plug

HELICAL IN-LINE
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS

1 Gear 18 Seal 33 Key
2 Pinion Shaft 19 Bolt 34 Drain Plug
5 Gear 20 Key 35 Gasket
6 Pinion 21 Spacer 36 Spacer
7 Output Shaft 22 Anti-Friction Bearing 37 Anti-Friction Bearing
8 Key 23 Thrust Washer 38 Anti-Friction Bearing
9 Oil Seal 24 Shim 39 Snap Ring
10 Oil Seal 25 Snap Ring 40 Bore Plug
11 Snap Ring 26 Flanged Eye Bolt 41 Shim
12 Anti-Friction Bearing 27 Bolt 42 Thrust Washer
13 NILOS ring* 28 Gasket 43 Gearcase
14 Gasket 29 Spacer 131 NILOS Ring*
15 Inspection Cover 30 Input Cover 132 NILOS Ring*
16 Spacer 31 Anti-Friction Bearing 918 Key
17 Vent Plug 32 Gasket 919 Snap Ring

HELICAL IN-LINE
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
27 61
48
29
30 3
32
63
60
62
59
57
45
58
54
55
6
46
52
53
918
46
56
4
PRESS-ON
919 PINION SHAFT
28
CUT PINION
SHAFT
SK03 - SK53 Third Stage Reduction Gear

3 Gear 46 Key 59 Shim
4 Pinion 48 Anti-Friction Bearing 60 Snap Ring
6 Pinion 52 Snap Ring 61 Snap Ring
27 Bolt 53 Key 62 Oil Plug
28 Gasket 54 Snap Ring 63 Gasket
29 Spacer 55 Intermediate Shaft, Plain 918 Key
30 Third Reduction Gearcase 56 Intermediate Shaft, Gearcut 919 Snap Ring
32 Gasket 57 Snap Ring

HELICAL IN-LINE
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
SK03 - SK53 Using Third Stage Reduction Gear


HELICAL IN-LINE
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
PRESS ON
PINION SHAFT
CUT PINION
SHAFT
28
918
6
919
25
24 17 26 27
23 18 19 30
22 15
1 21 32
14
16
13
12
11
35
20 990
8 7
33
TYPE "AS"
35
34
43
2
47
10 131
38 46 48
41 29 133
9 39
40
TYPE "A" 5
4
45
49
44
50
36 3
51
SK63 - SK103 Third Stage Reduction Housing 37
1 Gear 19 Bolt 38 Anti-Friction Bearing

3 Gear 21 Spacer 40 Bore Plug
4 Pinion Shaft 22 Anti-Friction Bearing 41 Shim
5 Gear 23 Thrust Washer 43 Gearcase
6 Pinion 24 Shim 44 Snap Ring
7 Output Shaft 25 Snap Ring 45 Anti-Friction Bearing
8 Key 26 Flanged Eye Bolt 46 Key
9 Oil Seal 27 Bolt 47 Shim
10 Oil Seal 28 Gasket 48 Bearing
11 Snap Ring 29 Spacer 49 Snap Ring
12 Anti-Friction Bearing 30 Input Cover 50 Thrust Washer
13 NILOS Ring 32 Gasket 51 Snap Ring
14 Gasket 33 Key 131 NILOS Ring
15 Inspection Cover 34 Drain plug 133 NILOS Ring
16 Spacer 35 Gasket 918 Key
17 Vent Plug 36 Spacer 919 Snap Ring
18 Seal 37 Anti-Friction Bearing 990 Oil Level Plug

HELICAL IN-LINE
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS

3 Gear 32 Gasket 47 Shim
4 Pinion Shaft 33 Key 48 Bearing
5 Gear 34 Drain plug 49 Snap Ring
6 Pinion 35 Gasket 50 Thrust Washer
28 Gasket 44 Snap Ring 51 Snap Ring
29 Spacer 45 Anti-Friction Bearing 133 NILOS Ring
30 Input Cover 46 Key

HELICAL IN-LINE
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
28
918
6 PRESS-ON
PINION SHAFT
919
CUT PINION
SHAFT
44
1 41 22
118
16* 117
25
13*
12
24
43
121*
119
116 124
115 109 33
114
120
2
37
39
40 49
47
TYPE "A" 31
36
SK12/02 - SK103/52 Input Compound Reduction

1 Gear 33 Key 115 Lock Washer
2 Pinion Shaft 36 Spacer 116 Bolt
5 Gear 37 Anti-Friction Bearing 117 Lock Washer
6 Pinion 39 Snap Ring 118 Bolt
12 Anti-Friction Bearing 40 Bore Plug 119 Intermediate Shaft, Plain
13 Nilos Ring* 41 Shim 120 Intermediate Shaft, Gearcut
16 Spacer* 43 Gearcase 121 Bearing Sleeve*
22 Anti-Friction Bearing 44 Snap Ring 124 Snap Ring
24 Shim 47 Shim 918 Key
25 Snap Ring 49 Snap Ring 919 Snap Ring
28 Gasket 109 Oil Seal
31 Anti-Friction Bearing 114 Intermediate Flange

HELICAL IN-LINE
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
SK12/02 - SK103/52 Input Compound Reduction

12 Anti-Friction Bearing 115 Lock Washer 120 Intermediate Shaft,
13 Nilos Ring* 116 Bolt Gearcut
16 Spacer* 117 Lock Washer 121 Bearing Sleeve*
25 Snap Ring 118 Bolt 124 Snap Ring
109 Oil Seal 119 Intermediate Shaft,
114 Intermediate Flange Plain

CLINCHER™
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
CUT PINION
SHAFT
918
217
218 PRESS-ON
PINION SHAFT
206
243 919
232 231
229
237
233 236
202
238 205
242 220
241
239 208
240 221
222
261*
207
210 261*
201 220
209 213
212 214
211
215
207
235 226
234 225
TYPE "A" 224
TYPE "AS" 219
209
210
TYPE "A" TYPE "AS"
SK 0182NB - SK 5282
201 Gear 217 Vent Plug 234 Drain Plug
202 Pinion Shaft 218 Gasket 235 Gasket
205 Gear 219 Bolt 236 Thrust Washer
206 Pinion 220 Key 237 Anti-Friction Bearing
208 Key 222 Anti-Friction Bearing 239 Snap Ring
209 Oil Seal 224 Retaining Washer 240 Bore Plug
210 Oil Seal 225 Lock Washer 241 Shim
211 Snap Ring 226 Bolt 242 Thrust Washer
212 Shim 229 Thrust Washer 243 Gearcase
213 Anti-Friction Bearing 231 Snap Ring 261 Nilos Ring*
214 Gasket 232 Gasket 918 Key
215 Inspection Cover 233 Key 919 Snap Ring

CLINCHER™
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
SK 0182NB - SK 5282
201 Gear 217 Vent Plug 233 Key
202 Pinion Shaft 218 Gasket 234 Drain Plug
205 Gear 219 Bolt 235 Gasket
206 Pinion 220 Key 236 Thrust Washer
209 Oil Seal 222 Anti-Friction Bearing 238 Anti-Friction Bearing
210 Oil Seal 224 Retaining Washer 239 Snap Ring
211 Snap Ring 225 Lock Washer 240 Bore Plug
212 Shim 226 Bolt 241 Shim
213 Anti-Friction Bearing 229 Thrust Washer 242 Thrust Washer
214 Gasket 231 Snap Ring 243 Gearcase
215 Inspection Cover 232 Gasket 261 Nilos Ring*

CLINCHER™
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
CUT PINION PRESS ON

SHAFT PINION SHAFT
918
228 206
919
217
218 227
(7 PLACES)
243
230
223
231
237
232 263*
236
233
202
205
262* 220
238
242 208
241 221
239
240 222
207
261* 220
210 201
209 213
212 214
261*
211
215
207
226
235 225
234 224
TYPE "A" 209
TYPE "AS" 219
210
TYPE "AS"
SK 0282NB + SK 6282 - SK 11282 TYPE "A"
201 Gear 219 Bolt 236 Thrust Washer

202 Pinion Shaft 220 Key 237 Anti-Friction Bearing
205 Gear 221 Snap Ring 238 Anti-Friction Bearing
207 Output Shaft 224 Retaining Washer 240 Bore Plug
208 Key 225 Lock Washer 241 Shim
209 Oil Seal 226 Bolt 242 Thrust Washer
210 Oil Seal 227 Bolt 243 Gear case
211 Snap Ring 228 Gasket 261 Nilos Ring*
212 Shim 230 Input Cover 262 Nilos Ring*
214 Gasket 232 Gasket 918 Key
215 Inspection Cover 233 Key 919 Snap Ring
217 Vent Plug 234 Drain Plug
218 Gasket 235 Gasket
CLINCHER™
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
SK 0282NB + SK 6282 - SK 11282

201 Gear 218 Gasket 234 Drain Plug
202 Pinion Shaft 219 Bolt 235 Gasket
205 Gear 220 Key 236 Thrust Washer
206 Pinion 221 Snap Ring 237 Anti-Friction Bearing
208 Key 223 Bore Plug 239 Snap Ring
209 Oil Seal 224 Retaining Washer 240 Bore Plug
210 Oil Seal 225 Lock Washer 241 Shim
211 Snap Ring 226 Bolt 242 Thrust Washer
212 Shim 227 Bolt 243 Gear case
213 Anti-Friction Bearing 228 Gasket 250 Bore Plug
214 Gasket 230 Input Cover 261 Nilos Ring*
215 Inspection Cover 232 Gasket 262 Nilos Ring*
217 Vent Plug 233 Key 263 Nilos Ring*

CLINCHER™
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
27 61
48
29
30 3
32
63
60
62
59
57
45
58
54
55
6
46
52
53
918
46
56
4
PRESS-ON
919 PINION SHAFT
28
CUT PINION
SHAFT
SK 2382 - SK 5382 Third Stage Reduction Housing

CLINCHER™
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
SK 2382 - SK 5382 Third Stage Reduction Housing

29 Spacer 55 Intermediate Shaft, Plain 203 Gear
32 Gasket 56 Intermediate Shaft, Gearcut 204 Pinion Shaft
30 Third Reduction Gearcase 57 Snap Ring 234 Oil Plug
45 Anti-Friction Bearing 58 Snap Ring 235 Gasket

CLINCHER™
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
CUT PINION
SHAFT
PRESS ON
PINION SHAFT
918
228
205
206
254 919
247
248
264*
249
217
227
218 (7 PLACES)
243
230
246 229
204 237
232 263*
245 236
247 233
244
250 202
223 203
262* 220
238
242 208
241 221
239
240 222
261*
207
261* 220
210 201
209 213
212
214
211
215
207
226
235 225
234 224
TYPE "A" 209
TYPE "AS" 219
210
TYPE "AS"
SK 1382 NB + SK 6382 - SK12382 TYPE "A"
201 Gear 221 Snap Ring 241 Shim

202 Pinion Shaft 222 Anti-Friction Bearing 242 Thrust Washer
203 Gear 223 Bore Plug 243 Gearcase
204 Pinion Shaft 224 Retaining Washer 244 Snap Ring
205 Gear 225 Lock Washer 245 Anti-Friction Bearing
206 Pinion 226 Bolt 246 Key
207 Output Shaft 227 Bolt 247 Shim
208 Key 228 Gasket 248 Anti-Friction Bearing
209 Oil Seal 229 Thrust Washer 249 Spacer
210 Oil Seal 230 Input Cover 250 Bore Plug
211 Snap Ring 232 Gasket 254 Thrust Washer
212 Shim 233 Key 261 Nilos Ring*
213 Anti-Friction Bearing 234 Drain Plug 262 Nilos Ring*
214 Gasket 235 Gasket 263 Nilos Ring*
215 Inspection Cover 236 Thrust Washer 264 Nilos Ring*
217 Vent Plug 237 Anti-Friction Bearing 918 Key
218 Gasket 238 Anti-Friction Bearing 919 Snap Ring
219 Bolt 239 Snap Ring
220 Key 240 Bore Plug

CLINCHER™
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
SK 1382 NB + SK 6382 - SK12382

203 Gear 229 Thrust Washer 250 Bore Plug
204 Pinion Shaft 244 Snap Ring 254 Thrust Washer
205 Gear 245 Anti-Friction Bearing 261 Nilos Ring*
206 Pinion 246 Key 262 Nilos Ring*
207 Output Shaft 247 Shim 263 Nilos Ring*
208 Key 248 Anti-Friction Bearing 264 Nilos Ring*
223 Bore Plug 249 Spacer

CLINCHER™
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
28
918
6 PRESS-ON
PINION SHAFT
919
CUT PINION
SHAFT
44
1 41 22
118
16* 117
25
13*
12
24
43
121*
119
116 124
115 109 33
114
120
2
37
39
40 49
47
TYPE "A" 31
36
SK1282/02 - SK11382/52 Multi-stage Reduction Unit

CLINCHER™
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
SK 1282/02 - SK 11382/52
12 Anti-friction Bearing 114 Intermediate Flange 119 Intermediate Shaft, Plain
13 Nilos Ring* 115 Lock Washer 120 Intermediate Shaft, Gearcut
16 Spacer 116 Bolt 121 Bearing Sleeve
25 Snap Ring 117 Lock Washer 124 Snap Ring
109 Oil Seal 118 Bolt
CLINCHER™
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
CUT PINION
SHAFT
PRESS-ON
PINION SHAFT
918
252 206
919
243
232
252
223
223
220
208
216
253 207
SK 0182NB - SK 11282 & SK 1382 - SK 11382

206 Pinion 220 Key 252 Rubber Buffer
207 Output Shaft 223 Bore Plug 253 Bolt
208 Key 232 Gasket 918 Key
216 Flange 243 Gearcase 919 Snap Ring

CLINCHER™
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
SK 0182NB - SK 11282 & SK 1382 - SK 11382

207 Output Shaft 223 Bore Plug 253 Bolt
208 Key 251 Shrink Disc
216 Flange 252 Rubber Buffer

CLINCHER™ VL2 & VL3
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
277
278
282
289
211(1)
221(2)
261
207S
287
207A
270
207
287(3)
298(3) 209(3)
209(3)
213 222
210(3)
271
295 284 251
270
271A
216A 279 272B 253
Parallel Helical Clincher VL2 & VL3

207A Hollow Output Shaft 222 Bearing 278 Plug Gasket
207 Solid Output Shaft 251 Shrink Disk 279 Oil Slinger (VL3)
207S Shrink Disk Hollow Shaft 253 Screw 282 Seal
209 (3) Seal 261 NILOS Ring 284 Spacer
210 (3) Seal 270 Shaft Cover 287 (3) Seal
211 (1) Snap Ring 271 Shaft Cover Screw 289 Grease Fitting
213 Bearing 272B Dowel Pin 295 O-Ring
216A Flange 277 Drain Plug (VL2) 298 (3) Bushing
221(3) Snap Ring 277 Oil Level Indicator (VL3)
(1) = Needed for 2282/3282 (3) = Varies By Unit
(2) = Needed for 3282/3382

90.1 HELICAL-BEVEL
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
732
918
CUT PINION 706 PRESS-ON

SHAFT PINION SHAFT
723 919
721 765
712 766
705
722
760* 748
747
750 756 736

745
774 746
739 717
703
741
742 718
770
775
738
761* 735
990
703
735
734
719 720
707
708 701
743 773
714 733 716
760*
735 702 713
734 715 773 TYPE "A"
710
761*
737 709
775
770
729 712
741 711
731
774
740
SK 9012.1 - SK 9096.1 Foot Mounted TYPE "AS"
701 Output Gear 721 Snap Ring 747 Shim

702 Pinion Shaft 722 Anti-Friction Bearing 748 Anti-Friction Bearing
703 Bevel Gearset 723 Bore Plug 750 Bore Plug
705 Gear 729 Thrust Washer 756 Flanged Eye Bolt
706 Pinion 731 Snap Ring 760 Nilos Ring*
707 Output Shaft 732 Gasket 761 Nilos Ring*
708 Key 733 Key 765 Slotted Round Nut
709 Oil Seal 734 Oil Plug 766 Tab Lock Washer
710 Oil Seal 735 Gasket 770 Backstop (If Equipped)
711 Snap Ring 736 Snap Ring 773 Key (w/Backstop)
712 Shim 737 Anti-Friction Bearing 774 Snap Ring
713 Anti-Friction Bearing 738 Anti-Friction Bearing (w/Backstop)
714 Gasket 739 Snap Ring 775 Thrust Washer
715 Inspection Cover 740 Bore Plug (w/Backstop)
716 Spacer 741 Shim 918 Key
717 Vent screw 742 Thrust Washer 919 Snap Ring
718 Gasket 743 Gearcase 990 Oil Level Plug
719 Bolt 745 Anti-Friction Bearing
720 Key 746 Key
90.1 HELICAL-BEVEL
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
* *
* *
SK 9012.1 - SK 9096.1 Foot Mounted

701 Output Gear 720 Key 745 Anti-Friction Bearing
702 Pinion Shaft 721 Snap Ring 746 Key
703 Bevel Gearset 722 Anti-Friction Bearing 747 Shim
705 Gear 723 Bore Plug 748 Anti-Friction Bearing
706 Pinion 729 Thrust Washer 750 Bore Plug
707 Output Shaft 731 Snap Ring 756 Flanged Eye Bolt
708 Key 732 Gasket 760 Nilos Ring*
709 Oil Seal 733 Key 761 Nilos Ring*
710 Oil Seal 734 Oil Plug 765 Slotted Round Nut
711 Snap Ring 735 Gasket 766 Tab Lock Washer
712 Shim 736 Snap Ring 770 Backstop (If Equipped)
713 Anti-Friction Bearing 737 Anti-Friction Bearing 773 Key (w/Backstop)
715 Inspection Cover 739 Snap Ring (w/Backstop)
716 Spacer 740 Bore Plug 775 Thrust Washer
717 Vent 741 Shim (w/Backstop)
718 Gasket 742 Thrust Washer
719 Bolt 743 Gearcase

90.1 HELICAL-BEVEL
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
CUT PINION
SHAFT
PRESS-ON
PINION SHAFT
732
918
723 711
712 706
713 919 765
760* 766
705
748
750 747 736

774 756 745
739
741 717 703
742 718 743
770
775
738 746
761*
735
703 990
719 735
734
720
708
701
773
733
714 716
702 707 760*
773 722 TYPE "A"
735 715
734
710
761*
737 709
749 775
744 770 712
753 729
721
741
731
774
740
SK 9012.1 - SK 9096.1 - Flange Mounted TYPE "AS"
701 Output Gear 722 Anti-Friction Bearing 748 Anti-Friction Bearing

702 Pinion Shaft 723 Bore Plug 749 Dowel Pin
703 Bevel Gearset 729 Thrust Washer 750 Bore Plug
705 Gear 731 Snap Ring 753 Bolt
706 Pinion 732 Gasket 756 Flanged Eye Bolt
707 Output Shaft 733 Key 760 Nilos Ring*
708 Key 734 Oil plug 761 Nilos Ring*
709 Oil Seal 735 Gasket 765 Slotted Round Nut
710 Oil Seal 736 Snap Ring 766 Tab Lock Washer
711 Snap Ring 737 Anti-Friction Bearing 770 Backstop (If Equipped)
712 Shim 738 Anti-Friction Bearing 773 Key (w/Backstop)
714 Gasket 740 Bore Plug (w/Backstop)
715 Inspection Cover 741 Shim 775 Thrust Washer
716 Spacer 742 Thrust Washer (w/Backstop)
717 Vent Plug 743 Gearcase 918 Key
718 Gasket 744 Flange 919 Snap Ring
719 Bolt 745 Anti-Friction Bearing 990 Oil Level Plug
720 Key 746 Key
721 Snap Ring 747 Shim
90.1 HELICAL-BEVEL
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
* *
SK 9012.1 - SK 9096.1 - Flange Mounted

701 Output Gear 720 Key 744 Flange
702 Pinion Shaft 721 Snap Ring 745 Anti-Friction Bearing
703 Bevel Gearset 722 Anti-Friction Bearing 746 Key
705 Gear 723 Bore Plug 747 Shim
706 Pinion 729 Thrust Washer 748 Anti-Friction Bearing
707 Output Shaft 731 Snap Ring 750 Bore Plug
708 Key 732 Gasket 753 Bolt
709 Oil Seal 733 Key 756 Flanged Eye Bolt
710 Oil Seal 734 Oil plug 760 Nilos Ring*
711 Snap Ring 735 Gasket 761 Nilos Ring*
712 Shim 736 Snap Ring 765 Slotted Round Nut
713 Anti-Friction Bearing 737 Anti-Friction Bearing 766 Tab Lock Washer
714 Gasket 738 Anti-Friction Bearing 770 Backstop*
715 Inspection Cover 739 Snap Ring 773 Key (w/Backstop)
716 Spacer 740 Bore Plug 774 Snap Ring
717 Vent Plug 741 Shim (w/Backstop)
718 Gasket 742 Thrust Washer 775 Thrust Washer
719 Bolt 743 Gearcase (w/Backstop)

90.1 HELICAL-BEVEL
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
CUT PINION
SHAFT
PRESS-ON
PINION SHAFT
726 TYPE "A"

725 732
724 918
709
710
711
712 706
713 919 765
760* 766
705
TYPE "AS" 748
750 747 736

774 756 745
739
741 717 703
742
718 743
770
775
738 746
761*
735
703 990
719 735
734
720
707 701
773
733
714 716 760*
702
735 715 773 722
734 TYPE "A"
710
761* 709
752 737 775
753 770 712
729 721
741
731
774
740
SK 9012.1 - SK 9096.1 - Shaft Mounted TYPE "AS"
701 Gear 724 Retaining Washer 748 Anti-Friction Bearing

702 Pinion Shaft 725 Lock Washer 750 Bore Plug
703 Bevel Gearset 726 Bolt 752 Torque Arm
705 Gear 729 Thrust Washer 753 Bolt
706 Pinion 731 Snap Ring 756 Flanged Eye Bolt
707 Output Shaft 732 Gasket 760 Nilos Ring*
709 Oil Seal 733 Key 761 Nilos Ring*
710 Oil Seal 734 Oil plug 765 Slotted Round Nut
711 Snap Ring 735 Gasket 766 Tab Lock Washer
712 Shim 736 Snap Ring 770 Backstop (If Equipped)
713 Anti-Friction Bearing 737 Anti-Friction Bearing 773 Key (w/Backstop)
715 Inspection Cover 739 Snap Ring (w/Backstop)
716 Spacer 740 Bore Plug 775 Thrust Washer
717 Vent Plug 741 Shim (w/Backstop)
718 Gasket 742 Thrust Washer 918 Key
719 Bolt 743 Gearcase 919 Snap Ring
720 Key 745 Anti-Friction Bearing 990 Oil Level Plug
721 Snap Ring 746 Key
722 Anti-Friction Bearing 747 Shim
90.1 HELICAL-BEVEL
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
* *
SK 9012.1 - SK 9096.1 - Shaft Mounted

701 Gear 722 Anti-Friction Bearing 746 Key
702 Pinion Shaft 724 Washer 747 Shim
703 Bevel Gearset 725 Lock Washer 748 Anti-Friction Bearing
705 Gear 726 Bolt 750 Bore Plug
706 Pinion 729 Thrust Washer 751 Shrink Disc
707 Output Shaft 731 Snap Ring 752 Torque Arm
709 Oil Seal 732 Gasket 753 Bolt
710 Oil Seal 733 Key 755 Rubber Buffer
711 Snap Ring 734 Oil plug 756 Flanged Eye Bolt
712 Shim 735 Gasket 760 Nilos Ring*
714 Gasket 737 Anti-Friction Bearing 765 Slotted Round Nut
715 Inspection Cover 738 Anti-Friction Bearing 766 Tab Lock Washer
716 Spacer 739 Snap Ring 770 Backstop*
717 Vent Plug 740 Bore Plug 773 Key (w/Backstop)
718 Seal 741 Shim 774 Snap Ring
719 Bolt 742 Thrust Washer (w/Backstop)
720 Key 743 Gearcase 775 Thrust Washer
721 Snap Ring 745 Anti-Friction Bearing (w/Backstop)

90.1 HELICAL-BEVEL
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
27 61
48
29
30 3
32
63
60
62
59
57
45
58
54
55
6
46
52
53
918
46
56
4
PRESS-ON
919 PINION SHAFT
28
CUT PINION
SHAFT
SK9013.1 - SK9053.1 Third Stage Reduction Gear


90.1 HELICAL-BEVEL
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
SK9013.1 - SK9053.1 Third Stage Reduction Gear

3 Gear 46 Key 58 Snap Ring
4 Pinion 48 Anti-Friction Bearing 59 Shim
27 Bolt 52 Snap Ring 60 Snap Ring
28 Gasket 53 Key 61 Snap Ring
29 Spacer 54 Snap Ring 62 Oil Plug
30 Third Reduction Gearcase 55 Intermediate Shaft, Plain 63 Gasket
32 Gasket 56 Intermediate Shaft, Gearcut

90.1 HELICAL-BEVEL
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
28
918
6 PRESS-ON
PINION SHAFT
919
CUT PINION
SHAFT
44
1 41 22
118
16* 117
25
13*
12
24
43
121*
119
116 124
115 109 33
114
120
2
37
39
40 49
47
TYPE "A" 31
36
SK9062.1/32 - SK9092.1/52 Input Compound Reduction

90.1 HELICAL-BEVEL
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
* *
SK9062.1/32 - SK9092.1/52 Input Compound Reduction

11 Bearing 114 Intermediate Flange 119 Intermediate Shaft, Plain
13 Nilos Ring* 115 Lock Washer 120 Intermediate Shaft, Gearcut
16 Spacer* 116 Bolt 121 Bearing Sleeve *
25 Snap Ring 117 Lock Washer 124 Snap Ring
109 Oil Seal 118 Bolt

Helical Bevel VL2 & VL3
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
722 797 784 749 782 753 795 744

791
755
755
754S 751S
754
781
787
707A
724
707
710
709 713
707S
789
777
Helical Bevel VL2 & VL3

707 Hollow Output Shaft 744 Flange VLII & VLIII 782 Seal
707A Output Shaft 749 Dowel Pin 784 Spacer VLIII
707S Shrink Disk Hollow Shaft 751S Shrink Disk 787 Seal
709 Seal 753 Screw 789 Grease Fitting
710 Seal 754 Shaft Cover 791 O-Ring
711 Snap Ring 755 Shaft Cover Screw 795 Oil Slinger (VLIII Only)
713 Bearing 777 Drain Plug (VLII) 797 NILOS Ring
722 Bearing 777 Oil Indicator (VLIII Only)
724 Fixing Kit 781 Axial Shim

PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
CUT PINION
SHAFT
PRESS-ON
PINION SHAFT
728
918
723 706
919
721
712
722
765
716
766
742
703 705
748
745
747
746
703
720
767
708
743
TYPE "AS"
735 714
734 707
715
719 713
712
711
710
SK 92072 Foot Mounted
703 Bevel Gearset 716 Spacer 745 Anti-Friction Bearing
705 Gear 719 Bolt 746 Key
706 Pinion 720 Key 747 Shim
708 Key 722 Anti-Friction Bearing 765 Slotted Nut
710 Oil Seal 723 Bore Plug 766 Tab Lock Washer
711 Snap Ring 728 Gasket 767 Bolt
712 Shim 734 Oil Plug 918 Key
713 Anti-Friction Bearing 735 Gasket 919 Snap Ring
715 Inspection Cover 743 Gear case

PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
CUT PINION
SHAFT
755
PRESS-ON
PINION SHAFT
754
728
918
751
TYPE "AS"
706
919
724
710 765
766
721
705
722 748
745
747
746
716 703
703
752
767
720
735
734 TYPE "AS"
743
707
714
713
715
719 712
711
710
744
749
SK 92072 Flange or Shaft Mounted 753
703 Bevel Gearset 720 Key 748 Anti-Friction Bearing

705 Gear 721 Snap Ring 749 Grooved Pin
706 Pinion 722 Anti-Friction Bearing 751 Shrink Disc
707 Output Shaft 724 Fixing Element Kit 752 Rubber Buffer
710 Oil Seal 728 Gasket 753 Bolt
711 Snap Ring 734 Oil Plug 754 Cover
712 Shim 735 Gasket 755 Bolt
713 Anti-Friction Bearing 743 Gearcase 765 Slotted Round Nut
714 Gasket 744 Flange 766 Tab Lock Washer
715 Inspection Cover 745 Anti-Friction Bearing 767 Bolt
716 Spacer 746 Key 918 Key
719 Bolt 747 Shim 919 Snap Ring

PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
SK 92072
703 Bevel Gearset 719 Bolt 746 Key
706 Pinion 721 Snap Ring 748 Anti-Friction Bearing
707 Output Shaft 722 Anti-Friction Bearing 749 Grooved Pin
708 Key 723 Bore Plug 751 Shrink Disc Connector
710 Oil Seal 724 Fixing Element Kit 752 Rubber Buffer
711 Snap Ring 728 Gasket 753 Socket Head Screw
712 Shim 741 Shim 754 Shrink Disc Cover
713 Anti-Friction Bearing 742 Thrust Washer 755 Socket Head Screw
714 Gasket 743 Gear case 766 Tab Lock Washer
715 Inspection Cover 744 Flange 767 Bolt
716 Spacer 745 Anti-Friction Bearing

PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
CUT PINION PRESS-ON

SHAFT PINION SHAFT
918
706
723 919
721
712
722
769
716 703 730
732
728
748 765
766
767 741
705
739
747
742
745
747
731
703
746
743
714 707
715 TYPE "AS"

719
720
708
713
712
711
SK 92172 - SK92772 Foot Mounted 710
703 Bevel Gearset 719 Bolt 743 Gearcase

705 Gear 720 Key 745 Anti-Friction Bearing
706 Pinion 721 Snap Ring 746 Key
707 Output Shaft 722 Anti-Friction Bearing 747 Shim
708 Key 723 Bore Plug 748 Anti-Friction Bearing
710 Oil Seal 728 Gasket 765 Shim
711 Snap Ring 730 Input Cover 766 Snap Ring
712 Shim 731 Snap Ring 767 Bolt
713 Anti-Friction Bearing 732 Gasket 769 Bolt
714 Gasket 739 Snap Ring 918 Key
715 Inspection Cover 741 Shim 919 Snap Ring
716 Spacer 742 Thrust Washer

PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
CUT PINION PRESS-ON

SHAFT PINION SHAFT
TYPE "AS" 918

TYPE "A" 706
919
721
712
722 769
730
716 703
710
709
732
728
748 765
766
767 741
705
739
747
742
745
747
731
703
707
746
TYPE "A"
743
714 720
TYPE "AS"
708
715
719
713 744
712
711
709 749
710
753
SK 92172 - SK92772 Solid Shaft + Flange Mount

703 Bevel Gearset 719 Bolt 745 Anti-Friction Bearing
705 Gear 720 Key 746 Key
706 Pinion 721 Snap Ring 747 Shim
708 Key 728 Gasket 749 Grooved Pin
709 Oil Seal 730 Input Cover 753 Bolt
710 Oil Seal 731 Snap Ring 765 Shim
711 Snap Ring 732 Gasket 766 Snap Ring
713 Anti-Friction Bearing 741 Shim 769 Bolt
714 Gasket 742 Thrust Washer 918 Key
715 Inspection Cover 743 Gearcase 919 Snap Ring
716 Spacer 744 Flange

PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
CUT PINION
SHAFT
PRESS-ON
PINION SHAFT
724 918
706
919
755
TYPE "AS"
TYPE "A" 769

754 730
721
712
751 732
710
709
722
728
716 703
743
748 765
766
767 741
747
705
739
747
742
745
731
703
746
707 TYPE "A"
714 720
TYPE "AS"
715
719 744
713
712
721
753 709 749
710
752
SK 92172 - SK92772 Flange or Shaft Mount 753
703 Bevel Gearset 722 Anti-Friction Bearing 748 Anti-Friction Bearing

705 Gear 724 Fixing Element Kit 749 Grooved Pin
706 Pinion 728 Gasket 751 Shrink Disc Connector
707 Output Shaft 730 Input Cover 752 Torque Arm
709 Oil Seal 731 Snap Ring 753 Bolt
710 Oil Seal 732 Gasket 754 Cover
713 Anti-Friction Bearing 741 Shim 765 Shim
714 Gasket 742 Thrust Washer 766 Snap Ring
715 Inspection Cover 743 Gearcase 767 Bolt
716 Spacer 744 Flange 769 Bolt
719 Bolt 745 Anti-Friction Bearing 918 Key
720 Key 746 Key 919 Snap Ring
721 Snap Ring 747 Shim

PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
SK 92172 - SK 92772
703 Bevel Gearset 720 Key 745 Anti-Friction Bearing
705 Gear 721 Snap Ring 746 Key
707 Output Shaft 723 Sealing Plug 748 Anti-Friction Bearing
708 Key 724 Fixing Element Kit 749 Grooved Pin
709 Oil Seal 728 Gasket 751 Shrink Disc Connector
710 Oil Seal 730 Gearbox Cover 752 Torque Arm
711 Snap Ring 731 Snap Ring 753 Bolt
712 Shim 732 Gasket 754 Cover
713 Anti-Friction Bearing 739 Snap Ring 755 Bolt
714 Gasket 741 Shim 765 Slotted Round Nut
715 Inspection Cover 742 Thrust Washer 766 Tab Lock Washer
716 Spacer 743 Gearcase 767 Bolt
719 Bolt 744 Flange 769 Hexagonal Screw

PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
325
910
310
320
330
331
300
105
1465 900
911
655
652
653 332
620 334
1470 648 811 801
610 851 823
1500 140 810 822
634 141 821
650 120
615 121
1400 600 850 830

635 826 824
636 827
631 800 400
630
657 120 120
121 121
100
630 410
630
520
500
510
140
121 141
120
130
121
131
120
131
SK 92072.1 - SK 92772.1 & 93072.1 - 93772.1 130
100 Housing 330 Screw 620 Output gear 800 Pinion shaft 850 Socket
105 Seal 331 Seal 630 Key 801 Drive gear 851 Circlip
120 Screw 332 Screw 631 Radial shaft seal 810 Roller bearing 900 Driving pinion
121 Seal 334 Seal 650 Circlip 811 Roller bearing 910 Key
130 Screw 400 Flange 635 Shim 820 Circlip 911 Circlip
131 Seal 410 Screw 636 Shim 630 Key 1400 Shrink disc
140 Screw 500 Torque arm 648 Key 822 Locknut assembly
141 Seal 510 Socket 650 Circlip 823 Tab washer 1465 Cover
300 Gear unit cover 520 Screw 652 Shim 824 Socket 1470 Screw
310 Seal 600 Output shaft 653 Shim 826 Shim 1500 Fixing element
320 Screw 610 Roller bearing 655 Radial shaft seal 827 Shim
325 Screw 615 Roller bearing 657 Sealing cap 830 Supporting disc

HELICAL-WORM
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
301
321
311 CUT PINION

312 SHAFT
313
323
319
315
317
318 PRESS-ON
PINION SHAFT
320
307 314 325 918

308 306
919
332
329
318 305
990
334
333
336
337
302 309
318
316
324 313
312
311
TYPE "AS"
337
336
335
334
328
SK 02040 - SK 42125 Foot Mounted

301 Worm Wheel 315 Inspection Cover 329 Thrust Washer
302 Worm 316 Drain Plug 332 Snap Ring
306 Pinion 318 Gasket 334 Snap Ring
307 Output Shaft 319 Socket Head Screw 335 Shim
308 Key 320 Key 336 Thrust Washer
309 Oil Seal 321 Bore Plug 337 Anti-Friction Bearing
311 Snap Ring 323 Flanged Eye Bolt 918 Key
312 Shim 324 Gearcase 919 Snap Ring
313 Anti-Friction Bearing 325 Gasket 990 Oil Level Plug
314 Gasket 328 Bore Plug

HELICAL-WORM
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS

301 Worm Wheel 314 Gasket 325 Gasket
302 Worm 315 Inspection Cover 328 Bore Plug
305 Gear 316 Drain Plug 329 Thrust Washer
306 Pinion 317 Vent Plug 332 Snap Ring
307 Output Shaft 318 Gasket 333 Key
308 Key 319 Socket Head Screw 334 Snap Ring
309 Oil Seal 320 Key 335 Shim
311 Snap Ring 321 Bore Plug 336 Thrust Washer
312 Shim 323 Flanged Eye Bolt 337 Anti-Friction Bearing
313 Anti-Friction Bearing 324 Gearcase

HELICAL-WORM
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
301
321
311 CUT PINION

SHAFT
312
313 323
319
315
317
318
PRESS-ON
PINION SHAFT
320 314
325 918
307 306
308
919
324
332
329
318
316 318 305
990 334
333 336
337
302 318 309
316
313
318
316 312
311
TYPE "AS"
337
336
335
334
328
SK 02040 - SK 42125 Flange Mounted

301 Worm Wheel 315 Inspection Cover 329 Thrust Washer
302 Worm 316 Drain Plug 332 Snap Ring
306 Pinion 318 Gasket 334 Snap Ring
307 Output Shaft 319 Socket Head Screw 335 Shim
308 Key 320 Key 336 Thrust Washer
309 Oil Seal 321 Bore Plug 337 Anti-Friction Bearing
311 Snap Ring 323 Flanged Eye Bolt 918 Key
312 Shim 324 Gearcase 919 Snap Ring
313 Anti-Friction Bearing 325 Gasket 990 Oil Level Plug
314 Gasket 328 Bore Plug

HELICAL-WORM
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS

301 Worm Wheel 314 Gasket 325 Gasket
302 Worm 315 Inspection Cover 328 Bore Plug
305 Gear 316 Drain Plug 329 Thrust Washer
306 Pinion 317 Vent Plug 332 Snap Ring
307 Output Shaft 318 Gasket 333 Key
308 Key 319 Socket Head Screw 334 Snap Ring
309 Oil Seal 320 Key 335 Shim
311 Snap Ring 321 Bore Plug 336 Thrust Washer
312 Shim 323 Flanged Eye Bolt 337 Anti-Friction Bearing
313 Anti-Friction Bearing 324 Gearcase

HELICAL-WORM
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
342 TYPE "A"

340
309
310
311
341 312
313 CUT PINION

SHAFT
323
319
TYPE "AS" 315
317
318 PRESS-ON
PINION SHAFT
320
314 325 918

306
919
307 324
332
329
318 305
318 334
301 316 990
336
333 318 337
316
302
318 TYPE "AS"

316 311
322 310
313 309
312
337
336
335 TYPE "A"
334
328
SK 02040 - SK 42125 Shaft Mounted

301 Worm Wheel 317 Vent Plug 335 Shim
302 Worm 318 Gasket 336 Thrust Washer
305 Gear 319 Socket Head Screw 337 Anti-Friction Bearing
306 Pinion 320 Key 340 Retaining Washer
307 Output Shaft 322 Spacer 341 Lock Washer
309 Oil Seal 323 Flanged Eye Bolt 342 Bolt
310 Oil Seal 324 Gearcase 350 Flange
311 Snap Ring 325 Gasket 351 Bolt
312 Shim 328 Bore Plug 918 Key
313 Anti-Friction Bearing 329 Thrust Washer 919 Snap Ring
314 Gasket 332 Snap Ring 990 Oil Level Plug
315 Inspection Cover 333 Key
316 Drain Plug 334 Snap Ring

HELICAL-WORM
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
SK 02040 - SK 42125 Shaft Mounted

301 Worm Wheel 316 Drain Plug 333 Key
302 Worm 317 Vent Plug 334 Snap Ring
305 Gear 318 Gasket 335 Shim
306 Pinion 319 Socket Head Screw 336 Thrust Washer
307 Output Shaft 320 Key 337 Anti-Friction Bearing
309 Oil Seal 322 Spacer 340 Retaining Washer
310 Oil Seal 323 Flanged Eye Bolt 341 Lock Washer
311 Snap Ring 324 Gearcase 342 Bolt
312 Shim 325 Gasket 350 Flange
313 Anti-Friction Bearing 328 Bore Plug 351 Bolt
315 Inspection Cover 332 Snap Ring

HELICAL-WORM
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
27 61
48
29
30 3
32
63
60
62
59
57
45
58
54
55
6
46
52
53
918
46
56
4
PRESS-ON
919 PINION SHAFT
28
CUT PINION
SHAFT


HELICAL-WORM
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS

3 Gear 46 Key 58 Snap Ring
28 Gasket 53 Key 61 Snap Ring
29 Spacer 54 Snap Ring 62 Oil Plug
30 Third Reduction Gearcase 55 Intermediate Shaft, Plain 63 Gasket
32 Gasket 56 Intermediate Shaft, Gearcut

HELICAL-WORM
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
346
345
347
SK13050 - SK43125 Torque Arm

345 Torque Arm 346 Bolt 347 Bushing

HELICAL-WORM
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
SK13050 - SK43125 Torque Arm

345 Torque Arm 346 Bolt 347 Bushing

HELICAL-WORM
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
SK13050 - SK43125
307 Output Shaft 309 Oil Seal 350 Flange
308 Key 346 Screw 354 Shrink Disc Connector

NORDBLOC®
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS

10 Driven gear 46 Output shaft bearing 118 Bolt
11 Pinion shaft 47 Pinion shaft bearing 120 Key
12 Driving gear 48 Pinion shaft bearing 124 Shim
13 Driving pinion 65 Shaft seal 125 Snap ring
30 Gearcase 80 Spacer 127 Bolt
33 Input cover 91 Gasket 134 Vent plug
40 Output shaft 96 Gasket 135 Gasket
42 Key 113 Oil plug 146 Key
45 Output shaft bearing 114 Gasket 147 Shim

NORDBLOC®
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS

9 Flange 47 Pinion shaft bearing 124 Shim
10 Driven gear 48 Pinion shaft bearing 125 Snap ring
11 Pinion shaft 65 Shaft seal 127 Bolt
12 Driving gear 67 O-Ring 134 Vent plug
13 Driving pinion 80 Spacer 135 Gasket
30 Gearcase 91 Gasket 146 Key
33 Input cover 96 Gasket 147 Shim
40 Output shaft 113 Oil plug 153 Bolt
42 Key 114 Gasket 154 Grooved dowel pin
45 Output shaft bearing 118 Bolt
46 Output shaft bearing 120 Key

NORDBLOC®
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS

10 Driven gear 65 Shaft seal 120 Key
11 Pinion shaft 72 Bore plug 123 Thrust washer
12 Driving gear 80 Spacer 124 Shim
13 Driving pinion 81 Spacer 125 Snap ring
14 Driving gear 82 Spacer 127 Bolt
15 Pinion shaft 83 Thrust washer 133 Key
30 Gearcase 84 Thrust washer 134 Vent plug
33 Input cover 85 Thrust washer 135 Gasket
34 Gear case cover 90 Gasket 139 Snap ring
40 Output shaft 91 Gasket 140 Shim
42 Key 96 Gasket 141 Shim
45 Output shaft bearing 111 Snap ring 142 Thrust washer
46 Output shaft bearing 112 Shim 143 Thrust washer
47 Pinion shaft bearing 113 Oil plug 146 Key
48 Pinion shaft bearing 114 Gasket 147 Shim
49 Pinion shaft bearing 118 Bolt 149 Snap ring
50 Pinion shaft bearing 119 Bolt

NORDBLOC®
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS

9 Flange 66 Shaft seal 123 Thrust washer
10 Driven gear 67 O-Ring 124 Shim
11 Pinion shaft 72 Bore plug 125 Snap ring
12 Driving gear 80 Spacer 127 Bolt
13 Driving pinion 81 Spacer 133 Key
14 Driving gear 82 Spacer 134 Vent plug
15 Pinion shaft 83 Thrust washer 135 Gasket
30 Gearcase 84 Thrust washer 139 Snap ring
33 Input cover 85 Thrust washer 140 Shim
34 Gearcase cover 90 Gasket 141 Shim
40 Output shaft 91 Gasket 142 Thrust washer
42 Key 96 Gasket 143 Thrust washer
45 Output shaft bearing 111 Snap ring 146 Key
46 Output shaft bearing 112 Shim 147 Shim
47 Pinion shaft bearing 113 Oil plug 149 Snap ring
48 Pinion shaft bearing 114 Gasket 153 Bolt
49 Pinion shaft bearing 118 Bolt 154 Grooved dowel pin
50 Pinion shaft bearing 119 Bolt
65 Shaft seal 120 Key

NORDBLOC.1®
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
325
310
330 910
331 320
300
105 PRESS-ON
CUT PINION PINION SHAFT
SHAFT
900
911 100
615
650
620
648
600
630
TYPE "AS" 610 121

131
120
638 130
635
636
634
631
712
737
753 701
711
700
710
410
400
SK 072.1 - SK 672.1 420
100 Gearcase 400 Flange 648 Key

105 Gasket 410 Bolt 650 Snap Ring
120 Drain Plug 420 Grooved Pin 700 Pinion Shaft
121 Gasket 600 Output Shaft 701 Driving Gear
130 Drain Plug 610 Anti-Friction Bearing 710 Anti-Friction Bearing
131 Gasket 615 Anti-Friction Bearing 711 Anti-Friction Bearing
300 Gearcase Cover 620 Gear 712 Anti-Friction Bearing
310 Gasket 630 Key 737 Key
320 Bolt 631 Oil Seal 745 Shim
325 Bolt 634 Snap Ring 753 Socket
326 Lock Washer 635 Shim 900 Driving Pinion
330 Vent Plug 636 Shim 910 Key
331 Seal 638 Snap Ring 911 Snap Ring

NORDBLOC.1®
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
325
326
310
910
CUT PINION
SHAFT 900
911 PRESS-ON
220 615 PINION SHAFT
230 110 620
111
648
600
630
200 610
635
636
634
712
210
737
753 701
711
TYPE "AS" TYPE "A" 700
710
121 734
120 735
732
131
130
632 100
631 141
140
400
730
410
SK 772.1 - SK 972.1 420
100 Gearcase 325 Bolt 636 Shim

110 Vent Plug 326 Lock Washer 648 Key
111 Seal 400 Flange 700 Pinion Shaft
120 Drain Plug 410 Bolt 701 Driving Gear
121 Gasket 420 Grooved Pin 710 Anti-Friction Bearing
130 Drain Plug 600 Output Shaft 711 Anti-Friction Bearing
131 Gasket 610 Anti-Friction Bearing 712 Anti-Friction Bearing
140 Drain Plug 615 Anti-Friction Bearing 734 Shim
141 Gasket 620 Gear 735 Shim
200 Housing Cover 630 Key 737 Key
210 Gasket 631 Oil Seal 753 Socket
220 Bolt 632 Oil Seal 900 Driving Pinion
230 Bolt 634 Snap Ring 910 Key
310 Seal 635 Shim 911 Snap Ring

NORDBLOC.1®
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
325
326
310
330 910
331 320
300
105 PRESS-ON
CUT PINION PINION SHAFT
SHAFT
900
911 100
821
811
801
800
615
810
650
620
648
121
600 131
630 120
130
TYPE "AS" 610

638
635 712
636
634 755
631
737
753 701
711
700
410
710
400
SK 373.1 - SK 673.1 420
100 Gearcase 420 Grooved Pin 710 Anti-Friction Bearing

105 Gasket 600 Output Shaft 711 Anti-Friction Bearing
120 Drain Plug 610 Anti-Friction Bearing 712 Anti-Friction Bearing
121 Gasket 615 Anti-Friction Bearing 737 Key
130 Drain Plug 620 Gear 745 Shim
131 Gasket 630 Key 753 Socket
300 Gearcase Cover 631 Oil Seal 800 Pinion Shaft
310 Gasket 634 Snap Ring 801 Drive Gear
320 Bolt 635 Shim 810 Anti-Friction Bearing
325 Bolt 636 Shim 811 Anti-Friction Bearing
326 Lock Washer 638 Snap Ring 821 Key
330 Vent Plug 648 Key 900 Driving Pinion
331 Seal 650 Snap Ring 910 Key
400 Flange 700 Pinion Shaft 911 Snap Ring
410 Bolt 701 Driving Gear

NORDBLOC.1®
PARTS LIST DRAWINGS
RETAIN FOR FUTURE USE 325
U15705 - 4 of 4
326
310
910
CUT PINION
SHAFT 900
911 PRESS-ON
220 615 PINION SHAFT
230 110 620
111
648
600
630
200
610
635
636
634 819
821 835
210 811 836
712
801
737
800 701
753
810
711
TYPE "AS" TYPE "A" 820
700
121
120 710
734
735
732
131
130
632 100
631 141
140
400
730
410
SK 773.1 - SK 973.1 420
100 Gearcase 600 Output Shaft 712 Anti-Friction Bearing

105 Gasket 610 Anti-Friction Bearing 737 Key
120 Drain Plug 615 Anti-Friction Bearing 745 Shim
121 Gasket 620 Gear 753 Socket
130 Drain Plug 630 Key 800 Pinion Shaft
131 Gasket 631 Oil Seal 801 Drive Gear
300 Gearcase Cover 634 Snap Ring 810 Anti-Friction Bearing
310 Gasket 635 Shim 811 Anti-Friction Bearing
320 Bolt 636 Shim 819 Snap Ring
326 Lock Washer 648 Key 821 Key
330 Vent Plug 650 Snap Ring 835 Shim
331 Seal 700 Pinion Shaft 836 Shim
400 Flange 701 Driving Gear 900 Driving Pinion
410 Bolt 710 Anti-Friction Bearing 910 Key
420 Grooved Pin 711 Anti-Friction Bearing 911 Snap Ring

TROUBLESHOOTING
Troubleshooting
This section identifies some of the most common issues involved with NORD Gear speed reducers , and provides
recommendations to assist you in defining and answering your questions as you work with our products. You may also
contact our Engineering/Application departments if your questions are not answered in the table below.
Problem With the Reducer Possible Causes Suggested Remedy

Check rated capacity of reducer, replace
Load exceeds the capacity of the
Overloading with unit of sufficient capacity or reduce
reducer
the load.
Check lubricant level and adjust up to
Insufficient lubrication
Runs Hot recommended levels
Check lubricant level and adjust down to
Improper lubrication Excessive lubrication
recommended levels.
Flush out and refill with correct lubricant
Wrong lubrication
as recommended
Inspect mounting of reducer. Tighten
Weak mounting structure loose bolts and/or reinforce mounting and
Loose foundation bolts structure.
Loose hold down bolts Tighten bolts
Runs Noisy Replace bearing. Clean and flush reducer

May be due to lack of lubricant
and fill with recommended lubricant.
Failure of bearings
Overload Check rated capacity of reducer.
Level of lubricant in reducer not Check lubricant level and adjust to factory
Insufficient lubricant
properly maintained. recommended level.
Overloading of reducer can cause Replace broken parts. Check rated
damage capacity of reducer.
Output shaft Internal parts are Key missing or sheared off on
Replace key.
does not turn broken or missing input shaft.
Properly allign reducer and coupling.
Coupling loose or disconnected
Tighten coupling.
Caused by dirt or grit entering Replace seals. Autovent may be clogged.
Worn seals
seal. Replace or clean.
Check lubricant level and adjust to
Overfilled reducer
recommended level.
Unit runs hot or leaks
Oil Leakage Clean or replace, being sure to prevent any
Vent clogged.
dirt from falling into the reducer.
Improper mounting position, such
Check mounting position on the name tag
Incorrect fill level as wall or ceiling mount of
& verify with mounting chart in manual.
horizontal reducer.

MOTORS - AC INDUCTION,
SINGLE & POLYPHASE
1. Overview 2. Motor Types

This user manual applies to NORD Motor products and it pro- NORD AC electric induction motors described in this manual
vides general information for motor operation, installation, generally include the following types:
maintenance, inspection, repair, and trouble shooting, which
is relevant to most of the motor products shipped by NORD. • Single speed or two-speed design.
Information and instructions provided in this manual, safety • Three phase alternating current or single phase design.
and commissioning information and all other manuals appli- • Enclosure types: TEFC, TENV, and TEBC.
cable to any items supplied by NORD must be observed. 3. Enclosure Types
This instruction manual is not intended to include compre- Totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC).
hensive details and information related to all possible design
variations or accessories options available with NORD motors. TEFC motor designs rely on fan that is mounted on the mo-
If there is any uncertainty about specific procedures, instruc- tor’s rotor shaft so the cooling capacity can vary based upon
tions or motor details, then please refer these questions to the motor’s operating speed.
NORD for additional information or clarification.
Totally enclosed, non-ventilated (TENV)
Before installing, operating, or performing maintenance on The TENV motor designs rely purely on convection cooling
any electrical motor become familiar with the following: and they have no fan. Often TENV designs are labeled for
intermittent or periodic duty or at a lower power rating than
• The detailed operating instructions and wiring diagrams. is typical for the given motor frame size.
• All applicable national, local and system-specific
regulations, codes and practices. Totally enclosed, blower cooled (TEBC)
• The national / regional regulations governing safety and The TEBC design uses separate blower or ventilator fan, with
accident prevention. its own low wattage motor and a separate power supply, to
• The proper use of any tools, transportation or hoisting provide continuous airflow and cooling. The blower can be
equipment, and safety equipment needed to complete used to extend the speed range of the motor and allow ex-
the installation. treme slow speed operation without causing a concern for
overheating. Blower data is provided in Table 6, page 11.
• To avoid serious injury or possible damage to the
equipment or machine, compliance with all safety and 4. Voltage and Frequency Variation
information notes is mandatory!
Voltage and frequency variations are based upon the assump-
tion that the nameplate horsepower will not be exceeded and
WARNING that the motor temperature may increase. Standard allow-
able deviations are based upon the type of motor labeling.
All work involved in the transport, connection, commis-
sioning and maintenance of any NORD product must be NEMA and CSA Labeled Motors
carried out by qualified and responsible technicians. All
applicable national, regional, and local work regulations Variations are based upon the nominal utilization voltage,
and safety requirements must also be complied with. and not the service (supply) voltage as per ANSI C84.1.
NORD assumes no liability for personal injury, accidental Service Voltages Utilization Voltages
death, or equipment damage and malfunctions resulting
from failure to comply with installation or operating in- 120V, 208V, 240V, 480V, 600V 115V, 200V, 230V, 460V, 575V
structions, safety notes, or any work regulations and laws! • Voltage variation at rated frequency = ±10%.
• Frequency variations at rated voltage = ±5%.
DANGER • Combined voltage/frequency variation = ±5%.
To avoid electrocution, injury or death, make certain the CE Labeled Motors
motor is properly grounded, completely de-energized and
brought to a no-voltage condition prior to working on any Per IEC 60038, allowable service voltage variations on in the
electrical connections. current system, compared to the previous system, are as in-
dicated.
Previous Service Voltages Current Service Voltages
220V, 380V, 660V 230V, 400V, 690V +6/-10%
240V, 415V 230V, 400V +10/-6%
• Per EN 60034-1 a ±5% voltage variation and a ±2%
frequency variation can be tolerated.
• The allowed variations are based upon the voltage
(or voltage range) indicated on the motor nameplate.

SINGLE & POLYPHASE
5. Motor Nameplate Information
The motor nameplate and the display of technical information may vary slightly depending upon the global standard/s that
the motor conforms to and the efficiency level. Please reference the examples below.
www.nord.com C US
E 191510 LR 112560
Mtr
No.
PH SF NEMA DUTY IP
INS EFF % PF FR
AMB ° CENCL DP CODE
Hp kW
rpm Hz rpm Hz
V V
A A
Brake Nm VAC VDC
www.nord.com C US
E 191510 LR 112560
Mtr
No.
PH SF NEMA DUTY IP
INS EFF % PF FR
AMB °C ENCL DP CODE
Hp kW
rpm Hz rpm Hz
V V
A A
Brake Nm VAC VDC
0850203-0
Type SK
~ Mot Nr
Th Cl F IP S
EN 60034 (H)
V A
kW 1/min
COS φ Hz
MB= Nm, AC V ~ ,DC V=
Table
able 1.
1. Nameplate
Nameplate Data
Data
Field Definition Field Definition
Model / Type Power Factor
Number of Phases Motor Frame Size
2
Order Number Full Load Speed (rpm or 1/min )
Serial Number Efficiency
Insulation Class NEMA Code Letter
IP (Ingress Protection) Enclosure Rating Service Factor
Duty Cycle Current Rating (If Service Factor ≥ 1.15)
Ambient Temperature Rating (°C) Operating Voltage Rage (A)
Enclosure Type Current Rating at Operating Voltage Range (A)
Motor Frequency (Hz) Service Factor at Operating Voltage Range (A)
Voltage Rating (V) Brake Rating (Nm)
Current Rating (A) Brake Supply Voltage (VAC)
Rated Power (HP or kW) Brake Coil Voltage (VDC)

SINGLE & POLYPHASE
6. Motor Options And Nomenclature

NORD offers many options for its motors. The option code will be shown in the motor nomenclature.
Below are commonly used options.
Code Description Code Description

AICM Additional Internal Insulation Coating Applied OL TENV Motor – Without Fan / With Cover
BRE With Brake OL/H TENV Motor - Without Fan & Cover
EAR Single Phase, Start Cap/Run Cap P Premium Efficient Motors
ECR Single Phase, Start Cap/Run Cap Increased SF RD Canopy Cover
EHB Single Phase, Run Capacitor Only RDD Double Canopy Cover
EP Epoxy Dipped Windings RG Brake – Corrosion Protected
F Blower Cooling Fan - 3ph & 1ph RLS Backstop
FC Blower Cooling Fan - 1ph SH Motor Space Heater
FHL Brake – Lockable Manual Release SR Brake – Dust Protected
H Energy Efficient TF Thermistor
HL Brake – Manual Hand Release TW Thermostat
IG Incremental Encoder VN 10:1 Constant Torque Rated Motor
IP66 IP66 Environmental Protection VR 5:1 Constant Torque Rated Motor
IR Brake – Current Sensing Relay VW 20:1 Constant Torque Rated Motor
KB Condensation Holes - Removable Plugs VZ-F 1000+:1 Constant Torque Rated Motor
KD Condensation Holes - Open WE 2nd Motor Shaft End
MIK Brake – Microswitch WU High Slip Rotor
MS Power Plug Connector Z High Inertia Motor Fan
Motor Nomenclature
100LP / 4 BRE 40 ...
Other Options
Brake Size Nm
Brake
Number of Poles
Frame Size
Ordering Examples
100LP / 4 BRE 100 HL RG 63L / 4 BRE 40 FHL SR
Corrosion Protection Dust & Corrosion Prot.
Hand Release Lever Locking Hand Release Lever
100 Nm Brake Torque 40 Nm Brake Torque
Brake Brake
4 Poles 4 Poles
Motor Frame Size Motor Frame Size
100 Frame Motor with 4 poles, Brake, 100 Nm with 63 Frame motor with 4 poles, a 40 Nm Brake with
a hand release lever, corrosion protected brake, a locking hand release lever and dust & corrosion
and a current sensing relay. protection.

SINGLE & POLYPHASE
7. Application Conditions 8. Transportation

Standard NORD motors are designed to operate in dusty or During transportation observe the following:
moist environments and have anti-fungal, thermal class F in-
sulation. • Make sure that all eyebolts and lifting lugs are tight and
firmly against their supporting surface.
• Enclosure Protection Rating = IP55 (minimum). • Use all the lifting eyes that are intentionally supplied with
• Maximum Installation Height = 3300 ft (1000 m). the motor.
• Ambient Temperature = -4 to 104°F (-20 to 40 °C). • Lift only at designed points.
• Tropical-proof, Thermal Class F insulation. • Protect the mounting surface from possible damage
during transportation.
The protection level and maximum ambient temperature are
stated on the motor nameplate. • Always use sufficiently rated handling equipment, lift
mechanisms and lifting straps.
• With heavier objects or unbalanced loads, it may be ap-
IMPORTANT NOTE propriate to use more than one lifting point or an
additional strap or sling to assure safe transportation of
NORD can provide motors for an expanded range of appli- the assembly. This is especially true of assembled
cations and service conditions including higher protection gearmotors and motorized reducers.
levels, extreme ambient conditions and, higher altitudes.
• Once the NORD motor or assembly is properly installed,
remove the transportation fixtures completely or make
certain they are properly re-secured and tightened.
IMPORTANT NOTE
Consult NORD for recommendations if motors are oper- WARNING
ated under extreme loading conditions, exposed to high
inertia loads, or need to operate under unusually high Transportation – Use of Lifting Devices
cycling conditions with high starting and stopping fre- To avoid death, serious injury or equipment damage…
quency.
• Hoisting lugs or lifting eyes attached to the motor are
designed for the weight of the motor only! Do not
DANGER attach any additional loads!
• The motor must only be transported and lifted using
Special design and assembly considerations are needed if the lifting eyes, in a position that is appropriate for its
NORD motors are subject to any of the following conditions. type of construction. Otherwise, it could fall over or slip
Environmental conditions may lead to premature damage in the lifting tackle.
and/or failure without the proper protective features.
Consult NORD for design considerations: • During suspended transport, two straps must be able to
carry the entire load weight safely.
• Outdoor installation with motor in a vertical position.
• When required use additional, suitable means of
• Direct contact with aggressive or corrosive materials support for transportation, installation or removal.
(acids, bases, salts, certain gases, etc.).
• Always secure the support equipment to prevent it
• Exposure to extreme high or low temperatures, high from slipping.
relative humidity, condensation moisture or very wet
environments.
• Subject to extreme material build-up on the unit (dirt,
dust, sand, etc.).
• Hazardous Locations (risk of fire or explosion).

SINGLE & POLYPHASE
9. Storage 10. Safety Considerations

If the motor is not in service, store it according to the follow- When installing, servicing or replacing electric motors it is im-
ing conditions: portant to be working in a “voltage-free” state. Observe the
following safety rules.
• Store the motor in a clean, dry, dirt-free, vibration free
area. Safety Rules
• Storage temperatures of 10°C (50°F) to 50°C (120°F) must
be maintained. 1. Disconnect the system. Disconnect the auxiliary circuits
• Relative humidity must not exceed 60%. (brakes, space heaters, etc.).
• If vibration in the area exceeds 0.002 inch (0.05 mm) at 60 2. Prevent reconnection (follow safe lock-out/tag-out practices).
hertz, then vibration isolation pads are suggested to 3. Make sure that the equipment is at zero voltage.
prevent brinelling of the bearings. 4. Make certain the equipment is properly grounded and
• Treat the unprotected shaft end and mating flange short-circuited.
surfaces with a corrosion inhibitor that can be cleaned off 5. Cover or isolate nearby components that are still
prior to commissioning. electrically live.
• Before placing the motor into service, visually inspect the
motor exterior for evidence of deterioration during To energize the system, apply the measures in reverse order.
storage. Turn the motor shaft by hand to make sure the
shaft turns freely. Qualified Personnel
• Motor space heaters, when provided, are to be connected
and energized whenever there is a possibility that the All work involved in the transport, connection, commission-
storage ambient conditions will reach the dew point. ing and maintenance of any NORD product must be carried
Space heaters are optional. Remove motor from the out by qualified and responsible technicians.
storage container when the heater is energized.
For the purpose of this documentation, a qualified personnel
• If the motor needs to be stored for extended periods, or is taken to mean a person or people who fulfill the following
if it is stored in less than favorable conditions, it is requirements:
recommend that the winding insulation resistance be
checked prior to commissioning (page 7). • Through appropriate training and experience, they are
• Even if stored in favorable conditions, the antifriction able to recognize and avoid risks and potential dangers in
motor bearings and motor shaft seals may need to be their particular field of activity.
replaced if the storage period is more than 4 years. • They have been instructed to carry out work on the
machine by the appropriate person responsible.
• They are responsible for knowing and complying with all
applicable national, regional, and local work regulations
and safety requirements.

SINGLE & POLYPHASE
10. Safety Considerations Ctd.

General Warnings and Cautions
DANGER WARNING
To avoid electrocution, injury or death, make certain all Maintain Proper Cooling
electrical devices (motors, brakes, variable frequency
drives, etc.) are properly grounded, completely de-en- Operating the motor without the intended cooling fan
ergized, and brought to a no-voltage condition prior to may cause overheating and result in very hot surfaces, per-
working on any electrical connections. Remember that sonal injury and material damage. Never commission a
most of these devices carry potentially dangerous energy motor intended to be fan cooled when it is missing the
levels for a period of time after power is removed. Always shaft-driven fan or external blower assembly.
follow proper lock-out/tag-out procedures.
DANGER
DANGER Condensation Drain Holes (Optional)
Electrical machines contain dangerous voltage levels, elec- Inserting objects into the condensation drain holes can
trically live parts, rotating surfaces and hot surfaces. To damage the winding and can result in death, serious injury
prevent injury, death or possible equipment damage al- and damage to property!
ways observe the following:
• Before opening sealed drain holes, make sure the
• Keep all safety covers and guards in place during oper- motor is in a no-voltage condition. Close the condensa-
ation. Remove and replace covers in compliance with tion drain holes before re-commissioning.
the applicable safety regulations.
• Exercise caution around drain holes that are intended
• Allow the machine to cool down before starting any to be left open, especially when the motor is energized.
work on it.
• Operate the machines properly.
• Perform regular maintenance on the machine. IMPORTANT NOTE
• Secure and guard free-standing shaft extensions. Before start-up check the following:
• All electrical connections are secure, well grounded
DANGER and properly made.
• The motor is rotating in the correct direction (when
Electrically Live Parts
de-coupled from the driven load).
Electrical machines contain electrically live parts. Fatal or
• There are no temperature-sensitive parts (cables etc.),
severe injuries and substantial material damage can occur
in contact with motor enclosure.
if the required covers are removed or if the machines are
not handled, operated, or maintained properly. • Condensation drain holes are always located at the
lowest point of the motor.
WARNING
Rotating Parts
Electrical machines contain dangerous rotating parts. Fatal
or severe injuries and substantial material damage can oc-
cur if the required covers are removed or if the machines
are not handled, operated, or maintained properly.
WARNING
Hot Surfaces
Electrical machines have hot surfaces. Fatal or severe in-
juries and substantial material damage can occur if the
required covers are removed or if the machines are not
handled, operated, or maintained properly. Allow the ma-
chine to cool down before starting any work on it.

SINGLE & POLYPHASE
11. Checking the Insulation

Before putting the motor into operation for the first time, Typical motor bearing grease is an NLGI No. 2 consistency,
after a lengthy period of storage or standstill (approx. 6 high grade product with a polyurea base thickener, synthetic
months), the insulation resistance of the winding should be or blended mineral/synthetic oil, and stabilizing agents to
checked. protect against heat and oxidation.
WARNING Table 3 – Motor Bearing Maintence Guidelines

Frame Size Power Poles Re-greasing Interval
During or directly after measurement the motor connec-
tion terminals carry hazardous voltages. Fatal or severe 0.16-60 HP
63-225 All Maintence Free
injuries and substantial material damage can occur if the (0.12-45 kW)
required covers are removed or if the machines are 2 4000 h
75-125 HP
not handled, operated, or maintained properly. 250 to 280
(55-75 kW) 4 to 8 8000 h
A. Control 150-250 HP 2 3000 h
315
(132-200 kW) 4 to 8 6000 h
The insulation resistance of new, cleaned, or repaired motor
windings against the grounded housing and against one an-
other should be > 200 Mega-Ohms. STOP NOTICE
B. Measurement When re-greasing motor bearings do not to mix different
greases without verifying the compatibility with a repu-
Using a Mega-Ohm meter apply a DC voltage of 500 VDC to table grease lubrication supplier. Mixing incompatible
the motor winding for a period of 60 seconds and record the products can lead to bearing failure.
winding insulation resistance compared to ground.
• The 500 VDC test voltage is applicable to low voltage 13. Mechanical Installation
motors up to 1000 VAC.
Integral motors, NEMA C-face motors, and IEC flange mount-
• When performing this test the temperature of the ed motors must be rigidly secured to their mating connection
windings should be 25°C ± 15°C (77°F ± 27°F). surface using all fastening screws tightened to the proper
bolt torque. It is good practice to apply a medium strength
C. Verification thread- locking agent (Loctite® 242) to the mounting screws.
• If the insulation resistance of the winding is less than 50 Foot mounted motors must be securely installed to a rigid
Mega-Ohms, the cause may be moisture. The windings and level foundation or mounting surface to minimize vibra-
should be dried and the test should be repeated. tion and maintain alignment between the motor and shaft
• After any lengthy period of operation the insulation load. All mounting hole locations must be utilized. Tighten
resistance may drop. So long as the measured value does all hold down screws or bolts to the proper bolt torque.
not fall below the critical value of 50 Mega-Ohm, the
motor may continue to be operated. NOTICE
• If the measured value falls below the critical 50 Failure to provide a proper mounting surface may cause
Mega-Ohm level, the cause must be established and the vibration, misalignment and bearing damage.
windings or winding sections must be cleaned, dried,
repaired, or replaced as needed.
Accurate alignment and proper balancing of output devices
12. Bearing Lubrication (couplings, belts, pulleys, etc.) is required to assure quite, low
vibration, trouble free operation. When the motor is directly
NORD motor frame sizes 63 up to and including 225 are nor-
coupled to a gear drive or a driven machine make sure that
mally supplied with internally grease lubricated bearings and
the motor shaft and driven machine shaft are aligned with
require no lubrication during normal operation.
one another axially.
NORD motor frame sizes 250 and larger are supplied with
grease fittings for re-greasing the motor bearings. NOTICE
Inaccurate alignment may lead to bearing damage, exces-
IMPORTANT NOTE sive vibrations and shaft breakage.
Motors with grease fittings are normally supplied with a

label indicating the grease type used, the suggested re- IMPORTANT NOTE
lubrication interval, and the amount of new grease to be
applied. General bearing maintence guidelines are listed For motor replacement guidelines see section 20 on page
in Table 3. 15 and section 21 on page 16.

SINGLE & POLYPHASE
14. Electrical Connections

• Tighten the terminal board screw connections on the on
DANGER the main terminal board per the table below.
To avoid electrocution, injury or death, make certain all
electrical devices (motors, brakes, variable frequency Table 4 – Tightening Torque:
drives, etc.) are properly grounded, completely de-en- Terminal Board and Grounding Screws
ergized, and brought to a no-voltage condition prior to Thread Size Nut Size Tightening Torque
working on any electrical connections. Remember that
most of these devices potentially dangerous energy levels [mm] [lb-ft] [Nm]
for a period of time after power is removed. Always fol- M4 7 0.6-0.9 0.8-1.2
low proper lock-out/tag-out procedures. M5 8 1.3-1.8 1.8-2.5
M6 10 2.0-3.0 2.7-4
IMPORTANT NOTE M8 13 4.0-5.9 5.5-8
M10 17 6.6-9.6 9-13
External motor brakes have their own connection require- M12 19 11.8-14.8 16-20
ments as indicated in the appropriate brake instruction
manuals.
• Upon final assembly, the terminal box cover must be
sealed so that it is dust-tight and water-tight.
WARNING
If the motor has an integral brake, make certain there is Table 5 – Tightening Torque:
no load connected to the driven equipment before releas- Terminal Box Cover Screws
ing the brake. Otherwise serious injury, death, or damage
Thread Size Tightening Torque
to the equipment may result.
[lb-ft] [Nm]
• The supply voltage and frequency must agree with the M4 0.6-0.9 0.8-1.2
motor nameplate data. M5 0.9-1.3 1.2-1.8
• Always feed the connecting leads into the terminal box M6 1.1-1.8 1.5-2.5
using appropriate mating cable glands. The mating M8 2.2-3.7 3.0-5.0
connection cables and cable glands should be suitable for
temperatures ≥ 194°F (90°C).
15. Direction of Rotation
• Provide the ends of the connecting leads and ground
lead with cable lugs or curved ring eyelets before connect- The motor shaft rotation is defined per IEC 600034, Part 8.
ing them to the terminal board. The motor shaft rotation can be controlled by the way the
• Make certain that the wiring connections and arrange- incoming line power is connected. When connecting the in-
ment of the terminal board jumpers conform to the coming line power in phase order to the terminal block posts,
appropriate wiring diagram as provided in the motor T1 (U1), T2 (V1), and T3 (W1) respectively, the motor shaft
terminal box and/or page 9 of this manual. rotation will be clockwise when viewing the motor shaft at
the drive-end.

SINGLE & POLYPHASE
15. Wiring Diagrams - Motor & Motor Option Connection Diagrams

NORD Frames 63-225
NORD Frames 63-225 NORD Mfg by Siemens - Frames 200+ NORD Mfg by Siemens - Frames 200+ 460 / 800V, 60Hz, 3Ø 230 / 400V, 50Hz, 3Ø
230 / 460V, 60Hz, 3Ø 200 / 400V, 50Hz, 3Ø 230 / 460V, 60Hz, 3Ø 200 / 400V, 50Hz, 3Ø 230 / 460V, 60Hz, 3Ø 200 / 400V, 50Hz, 3Ø 208 / 360V, 60Hz, 3Ø 400 / 690V, 50Hz, 3Ø
190 / 380V, 60Hz, 3Ø 190 / 380V, 60Hz, 3Ø 332 / 575V, 60Hz, 3Ø
120094410
WIRING DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM

3 PHASE MOTOR 3 PHASE MOTOR 3 PHASE MOTOR 3 PHASE MOTOR
high voltage L2 Y high voltage L1 L2 L3
T4 T5 T6
Y Y
U1 T1 V1 T2 W1 T3 T2 (V1)
L1 L3 T1 (U1) T3 (W1) T6 T4 T5
T7 T8 T9 W2 U2 V2
V2 T5 V5 T8 T8 (V3) T5 (V2)
T1 T2 T3
U2 T4 U5 T7 T7 (U3) T4 (U2) T1 T2 T3
L1 L2 L3 Y U1 V1 W1
W2 T6 W5 T9 T9 (W3) T6 (W2)
High Voltage high voltage L1 L2 L3
low voltage L2 YY low voltage L1 L2 L3

T4 T5 T6
V1 T2 T1 (U1) T2 (V1) T3 (W1) T6 T4 T5
U1 T1 W1 T3 W2 U2 V2
T7 T8 T9 L1 L3
V2 T5 V5 T8 T8 (V3) T5 (V2)
YY
T1 T2 T3 U2 T4 U5 T7 T7 (U3) T4 (U2)
T1 T2 T3
L1 L2 L3 W2 T6 W5 T9 T9 (W3) T6 (W2) YY U1 V1 W1
Low Voltage *JUMPER WIRES NEEDED low voltage L1 L2 L3
NORD 2 - SPEED MOTORS NORD 2 - SPEED MOTORS

SINGLE WINDING (4-2 & 8-4 POLE) DUAL WINDING (8-2 POLE)
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
2 - SPEED MOTORS
2 - SPEED MOTORS
T4 T5 T6 T4 T5 T6
2U 2V 2W 2U
SINGLE WINDING
2V 2W
DUAL WINDING
HIGH SPEED HIGH SPEED

T1 1U T2 1V T3 1W
T1 T2 T3
1U 1V 1W
T4 T5 T6 T4 T5 T6
2U 2V 2W 2U 2V 2W
LOW SPEED LOW SPEED

T1 1U T2 1V T3 1W
T1 T2 T3
1U 1V 1W
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
Customer Supplied
Starter Contacts
OPTION “F” 1 PH OPTION “F” 3 PH

FROM MOTOR
WIRE
TERMINATION * MAX. OPERATING FROM MOTOR
WIRE
TERMINATION
380-575V VOLTAGE 2.5V.
50 / 60 Hz * SWITCH TEMP. 155°C
* RESPONSE TIME
230V
50 / 60 Hz < 5 SECONDS
TO
CONTROL
220-332V DEVICE
50 / 60 Hz TO
CONTROL
DEVICE
* CAPACITOR IS SUPPLIED
THERMISTOR SPACE HEATER

120095240
120095220
120095250
BLOWER COOLING FAN

“F” OPTION “TF” OPTION “SH” OPTION
FROM MOTOR
WIRE
TERMINATION * NC (NORMALLY CLOSED)
* CONTACTS RATED 1.6A
1 PHASE AT 2.50 VAC
115V* * 6-500 VAC RANGE
50/60 Hz TO * AUTOMATIC RESET AT
CONTROL
DEVICE
30 ± 15°C TEMP. DROP
* CAPACITOR IS SUPPLIED
THERMISTATS
120095230
120095450
BLOWER COOLING FAN

“FC” OPTION “TW” OPTION

SINGLE & POLYPHASE
15. Wiring Diagrams Ctd. - Single Phase Motor Connection Diagrams

Motor Frame Sizes 63-90 Motor Frame Sizes 63-90 Motor Frame Sizes 63-90
230V, 50Hz, 1Ø 230V, 50Hz, 1Ø 230V, 50Hz, 1Ø
SINGLE PHASE SINGLE PHASE MOTOR SINGLE PHASE

MOTOR EHB1 EAR1 MOTOR - EST
CA
Z1 U2 Z2 Z1 U2 Z2 2 3 W2 U2 V2
Starting Relay CB
L1 CB L1
U1 CB 4 L1 U1 V1 W1
U1
N
Clockwise N Clockwise Clockwise N
CA
Z1 U2 Z2 Z2 2 3 W2 U2 V2
Starting Relay CB
L1 CB L1
U1 U1 CB 4 L1 U1 V1 W1 N
N
Counter Clockwise N Counter Clockwise Counter Clockwise
Motor Frame Sizes 63-90

115 / 230, 60Hz, 1Ø
SINGLE PHASE MOTOR WITH STANDARD RELAY

ECR - NEMA 115/230V
CB CB CB CB
CA CA CA CA
T2 T7 T6 T2 T7 T6 T2 T7 T6 T2 T7 T6
2 3 T4 T5 T1 2 3 T4 T5 T1 2 3 T4 T5 T1 2 3 T4 T5 T1
STARTING RELAY STARTING RELAY STARTING RELAY
4 T9 T8 T3 4 T9 T8 T3 4 T3 4 T9 T8 T3
T9 T8
N L1 N L1 N L1 N L1
Clockwise Low Voltage Clockwise High Voltage Counter Clockwise Low Voltage Counter Clockwise High Voltage
Motor Frame Sizes 63-90

115 / 230, 60Hz, 1Ø
08506980
SINGLE PHASE MOTOR WITH SINPAC RELAY
ECR - NEMA 115/230V
N L1 N L1 N L1 N L1
Clockwise Low Voltage Clockwise High Voltage Counter Clockwise Low Voltage Counter Clockwise High Voltage

SINGLE & POLYPHASE
16. Motor Accessories

Blower Cooling Fan (Option F & FC)
• Connection Diagram Shown on page 10
• Option FC is 1-phase, 115V
• Option F has capability of 1 phase by connecting a supplied capacitor
Table 6 – Option F & FC
Option F – 3ph & 1ph 220-575V 50/60Hz

60Hz Ratings 50Hz Ratings
Motor Frame Voltage Current Power Voltage Current Power
[V] [A] [W] [V] [A] [W]
Single phase connection - ⊥ (∆ Delta)
63 230 – 277 0.11 38 230 – 277 0.10 27
71 230 – 277 0.12 41 230 – 277 0.10 28
80 230 – 277 0.13 44 230 – 277 0.11 29
90 230 – 277 0.25 88 230 – 277 0.26 72
100 230 – 277 0.28 88 230 – 277 0.26 70
112 230 – 277 0.31 107 230 – 277 0.26 73
132 230 – 277 0.27 89 230 – 277 0.29 82
160 - 225 230 – 277 0.41 140 230 – 277 0.45 128
Three phase low-voltage connection - (∆ Delta)
63 220 – 332 0.08 23 220 – 290 0.10 27
71 220 – 332 0.08 24 220 – 290 0.10 30
80 220 – 332 0.08 25 220 – 290 0.01 29
90 220 – 332 0.21 64 220 – 290 0.28 86
100 220 – 332 0.21 66 220 – 290 0.27 86
112 220 – 332 0.23 70 220 – 290 0.27 85
132 220 – 332 0.25 74 220 – 290 0.32 96
160 - 225 220 – 322 0.49 165 220 – 290 0.52 155
Three phase high-voltage connection - (Y)
63 380 – 575 0.04 23 380 – 500 0.05 29
71 380 – 575 0.04 25 380 – 500 0.05 30
80 380 – 575 0.04 26 380 – 500 0.05 29
90 380 – 575 0.12 62 380 – 500 0.16 82
100 380 – 575 0.12 66 380 – 500 0.16 83
112 380 – 575 0.13 70 380 – 500 0.16 82
132 380 – 575 0.14 75 380 – 500 0.18 96
160 - 225 380 – 575 0.28 165 380 – 500 0.29 155
Option FC – 115V 50/60Hz 1ph
60Hz Ratings 50Hz Ratings
Motor Frame Voltage Current Power Voltage Current Power
[V] [A] [W] [V] [A] [W]
Single Phase Connection - ⊥ (∆ Delta)
63 100 – 135 0.23 42 100 – 135 0.30 42
71 100 – 135 0.23 47 100 – 135 0.30 44
80 100 – 135 0.27 57 100 – 135 0.30 43
90 100 – 135 0.46 102 100 – 135 0.57 78
100 100 – 135 0.53 105 100 – 135 0.54 78
112 100 – 135 0.60 115 100 – 135 0.55 80

SINGLE & POLYPHASE
16. Motor Acc. Ctd. - Motors with Thermal Protection Operation of WAGO® Series 221 Connector
Effective July 15th, 2016 many newly manufactured NORD 1. Strip the wire/s to be connected to 11 mm (0.43 in).
motors that require a thermal protection device will use 2. Open up the lever of the lever-nut, place the wire in the
WAGO® Series 221 Series Compact Splicing Connectors. These receptical and close the clamp.
connectors will be used for splicing the leads of the thermal 3. Repeat for the additional wires being joined.
protection option supplied by NORD to the customer sup-
plied control device.
• The WAGO® connector will facilitate assembly of NORD

63-132 frame, 60Hz, CUS approved motors
• An oversized brake terminal box and secondary 2-post
wire termination strip will no longer be required.
• NORD will supply (2) Wago® Series 221, 2 conductor splicing
connectors for each motor requiring thermal protection
(NORD P/N 18251607)
Table 7 – Motors Receiving the WAGO® Connector

Motor Supplier NORD
Frame Size 63 to 132
Type CUS WAGO® receptical in the open position
Thermal Protection Option TW, TF, PT100, KTY
Motor Connection Wye-Wye/Wye (YY/Y)
Voltage – Hz 230/460V – 60 Hz
Brake Motors Affected No
EKK Small Terminal Box Not possible (space limited
Table 8 – WAGO® Series 221 Connector Ratings

12-24 AWG (solid stranded or fine stranded)
Wire Size 0.14 - 4mm2 (fine stranded)
0.2 - 2mm2 (solid stranded)
Rated Voltage 600V
Rated Current 20A
Operating Temp. 105°C (221°F)
WAGO® receptical in the closed position
Global Approvals cULus, ENC 05, EAC, PSE
UL Certificate E69654
The WAGO Connector remains optional for the following
NORD motors:
Brake Motors - An oversized conduit box is utilized with a

secondary 2-post wire termination block for the thermal
protection option
Delta/Wye (∆/Y) Connected Motors - These utilize an 8 post
terminal box (6 primary posts for the supply power and 2
auxillary posts for thermal protection)
Motors 160 Frame and Larger - The terminal box is large
enough to allow the use of a secondary 2-post wire
termination block for your thermal protection device.

SINGLE & POLYPHASE
Thermostats (TW & 2TW)

Table 9. TW & 2TW options, Thermostats
16. Motor Acc. Ctd. - Space Heaters (Option SH)
Standard connection Series connected, one per phase • Connection Diagram shown on Page 9
Contact NC (Normally Closed)/ Auto Re-setting • Space Heaters are mounted directly on the motor winding
• The leads are brought into the terminal box and
Response Temperature
311 °F (155 °C) Shut-Off Device labeled H1 and H2
(Option TW)
• They require a separate voltage supply and must not be
Response Temperature 311 °F (155 °C) Shut-Off Device energized when the motor is energized
(Option 2TW) + 266°F (130 °C) Alarm Device • The heaters will keep the winding of the motor
Nominal Current 1.6 Amp at 250 V approximately 5°C above the surrounding ambient
Resistance < 50 mΩ
Table 11. Space Heater Data
Switch Rebound < 1ms
Frame Size Wattage Voltages Heater
Insulation Rating 2000 VAC
Strips/MTR
Cycles 10,000 max
110V
Lead Identification P1 and P2 or
63 & 71 18W 230V 1
(inside terminal box) TB1 and TB2 / 2TB1 and 2TB2
460V
110V
Motor thermostats or bi-metallic switches can be wired di-
rectly into the control circuit without a separate control mod- 80 25W 230V 1
ule or tripping device. Thermostats operate on a relatively 460V
high control voltage so they are less sensitive to voltage in- 110V
terference from the main power supply. Often one can run 90 – 112 50W 230V 2
thermostat leads and motor power leads next to each other 460V
when using the appropriate shielded cable. The installer is 110V
responsible to wire the thermostats into the motor control 132-180 100W 230V 2
circuit. The leads may be labeled as indicated below. 460V
110V
Thermistors (TF) 200 & 225 120W 230V 2
Table 10. TF option, Thermistors 460V
Standard Connection Three devices, series connected,
one per phase Encoder (Option IG)
Type Positive temperature coefficient (PTC) • Most standard encoders will be enclosed inside the fan cover
Transition Temperature 150°C±5 °C • Incremental, Quadrature, Differential, Marker Channel
• IP66 Protection
Resistance 20… 500Ω (below transition)
• IG1 = 1024PPR, IG2 = 2048PPR, IG4 = 4096PPR
> 4 kΩ (above transition)
• TTL/RS422, HTL/Push-Pull, Line Driver.
Reed Current < 1mA • 5V or 10-30V available.
Max Voltage 30V • Absolute encoders also available.
• Seperate encoder wiring instructions are provided by
Lead Identification P1 and P2 or NORD.
(inside terminal box) TP1 and TP2
With a separate control module or tripping device (ex. Kir-

wan INT69) thermistors are used to sense motor overload/
over temperature conditions by converting the critical oper-
ating temperature limit into large internal resistance change.
Due to their small size, heat sink construction, and high
change in resistance value, minor resistance variations caused
by relatively long lead runs can be tolerated. This feature
also allows for one controller to be used for several tempera-
ture sensing locations. Many variable frequency drives come
with on-board thermistor inputs. NORD does not supply the
thermistor control module.
IMPORTANT NOTE
• Thermostats and Thermistors will automatically reset.
• All wiring must be completed by qualified personal
and adhere to all local codes.

SINGLE & POLYPHASE
17. Inspection
Inspect the motor after every 500 operating hours. Please use table 12 below for inspection guidelines.
CAUTION
If it is necessary to clean the motor exterior, do not use shop air. Shop air can force contaminents into the motor and may
cause parts damage or result in blowing debris causing injury.
Table12. - Motor Inspection Guidelines

Inspect Check Action
Motor Check the external surfaces for contamination. Clean the motor external surfaces using clean,
Exterior Accumulation of dirt and fibrous deposits must be removed. lint-free cloths.
Clean deposits from between cooling fins using a
vacuum cleaner and a stiff-bristled nylon brush.
Check the external surfaces for oil film and greasy deposits. Clean the oil film and greasy deposits from the motor
surface using clean, lint-free cloths.
If necessary, moisten the cloth with an approved
non-flammable, residue-free solvent. Do not pour
solvent on the motor.
Check for evidence of damage or overheating. If the motor has physical damage, replace the motor.
Motor Make sure the mounting hardware is secure. If the mounting hardware is not secure, check the
Mountings motor/gearbox alignment, and tighten the
mounting hardware.
Motor Check that all electrical connections are secure. If the electrical connections are not secure,
Electrical tighten them.
Connections
Check the electrical connections for evidence of arcing. Loose electrical connections can cause arcing, which
is evident by discoloration and charring. If you find
evidence of arcing, replace the damaged connections.
Insulation Using an ohmmeter, check and record the resistance of Compare the current resistance reading to
Resistance motor winding insulation. previous readings. If the resistance drops significantly,
perform an internal inspection for insulation damage
or deterioration.
Motor On motors that have a brake, use a feeler gauge to check the If the air gap exceeds the maximum allowed for
Brake air gap in between the brake pad and the rotor according to that brake configuration provided in the manual,
the appropriate user manual. adjust the air gap or replace the brake pad according to
user manual U35000.

SINGLE & POLYPHASE
932-1
947 932
900 940-1
929
948
900
918
916 952
923 902
902-1 905
940
923 906 910
904 TBLK-1 907
909 933 939

902-2 TBLK
902-1 6 907-1
919 908-1
920
921
902
960
961
902-1 908
902
Part Number Part Description Qty per Assembly Part Number Part Description Qty per Assembly
6 Input Pinion 1 921 Gasket 1
900 Rotor Assembly 1 923 Screw 4
902 A-Endbell 1 929 Bearing 1
902-1 Screw 4 932 B-Endbell 1
902-2 Dubo Seal 4 932-1 Screw 4
904 Oil Seal 1 933 Oil Seal 1
905 Bearing 1 939 Fan 1
906 Preload Spring 1 940 Fan Cover 1
907 Terminal Box Frame 1 940-1 Screw 4
907-1 Screw 4 947 Retaining Ring 1
908 Terminal Box Cover 1 948 Retaining Ring 1
908-1 Screw 4 952 Fan Clip 1
909 Gasket - Terminal Box Frame 1 960 NPT Thread Adapter 1
910 Gasket - Terminal Box Cover 1 961 Plug (includes O-ring) 1
916 Stator 1 TBLK Terminal Block 1
918 Key 1 TBLK-1 Screw, Terminal Block Mounting 2
919 Retaining Ring 1 Jumper Bar (not illustrated) AR
920 Oil Plug 1

SINGLE & POLYPHASE
19. Repair
Reference the parts list drawing on page 14 for clarification. F. Remove and discard the old flange gasket.
G. Clean the gasket faces on the motor and gearbox, making
A. Disassemble the motor according to the general sure no cleaning debris enters the gearbox.
exploded view in PARTS INFORMATION. Disassemble
only as far as necessary to replace the failed parts. H. Check the replacement motor to make sure the motor
flange, motor shaft, and motor pinion are identical to the
B. Whenever the motor is disassembled, clean all dust and motor that was removed.
contamination from the motor interior using a vacuum
I. Place a new gasket between the gearbox and new motor.
cleaner and a soft-bristled nylon brush.
J. Position the motor on the gearbox, making sure the
C. The following parts must be replaced if they are removed: input pinion meshes with the input gear. Rotate the
• Oil seal (904), Oil seal (933) motor as necessary to align the bolt holes and seat the
• Gasket (909), Gasket (910), Gasket (921) motor flange. Make sure the gasket remains properly
• Gasket on plug (961) aligned and seated
• Self-locking screws (907-1, 908-1, 923, 932-1, 940-1) K. Apply a medium strength thread locking compound to the
• Dubo Seals (902-2) bolt threads. Install the bolts and tighten them to the
D. If the following parts are removed, inspect them, and appropriate torque.
replace them if they are deformed or damaged:
• Retaining ring (919), Retaining ring (947), IMPORTANT NOTE
Retaining ring (948)
• Fan clip (952) If the motor/gearbox installation uses an input flange,
first mount the input flange to the motor using the four
20. Removing and Replacing Integral Motors mounting bolts and NEW DUBO sealing rings under the
head of each fastening screw. Make sure the fastening
Reference the parts list on Page 14 for clarification. screws are clean and apply new thread sealant if necessary.
A. Disconnect the power to the electric motor. Make certain L. Check the gearbox oil level in accordance with the appro-
the motor is properly grounded, de-energized and priate User Manual/s. If necessary fill or add oil to the
secured with a lock-out/tag-out device. gearbox.
B. Drain the oil from the mating gearbox, or rotate the
motor/gearbox assembly so that the motor is up, to NOTICE
prevent oil from spilling from the gearbox when the
motor is removed. Do not mix oil types. Mixing oil types may lead to compo-
nent damage and diminished performance. Consult NORD
C. Support the motor and prepare it for removal. Steady the for assistance or reference oil type listed on gearbox tag.
motor and support it. For larger motors, use of mechani-
cal lifting or support devices to may be appropriate.
D. Remove the fastening screws that hold the motor to the M. Re-establish the electrical connection to the motor.
reducer input. N. Observe the subsequent start-up closely to make certain
the equipment is operating properly and there are no seal
or gasket leaks.
IMPORTANT NOTE
Most integral motor installations have mounting bolts
accessible from the motor exterior. If the bolts are not
clearly visible, unbolt the input flange from the gearbox.
Remove the bolts securing the motor to the reducer input
flange, and discard the old DUBO sealing rings that were
under the screw heads.
E. Maintain motor shaft alignment and move the motor

directly away from its mounting surface until the motor
shaft and mating input gear clear both the internal gear
mesh and reducer input.

SINGLE & POLYPHASE
21. Removing and Replacing NEMA C-Face or 22. Testing

IEC Fange-Mounted Motors
For further clarification of these instructions, reference the IMPORTANT NOTE
parts list on Page 14 of this manual.
NORD electric motors do not require periodic testing.
A. Disconnect the power to the electric motor. Make certain
However, if a motor is removed from its installation, NORD
the motor is properly grounded, de-energized and
recommends that the motor be checked according to the
secured with a lock-out/tag-out device.
following static and dynamic testing procedures before it
B. Support the motor and prepare it for removal. Steady the is reinstalled. Finding a condition that will require future
motor and support it. For larger motors, use of mechani- repair before the motor is reinstalled decreases the overall
cal lifting or support devices to may be appropriate. maintenance time.
C. Remove the fastening screws that hold the motor to the
This section provides general test information and functional
C-face or IEC mounting flange.
checks for the types of motors covered by this manual. Read
D. Maintain motor shaft alignment, and move the motor and understand the tests and checks before performing them
directly away from its mounting surface until the motor on your motor.
shaft and mating coupling clear the mounting flange
surface of the driven equipment. Record and date all measurements taken.
E. Measure and record the proper placement of the motor If the motor fails any of the test procedures provided below, use
shaft coupling prior to removing it from the old motor. the troubleshooting guide to determine the motor problem.
F. Make sure the new motor shaft, key and key slot are free Static Testing
of all nicks, burrs, and lubrication or grease.
A. The motor can only be static tested if it is disconnected
G. Install the new shaft key on the new motor. If the shaft from the component it drives and securely mounted on a
key is not captured or if an open-ended key slot is utilized fixture or mounting plate. These tests are usually con-
it is good practice to secure the key into the key slot with ducted when a motor has been removed for any reason
a medium strength thread locking agent or alternatively other than failure
one may stake the key in place.
B. Turn the motor shaft slowly by hand. Feel and listen for
H. Re-install the coupling on the new motor shaft, making evidence of a failed bearing, which is indicated by a rough
sure the placement of the coupling is in the same location feel as the shaft rotates, and by noise.
as it was on the old motor (See Step E).
C. Check for smooth rotation, with no evidence of binding or
I. Clean all old gasket material, sealants, contamination, and catching. If the shaft does not rotate smoothly, or binds
corrosion from the flange surface on the driven equipment. or catches, the bearings are worn or failing, lack lubrica-
J. If the motor is utilized in a wet or wash down environ- tion, or are contaminated.
ment apply a sealing gasket or gasket eliminating com- D. Check the motor shaft for side play by applying pressure
pound to the mating flange surface, as would seem most at right angles to the shaft in several places around the
appropriate for the application. circumference. If the shaft moves perceptibly, the front
K. Support the new motor and mount it flush against the bearing may be worn.
mating flange surface of the driven equipment.
Dynamic Testing
L. Apply a medium strength thread locking agent to the bolt
threads. A. Find the motor voltage and rated load current values as
listed on the motor nameplate.
M. Install the bolts and tighten them to the appropriate
torque. B. Using a volt-ohmmeter, verify that the motor power supply
is in the correct range.
N. Re-establish the electrical connection to the motor.
C. Run the motor with no load. As the motor is operating,
O. Observe the subsequent start-up closely to make certain listen for unusual motor noise and check for excessive
the equipment is operating properly. vibration. Vibration and motor noise are indications of
bearing contamination, lack of lubrication, damage, or
failure.
D. Use an ammeter to measure the no-load current. Record
the no-load current for comparison with previous
readings, and for reference during future testing.
E. If the motor passes the no-load test, operate the
motor at rated load and check and record the current.
F. Check the motor operating temperature at rated load. If
the motor operates at a higher than normal temperature,
the motor may be damaged, overloaded or failing.

SINGLE & POLYPHASE
23. Troubleshooting
Fault Likely Cause Corrective Action
Motor fails to start. • Motor is mis-wired • Verify and correct motor wiring.
• Brake is may not be releasing. • Troubleshoot brake per User Manual U35000.
• Fan guard damaged and contacting fan. • Replace damaged fan guard.
• Motor protection device has tripped or • Check motor protection device for correct
does not switch setting and correct error.
• 1-Ph Capacitor or start switch has failed. • Discharge capacitor and use a volt-ohm meter to
check the capacitor for an open circuit - replace if
needed. Inspect switch and connections. Replace
if contacts look burned or pitted.
Fuses blow or motor • Short circuit in line. • Rectify short circuit.
protection faults immediately. • Lines connected incorrectly. • Check circuit diagram and make corrections.
• Fuse or circuit breaker tripped. • Replace fuse or circuit breaker.
• Motor is overloaded or equipment jammed. • Make sure load is free. Verify motor amp draw
• Stator is shorted or went to ground. compared to nameplate rating.
• A damaged or blown stator will show a burn
mark. Stator must be repaired or replaced.
Motor hums and has high • Brake may not be releasing. • Troubleshoot brake per User Manual U35000.
current consumption • Rotor may be rubbing stator. • Send motor to a repair specialist.
• Defective or incorrect stator winding.
Severe speed loss under load • Overload. • Check load conditions and make certain system
or excessive acceleration time. • Excessive voltage drop. is unobstructed. Reduce load or consider a
• Damaged or failing motor bearings. larger motor.
• Damaged or worn gear unit. • Verify service voltage is within specification.
• 1-Ph Capacitor or start switch has failed. Check if nearby equipment is affecting incoming
power. Make sure connection harness and wiring
is adequate.
• Replace motor bearings.
• Replace or repair damaged gear unit.
• See instructions under “Motor fails to start”.
Motor runs the incorrect • Incorrect wiring. • Rewire motor according to system schematic
direction. and/or switch two incoming motor phases.
Motor heats up excessively • Overload. • Make sure load is free. Verify motor amp draw
or thermal overload • Ambient temperature is too high. compared to nameplate rating. Reduce load or
protection trips • Inadequate cooling. consider a larger motor.
• Operation is outside the allowed duty cycle. • Do not operate above the rated conditions.
• Motor protection device may be defective. • Correct cooling air supply. Open and clear cooling
• Excessive supply voltage. air passages. Retrofit with forced ventilator fan
• System short or damaged stator. if needed.
• Adjust operating duty cycle or contact a specialist
to select a suitable motor or drive.
• Replace motor protection device.
• Adapt motor supply voltage.
• Check for loose, cut or damaged wires. Check
stator winding for defects or burn damage.
Excessive Noise or Vibration • Motor bearings contaminated or damaged. • Test motor by itself. If bearings are bad noise may
• Excessive motor shaft end play. be heard or roughness detected. Replace
• Misaligned or imbalanced load. bearings. Add lubrication if bearings have
grease fittings.
• Check shaft endplay with motor and system
power disconnected. If shaft movement is
excessive replace motor shaft bearings.
• Check all mating shaft connections for proper
alignment and correct all imbalanced load
conditions.
1 Ph Start Capacitor Failures • Motor is not coming up to speed quickly enough. • Verify motor size to load conditions. Motor
• Motor is being cycled frequently should come up to speed in no more than 2-3
• Start switch is defective or damaged. seconds.
• Verify duty cycle and consult specialist for
recommendations.
• Replace start switch.
1 Ph Run Capacitor Failures • Possible power surge to motor caused by • Install proper surge protection.
transient voltage or lightening. • Verify ambient conditions do not exceed
• Excessive ambient temperature. nameplate value.

MOTOR BRAKES
INSTALLATION & MAINTENANCE
Brake Operation
The standard NORD motor brake is “spring-set”. When pow-
er is removed and the brake is de-energized (power-off), the
brake springs exert a force against the armature plate in
turn preventing the brake rotor (or brake disc) from rotat-
ing. When the brake coil is energized (power-on), a magnetic
field builds and pulls the armature plate across the air gap to
the brake casing, which releases the brake rotor and allows
the motor shaft to rotate.
Figure 1: Basic Brake Operation
General Instructions
This manual describes general operating and maintenance
guidelines for a majority of brake products shipped by NORD
Gear. This instruction manual is not intended to include a
comprehensive listing of all details or procedures required
for installation, operation and maintenance.
Brakes covered in this manual are manufactured by PRECIMA.

Please feel free to contact NORD with any questions about
the supplied brake components.
NORD brakes are DC voltage brakes and in most instances
Safety Notice
are supplied with a motor mounted brake rectifier for easy
Only qualified personnel should attempt installation, opera- connections to AC power. AC power is taken directly from
tion and maintenance of NORD brakes. Read this manual in the power line or from the terminal block of the motor and
its entirety before operating, commissioning, servicing, or as- converted to DC by the supplied rectifier.
sembling the motor brake. If you have a question about a
procedure or are uncertain about any detail, seek clarifica-
tion and DO NOT PROCEED! IMPORTANT NOTE
If the motor is connected to a frequency inverter, soft start,
DANGER or is a two-speed motor, the AC power must be supplied to
the brake rectifier separately from the motor power.
• This equipment contains high electrical voltage.
Remove and lockout all power from the electric motor
and brake before any work is completed on the brake. Advantages
• The user is responsible for conforming to all national • Each NORD motor frame size has a number of brake sizes
and local electrical and safety codes. Wiring practices, available, with different torque capacities.
proper grounding, disconnects, and over current • Brake torque adjustments are possible by changing the
protection, are of particular importance. brake spring combinations. In addition, brake sizes from
• Make certain the load is supported when servicing the 5-40 Nm (3.7-30 lb-ft) are typically supplied with an addi-
brake. Removing power from the brake or removing tional spanner-nut adjustment on the back of the brake.
the brake from the motor will release the load, which • NORD brakes provide a high degree of safety because
may cause severe injury or death. when power is removed the brake will automatically set to
• Failure to follow proper procedures and precautions hold the load.
may result in severe bodily injury or death. • The brake rotor or brake disc is environmentally safe and
asbestos-free.
• The connection between the rectifier and the brake coil is
completed at the factory and the brake air-gap is factory-
set but can be adjusted in the event of wear.

MOTOR BRAKES
General Selection Considerations Table 1a: Brake Torque Reduction - Spring Removal
As indicated in the NORD catalog, each NORD motor can be "Brake Size" 7 Springs 5 Springs 3 Springs
supplied with a number of brake torque sizes. [Nm] [lb-ft] [Nm] [lb-ft] [Nm] [lb-ft]
BRE 5 5 3.7 3.5 2.6 2 1.5
NORD relies on the equipment builder to specify appropriate
brake sizing for their application, while giving consideration BRE10 10 7.4 7 5.2 4 3.0
to the following: BRE20 20 14.8 14 10.3 8 5.9
BRE40 40 29.5 28 20.7 17 12.5
• For most applications, we advise sizing the brake to 1.5 - 2
BRE60 60 44.3 43 31.7 26 19.2
times the motor rated torque.
BRE100 100 73.8 70 51.6 42 31.0
• For vertical applications, it may be advisable to size the
brake size up to 3 times the motor rated torque. BRE150 150 111 107 78.9 65 47.9
• For some applications, it may be necessary to specify a On brake sizes 5-150 Nm (3.7-111 lb-ft) full brake torque is
reduced brake torque setting to prevent excessive peak achieved with all (7) springs. The brake springs are placed
load conditions developed at the reducer output. in such a manner where there are (3) inner and (4) outer
• On travel drive applications, excessive brake torque may springs. When adjusting the brake torque, start by removing
lead to wheel skid; in addition on crane applications excess the outer springs at opposite corners to prevent uneven
hoist-cable swing can result. brake wear.
Table 1b: Brake Torque Reduction - Spring Removal

IMPORTANT NOTE
"Brake Size" 8 Springs 6 Springs 4 Springs
• Brake torque - The brake torque is measured with a
[Nm] [lb-ft] [Nm] [lb-ft] [Nm] [lb-ft]
mean friction radius of the brake pad surface with a
circumferential speed of 1m/sec (197 fpm). BRE250 250 184 187 138 125 92
• Brake torque tolerance - For different applications and BRE400 400 295 300 221 200 148
operating conditions, brake torque can vary from BRE800 800 590 600 443 400 295
+40/-20% compared to the rated brake torque.
BRE1200 1200 885 900 664 600 443
• Hoisting (lifting/lowering) applications - must have the
brake wired for fast response (DC-switching) On brake sizes 250-1200 Nm (184-885 lb-ft) full brake torque
• Initial operation & wear-in period - In new condition, is achieved with all (8) springs. The brake springs are placed
the brake will have a reduced torque of up to 30%. in such a manner where there are (4) inner and (4) outer
In order to achieve full rated brake torque, a short run- springs. When adjusting the brake torque, start by removing
in period is required. The run in time will vary the outer springs at opposite corners to prevent uneven
depending on system loads. brake wear.
• The brake rotor or brake pad - must be protected against
foreign matter, oil and grease. Contaminants of this type Table 2: Spanner Nut Adjustment
can greatly influence wear and reduce breaking torque.
“Brake Torque Max. Minimum
Size" Reduction* Turns Torque
Brake Torque Adjustment
[Nm] [lb-ft] [Nm] [lb-ft]
Brake torque adjustments are possible by changing the brake BRE 5 0.2 0.15 6 0.8 0.59
spring combinations or by removing springs (Table 1). BRE10 0.2 0.15 12 1.6 1.18
In addition, brake sizes from 5-40 Nm (3.7-30 lb-ft) are typi- BRE20 0.3 0.22 12 4.4 3.25
cally supplied with a threaded adjustment nut or spanner nut BRE40 1 0.74 9 8.0 5.90
to allow for additional fine torque adjustments of the brake.
The braking torque can be adjusted by unscrewing the span-  With the minimum number of springs and
ner nut a number of turns or “clicks” with a spanner wrench maximum number of turns to the spanner nut.
(Table 2). * Per each turn of the spanner nut
Brake sizes from 5-40 Nm (3.7-30 lb-ft) are typically supplied
with a threaded adjustment nut or spanner nut. Additional
fine torque adjustment can be made by unscrewing the span-
ner nut a number of turns or “clicks” with a spanner wrench.

286
MOTOR BRAKES
Brake Control Rectifiers Rectifier Types [Ctd.]

NORD brake control rectifiers convert AC voltage to DC volt- PMG 500 Push-Hybrid rectifier [PMG]:
age. Rectifiers are used because most applications require A fast-acting or push-hybrid brake rectifier provides an ini-
AC voltage to power the motor, but DC power is required tial “push” in the form of a timed full-wave brake-release
to power the brake and DC power is not typically available. function, which is then followed by a continuous half-wave
NORD brake motors typically include the rectifier located in- brake-holding function. There are two ways to apply these
side the terminal box. rectifiers as follows:
Rectifier Advantages • “Overexcitation” of the brake coil provides faster brake

release or improved cycling capacity. The DC voltage of the
• Individual power source for each brake. brake coil is determined based upon using a half-wave
• Compact size, mounted inside the terminal box. rectifier. The output voltage is 45% of the input voltage
• Multiple types, voltage options and release/engagement (VDC = 0.45 x VAC).
modes available.
• Mountable in a separate control cabinet. • “Reducer-Power Holding” of the brake coil maintains the
• Integral protection against voltage spikes. brake in a released state by using only 25% of the power
needed for the initial brake release. This results in very
Table
Model3: Rectifier
Type Types and
Part No.Ratings
Color Input Rated
fast brake stopping. The DC voltage of the brake coil is
Voltage Current determined based upon using a full-wave rectifier. The
VAC ± 10% ADC output voltage is 90% of the input voltage.
(40°C) (75°C) (VDC = 0.90 x VAC).
GVE20L Full-wave 19141000 Black 110-275 1.5 1.0 NORD offers additional fast-acting rectifiers besides the PMG
GVE20V Full-wave 19141030 Black 110-275 1.5 1.0 500. For additional details please reference User Manual
GHE40L Half-wave 19141010 Yellow 200-480 2.0 1.0 U35100 – Fast Acting Brake Rectifiers.
GHE40V Half-wave 19141040 Yellow 200-480 2.0 1.0
GHE50L Half-wave 19141020 Gray 200-575 2.0 1.0 NOTICE
GHE50V Half-wave 19141050 Gray 200-575 2.0 1.0
In order to prevent rapid wear, the PMG 500 rectifier is
GUE40V Dual-wave 19140300 Black 190-460 0.7 0.5 required when utilizing the larger 800 Nm (590 lb-ft) and
PMG500 Push-Hybrid 19140200 Black 200-500 4.0 2.8 1200 Nm (885 lb-ft) twin-rotor brakes. The PMG 500 rec-
Rectifier electronics are sealed for moisture-protection; electronics on models end- tifier is wired to “overexcite” the brake during its initial
ing with the suffix “V” are resin-encapsulated to provide added protection if water release.
should get into the motor terminal box.
Rectifier Types Brake Switching Options
Full-wave rectifier [GVE]: The rectifiers discussed in this manual can be wired to allow
A rectifier in which both the positive and negative half-cycles brake switching at either the AC power source (input) or the
of the AC input signal are rectified to produce a uni-direction- DC power source (output).
al DC current supply to the load or the brake. The output volt-
age is 90% of the input voltage (VDC = 0.90 x VAC). • AC switching allows the brake rectifier to be powered
directly from the motor’s terminal block with no additional
Half-wave rectifier [GHE]: wiring. However, this provides a slower brake stopping
time due to the additional time needed to de-energize or
A rectifier in which only alternate half-cycles of the AC input collapse the motor’s magnetic field.
signal are rectified to produce a uni-directional DC current
supply to the load or the brake. The output voltage is 45% of • DC switching directly interrupts the current flow in the DC
the input voltage (VDC = 0.45 x VAC). circuit of the brake rectifier. This method of brake switch-
ing guarantees faster brake stopping or brake engage-
Dual Wave Rectifier [GUE] ment times.
A rectifier that can be wired as either a full-wave rectifier or a
half-wave rectifier depending upon how it is connected to the
AC input signal. WARNING
When the moving system undergoes a change in height
IMPORTANT NOTE (such as in a lift or incline conveyor application) or if the
system tends to speed up or overhaul during normal oper-
If the motor is connected to a frequency inverter, soft start, ation, then DC-switching of the brake is required in order
or is a two-speed motor, then seperate AC power must be to prevent excessive load movement, drift or falling loads
supplied to the brake rectifier. during stopping.

287
MOTOR BRAKES
Figure 2.1: GVE/GHE Dimensions Figure 3.1: GUE Dimensions
0.24 in
6.0 mm 0.14 in
0.14 in 3.5 mm
3.5 mm 0.14 in
0.14 in 3.5 mm
3.5 mm
0.20 in
0.20 in 5.0 mm
5.0 mm
1.50 in 1.95 in
38.0 mm 49.5 mm
1.06 in
27.0 mm 0.75 in
19.0 mm
2.34 in 1.54 in 0.12 in

59.5 mm 39.0 mm 3.0 mm
1.89 in 1.46 in 0.16 in
48.0 mm 37.0 mm 4.0 mm
Figure 2.2: GVE/GHE Braking Methods Figure 3.2: GVE/GHE Braking Methods
STANDARD STOPPING STANDARD STOPPING

AC-SWITCHING AC-SWITCHING
BRAKING BRAKING
METHOD METHOD
H 460V 230V OV 205V=
10 or 20 ~ ~ ~
10 or 20
or
1&2 3&4 5&6 1B & 2 3&4 5&6

AC BRAKE VOLTAGE JUMPER DC BRAKE AC BRAKE VOLTAGE JUMPER DC BRAKE
FAST STOPPING FAST STOPPING

DC-SWITCHING DC-SWITCHING
BRAKING
BRAKING METHOD
METHOD
GVE/GHE RECTIFIER 460V 230V OV 205V= 15 or 25
15 or 25 ~ ~ ~
or
AC BRAKE
1&2 3&4 5&6 1&2 3&4 5&6
AC BRAKE VOLTAGE NORMALLY OPEN CONTACT DC BRAKE AC BRAKE VOLTAGE NORMALLY OPEN CONTACT DC BRAKE
* The normally open contact/s (NO) is not supplied by NORD it must close at the same
time power is supplied to the brake. The contact must be capable of switching
* time
The normally open contact/s (NO) is not supplied by NORD it must close at the same
power is supplied to the brake. The contact must be capable of switching
inductive loads and/or be rated at IEC AC3. inductive loads and/or be rated at IEC AC3.
Braking Break Release Brake Engage Power Source Braking Break Release Brake Engage Power Source
Method (Start) (Stop) Method (Start) (Stop)
Standard Motor Standard Motor
10 Standard 10 Standard
(AC-Switching) terminals (AC-Switching) terminals
Fast Motor Fast Motor
(DC-switching) terminals (DC-switching) terminals
Standard Separate Standard Separate
(AC-Switching) power (AC-Switching) power
Fast Separate Fast Separate
(DC-switching) power (DC-switching) power

288
MOTOR BRAKES
Figure 4.1: PMG 500 Dimensions Figure 4.2: PMG 500 Braking Methods
STANDARD STOPPING (AC-SWITCHING)

2.60
BRAKING
2.17 METHOD
0.31
0.16
PMG 500 30 or 45
0.39
+
Ø 0.17
1.81
~&~ +&- &
AC BRAKE VOLTAGE DC BRAKE JUMPER
FAST & VERY FAST STOPPING (DC-SWITCHING)

BRAKING
METHOD
0.73
PMG 500 35 or 50
PMG 500 Push-Hybrid Rectifier ~&~ +&- * &

The PMG 500 rectifier provides an initial “push” the form of AC BRAKE VOLTAGE DC BRAKE NORMALLY OPEN CONTACT
a timed full-wave brake-release function, which is then fol- * The normally open contact/s (NO) is not supplied by NORD it must close at the same
lowed by a continuous half-wave brake-holding function. inductive loads and/or be rated at IEC AC3.
• In order to prevent rapid wear, the PMG 500 rectifier is Braking Break Release Brake Engage Power
required when utilizing the larger 800 Nm (590 lb-ft) - and Method (Start) (Stop) Source
1200 Nm (885 lb-ft) twin-rotor brakes. 30
Fast Standard Motor
(Overecitation) (AC Switching) terminals
• The PMG 500 rectifier is wired to “overexcite” the brake
Fast Fast Motor
during its initial release. The DC voltage of the brake coil is 35
(Overecitation) (DC Switching) terminals
determined based upon using a half-wave rectifier.
Fast Standard Seperate
45
(Overecitation) (AC Switching) power
In some applications the PMG rectifier may be used for
Fast Fast Seperate
“Reduced Power Holding” or very fast brake engagement (See 50
(Overecitation) (DC Switching) power
user manual U35100 for details).
IMPORTANT NOTE
If the motor is connected to an AC drive, soft start, or is a
two-speed motor, the AC power must be supplied to the
brake rectifier seperately from the motor power.

289
MOTOR BRAKES
BRAKE SIZE: BRE 5 BRAKE TORQUE: 5 Nm (3.7 lb-ft) max. BRAKE SIZE: BRE 10 BRAKE TORQUE: 10 Nm (7.4 lb-ft) max.
NORD Half-Wave Full-Wave PC VC IC RC NORD Half-Wave Full-Wave PC VC IC RC
Brake P/N [VAC] [AAC] [VAC] [AAC] [W] [VDC] [ADC] [Ω] Brake P/N [VAC] [AAC] [VAC] [AAC] [W] [VDC] [ADC] [Ω]
19010212 - - - - 22 24 0.92 26.0 19020222 - - - - 28 24 1.17 20.6
19010912 230 0.09 115 0.19 22 105 0.21 500 19020922 230 0.14 115 0.28 33 105 0.32 332
19011902 400 0.05 200 0.11 22 180 0.12 1475 19021902 400 0.07 200 0.15 29 180 0.16 1100
19011912 460 0.05 230 0.10 22 205 0.11 1900 19021922 460 0.06 230 0.11 26 205 0.13 1620
19012212 500 0.04 250 0.08 21 225 0.09 2450 19022222 500 0.06 250 0.12 30 225 0.13 1700
19012512 575 0.04 - - 22 250 0.09 2850 19022522 575 0.05 - - 27 250 0.11 2323
BRAKE SIZE: BRE20 BRAKE TORQUE: 20 Nm (15 lb-ft) max. BRAKE SIZE: BRE40 BRAKE TORQUE: 40 Nm (30 lb-ft) max.
19030222 - - - - 34 24 1.42 16.9 19040232 - - - - 41 24 1.69 14.2
19030922 230 0.18 115 0.35 41 105 0.39 270 19040932 230 0.21 115 0.42 49 105 0.46 226
19031922 400 0.09 200 0.17 34 180 0.19 950 19041902 400 0.11 200 0.22 45 180 0.25 723
19031932 460 0.07 230 0.13 30 205 0.15 1391 19041922 460 0.11 230 0.22 50 205 0.24 840
19032222 500 0.07 250 0.15 36 225 0.16 1391 19042232 500 0.09 250 0.18 44 225 0.20 1150
19032522 575 0.06 - - 35 250 0.14 1780 19042532 575 0.08 - - 44 250 0.18 1425
BRAKE SIZE: BRE 60 BRAKE TORQUE: 60 Nm (44 lb-ft) max. BRAKE SIZE: BRE 100 BRAKE TORQUE: 100 Nm (74 lb-ft) max.
19050252 - - - - 52 24 2.18 11.0 19060252 - - - - 80 24 3.33 7.2
19050952 230 0.27 115 0.54 63 105 0.60 174 19060952 230 0.39 115 0.79 92 105 0.88 120
19051902 400 0.13 200 0.27 54 180 0.30 602 19061902 400 0.21 200 0.42 83 180 0.46 390
19051952 460 0.12 230 0.25 57 205 0.28 740 19061952 460 0.20 230 0.40 91 205 0.44 464
19052252 500 0.10 250 0.20 50 225 0.22 1004 19062252 500 0.16 250 0.32 79 225 0.35 643
19052552 575 0.09 - - 48 250 0.19 1300 19062552 575 0.14 - - 79 250 0.31 795
BRAKE SIZE: BRE 150 BRAKE TORQUE: 150 Nm (110 lb-ft) max. BRAKE SIZE: BRE 250 BRAKE TORQUE: 250 Nm (185 lb-ft) max.
19070252 - - - - 77 24 3.20 7.5 19080252 - - - - 99 24 4.14 5.8
19070952 230 0.39 115 0.79 92 105 0.88 120 19080952 230 0.51 115 1.03 120 105 1.14 92
19071902 400 0.18 200 0.36 73 180 0.40 445 19081902 400 0.27 200 0.54 108 180 0.60 300
19071952 460 0.15 230 0.31 70 205 0.34 600 19081952 460 0.24 230 0.49 111 205 0.54 380
19072252 500 0.15 250 0.30 76 225 0.34 670 19082252 500 0.20 250 0.40 100 225 0.44 507
19072552 575 0.14 - - 76 250 0.30 825 19081962 575 0.17 - - 95 250 0.38 655
BRAKE SIZE: BRE 400 BRAKE TORQUE: 400 Nm (295 lb-ft) max. BRAKE SIZE: BRE 800 BRAKE TORQUE: 800 Nm (590 lb-ft) max. 
19092252 - - - - 144 24 6.00 4.0 19094252 - - - - 144 24 6.00 4.0
19092952 230 0.62 115 1.24 145 105 1.38 76 19094952 230 0.62 - - 145 105 1.38 76
19093902 400 0.35 200 0.70 141 180 0.78 230 19095902 400 0.27 - - 108 180 0.60 300
19093952 460 0.31 230 0.62 140 205 0.68 300 19095902 460 0.31 - - 140 205 0.68 300
19093962 500 0.29 250 0.57 143 225 0.63 355 19095962 500 0.29 - - 143 225 0.63 355
19093972 575 0.26 - - 142 250 0.57 440
BRAKE SIZE: BRE 1200 BRAKE TORQUE: 1200 Nm (885 lb-ft) max. 
NORD Half-Wave Full-Wave PC VC IC RC
NOTICE
Brake P/N [VAC] [AAC] [VAC] [AAC] [W] [VDC] [ADC] [Ω] The PMG500 rectifier is required when utilizing the larger 800 Nm (590 lb-ft)
19099802 230 0.62 - - 145 105 1.38 76 - and 1200 Nm (885 lb-ft) twin-rotor brakes. In order to prevent rapid wear,
NORD recommends using the PMG500 rectifier to “overexcite” the brake
19099902 400 0.27 - - 108 180 0.60 300 during its release. The brake coil should be sized utilizing the PMG rectifier
19099902 460 0.31 - - 140 205 0.68 300 like a half-wave rectifier.
Half-Wave [VAC] = AC supply voltage with half-wave rectifier Pc [W] = Power to brake coil
Half-Wave [AAC] = AC supply current to half-wave rectifier Vc [VDC] = DC brake coil voltage (range -30% to +10%)
Full-Wave [VAC] = DC supply voltage with full-wave rectifier Ic [ADC] = DC current top brake coil
Full-Wave [AAC] = AC supply current to full-wave rectifier Rc [V] = Brake coil resistance (±5%)
 When used as a stopping brake, evaluation of brake work is essential. Brake coil data based upon ambient conditions of 20°C (68°F).
 Designed as a holding brake or emergency stop brake only.

290
MOTOR BRAKES
General Maintenance Brake Hand-Lever Installation and Adjustment

Brake Air Gap Figure 6
In order to obtain optimal brake performance and maximum Direction of

brake life, it is necessary to periodically check and reset the hand release
brake air gap. As the brake rotor wears and decreases in
thickness, the air gap will increase. If the air gap is too large,
the brake coil may not have enough magnetic force to pull Hand lever
the metal armature disc across the gap and the brake will
drag.
Brake Housing
IMPORTANT NOTE
Bolt
When a complete brake motor is supplied by NORD, the
air gap is already set at the factory. If the brake is ordered Washer
as a part, the air gap must be set in the field. All brake air
gap adjustments must be made with the brake assembled Spring
onto the motor and power off (brake engaged).
Hand Release Lever (HL)

Pins
It is common to supply the NORD brake with a hand release
lever assembly. The hand release lever allows the brake to be
manually released without requiring that the brake be ener- y
gized with voltage. The lever has a spring return that allows Hand Lever Air Gap
the brake to be hand released and returned automatically to
its set position. The handle of the hand release lever can be 1. Place the hand-lever over the brake housing (as shown)
unscrewed for easy removal. and align the pins.
Figure 5 2. Screw the bolts with washer and spring into the pins.
3. Using a feeler gage, adjust the hand-lever air gap per Table 5.
Table 5: Hand-Lever Air Gap Setting

Brake Dimension “y”  Brake Dimension “y” 
Size [mm] [in] Size [mm] [in]
BRE 5 1 0.040 BRE 100 1.2 0.047
BRE 10 1 0.040 BRE 150 1.2 0.047
BRE 20 1 0.040 BRE 250 1.5 0.059
BRE 40 1 0.040 BRE 400 1.5 0.059
BRE 60 1 0.040 BRE 800 1.5 0.059
BRE 1200 1.5 0.059
 Tolerance: + 0.008 in [+ 0.2 mm]
IMPORTANT NOTE IMPORTANT NOTE

When a brake motor with hand-lever is supplied by NORD, When setting the hand-lever gap or dimension “y” the
both the hand lever air gap and brake air gap are set at magnetic brake coil housing and the anchor plate must be
the factory. When ordered as parts, proper hand-lever and kept uniform all around.
air gap adjustments must be made in the field. Hand-lever
adjustments must always be made prior to assembling the
brake to the motor. All brake air gap adjustments must
IMPORTANT NOTE
be made with the brake assembled to the motor and the • To assure proper assembly and proper functioning of
power off (brake engaged). the brake, the hand-lever must be assembled to the
brake, and the hand-lever air gap must be adjusted,
before the brake is assembled to the motor.
• Once adjusted properly, the hand-lever air gap setting
should not be altered, even when readjusting the air
gap setting.

291
MOTOR BRAKES
Setting the Brake Air Gap Procedure
NORD spring-loaded brakes are virtually maintenance free. 1. Loosen the fixing screws that attach the brake to the
However, the air-gap of the brake rotor or brake disc must motor’s end-shield by approximately half a turn. The brake
be periodically checked and adjusted. If necessary, the worn assembly may be further loosened by turning the setting
brake rotor must be replaced. Table 6 serves as guide to check bolts or hollow screws counterclockwise into the brake
and set the brake air gap as needed. coil housing.
2. The desired nominal air-gap for each brake size is

IMPORTANT NOTE displayed in Table 6. In the course of making adjustments,
the air gap measurement must be checked in several places
When a complete brake motor is supplied by NORD, the using a feeler gauge. The feeler gauge should be
air gap is already set at the factory. If the brake is ordered positioned between the armature plate and the brake coil
as a part, the air gap must be set in the field. All brake air housing as indicated in Figure 7.
gap adjustments must be made with the brake assembled
to the motor and the power off (brake engaged). 3. Decreasing or Increasing the air gap can be accomplished
per the following instructions:
The brake air gap is checked by placing a feeler gage be-
tween metal anchor plate and the brake coil housing as Decreasing the Air Gap – To decrease the air gap, turn the
shown in Figure 6. This procedure is identical even for the setting bolts or hollow screws counter-clockwise while
larger BRE800 and BRE1200 twin rotor brakes. securing the fixing screws; alternatively, turn the fixing
screws clockwise while securing the setting bolts or
Figure 7 – Setting the Brake Air Gap hollow-screws.
ARMATURE AIR GAP Increasing the Air Gap – To increase the air gap, turn the
PLATE
setting bolts or hollow screws clockwise while securing the
MOTOR FIXING
fixing screws; alternatively, turn the fixing screws counter-
END SHIELD SCREW clockwise, while securing the setting bolts or hollow screws.
SETTING BOLT 4. Re-tighten the fixing screws to the proper torque as
(HOLLOW SCREW)
indicated in Table 6.
5. Re-check the air gap in several places and repeat Steps 1-5
BRAKE
HUB as needed until the air gap spacing is uniform and
BRAKE
consistent all the way around the brake.
ROTOR
Table 6: Brake Air Gap Settings
Brake Fixing Screw Nominal Air Gap Maximum
MOTOR
END SHIELD
COIL
HOUSING
Size Tightening Torque Setting  Air Gap 
[lb-ft] [Nm] [in] [mm] [in] [mm]
METAL BRE 5 2.2 3 0.008 0.2 0.024 0.6
ANCHOR PLATE
AIR GAP
BRE10 4.4 6 0.008 0.2 0.028 0.7
BRE20 7.4 10 0.012 0.3 0.031 0.8
BRE40 7.4 10 0.012 0.3 0.035 0.9
BRE60 18 25 0.012 0.3 0.039 1.0
BRE100  18 25 0.016 0.4 0.043 1.1
BRE150  18 25 0.016 0.4 0.043 1.1
BRE250 37 50 0.020 0.5 0.047 1.2
BRE400 37 50 0.020 0.5 0.047 1.2
BRE800 37 50 0.028 0.7 0.047 1.2
BRE1200 37 50 0.028 0.7 0.047 1.2
 Tolerance: + 0.004 in [+ 0.1 mm]
 Brake air gap must be re-adjusted before the stated value.
X
 When using the stainless steel friction plate (RG) increase the
nominal air gap to 0.2 mm (0.008 in.).

292
MOTOR BRAKES
Brake Rotor (Brake Disc) Wear Assessment Optional Brake Accessories

Periodically the brake rotor or brake disc must also be checked NORD can supply a variety of brake options and accessories,
for wear. If the brake rotors wear approaches the minimum of which some of the most common are noted below.
allowed thickness, then the part should be replaced. Use
Table 7 to determine whether or not the brake rotor requires Hand Release Lever (HL)
replacement.
The hand release lever allows the brake to be manually re-
Table 7: Brake Rotor Thickness leased without requiring that the brake be energized with
voltage. The lever has a spring return that allows the brake to
Brake Size Nominal Brake Rotor Minimum Brake Rotor
be hand released and returned automatically to its set posi-
Thickness  Thickness 
tion. The handle of the hand release lever can be unscrewed
[in] [mm] [in] [mm] for easy removal.
BRE 5 0.295 7.5 0.177 4.5 Figure 8
BRE10 0.335 8.5 0.217 5.5
BRE20 0.406 10.3 0.295 7.5
BRE40 0.492 12.5 0.374 9.5
BRE60 0.571 14.5 0.453 11.5
BRE100 0.630 16 0.492 12.5
BRE150 0.709 18 0.571 14.5
BRE250 0.787 20 0.650 16.5
BRE400 0.787 20 0.650 16.5
BRE800 0.787 20 0.650 16.5
BRE1200 0.866 22 0.689 17.5
 As new condition.
 Worn condition - brake rotor replacement is required!
Brake Pad Replacement (reference to parts list on page 8) Locking Hand Release Lever (FHL)
When the brake pad is worn the pad should be replaced to This option allows the brake to be manually released and
maintain proper brake operation and ensure safety. locked off without requiring voltage to the brake. The lock
mechanism prevents the spring from returning the brake to
Required Tools a closed state without manual action by the user. The hand
release lever can be unscrewed for easy removal.
• Phillips head screw drivers (fan shroud removal) Figure 9
• External snap ring pliers (fan and brake hub removal).
• Large flat head screw driver or small pry bar (fan removal)
• Metric T-handle wrenches and open-end wrenches.
Procedure
1. Remove the fixing screws (946) securing the fan cover (940)
to the motor end-shield (932). If the brake has a hand
release (937), the lever arm should be removed by
unscrewing it.
2. Remove the fan cover (940) and note the position of the
hand release slot if applicable.
3. Remove the snap ring holding the cooling fan (939) and
carefully remove the cooling fan (939), key and second Corrosion Protected Brake (RG)
snap ring (997).
The brake is fitted with a stainless steel brake plate to pro-
4. If the brake is equipped with a dust boot (992), remove it. vide additional corrosion protection in severe and wet envi-
ronments.
5. Remove the socket head cap screws holding the brake coil
(936) to the motor end-shield (932). Dust & Corrosion Protected Brake (SR)
6. Remove the brake coil (936), noting the hand release (937) A rubber-sealing boot is installed on the brake to provide
and power cable locations. additional protection in dusty environments. This feature in-
cludes the stainless steel brake plate (RG).
7. Slide the brake rotor (993) off the brake hub (938) which is
secured to the motor shaft. IP66 Brake (IP66)
8. Clean the brake, install the new brake rotor pad and NORD can also provide an IP66 brake option designed for
reassemble the brake in reverse order of the steps outlined. a bigger degree of protection against severe environments.
293
MOTOR BRAKES
Parts List - Precima Brakes
9900* 9920* 9940 9380 9950 9960 9390 9710 9900 9980 9990
9320 9910 9930 9370* 9460 9360 9970 9400
a Airgap
Normal Design, Enclosure IP55 with following options: Optional Brake with optional IP66 enclosure
RG – Stainless Steel Disc (Item 9900)
SR – Dust Boot-includes Option RG (Item 9920)
HL – Hand Release (Item 9370)
9320 Non-drive end shield 9710 O-ring - optional 9960 Pressure plate adjustment**
9360 Brake coil 9900 Friction plate - optional 9970 Adjustable ring **
9370 Manual brake lever – optional 9910 Setting bolt 9980 Bushing/seal - optional
9380 Brake hub 9920 Dust protection ring 9990 V-ring - optional
9390 Fan 9930 Brake rotor
9400 Fan cover 9940 Armature plate
9460 Fixing screw 9950 Spring ** Only for brakes that are 5 Nm to 40 Nm
Table 8: Spare Parts

Brake NORD Motor Brake Rotor Brake Hub Brake Hub Hand Release Stainless Disc Dust Boot
Size Frame [Item 9930] [Item 9380] Bore / (Style) (HL) [Item 9370] (RG) [Item 9900] (SR) [Item 9920]
BRE5 63/71/80 19120042 19100112 15 mm (hex) 19150042 19130042 19110042
BRE10 63/71 19120082 19100212 15 mm (hex) 19150082 19130082 19110082
BRE10 80/90 19120082 19100222 20 mm (hex) 19150082 19130082 19110082
BRE20 80/90/112 19120162 19100322 20 mm (hex) 19150162 19130162 19110162
BRE20 100 19120162 19100332 25 mm (hex) 19150162 19130162 19110162
BRE40 90/100 19120322 19100452 25 mm (spline) 19150322 19130322 19110402
BRE40 112 19120402 19100442 30 mm (hex) 19150322 19130322 19110402
BRE60 100 19120602 19100532 25 mm (spline) 19150602 19130602 19110602
BRE60 112 19120602 19100542 30 mm (spline) 19150602 19130602 19110602
BRE60 132 19120602 19100552 35 mm (spline) 19150602 19130602 19110602
BRE100 132/160 19120802 19100652 35 mm (spline) 19150802 19130802 19110802
BRE150 132 19121502 19100752 35 mm (spline) 19151502 19131502 19111502
BRE150 160/180 19121502 19100772 45 mm (spline) 19151502 19131502 19111502
BRE250 160/180 19122402 19100872 45 mm (spline) 19152402 19132500 19112502
BRE250 200 19122402 19100882 50 mm (spline) 19152402 19132500 19112502
BRE400 200/225 19124002 19100912 60 mm (spline) 19154003 10114020 19114002
IMPORTANT NOTES
• For brake coil part numbers, listed by brake size and coil voltage, please see page 4.
• The large BRE 800 and BRE 1200 twin rotor brakes are supplied to NORD pre-assembled and complete. For parts list
details and spare parts information please contact NORD.

294
MOTOR BRAKES
Brake Times & Electrical Selection Selection Suggestions

Brake timing performance is critical in selecting the optimal When Fast Stopping is Recommended
brake system. NORD brakes can provide exceptional perfor-
mance in terms of the release (start) times and engagement Any applications that require quick stops and positive action
(stop) times. Use the following guidelines in order to select at stand-still
the correct brake control components and connections.
Recommended Applications
1) Determine if the brake needs to be wired directly • conveyors and inclined conveyors
from the motor terminal block or powered by a
• hoists and lifts
separate power source.
• bulk material handling equipment
- If you are using a frequency inverter, soft-start or a (bucket elevators, idler conveyor’s).
two speed motor you will need to supply the
rectifier from a separate power source. WARNING
- If the motor is powered direct across-the-line the • Hoisting (lifting/lowering) applications - must have
rectifier power can be supplied from the motor’s the brake wired for fast response.
terminal block.
When Fast-Release is Recommended (Overexcitation)
2) What type of performance do I need?
Fast Release is recommended in any application that is very
- Is the standard brake performance OK? high-cycling with frequent starts and stops. These applica-
tions require the brake to release very-quickly in order to
- Is a higher performance required for fast brake release avoid excessive heat build-up in the AC motor and brake coil.
or very fast brake stopping?
3) Determine the brake supply voltage and check the
rectifier compatability using the table on page 10? • Index conveyors
• Diverters
• Storage and retrieval crane systems
Power Source Brake Release Brake engagement Braking Rectifier

(start) (stop) Method *
Standard Standard (AC switching) 10 GVE/GHE/GUE
Motor Standard Fast (DC switching) 15 GVE/GHE/GUE

Terminal Block  Fast (Overexcitation) Standard (AC switching) 30 PMG 500
 Fast (Overexcitation) Fast (DC switching) 35 PMG 500
Standard Standard (AC switching) 20 GVE/GHE/GUE
Separate Standard Fast (DC switching) 25 GVE/GHE/GUE

Power Source  Fast (Overexcitation) Standard (AC switching) 45 PMG 500
 Fast (Overexcitation) Fast (DC switching) 50 PMG 500

* Braking methods referenced in connection diagrams on pages 11-15.
 Please see important note below:
NOTICE
The PMG500 rectifier is required when utilizing the larger 800 Nm (590 lb-ft) - and 1200 Nm (885 lb-ft) twin-rotor brakes. In
order to prevent rapid wear, NORD recommends using the PMG500 rectifier to “overexcite” the brake during its release. The
brake coil should be sized utilizing the PMG rectifier like a half-wave rectifier.

295
MOTOR BRAKES
The table below determines the rectifier and DC brake voltage required, based on the AC supply voltage & braking method.
Rectifier Supply Brake Coil Braking Rectifier Rectifier
BRE 1200
BRE 100
BRE 150
BRE 250
BRE 400
BRE 800
Voltage Voltage Method Type P/N
BRE 10
BRE 20
BRE 40
BRE 60
BRE 5
(VAC) (VDC)
115 105 20 GVE20L 19141000 X X X X X X X

105 25 GVE20L 19141000 X X X X X X X
208 180 10 GVE20L 19141000 X X X X X X X X X
180 15 GVE20L 19141000 X X X X X X X X X
180 20 GVE20L 19141000 X X X X X X X X X
180 25 GVE20L 19141000 X X X X X X X X X
105 30 PMG500 19140200 X X
105 35 PMG500 19140200 X X
105 45 PMG500 19140200 X X
105 50 PMG500 19140200 X X
230 or 208-230 105 10 GHE40L 19141010 X X X X X X X
205 10 GVE20L 19141000 X X X X X X X X X
205 10 GUE40V 19140300 X X X X X X X
105 15 GHE40L 19141010 X X X X X X X
205 15 GVE20L 19141000 X X X X X X X X X
205 15 GUE40V 19140300 X X X X X X X
105 20 GHE40L 19141010 X X X X X X X
205 20 GUE40V 19140300 X X X X X X X X X
205 20 GVE20L 19141000 X X X X X X X
105 25 GHE40L 19141010 X X X X X X X
205 25 GUE40V 19140300 X X X X X X X X X
205 25 GVE20L 19141000 X X X X X X X
105 30 PMG500 19140200 X X
105 35 PMG500 19140200 X X
105 45 PMG500 19140200 X X
105 50 PMG500 19140200 X X
332 180 30 PMG500 19140200 X X
180 35 PMG500 19140200 X X
400 180 10 GHE40L 19141010 X X X X X X X
180 10 GUE40V 19140300 X X X X X X X
180 15 GHE40L 19141010 X X X X X X X
180 15 GUE40V 19140300 X X X X X X X
180 20 GHE40L 19141010 X X X X X X X
180 20 GUE40V 19140300 X X X X X X X
180 25 GHE40L 19141010 X X X X X X X
180 25 GUE40V 19140300 X X X X X X X
180 30 PMG500 19140200 X X
180 35 PMG500 19140200 X X
180 45 PMG500 19140200 X X
180 50 PMG500 19140200 X X
460 205 10 GHE40L 19141010 X X X X X X X X X
205 10 GUE40V 19140300 X X X X X X X
205 15 GHE40L 19141010 X X X X X X X X X
205 15 GUE40V 19140300 X X X X X X X
205 20 GHE40L 19141010 X X X X X X X X X
205 20 GUE40V 19140300 X X X X X X X
205 25 GHE40L 19141010 X X X X X X X X X
205 25 GUE40V 19140300 X X X X X X X
205 30 PMG500 19140200 X X
205 35 PMG500 19140200 X X
205 45 PMG500 19140200 X X
205 50 PMG500 19140200 X X
575 250 10 GHE50L 19141020 X X X X X X X X X
250 15 GHE50L 19141020 X X X X X X X X X
250 20 GHE50L 19141020 X X X X X X X X X
250 25 GHE50L 19141020 X X X X X X X X X
? Specify Rectifier Model Type And DC Brake Voltage

296
MOTOR BRAKES
Typical Connection Diagrams

BR101A BR101B BR101C BR601A
POWERED FROM POWERED FROM POWERED FROM POWERED FROM
MOTOR TERMINAL BLOCK
10 MOTOR TERMINAL BLOCK
10 MOTOR TERMINAL BLOCK 10
STANDARD RELEASE STANDARD RELEASE STANDARD RELEASE STANDARD RELEASE
NORMAL STOPPING (AC-SWITCHING) NORMAL STOPPING (AC-SWITCHING) NORMAL STOPPING (AC-SWITCHING) NORMAL STOPPING (AC-SWITCHING)
RECTIFIER RECTIFIER RECTIFIER RECTIFIER
JUMPER BRAKE COIL VB-DC JUMPER BRAKE COIL VB-DC JUMPER BRAKE COIL VB-DC JUMPER BRAKE COIL VB-DC
LOW HIGH HIGH W2 U2 V2 LOW

VB-AC VOLTAGE VB-AC VOLTAGE VOLTAGE VB-AC VOLTAGE
U1 V1 W1
VB-AC
Vmotor MOTOR Vmotor MOTOR Vmotor MOTOR Vmotor MOTOR
STARTER STARTER STARTER STARTER
MOTOR RECTIFIER Vmotor VB-AC VB-DC MOTOR RECTIFIER Vmotor VB-AC VB-DC MOTOR RECTIFIER Vmotor VB-AC VB-DC MOTOR RECTIFIER Vmotor VB-AC VB-DC
208-230YY/460Y GVE20 208 VAC 230 VAC 205 VDC 230YY/460Y GVE20 460 VAC 230 VAC 205 VDC 230YY/460Y GHE40 460 VAC 460 VAC 205 VDC 208/360Y GVE20 208 VAC 208 VAC 180 VDC
230YY/460Y GVE20 230 VAC 230 VAC 205 VDC 230YY/460Y GHE40 460 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC 230/400Y GVE20 230 VAC 230 VAC 205 VDC
230YY/460Y GHE40 230 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC 400/690Y GHE40 400 VAC 400 VAC 180 VDC
460/Y GHE40 460 VAC 460 VAC 205 VDC
BR601B BR601C POWERED FROM BR603A BR603B
POWERED FROM POWERED FROM POWERED FROM
10 MOTOR TERMINAL BLOCK 10 MOTOR TERMINAL BLOCK 15 MOTOR TERMINAL BLOCK
15
NORMAL STOPPING (AC-SWITCHING) NORMAL STOPPING (AC-SWITCHING) FAST STOPPING (DC-SWITCHING) FAST STOPPING (DC-SWITCHING)
VB-AC RECTIFIER VB-AC RECTIFIER

RECTIFIER RECTIFIER
VB-AC VB-AC
BRAKE COIL VB-DC BRAKE COIL VB-DC
JUMPER JUMPER
W2 U2 V2 HIGH W2 U2 V2 HIGH LOW HIGH

VOLTAGE VOLTAGE W2 U2 V2 VOLTAGE W2 U2 V2 VOLTAGE
U1 V1 W1 U1 V1 W1
U1 V1 W1 U1 V1 W1
Vmotor MOTOR Vmotor MOTOR MOTOR MOTOR
Vmotor Vmotor
230/400Y GVE20 400 VAC 230 VAC 205 VDC 230/400Y GHE40 400 VAC 400 VAC 180 VDC 208/360Y GVE20 208 VAC 208 VAC 180 VDC 230/400Y GVE20 400 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC
332/575Y GHE50 575 VAC 575 VAC 250 VDC 230/400Y GVE20 230 VAC 230 VAC 205 VDC
400/690Y GHE40 400 VAC 400 VAC 180 VDC
460/Y GHE40 460 VAC 460 VAC 205 VDC
BR603C BR103A BR103B BR103C
15 MOTOR TERMINAL BLOCK 15 MOTOR TERMINAL BLOCK 15 MOTOR TERMINAL BLOCK 15
FAST STOPPING (DC-SWITCHING) FAST STOPPING (DC-SWITCHING) FAST STOPPING (DC-SWITCHING) FAST STOPPING (DC-SWITCHING)
VB-AC RECTIFIER RECTIFIER VB-AC RECTIFIER VB-AC RECTIFIER
BRAKE COIL VB-DC BRAKE COIL VB-DC BRAKE COIL VB-DC BRAKE COIL VB-DC
HIGH LOW HIGH HIGH

W2 U2 V2 VOLTAGE VOLTAGE VOLTAGE VOLTAGE
VB-AC
U1 V1 W1
MOTOR MOTOR MOTOR MOTOR

Vmotor Vmotor Vmotor Vmotor
230/400Y GHE40 400 VAC 400 VAC 180 VDC 208-230YY/460Y GVE20 208 VAC 230 VAC 205 VDC 230YY/460Y GVE20 460 VAC 230 VAC 205 VDC 230YY/460Y GHE40 460 VAC 460 VAC 205 VDC
332/575Y GHE50 575 VAC 575 VAC 250 VDC 230YY/460Y GVE20 230 VAC 230 VAC 205 VDC
230YY/460Y GHE40 230 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC
* supplied
The normally open contact/s (NO) is not supplied by NORD. It must close at the same time power is
to the brake. The contact must be capable of switching inductive loads and/or be rated IEC AC3. ___ = Braking Method

297
MOTOR BRAKES
BR102A BR102B BR602A BR602B
SEPERATE POWER SOURCE 20 SEPERATE POWER SOURCE 20 SEPERATE POWER SOURCE 20 SEPERATE POWER SOURCE 20
JUMPER JUMPER JUMPER JUMPER

LOW HIGH LOW HIGH

U1 V1 W1 U1 V1 W1

Vmotor VB-AC Vmotor VB-AC Vmotor VB-AC Vmotor
VB-AC
208-230YY/460Y GVE20 208 VAC 230 VAC 205 VDC 230YY/460Y GVE20 460 VAC 115 VAC 105 VDC 208/360Y GVE20 208 VAC 208 VAC 180 VDC 230/400Y GHE40 400VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC
230YY/460Y GVE20 230 VAC 115 VAC 105 VDC 230YY/460Y GVE20 460 VAC 230 VAC 205 VDC 230/400Y GVE20 230 VAC 230 VAC 205 VDC 230/400Y GHE20 400VAC 230 VAC 205VDC
230YY/460Y GVE20 230 VAC 230 VAC 205 VDC 230YY/460Y GHE40 460 VAC 460 VAC 205 VDC 400/690Y GHE40 400 VAC 400 VAC 180 VDC 230/400Y GHE40 400 VAC 400 VAC 180 VDC
230YY/460Y GHE40 230 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC 460/Y GHE40 460 VAC 460 VAC 205 VDC 332/575Y GHE50 575 VAC 575 VAC 250 VDC
BR104A BR104B BR604A BR604B
SEPERATE POWER SOURCE
25 SEPERATE POWER SOURCE 25 SEPERATE POWER SOURCE 25 SEPERATE POWER SOURCE 25
LOW HIGH LOW HIGH

U1 V1 W1 U1 V1 W1
VB-AC Vmotor VB-AC Vmotor Vmotor Vmotor
VB-AC VB-AC
208-230YY/460Y GVE20 208 VAC 230 VAC 205 VDC 230YY/460Y GVE20 460 VAC 115 VAC 105 VDC 208/360Y GHE20 208 VAC 208 VAC 105 VDC 230/400Y GHE40 400VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC
230YY/460Y GVE20 230 VAC 115 VAC 105 VDC 230YY/460Y GVE20 460 VAC 230 VAC 205 VDC 230/400Y GHE20 230 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC 230/400Y GHE20 400VAC 230 VAC 205VDC
230YY/460Y GVE20 230 VAC 230 VAC 205 VDC 230YY/460Y GHE40 460 VAC 460 VAC 205 VDC 400/690Y GHE40 400 VAC 400 VAC 180 VDC 230/400Y GHE40 400 VAC 400 VAC 180 VDC
230YY/460Y GHE40 230 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC 460/Y GHE40 460 VAC 460 VAC 205 VDC 332/575Y GHE50 575 VAC 575 VAC 250 VDC
* supplied

298
MOTOR BRAKES
GU101A GU101B GU101D GU101E
MOTOR TERMINAL BLOCK 10 MOTOR TERMINAL BLOCK 10 MOTOR TERMINAL BLOCK 10 MOTOR TERMINAL BLOCK 10
STANDARD STOPPING (AC-SWITCHING) STANDARD STOPPING (AC-SWITCHING) STANDARD STOPPING (AC-SWITCHING) NORMAL STOPPING (AC-SWITCHING)
VB-AC RECTIFIER VB-AC RECTIFIER VB-AC RECTIFIER RECTIFIER

a b a b a b a b

BRAKE COIL VB-DC BRAKE COIL VB-DC BRAKE COIL VB-DC VB-AC BRAKE COIL VB-DC
LOW HIGH HIGH LOW

VOLTAGE VOLTAGE VOLTAGE W2 U2 V2 VOLTAGE
U1 V1 W1

208-230YY/460Y GUE40V 208 VAC 208-230 VAC 205 VDC 208-230YY/460Y GUE40V 460 VAC 460 VAC 205 VDC 230YY/460Y GUE40V 460 VAC 230 VAC 205 VDC 230∆/400Y GUE40V 230 VAC 230 VAC 205 VDC
230YY/460Y GUE40V 230 VAC 230 VAC 205 VDC 230YY/460Y GUE40V 460 VAC 460 VAC 205 VDC
GU101F GU103A GU103B GU103D

MOTOR TERMINAL BLOCK 10 MOTOR TERMINAL BLOCK 15 MOTOR TERMINAL BLOCK 15 MOTOR TERMINAL BLOCK 15
NORMAL STOPPING (AC-SWITCHING) FAST STOPPING (DC-SWITCHING) FAST STOPPING (DC-SWITCHING) FAST STOPPING (DC-SWITCHING)
RECTIFIER VB-AC RECTIFIER VB-AC RECTIFIER VB-AC RECTIFIER

a b a b a b a b
JUMPER
VB-AC
HIGH LOW HIGH HIGH

U1 V1 W1

230∆/400Y GUE40V 400 VAC 400 VAC 180 VDC 208-230YY/460Y GUE40V 208 VAC 208-230 VAC 205 VDC 208-230YY/460Y GUE40V 460 VAC 460 VAC 205 VDC 230YY/460Y GUE40V 460 VAC 230 VAC 205 VDC
GU103E GU103F GU102A GU102B

POWERED FROM POWERED FROM
MOTOR TERMINAL BLOCK 15 MOTOR TERMINAL BLOCK 15 SEPERATE POWER SOURCE
20 SEPERATE POWER SOURCE 20
FAST STOPPING (DC-SWITCHING) FAST STOPPING (DC-SWITCHING) STANDARD STOPPING (AC-SWITCHING) STANDARD STOPPING (AC-SWITCHING)
VB-AC RECTIFIER VB-AC RECTIFIER RECTIFIER RECTIFIER

a b a b a b a b
JUMPER BRAKE COIL VB-DC JUMPER BRAKE COIL VB-DC

LOW HIGH LOW HIGH

W2 U2 V2 VOLTAGE W2 U2 V2 VOLTAGE VOLTAGE VOLTAGE
U1 V1 W1 U1 V1 W1

Vmotor Vmotor VB-AC Vmotor VB-AC Vmotor
230∆/400Y GUE40V 230 VAC 230 VAC 205 VDC 230∆/400Y GUE40V 400 VAC 400 VAC 180 VDC 208-230YY/460Y GUE40V 208 VAC 208-230 VAC 205 VDC 208-230YY/460Y GUE40V 460 VAC 460 VAC 205 VDC
208-230YY/460Y GUE40V 208 VAC 115 VAC 105 VDC
230YY/460Y GUE40V 230 VAC 115 VAC 105 VDC
* supplied

299
MOTOR BRAKES

GU102E GU102F GU104A GU104B
SEPERATE POWER SOURCE
20 SEPERATE POWER SOURCE 20 SEPERATE POWER SOURCE 25 SEPERATE POWER SOURCE 25
STANDARD STOPPING (AC-SWITCHING) STANDARD STOPPING (AC-SWITCHING) FAST STOPPING (DC-SWITCHING) FAST STOPPING (DC-SWITCHING)

a b a b a b a b
JUMPER BRAKE COIL VB-DC JUMPER BRAKE COIL VB-DC BRAKE COIL VB-DC BRAKE COIL VB-DC
W2 U2 V2
LOW HIGH LOW HIGH
VOLTAGE W2 U2 V2 VOLTAGE VOLTAGE VOLTAGE
U1 V1 W1 U1 V1 W1

VB-AC VB-AC
230∆/400Y GUE40V 230 VAC 230 VAC 205 VDC 230∆/400Y GUE40V 400 VAC 400 VAC 180 VDC 208-230YY/460Y GUE40V 208 VAC 208-230 VAC 205 VDC 208-230YY/460Y GUE40V 460 VAC 460 VAC 205 VDC
208-230YY/460Y GUE40V 208 VAC 115 VAC 105 VDC
230YY/460Y GUE40V 230 VAC 115 VAC 105 VDC
GU104E GU104F
SEPERATE POWER SOURCE 25 SEPERATE POWER SOURCE 25
STANDARD RELEASE STANDARD RELEASE
FAST STOPPING (DC-SWITCHING) FAST STOPPING (DC-SWITCHING)
RECTIFIER RECTIFIER
a b a b
W2 U2 V2
LOW HIGH
VOLTAGE W2 U2 V2 VOLTAGE
U1 V1 W1 U1 V1 W1
MOTOR MOTOR
STARTER STARTER
VB-AC Vmotor VB-AC Vmotor
MOTOR RECTIFIER Vmotor VB-AC VB-DC MOTOR RECTIFIER Vmotor VB-AC VB-DC
230∆/400Y GUE40V 230 VAC 230 VAC 205 VDC 230∆/400Y GUE40V 400 VAC 400 VAC 180 VDC
* supplied

300
MOTOR BRAKES

PMG101A PMG101B PMG101C PMG101D
30
FAST-RELEASE (OVER EXCITATION) FAST-RELEASE (OVER EXCITATION) FAST-RELEASE (OVER EXCITATION) FAST-RELEASE (OVER EXCITATION)
VB-AC RECTIFIER VB-AC RECTIFIER VB-AC RECTIFIER VB-AC RECTIFIER

+ + + +

LOW HIGH HIGH LOW

U1 V1 W1

230YY/460Y PMG500 230 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC 230YY/460Y PMG500 460 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC 230YY/460Y PMG500 460 VAC 460 VAC 205 VDC 208∆/360Y PMG500 208 VAC 208 VAC 105 VDC
230∆/400Y PMG500 230 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC
400∆/690Y PMG500 400 VAC 400 VAC 180 VDC
460∆/Y PMG500 460 VAC 460 VAC 205 VDC
PMG101E PMG102A PMG102B PMG102C
35

+ + + +
JUMPER BRAKE COIL VB-DC BRAKE COIL VB-DC BRAKE COIL VB-DC
BRAKE COIL VB-DC
HIGH LOW HIGH HIGH

VB-AC
U1 V1 W1

230∆/400Y PMG500 400 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC 230YY/460Y PMG500 230 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC 230YY/460Y PMG500 460 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC 230YY/460Y PMG500 460 VAC 460 VAC 205 VDC
PMG102D PMG102E
35
FAST-RELEASE (OVER EXCITATION) FAST-RELEASE (OVER EXCITATION)
VB-AC RECTIFIER VB-AC RECTIFIER

+ +
LOW HIGH
W2 U2 V2
VOLTAGE W2 U2 V2
VOLTAGE
U1 V1 W1 U1 V1 W1
MOTOR MOTOR
STARTER STARTER
Vmotor Vmotor
208∆/360Y PMG500 208 VAC 208 VAC 105 VDC 230∆/400Y PMG500 400 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC
230∆/400Y PMG500 230 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC
400∆/690Y PMG500 400 VAC 400 VAC 180 VDC
460∆/Y PMG500 460 VAC 460 VAC 205 VDC
* supplied

301
MOTOR BRAKES

+ + + +

LOW HIGH HIGH LOW

U1 V1 W1

VB-AC VB-AC
230YY/460Y PMG500 230 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC 230YY/460Y PMG500 460 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC 230YY/460Y PMG500 460 VAC 460 VAC 205 VDC 208∆/360Y PMG500 208 VAC 208 VAC 105 VDC
230∆/400Y PMG500 230 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC
400∆/690Y PMG500 400 VAC 400 VAC 180 VDC
460∆/Y PMG500 460 VAC 460 VAC 205 VDC

+ + + +
BRAKE COIL VB-DC
HIGH LOW HIGH HIGH

U1 V1 W1

VB-AC VB-AC
230∆/400Y PMG500 400 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC 230YY/460Y PMG500 230 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC 230YY/460Y PMG500 460 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC 230YY/460Y PMG500 460 VAC 460 VAC 205 VDC
PMG105D PMG105E
SEPERATE POWER SOURCE 50 SEPERATE POWER SOURCE 50

RECTIFIER RECTIFIER
+ +
LOW HIGH
W2 U2 V2 VOLTAGE W2 U2 V2 VOLTAGE
U1 V1 W1 U1 V1 W1
MOTOR MOTOR
STARTER STARTER
VB-AC Vmotor VB-AC Vmotor
208∆/360Y PMG500 208 VAC 208 VAC 105 VDC 230∆/400Y PMG500 400 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC
230∆/400Y PMG500 230 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC
400∆/690Y PMG500 400 VAC 400 VAC 180 VDC
460∆/Y PMG500 460 VAC 460 VAC 205 VDC
* supplied

302
MOTOR BRAKES
Typical Connection Diagrams - Single Phase Motors

303
MOTOR BRAKES
Troubleshooting Information
Troubleshooting Cause Remedy
Brake doesn’t release Air gap too large Check air gap and adjust
Brake not recieving electrical power Check electrical connection
Failed rectifier Replace rectifier
Brake is getting too warm Use fast response (FR) rectifier
Voltage to brake coil too small Check connection voltageof brake coil
Rectifier supply voltage from inverter Rectifier voltage must be from seperate source.
(Inverter output voltage varies)
Brake release is delayed Air gap too large Check air gap and adjust
Voltage to brake coil too small Check connection voltage of brake coil
Brake does not engage Voltage to coil too large Check connection voltages of brake windings
Hand release is adjusted incorrectly Adjust to correct air gap
Anchor plate mechanically blocked Remove mechanical blockage
Brake engagement is Voltage to coil too large Check connection voltage of brake windings
delayed
Brake is switched to AC side Use DC switching

304
FAST ACTING BRAKE RECTIFIERS
(GPE, GPU & PMG)
Standard Rectifier Types

Full-Wave Rectifier
A rectifier in which both the positive and negative half-cycles
of the AC input signal are rectified to produce a uni-direc-
tional DC current supply to the load or the brake. The output
voltage is 90% of the input voltage (VDC = 0.90 x VAC).
Half-Wave Rectifier
A rectifier in which only alternate half-cycles of the AC input
signal are rectified to produce a uni-directional DC current
supply to the load or the brake. The output voltage is 45% of
the input voltage (VDC = 0.45 x VAC).
General Instructions Dual-Wave Rectifier
This manual provides general operating instructions for the A rectifier that can be wired as either a full-wave rectifier or
“Fast Acting Brake Rectifiers type “GPE, GPU, and PMG” that a half-wave rectifier depending upon how it is connected to
are commonly offered by NORD in addition to the standard the AC input signal.
brake control rectifiers. Please feel free to contact NORD
with any questions concerning the supplied brake rectifiers
and brake components. IMPORTANT NOTE
Safety Notice This manual provides general operating instructions for
NORD brakes with Fast-Acting brake Rectifiers. For addi-
Only qualified personnel should attempt installation, opera-
tional brake and brake rectifier information please refer-
tion and maintenance of NORD brakes and brake rectifiers.
ence User Manual U35000.
If you have a question about a procedure or are uncertain
about any detail, seek clarification and DO NOT PROCEED.
Fast-Acting or Push-Hybrid Rectifiers [GPE, GPU & PMG]
DANGER A push-hybrid rectifier or fast-acting brake rectifier provides
an initial “push” in the form of a timed full-wave brake-re-
• This equipment contains high electrical voltage. lease function, which is then followed by a continuous half-
Remove and lockout all power from the electric motor wave brake-holding function. There are two ways to apply
and brake before any work is completed on the brake. these rectifiers as follows:
• The user is responsible for conforming to all national
and local electrical and safety codes. Wiring practices, • “Overexcitation” of the brake coil provides faster brake
proper grounding, disconnects, and over current release or improved cycling capacity. The DC voltage of the
protection, are of particular importance. brake coil is determined based upon using a half-wave
rectifier. The output voltage is 45% of the input voltage
• Make certain the load is supported when servicing the
(VDC = 0.45 x VAC).
brake. Removing power from the brake or removing
the brake from the motor will release the load, which
• “Reducer-Power Holding” of the brake coil maintains the
may cause severe injury or death.
brake in a released state by using only 25% of the power
• Failure to follow proper procedures and precautions needed for the initial brake release. This results in very
may result in severe bodily injury or death. fast brake stopping. The DC voltage of the brake coil is
determined based upon using a full-wave rectifier. The
Brake Control R ectifi ers output voltage is 90% of the input voltage.
(VDC = 0.90 x VAC).
NORD brake control rectifiers convert AC voltage to DC volt-
age. Rectifiers are used because most applications require-
AC voltage to power the motor, but DC power is required NOTICE
to power the brake and DC power is not typically available.
NORD brakemotors typically include the rectifier located in- In order to prevent rapid wear, the PMG 500 rectifier is
side the terminal box. required when utilizing the larger 800 Nm (590 lb-ft) and
1200 Nm (885 lb-ft) twin-rotor brakes. The PMG500 rec-
Rectifier Advantages tifier is wired to “overexcite” the brake during its initial
• Individual power source for each brake. release.
• Compact size, mounted inside the terminal box.
• Multiple types, voltage options and
release/engagement modes available.
• Mountable in a separate control cabinet.
• Integral protection against voltage spikes.

(GPE, GPU & PMG)
Push-Hybrid Rectifiers External DC Switching (GPE) Ratings & Part Numbers

Model Type GPE20L GPE40L
Like the standard NORD brake control rectifiers, NORD’s fast
acting brake control rectifiers convert AC voltage to DC volt- Part Number 19140230 19140240
age. The “Fast Acting Brake Rectifiers”are utilized to improve Protection (electronics) Coated Coated
brake performance and are often recommended in order to Color Black
provide shorter brake release times or to provide faster stop-
ping times. Input Voltage (VAC) 200V-275V 380V-480V
Output Voltage (VDC) (VDC =0.45 x VAC) - As Half-Wave
The fast acting rectifiers are a two-stage “push” design. When (VDC =0.90 x VAC) - As Full-Wave
power is first applied these rectifiers operate like a full-wave
Rated Current @ 40°C 0.7 A 0.7A
rectifier and then after a relatively short period of time they
act like a half-wave rectifier. The GPE type rectifiers start out Rated Current @ 75°C 0.5 A 0.5A
in full-wave mode when power is first applied and then after Temperature Range -20°C to 75°C
approximately 250 ms they switch to half-wave mode. DC-Switching via External Contact or IR Relay
GPE rectifiers were designed for external control of the

brake’s DC-switching. GPE rectifiers are primarily used in Braking Method
across-the-line applications where the brake power is sup- Braking Break Release Brake Engage Power
plied by the motor terminals but they may also be used in Method (Start) (Stop) Source
situations where the brake power is supplied separately to Very Fast Motor
the brake rectifier. 40 Standard
(Reduced Power Holding) terminals
Fast Standard Motor
There are two ways to apply the fast acting rectifiers: 30
Fast Fast Motor
• The first method, known as “Overexcitation,” provides 35
fast brake release. The brake coil is selected like a half-
wave system (45% of the AC supply voltage).
Basic Connection (AC & DC Switching)
• The second method, known as “Reduced Power Hold- The GPE brake system can be connected for standard stopping
ing,” provides very fast brake stopping. The brake coil is (AC-Switching), fast stopping (DC-Switching) and very fast
selected like a full-wave system (90% of the AC supply stopping (Reduced power holding & DC-Switching). Fast
voltage). brake release can also be achieved by selecting a different
brake coil combination.
IMPORTANT NOTE
STANDARD STOPPING (AC-SWITCHING)
or is a two-speed motor, then seperate AC power must be P
supplied to the brake rectifier.
GPE Rectifier Dimensions

0.14 in
3.5 mm
0.14 in
3.5 mm 1&2 3&4 5&6
AC BRAKE VOLTAGE JUMPER DC BRAKE
0.20 in
5.0 mm
1.95 in FAST & VERY FAST STOPPING (DC-SWITCHING)
49.5 mm
GPE RECTIFIER
0.75 in
19.0 mm
2.34 in 1.54 in 0.12 in

59.5 mm 39.0 mm 3.0 mm
1&2 3&4 5&6

AC BRAKE VOLTAGE NORMALLY OPEN CONTACT DC BRAKE
inductive loads and/or be rated at IEC AC3.

(GPE, GPU & PMG)
Push-Hybrid Rectifiers Integrated DC Switching (GPU) GPU Rectifier Dimensions

Like the standard NORD brake control rectifiers, NORD’s fast 0.14 in
3.5 mm
acting brake control rectifiers convert AC voltage to DC volt- 0.14 in
3.5 mm
age. The “Fast Acting Brake Rectifiers”are utilized to improve
brake performance and are often recommended in order to 0.20 in
5.0 mm
provide shorter brake release times or to provide faster stop- 1.95 in
ping times. 49.5 mm
The fast acting rectifiers are a two-stage “push” design.

When power is first applied these rectifiers operate like a full-
wave rectifier and then after a relatively short period of time 0.75 in
they act like a half-wave rectifier. The GPU rectifiers start out 19.0 mm
in full-wave mode when power is first applied and then after 2.34 in 1.54 in 0.12 in
39.0 mm
approximately 250 ms they switch to half-wave mode. 59.5 mm 3.0 mm
GPU rectifiers were designed for integrated control of the Ratings & Part Numbers
brake’s DC-switching and are voltage sensing. GPU rectifiers Model Type GPU20L GPU40L
are primarily used in applications where there is a frequency
Part Number 19140090 19140170
inverter, soft start, or two-speed motor. Seperate AC power
must be supplied to the brake rectifier. Protection (electronics) Coated Coated
Color Black
There are two ways to apply the fast acting rectifiers: Input Voltage (VAC) 200V-275V 380V-480V
Output Voltage (VDC) (VDC =0.45 x VAC) - As Half-Wave
• The first method, known as “Overexcitation,” provides (VDC =0.90 x VAC) - As Full-Wave
fast brake release. The brake coil is selected like a half-
Rated Current @ 40°C 0.7A 0.7A
wave system (45% of the AC supply voltage).
Rated Current @ 75°C 0.5A 0.5A
• The second method, known as “Reduced Power Temperature Range -20°C to 75°C
Holding,” provides very fast brake stopping. The brake DC-Switching via Internal Activation
coil is selected like a full-wave system (90% of the AC
supply voltage). Basic Connection (AC & DC Switching)
The GPU brake system can be connected for standard stopping
(AC-Switching), fast stopping (DC-Switching) and very fast
IMPORTANT NOTE stopping (Reduced power holding & DC-Switching). Fast
brake release can also be achieved by selecting a different
The GPU rectifier may also be utilized for across-the-line brake coil combination.
applications; however it must always be powered separate
from the motor and have its own pair of contactors or STANDARD STOPPING
starters. It is unadvisable to use the motor terminal block AC-SWITCHING
to supply the GPU rectifier’s AC power due to the motor’s
slow energy dissipation when switched off. GPU RECTIFIER
IMPORTANT NOTE
or is a two-speed motor, then seperate AC power must be 1&2 3&4 5&6
supplied to the brake rectifier. AC BRAKE VOLTAGE JUMPER DC BRAKE
Braking Method FAST & VERY FAST STOPPING

DC-SWITCHING
Braking Break Release Brake Engage Power
Method (Start) (Stop) Source
Very Fast Seperate GPU RECTIFIER
55 Standard
(Reduced Power Holding) power
45
Fast Fast Seperate
50
1&2 3&4 5&6

AC BRAKE VOLTAGE - DC BRAKE

(GPE, GPU & PMG)
Push-Hybrid Rectifiers External DC Switching (PMG) Ratings & Part Numbers

Like the standard NORD brake control rectifiers, NORD’s fast Model Type PMG 500
acting brake control rectifiers convert AC voltage to DC volt-
age. The “Fast Acting Brake Rectifiers”are utilized to improve Part Number 19140200
brake performance and are often recommended in order to Protection (electronics) Coated
provide shorter brake release times or to provide faster stop- Color Black
ping times.
Input Voltage (VAC) 200-500VAC +/- 10%
The fast acting rectifiers are a two-stage “push” design. When Output Voltage (VDC) (VDC =0.45 x VAC) - As Half-Wave
power is first applied these rectifiers operate like a full-wave (VDC =0.90 x VAC) - As Full-Wave
rectifier and then after a relatively short period of time they Rated Current @ 40°C 4.0 A
act like a half-wave rectifier. The PMG type rectifiers start out
Rated Current @ 75°C 2.8 A
in full-wave mode when power is first applied and then after
approximately 250 ms they switch to half-wave mode. Temperature Range -15°C to 80°C
DC-Switching via External Contact
PMG rectifiers were designed for external control of the
brake’s DC-switching. PMG rectifiers are primarily used in Braking Method
across-the-line applications where the brake power is sup-
Braking Break Release Brake Engage Power
plied by the motor terminals, but they may also be used in Method (Start) (Stop) Source
situations where the brake power is supplied separately from
Very Fast Motor
the brake rectifier. 40 Standard
(Reduced Power Holding) terminals
Fast Standard Motor
There are two ways to apply the fast acting rectifiers: 30
Fast Fast Motor
• The first method, known as “Overexcitation,” provides 35
fast brake release. The brake coil is selected like a half- Very Fast Seperate
wave system (45% of the AC supply voltage). 55 Standard
(Reduced Power Holding) power
• The second method, known as “Reduced Power Hold- 45
ing,” provides very fast brake stopping. The brake coil is Fast Fast Seperate
selected like a full-wave system (90% of the AC supply 50
voltage).
Basic Connection (AC & DC Switching)
IMPORTANT NOTE The PMG brake system can be connected for standard stop-
ping (AC-Switching), fast stopping (DC-Switching) and very
If the motor is connected to a frequency inverter, soft start, fast stopping (Reduced power holding & DC-Switching). Fast
or is a two-speed motor, then seperate AC power must be brake release can also be achieved by selecting a different
supplied to the brake rectifier. brake coil combination.
PMG Rectifier Dimensions STANDARD STOPPING (AC-SWITCHING)

2.60 BRAKING
METHOD
2.17
PMG 500
30 or 45
0.31
0.16
0.39 +
Ø 0.17
1.81
~&~ +&- &

AC BRAKE VOLTAGE DC BRAKE JUMPER
FAST & VERY FAST STOPPING (DC-SWITCHING)

0.73
PMG 500
~&~ +&- * &

AC BRAKE VOLTAGE DC BRAKE NORMALLY OPEN CONTACT
inductive loads and/or be rated at IEC AC3.

(GPE, GPU & PMG)
Brake Times & Electrical Selection Selection Suggestions

Brake timing performance is critical in selecting the optimal When Fast or Very Fast Stopping is Recommended
brake system. NORD brakes can provide exceptional perfor-
mance in terms of the release (start) times and engagement Any applications that require quick stops and positive action
(stop) times. Use the following guidelines in order to select at stand-still
the correct brake control components and connections.
1) Determine if the brake needs to be wired directly
from the motor terminal block or powered by a separate • conveyors and inclined conveyors
source. • hoists and lifts
• bulk material handling equipment (bucket elevators,
- If you are using a frequency inverter, soft-start or a two idler conveyor’s).
speed motor you will need to supply the rectifier from a
separate power source. WARNING
- If the motor is powered direct across-the-line the rectifier Hoisting (lifting/lowering) applications - must have the
power can be supplied from the motor’s terminal block. brake wired for fast response (DC-switching) Hoisting (lift-
ing/lowering) applications must have the brake wired for
2) What type of performance do I need? fast response to protect against injury or damage to the
equipment.
- Is the standard brake performance OK?
When Fast-Release is Recommended (Overexcitation)
- Is a higher performance required for fast brake release or
very fast brake stopping? Any application that is very high-cycling with frequent starts
and stops. These applications require the brake to release
3) Determine the brake supply voltage and check the very-quickly in order to avoid excessive heat build-up in the
rectifier compatability using the table on the page 6. AC motor and brake coil.
• Index conveyors
• Diverters
Power Source Brake Release (start) Brake engagement (stop) Braking Method * Rectifier
Standard Very Fast (Reduced power holding) 40 GPE or PMG 500
Motor
Fast (Overexcitation) Standard (AC switching) 30 GPE or PMG 500
Terminal Block
Fast (Overexcitation) Fast (DC switching) 35 GPE or PMG 500
Standard Very Fast (Reduced power holding) 55 GPU or PMG 500
Seperate
Fast (Overexcitation) Standard (AC switching) 45 GPU or PMG 500
Power Source
Fast (Overexcitation) Fast (DC switching) 50 GPU or PMG 500
* Braking methods referenced in connection diagrams on pages 7-11.

(GPE, GPU & PMG)
Rectifier Supply Brake Coil Braking Rectifier Rectifier
BRE 1200
BRE 100
BRE 150
BRE 250
BRE 400
BRE 800
Voltage Voltage Method Type P/N
BRE 10
BRE 20
BRE 40
BRE 60
BRE 5
(VAC) (VDC)
105 30 GPE20L 19140230 X X X X

105 30 PMG500 19140200 X X X X X X X
105 35 GPE20L 19140230 X X X X
105 35 PMG500 19140200 X X X X X X X
180 40 GPE20L 19140230 X X X X X X X
208 180 40 PMG500 19140200 X X X X
(200-208) 105 45 GPU20L 19140090 X X X X
105 45 PMG500 19140200 X X X X X X X
105 50 GPU20L 19140090 X X X X
105 50 PMG500 19140200 X X X X X X X
180 55 GPU20L 19140090 X X X X X X X
180 55 PMG500 19140200 X X X X
105 30 GPE20L 19140230 X X X X
105 30 PMG500 19140200 X X X X X X X
105 35 GPE20L 19140230 X X X X X X X
105 35 PMG500 19140200 X X X X
205 40 GPE20L 19140230 X X X X X X X
230 205 40 PMG500 19140200 X X X X
(220-240) 105 45 GPU20L 19140090 X X X X
105 45 PMG500 19140200 X X X X X X X
105 50 GPU20L 19140090 X X X X
105 50 PMG500 19140200 X X X X X X X
205 55 GPU20L 19140090 X X X X X X X
205 55 PMG500 19140200 X X X X
180 30 GPE40L 19140240 X X X X X X X
180 30 PMG500 19140200 X X X X
180 35 GPE40L 19140240 X X X X X X X
332
180 35 PMG500 19140200 X X X X
180 45 GPU40L 19140170 X X X X X X X
180 50 GPU40L 19140170 X X X X X X X
180 30 GPE40L 19140240 X X X X X X X
180 30 PMG500 19140200 X X X X
180 35 GPE40L 19140240 X X X X X X X
400 180 35 PMG500 19140200 X X X X
(380-415) 180 45 GPU20L 19140090 X X X X X X X
180 45 PMG500 19140200 X X X X
180 50 GPU20L 19140090 X X X X X X X
180 50 PMG500 19140200 X X X X
205 30 GPE40L 19140240 X X X X X X X
205 30 PMG500 19140200 X X X X
205 35 GPE40L 19140240 X X X X X X X
460 205 35 PMG500 19140200 X X X X
(440-480) 205 45 GPU40L 19140170 X X X X X X X
205 45 PMG500 19140200 X X X X
205 50 GPU40L 19140170 X X X X X X X
205 50 PMG500 19140200 X X X X

(GPE, GPU & PMG)
GP101A GP101B GP101C GP101D

30
JUMPER BRAKE COIL VB-DC JUMPER BRAKE COIL VB-DC JUMPER BRAKE COIL VB-DC JUMPER BRAKE COIL VB-DC
LOW HIGH HIGH W2 U2 V2 LOW

VB-AC VOLTAGE VB-AC VOLTAGE VOLTAGE VB-AC VOLTAGE
VB-AC U1 V1 W1

230YY/460Y GPE20L 230 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC 230YY/460Y GPE20L 460 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC 230YY/460Y GPE40L 460 VAC 460 VAC 205 VDC 208/360Y GPE20L 208 VAC 208 VAC 105 VDC
230/400Y GPE20L 230 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC
400/690Y GPE40L 400 VAC 400 VAC 180 VDC
460/Y GPE40L 460 VAC 460 VAC 205 VDC
GP101E GP102A GP102B GP102C
35
RECTIFIER VB-AC RECTIFIER VB-AC RECTIFIER

RECTIFIER
VB-AC
BRAKE COIL VB-DC BRAKE COIL VB-DC BRAKE COIL VB-DC
BRAKE COIL VB-DC
JUMPER
W2 U2 V2 HIGH LOW HIGH HIGH

VOLTAGE VOLTAGE VOLTAGE VOLTAGE
U1 V1 W1
VB-AC
Vmotor MOTOR MOTOR MOTOR MOTOR

Vmotor Vmotor Vmotor
230/400Y GPE20L 400 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC 230YY/460Y GPE20L 230 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC 230YY/460Y GPE20L 460 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC 230YY/460Y GPE40L 460 VAC 460 VAC 205 VDC
332/575Y GPE40L 575 VAC 332 VAC 180 VDC
GP102D GP102E GP103A POWERED FROM GP103B POWERED FROM

35 MOTOR TERMINAL BLOCK 40 MOTOR TERMINAL BLOCK 40
VERY FAST STOPPING VERY FAST STOPPING
FAST STOPPING (DC-SWITCHING) FAST STOPPING (DC-SWITCHING) (DC-SWITCHING + REDUCED POWER HOLDING) (DC-SWITCHING + REDUCED POWER HOLDING)
LOW HIGH LOW HIGH

U1 V1 W1 U1 V1 W1

208/360Y GPE20L 208 VAC 208 VAC 105 VDC 230/400Y GPE20L 400 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC 230YY/460Y GPE20L 230 VAC 230 VAC 205 VDC 230YY/460Y GPE20L 460 VAC 230 VAC 205 VDC
230/400Y GPE20L 230 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC 332/575Y GPE40L 575 VAC 332 VAC 180 VDC
400/690Y GPE40L 400 VAC 400 VAC 180 VDC
460/Y GPE40L 460 VAC 460 VAC 205 VDC
* The normally open contact/s (NO) is not supplied by NORD. It must close at the same time power is supplied to the
brake. The contact must be capable of switching inductive loads and/or be rated IEC AC3.
___ = Braking Method

(GPE, GPU & PMG)
GP103C POWERED FROM GP103D POWERED FROM GP104A GP104B

MOTOR TERMINAL BLOCK 40 MOTOR TERMINAL BLOCK 40 SEPERATE POWER SOURCE 45 SEPERATE POWER SOURCE 45
(DC-SWITCHING + REDUCED POWER HOLDING) (DC-SWITCHING + REDUCED POWER HOLDING) NORMAL STOPPING (AC-SWITCHING) NORMAL STOPPING (AC-SWITCHING)
BRAKE COIL VB-DC BRAKE COIL VB-DC JUMPER JUMPER

LOW HIGH LOW HIGH

U1 V1 W1 U1 V1 W1

208/360Y GPE20L 208 VAC 208 VAC 180 VDC 230/400Y GPE20L 400 VAC 230 VAC 205 VDC 230YY/460Y GPU20L 230 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC 230YY/460Y GPU20L 460 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC
230/400Y GPE20L 230 VAC 230 VAC 205 VDC
GP104C GP104D GP104E GP105A

NORMAL STOPPING (AC-SWITCHING) NORMAL STOPPING (AC-SWITCHING) NORMAL STOPPING (AC-SWITCHING) FAST STOPPING (DC-SWITCHING)
JUMPER JUMPER JUMPER

HIGH LOW HIGH LOW

VOLTAGE W2 U2 V2 VOLTAGE W2 U2 V2 VOLTAGE VOLTAGE
U1 V1 W1 U1 V1 W1

VB-AC Vmotor VB-AC Vmotor VB-AC Vmotor VB-AC Vmotor
230YY/460Y GPU40L 460 VAC 460 VAC 205 VDC 208/360Y GPU20L 208 VAC 208 VAC 105 VDC 230/400Y GPU20L 400 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC 230YY/460Y GPU20L 230 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC
230/400Y GPU20L 230 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC 332/575Y GPU40L 575 VAC 332 VAC 180 VDC
400/690Y GPU40L 400 VAC 400 VAC 180 VDC
460/Y GPU40L 460 VAC 460 VAC 205 VDC
GP105B GP105C GP105D GP105E
HIGH HIGH LOW HIGH

U1 V1 W1 U1 V1 W1

230YY/460Y GPU20L 460 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC 230YY/460Y GPU40L 460 VAC 460 VAC 205 VDC 208/360Y GPU20L 208 VAC 208 VAC 105 VDC 230/400Y GPU20L 400 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC
230/400Y GPU20L 230 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC 332/575Y GPU40L 575 VAC 332 VAC 180 VDC
400/690Y GPU40L 400 VAC 400 VAC 180 VDC
460/Y GPU40L 460 VAC 460 VAC 205 VDC

(GPE, GPU & PMG)
GP106A GP106B GP106C GP106D

SEPERATE POWER SOURCE SEPERATE POWER SOURCE SEPERATE POWER SOURCE SEPERATE POWER SOURCE
55 55 55 55
VERY FAST STOPPING VERY FAST STOPPING VERY FAST STOPPING VERY FAST STOPPING
(DC-SWITCHING + REDUCED POWER HOLDING) (DC-SWITCHING + REDUCED POWER HOLDING) (DC-SWITCHING + REDUCED POWER HOLDING) (DC-SWITCHING + REDUCED POWER HOLDING)
LOW HIGH LOW HIGH

U1 V1 W1 U1 V1 W1

Vmotor Vmotor VB-AC Vmotor Vmotor
VB-AC VB-AC VB-AC
230YY/460Y GPU20L 230 VAC 230 VAC 205 VDC 230YY/460Y GPU20L 460 VAC 230 VAC 205 VDC 208/360Y GPU20L 208 VAC 208 VAC 180 VDC 230/400Y GPU20L 400 VAC 230 VAC 205 VDC
230/400Y GPU20L 230 VAC 230 VAC 205 VDC

30

+ + + +

LOW HIGH HIGH LOW

U1 V1 W1

230YY/460Y PMG500 230 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC 230YY/460Y PMG500 460 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC 230YY/460Y PMG500 460 VAC 460 VAC 205 VDC 208/360Y PMG500 208 VAC 208 VAC 105 VDC
230/400Y PMG500 230 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC
400/690Y PMG500 400 VAC 400 VAC 180 VDC
460/Y PMG500 460 VAC 460 VAC 205 VDC
35

+ + + +
BRAKE COIL VB-DC
HIGH LOW HIGH HIGH

VB-AC
U1 V1 W1

230/400Y PMG500 400 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC 230YY/460Y PMG500 230 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC 230YY/460Y PMG500 460 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC 230YY/460Y PMG500 460 VAC 460 VAC 205 VDC

(GPE, GPU & PMG)
PMG102D PMG102E PMG103A PMG103B

FAST STOPPING (DC-SWITCHING) FAST STOPPING (DC-SWITCHING) (DC-SWITCHING + REDUCED POWER HOLDING) (DC-SWITCHING + REDUCED POWER HOLDING)

+ + + +
LOW HIGH LOW HIGH

W2 U2 V2
VOLTAGE W2 U2 V2
VOLTAGE VOLTAGE VOLTAGE
U1 V1 W1 U1 V1 W1

208/360Y PMG500 208 VAC 208 VAC 105 VDC 230/400Y PMG500 400 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC 230YY/460Y PMG500 230 VAC 230 VAC 205 VDC 230YY/460Y PMG500 460 VAC 230 VAC 205 VDC
230/400Y PMG500 230 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC
400/690Y PMG500 400 VAC 400 VAC 180 VDC
460/Y PMG500 460 VAC 460 VAC 205 VDC
PMG103C PMG103D PMG104A PMG104B
MOTOR TERMINAL BLOCK 40 MOTOR TERMINAL BLOCK 40 SEPERATE POWER SOURCE 45 SEPERATE POWER SOURCE 45
(DC-SWITCHING + REDUCED POWER HOLDING) (DC-SWITCHING + REDUCED POWER HOLDING) NORMAL STOPPING (AC-SWITCHING) NORMAL STOPPING (AC-SWITCHING)

+ + + +
BRAKE COIL VB-DC BRAKE COIL VB-DC JUMPER JUMPER

LOW HIGH LOW HIGH

U1 V1 W1 U1 V1 W1

208/360Y PMG500 208 VAC 208 VAC 180 VDC 230/400Y PMG500 400 VAC 230 VAC 205 VDC 230YY/460Y PMG500 230 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC 230YY/460Y PMG500 460 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC
230/400Y PMG500 230 VAC 230 VAC 205 VDC
PMG104C PMG104D PMG104E PMG105A
NORMAL STOPPING (AC-SWITCHING) NORMAL STOPPING (AC-SWITCHING) NORMAL STOPPING (AC-SWITCHING) FAST STOPPING (DC-SWITCHING)

+ + + +
JUMPER JUMPER JUMPER BRAKE COIL VB-DC

BRAKE COIL VB-DC BRAKE COIL VB-DC BRAKE COIL VB-DC
HIGH LOW HIGH LOW

VOLTAGE W2 U2 V2 VOLTAGE W2 U2 V2 VOLTAGE VOLTAGE
U1 V1 W1 U1 V1 W1

VB-AC Vmotor Vmotor Vmotor Vmotor
VB-AC VB-AC VB-AC
230YY/460Y PMG500 460 VAC 460 VAC 205 VDC 208/360Y PMG500 208 VAC 208 VAC 105 VDC 230/400Y PMG500 400 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC 230YY/460Y PMG500 230 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC
230/400Y PMG500 230 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC
400/690Y PMG500 400 VAC 400 VAC 180 VDC
460/Y PMG500 460 VAC 460 VAC 205 VDC

(GPE, GPU & PMG)
PMG105B PMG105C PMG105D PMG105E

+ + + +
HIGH HIGH LOW HIGH

U1 V1 W1 U1 V1 W1

230YY/460Y PMG500 460 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC 230YY/460Y PMG500 460 VAC 460 VAC 205 VDC 208/360Y PMG500 208 VAC 208 VAC 105 VDC 230/400Y PMG500 400 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC
230/400Y PMG500 230 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC
400/690Y PMG500 400 VAC 400 VAC 180 VDC
460/Y PMG500 460 VAC 460 VAC 205 VDC
SEPERATE POWER SOURCE SEPERATE POWER SOURCE SEPERATE POWER SOURCE SEPERATE POWER SOURCE
55 55 55 55
VERY FAST STOPPING VERY FAST STOPPING VERY FAST STOPPING VERY FAST STOPPING
(DC-SWITCHING + REDUCED POWER HOLDING) (DC-SWITCHING + REDUCED POWER HOLDING) (DC-SWITCHING + REDUCED POWER HOLDING) (DC-SWITCHING + REDUCED POWER HOLDING)

+ + + +
LOW HIGH LOW HIGH

U1 V1 W1 U1 V1 W1

230YY/460Y PMG500 230 VAC 230 VAC 205 VDC 230YY/460Y PMG500 460 VAC 230 VAC 205 VDC 208/360Y PMG500 208 VAC 208 VAC 180 VDC 230/400Y PMG500 400 VAC 230 VAC 205 VDC
230/400Y PMG500 230 VAC 230 VAC 205 VDC

CURRENT SENSING BRAKE RELAY (IR)
Current Sensing Relay (IR)

The current sensing relay, is used to achieve a fast brake engagement (stopping) without the
use of external control equipment or additional wiring. The relay is mounted directly on the
conduit box, and is powered from the motor’s terminal block. The power leads for the relay
replace one of the brass jumper bars on the terminal block of any single speed motor. The
switch leads are connected to terminals 3 and 4 of the rectifier. When the power to the motor
is shut off, the IR relay opens the brake circuit on the DC side which allows the brake to
de-magnetize quickly.
IMPORTANT NOTE
Current Sensing Relay Requirements
n Brake must be powered from the motor’s terminal block (not seperately powered)
n Motor must be single speed and should not be powered by a frequency inverter or soft starter.
Part number 18556010 18556020

Reissmann Part Number RSR 25-46 RSR 50-46
Primary Current Rating (black/white wires) 25AAC 50 AAC
Maximum Primary Current (black/white wires) 75AAC 150 AAC
Maximum Time at Maximum Primary Current 0.2 s 0.2 s
Maximum Cycles per hour 500 500
Switching Voltage 42 - 550VDC 42 - 550VDC
Switching Current (red/blue wires) 1.0 ADC 1.0 ADC
Holding Current  ˂ 0.7 AAC ˂ 0.7 AAC
Delay Time  18 ms 18 ms
Enclosure Rating IP65 IP65
Ambient Temp. - 25 to 90 °C (- 40 to 167 °F) - 25 to 90 °C (- 40 to 167 °F)
 Relative to the distortion created by the magnetising current of the motor.
 Additional setting time delay added to the DC-setting time of the brake circuit.
IR Relay Wiring Diagram

Rectifier IR-Relay Wires
to Rectifier
Model Type Part Number Design Red Blue

GVE20L 1914000 Full-wave 4 3
GHE40L 19141010 Half-wave 4 3
GHE50L 19141020 Half-wave 4 3
GPE20L 19140230 Push-hybrid 4 3
GPE40L 19140240 Push-hybrid 4 3
GUE40V 19140300 Dual Wave 4 3
Conduit Box Thread Adapter

Thread Motor Frame Part Number O-Ring
M20 63-71 18542006* 25501615
M25 80-90 18522253 25501615
M32 100-132 18522320 25501615
M40 160-180 18522400 + 18522253 25501615
* Spacer

IR Relay Selection Table for 4-Pole Motors

Type Efficiency 230/460 V 460V D 332/575V 208/360 V 230/400V 400/690V
60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 50 Hz
63S/4 SE (IE1) 25A - 25A 25A 25A -
63SP/4 PE (IE3) 25A - 25A - 25A -
63L/4 SE (IE1) 25A - 25A 25A 25A -
63LP/4 PE (IE3) 25A - 25A - 25A -
71S/4 SE (IE1) 25A - 25A 25A 25A -
71SP/4 PE (IE3) 25A - 25A - 25A -
71L/4 SE (IE1) 25A - 25A 25A 25A -
71LP/4 PE (IE3) 25A - 25A - 25A -
80S/4 SE (IE1) 25A - 25A 25A 25A -
80SH/4 EE (IE2) - - - - 25A -
80SP/4 PE (IE3) 25A - 25A - 25A -
80L/4 SE (IE1) 25A - 25A 25A 25A -
80LH/4 EE (IE2) 25A - 25A - 25A -
80LP/4 PE (IE3) 25A - 25A - 25A -
90S/4 SE (IE1) 25A - 25A 25A 25A -
90SH/4 EE (IE2) 25A - 25A - 25A -
90SP/4 PE (IE3) 25A - 25A - 25A -
90L/4 SE (IE1) 25A - 25A 25A 25A -
90LH/4 EE (IE2) 25A - 25A - 25A -
90LP/4 PE (IE3) 25A - 25A - 25A -
100L/4 SE (IE1) 25A - 25A 25A - 25A
100LH/4 EE (IE2) 25A - 25A - - 25A
100LP/4 PE (IE3) 25A - 25A - - 25A
100LA/4 SE (IE1) 25A - 25A 25A - 25A
100AH/4 EE (IE2) - - - - - 25A
100AP/4 PE (IE3) - - - - - 25A
112M/4 SE (IE1) - - - - - 25A
112MH/4 EE (IE2) 25A - 25A - - 25A
112MP/4 PE (IE3) 25A - 25A - - 25A
132S/4 SE (IE1) 25A - 25A 25A - 25A
132SH/4 EE (IE2) 25A - 25A - - 25A
132SP/4 PE (IE3) 25A - 25A - - 25A
132M/4 SE (IE1) 25A - 25A 25A - 25A
132MH/4 EE (IE2) 25A - 25A - - 25A
132LH/4 EE (IE2) - - - - - 25A
132MA/4 SE (IE1) - - - - - 25A
132MP/4 PE (IE3) 25A - 25A - - 25A
25 A (P/N 18556010) – IR Relay is rated for 25 Amp motor phase current.

N/A – IR Relay option is not available.
Observe the efficiency law requirements for the country that the motor will be utilized in.

IR Relay Selection Table for 4-Pole Motors Ctd.

Type Efficiency 230/460 V 460V D 332/575V 208/360 V 230/400V 400/690V
60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 50 Hz
160SH/4 EE (IE2) - - - - - 25A
160SP/4 PE (IE3) - - - - - 25A
160M/4 SE (IE1) 25A - 25A - - 25A
160MH/4 EE (IE2) 25A - 25A - - 25A
160MP/4 PE (IE3) 25A - 25A - - 25A
160L/4 SE (IE1) 25A - 25A - - 25A
160LH/4 EE (IE2) 25A - 25A - - 50 A
160LP/4 PE (IE3) 25A - 25A - - 50 A
180MX/4 SE (IE1) 50 A - 25A - - 25A
180MH/4 EE (IE2) 50 A - 25A - - 50 A
180MP/4 PE (IE3) 50 A - 25A - - 50 A
180LX/4 SE (IE1) 50 A - 50 A - - 25A
180LH/4 EE (IE2) 50 A - 50 A - - 50 A
180LP/4 PE (IE3) 50 A - 50 A - - 50 A
200LX/4 SE (IE1) 50 A - 50 A - - 50 A
200XH/4 EE (IE2) N/A - 50 A - - N/A
225RP/4 PE (IE3) - 50 A 50 A - - N/A
225SH/4 EE (IE2) - 50 A 50 A - - N/A
225SP/4 PE (IE3) - 50 A 50 A - - N/A
225MH/4 EE (IE2) - 50 A N/A - - N/A
225MP/4 PE (IE3) - 50 A N/A - - N/A
250WH/4 EE (IE2) - N/A N/A - - N/A
250WP/4 PE (IE3) - 50 A N/A - - N/A
280SH/4 EE (IE2) - N/A N/A - - N/A
280SP/4 PE (IE3) - N/A N/A - - N/A
280MH/4 EE (IE2) - N/A N/A - - N/A
280MP/4 PE (IE3) - N/A N/A - - N/A
315SH/4 EE (IE2) - N/A N/A - - N/A
315SP/4 PE (IE3) - N/A N/A - - N/A
315MH/4 EE (IE2) - N/A N/A - - N/A
315MP/4 PE (IE3) - N/A N/A - - N/A
315RH/4 EE (IE2) - N/A N/A - - N/A
315RP/4 PE (IE3) - N/A N/A - - N/A
315LH/4 EE (IE2) - N/A N/A - - N/A
315LP/4 PE (IE3) - N/A N/A - - N/A

N/A – IR Relay option is not available.
Observe the efficiency law requirements for the country that the motor will be utilized in.

IR Relay Typical Connection Diagrams

IR101A IR101B IR102A IR102B
15
STANDARD-RELEASE STANDARD-RELEASE STANDARD-RELEASE STANDARD-RELEASE
Blue Blue Red Red
Red IR Red IR Blue IR Blue IR
Wht/Blk RELAY Wht/Blk RELAY Wht/Blk RELAY Wht/Blk RELAY
Wht/Blk Wht/Blk Wht/Blk Wht/Blk
VB-AC LOW HIGH VB-AC LOW HIGH

VB-AC VB-AC
208-230YY/460Y GVE20 208VAC 230 VAC 205 VDC 230YY/460Y GVE20 460 VAC 230 VAC 205 VDC 208-230YY/460Y GHE40 208VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC 230YY/460Y GHE40 460 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC
230YY/460Y GVE20 230 VAC 230 VAC 205 VDC 230YY/460Y GHE40 230 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC
IR103 IR301 IR401 IR501

15

VB-AC
Red Blue Red Red
Blue IR VB-AC Red IR VB-AC Blue IR Blue IR
W2 U2 V2 W2 U2 V2 W2 U2 V2
HIGH LOW LOW HIGH
VOLTAGE U1 V1 W1 VOLTAGE U1 V1 W1 VOLTAGE U1 V1 W1 VOLTAGE
VB-AC
230YY/460Y GHE40 460 VAC 460VAC 205 VDC 208/360Y GVE20 208 VAC 208 VAC 180 VDC 460/800Y GHE40 460 VAC 460 VAC 205 VDC 332/575Y GHE50 575 VAC 575 VAC 250 VDC
230/400Y GVE20 230 VAC 230 VAC 205 VDC
IR601 IR602
15 15
STANDARD-RELEASE
STANDARD-RELEASE
IMPORTANT NOTE
Requirements
RECTIFIER RECTIFIER
VB-AC • Brake must be powered from the motor’s terminal block
(not seperately powered)
Blue
Red IR VB-AC
Red
Blue IR
• Motor must be a single speed and should not be
Wht/Blk Wht/Blk
Wht/Blk
RELAY
Wht/Blk
RELAY powered by a frequency inverter or soft starter.
W2 U2 V2 W2 U2 V2
HIGH LOW
U1 V1 W1 VOLTAGE U1 V1 W1 VOLTAGE
Vmotor MOTOR Vmotor MOTOR

STARTER STARTER
230/400Y GVE20 400 VAC 230 VAC 205 VDC 400/690Y GHE40 400 VAC 400 VAC 180 VDC
230/400Y GHE40 400 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC

IR Relay with GUE40V Dual Wave Rectifier

15
208-230YY/460Y GUE40V 208 VAC 230 VAC 205 VDC 208-230YY/460Y GUE40V 460 VAC 460 VAC 205 VDC 208∆/360Y GUE40V 208 VAC 208 VAC 180 VDC 230∆/400Y GUE40V 400 VAC 400 VAC 180 VDC
230YY/460Y GUE40V 230 VAC 230 VAC 205 VDC 230YY/460Y GUE40V 460 VAC 460 VAC 205 VDC 230∆/400Y GUE40V 230 VAC 230 VAC 205 VDC
GPE Rectifier for External DC-Switching with IR Relay

FAST RELEASE (OVER EXCITATION) STANDARD-RELEASE STANDARD-RELEASE STANDARD-RELEASE
FAST STOPPING (DC-SWITCHING) FAST STOPPING (DC-SWITCHING) (REDUCED POWER HOLD) (REDUCED POWER HOLD)
Red Red Red Red
Blue IR Blue IR Blue IR Blue IR
VB-AC LOW HIGH VB-AC LOW HIGH

VB-AC VB-AC
230YY/460Y GPE20L 230 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC 230YY/460Y GPE20L 460 VAC 230 VAC 105 VDC 230YY/460Y GPE20L 230 VAC 230 VAC 205 VDC 230YY/460Y GPE20L 460 VAC 230 VAC 205 VDC
IR153A
IMPORTANT NOTE
Requirements
• Brake must be powered from the motor’s terminal block (not seperately powered)
• Motor must be a single speed and should not be powered by a frequency inverter or soft starter.

08.16.17
 www.nord.com/docs 320
NEMA/IEC/SERVO INPUT ADAPTERS
& THEIR COUPLINGS
WARNING
While working on the gear drive system, make sure the power from the prime mover is isolated or secured on “lock-out”
to prevent accidental start-up and to safeguard against injury!
NEMA/ IEC Motor Adapters NEMA/IEC Motor Weight Limits

Motor adapters allow for easy installation and removal of in- When mounting a motor to a NORD NEMA C-face motor
dustry standard motors. Motor adapters consist of a coupling adapter it is important to consider the motor’s weight. Fol-
and an adapter housing that connects the motor to the gear lowing is a table that includes the maximum motor weight
reducer. the NEMA adapter can support. If the motor exceeds the
listed weight is must be externally supported. When a C-face
NORD Gear supplies a coupling that is to be mounted on the mounted motor is externally supported care must be taken
motor shaft. It is important that the coupling is properly po- to ensure that the support system does not impose additional
sitioned. pre-loads on the NEMA motor adapter.
• For NEMA Input Adapters, follow the Motor Installation NEMA Motor Weight Limit
Instructions on pages 3-4.
Motor FRAME 56C 143TC 145TC 182TC 184TC 210TC
• For IEC Input Adapters, the supplied coupling will mount Max Weight [lb] 66 88 110 130 175 220
directly against the motor shaft shoulder. No locating Motor FRAME 250TC 280TC 324TC 326TC 365TC
measurements need to be taken.
Max Weight [lb] 440 550 770 1100 1540
IMPORTANT NOTE IEC Motor Weight Limit

Motor FRAME 63 71 80 90 100 112 132
Some of the larger IEC inputs will have a coupling spacer Max Weight [lb] 55 66 88 110 130 175 220
included to help locate the coupling. Slide the spacer
against the motor shaft shoulder, slide the coupling Motor FRAME 160 180 200 225 250 280 315
against the spacer and tighten set screw(s). Max Weight [lb] 440 550 770 1100 1540 1540 3300
Couplings
IMPORTANT NOTE
Couplings are made with tough abrasion resistant materials,
For the larger motor adapters (IEC160 / N250TC and larg- which resist most chemicals and petroleum products. They
er), an Automatic Lubricator is supplied. This will need to are electrically isolated (prevent metal to metal contact) and
be activated at the time of startup. For operation and require no lubrication or maintenance. Depending upon the
activation instructions, refer to user manual U45200. size of the C-face input, NORD provides either a gear or a jaw
type coupling.
NORD supplies three different types of couplings depending

on the size of input: “J” style, “M” style and “Jaw” style cou-
pling. Following are instructions on how to properly mount
each type of coupling onto the motor.

& THEIR COUPLINGS
Couplings for the NEMA and IEC Adapters Rotex® Couplings

Depending on the size of the input adapter to the gearbox, The cast iron jaw type couplings have an integral urethane
NORD Gear supplies two styles of couplings - BoWex® (gear “spider” that provides smooth transmission of the motor
tooth) and Rotex® (jaw) couplings. torque. A set screw on the coupling prohibits axial move-
ment along the motor shaft.
BoWex® Couplings
• Excellent shock and vibration dampening
NORD C-face adapter input shafts have a machined spline on • Excellent resistance to oils and most chemicals
the end. NORD incorporates two styles of BoWex® couplings, • No metal-to-metal contact
the “J” and “M” styles. The “J” style is a one-piece coupling • Operating Conditions: -22ºF - 195ºF (-30ºC - 90ºC)
with a metal hub and nylon spline. The “M” style is a two- • Higher temperature material (Hytrel) spider available
piece coupling – the metal hub and a nylon sleeve. Nylon up to 230ºF (110ºC)
and steel components allow them to operate in high ambient • Low temperature materials available upon request
temperatures without lubrication or maintenance. • Special bores available
• Nylon sleeves resist dirt, moisture, most chemicals and
petroleum products
• No lubrication required
• Operating Conditions:
-22ºF - 212ºF (-30ºC - 100ºC)
• Higher temperature coupling sleeve
available up to 250ºF (120ºC)
• Special bore available
Rotex® Couplings Mechanical Ratings “R” Style (NEMA & IEC)

Coupling Rated Torque Input Adapter Bore Size
Type Cont. Peak Sizes
5,532 lb-in 11,063 lb-in N320TC 2-3/8”
Rotex® R65
625 N-m 1,250 N-m IEC200, IEC225 55mm, 60mm
21,242 lb-in 42,484 lb-in N360TC 1-5/8”
Rotex® R90
2400 N-m 4800 N-m IEC250, 280, 315 65, 70, 80 mm
BoWex® Couplings Mechanical Ratings “J” Style (NEMA & IEC)
Coupling Rated Torque Input Adapter Bore Size
Type Sizes
Couplings for Servo Adapters
Cont. Peak
44.3 lb-in 88.5 lb-in N56C 5/8” NORD Gear supplies Rotex® (jaw) couplings for SERVO
BoWex® J14
5 N-m 10 N-m IEC63, IEC71 11mm, 14mm adapter connections.
106 lb-in 212 lb-in N56C, N140TC 5/8”, 7/8”
BoWex® J24 Rotex® Couplings Mechanical Ratings (Servo Adapter)
12 N-m 24 N-m IEC80, IEC90 19mm, 24mm
398 lb-in 1,195 lb-in N180TC 1-1/8” Coupling Rated Torque Input Reducer Bore
BoWex® J28 Type Cont. Peak Adapter Sizes Input Flange Size
45 N-m 135 N-m IEC100, IEC112 28mm
150 lb-in 301 lb-in
Rotex® R19 GS -SEP100, -SEK100 160S 19 mm
BoWex® Couplings Mechanical Ratings “M” Style (NEMA & IEC) 17 Nm 34 Nm
531 lb-in 1062 lb-in
Coupling Rated Torque Input Adapter Bore Size Rotex® R24 GS -SEP130, -SEK130 160S, 250S 24 mm
60 Nm 120 Nm
Type Cont. Peak Sizes
®
1416 lb-in 2832 lb-in -SEP165, -SEK165, 160S, 250S 32 mm
708 lb-in 2,124 lb-in N180TC, N210TC 1-1/8”, 1-3/8” Rotex R28 GS
BoWex® 160 Nm 320 Nm -SEP215, -SEK215 250S 38 mm
M38 80 N-m 240 N-m IEC132 38 mm -SEP215, -SEK215 300S 38 mm
4647 lb-in 9293 lb-in
BoWex® 885 lb-in 2,655 lb-in N250TC 1-5/8” Rotex® R48 GS -SEP300, -SEK300 300S
525 Nm 1050 Nm -SEP300, -SEK300 48 mm
M42 100 N-m 300 N-m IEC160 42 mm 350
BoWex® 1,239 lb-in 3,717 lb-in N280TC 1-7/8” SEP adapter couplings are for keyed motor shafts.
M48 140 N-m 420 N-m IEC180 48 mm SEK adapter couplings are clamping style for shafts without key.
Alternate bores upon request.

& THEIR COUPLINGS
“J” Style Coupling NEMA C-face Motor Installation “M” Style Coupling NEMA C-face Motor Installation
1. Measure the distance from the face of the input 1 Measure the distance from the face of the input adapter
adapter to the face of the splined shaft and record that to the face of the splined shaft & record that measurement.
measurement as A in the equation below.
2. Subtract 0.31” (~8mm) from the distance. This needs to
2. Measure depth of coupling engagement zone and be done so that the coupling will not be preloaded after
record the measurement as “B” in the equation below. installation!
3. Add “A” + “B” and subtract 0.08” (~2mm) from the 3. Use that measurement to locate the coupling from the
distance. This needs to be done so that the coupling face of the motor onto the shaft.
will not be preloaded after installation!
4. Once in place, tighten the set screw to lock the coupling
4. Use that measurement to locate the coupling from the in place. It is recommended that the key is staked or
face of the motor onto the shaft. bonded (Loctite) in place to prohibit the key from
vibrating out.
5. Once in place, tighten the set screw to lock the coupling
in place. It is recommended that the key is staked or 5. Mount the motor onto the input adapter with customer
bonded (Loctite) in place to prohibit the key from supplied bolts. Make sure that the coupling from the
vibrating out. adapter and the motor engage securely. Use lock washers
or Loctite to prohibit bolts from becoming loose from
6. Mount the motor onto the input adapter with customer vibration.
supplied bolts. Make sure that the coupling from the
adapter and the motor engage securely. Use lock
washers or Loctite to prohibit bolts from becoming
loose from vibration.
TIGHTEN
SET SCREW
C-FACE MOTOR
TIGHTEN
B SET SCREW
C-FACE MOTOR
COUPLING
PLACEMENT
DISTANCE
A
COUPLING
MEASURED SUBTRACT PLACEMENT
COUPLING DISTANCE DISTANCE DISTANCE
PLACEMENT
DISTANCE - 0.310" (8mm) =
MEASURED SUBTRACT COUPLING

DISTANCES DISTANCE PLACEMENT
A + B DISTANCE
+ - 0.080" (2mm) =

& THEIR COUPLINGS
“Jaw” Style Coupling NEMA C-face Installation

URETHANE TIGHTEN
1. Measure the distance from the face of the input adapter SPIDER SET SCREW
to the face of the coupling as shown and record that
measurement.
C-FACE MOTOR
2. Subtract the “X” dimension from the measured distance.
This needs to be done so that the coupling will not be
preloaded after installation!
3. Use that measurement to locate the coupling from the COUPLING

face of the motor onto the shaft. PLACEMENT
DISTANCE
4. The metal portion of the coupling should be heated up
prior to assembly, generally 250ºF to 300ºF (120ºC to 150ºC).
COUPLING
MEASURED SUBTRACT PLACEMENT
DISTANCE DISTANCE DISTANCE
IMPORTANT NOTE
- “X” See table =
Below
DO NOT HEAT THE URETHANE SPIDER.
5. Once in place, tighten the setscrew to lock coupling in Coupling “X”

place. Let the coupling cool down before placing the Size (Subtract this value from measured distance)
spider into the jaws. It is recommended that the key is
R14 0.06” (1.5 mm)
staked or bonded (Loctite) in place to prohibit the key
from vibrating out. R19 & R24 0.08” (2.0 mm)
R28 0.10” (2.5 mm)
6. Mount the motor onto the input adapter with customer
supplied bolts. Make sure that the coupling from the R38 & 42 0.12” (3.0 mm)
adapter and the motor engage securely. Use lock washers R48 0.14” (3.5 mm)
or Loctite to prohibit bolts from becoming loose from
vibration. R65 0.18” (4.5 mm)
R90 0.22” (5.5 mm)

& THEIR COUPLINGS
IEC 63-112 / IEC132-180 / IEC 160-315 &

NEMA 56C-180TC, NEMA 180TC-N280TC, NEMA 320TC-360TC
N56C - N180TC N180TC - N280TC IEC200 - IEC 315

IEC 63 - IEC112 1374 IEC 132 - IEC180
910
1347
1311 1375
1345 1374
1221 1327 1372
1220 1374 1354
900 1371 1355
1370 1250
1300 1253 1321
1200 1356
1357 1373
1375 1369
1349 1346
911 1373 910 1345
1350
1310 1320 1371
1320 1332
1231
1251 1333 1232
900
1241 1356 1230
1240 1357
1252
1349 1311
1350
911
1300
1310
1330 N320TC - N360TC
1260
1261
1262
NEMA/IEC Parts List

900 Drive pinion 1231 Screw 1305 Parallel key 1332 Shim
910 Parallel key 1232 Spring lock washer 1310 Bearing 1333 Shim
911 Circlip 1234 Shim 1311 Bearing 1345 Circlip
1200 Housing 1235 Shim 1312 Bearing 1346 Circlip
1210 Gasket 1240 Screw 1320 Radial packing ring 1348 Support disc
1220 Screw 1241 Gasket 1321 Radial packing ring 1356 Shim
1221 Spring lock washer 1245 Lubricating nipple 1330 Circlip 1357 Shim
1230 Lid 1300 Drive Shaft 1331 Circlip 1380 Gamma ring

& THEIR COUPLINGS
SERVO SEP/SEK 100, SEP/SEK 130, SEP/SEK 165, SEP/SEK 215, SEP/SEK 300
1374
1372
1347
1311
1373
1369
910
1220 1371
1310
1221
900 1356
1357
1345
1300
1320
1200
911
1348
1336
1337
1241 1327
1240
1306
1336
1337
1327
1304
SERVO Parts List

900 Drive pinion 1241 Gasket 1327 Circlip 1357 Shim
910 Parallel key 1300 Drive Shaft 1336 Shim 1369 Parallel key
911 Circlip 1304 Support disc 1337 Shim 1371 Coupling half
1200 Housing 1306 Support disc 1345 Circlip 1372 Ring gear
1220 Screw 1310 Bearing 1347 Circlip 1373 Half-coupling
1221 Spring lock washer 1311 Bearing 1348 Support disc 1374 Screw
1240 Screw 1320 Radial packing ring 1356 Shim

AUTOMATIC LUBRICATOR
Automatic Lubricator
Some NORD gear units with NEMA (or IEC) adapters rang-
ing in size from N250TC-N400TC (or IEC160-IEC315) are sup-
plied with a factory-installed, field-activated, PERMA® Classic
Automatic Lubrication Cartridge. The automatic lubricator is
used to dispense lubricant to the outer most roller bearing
of the input NEMA (or IEC) input assembly. The lubrication
cartridge must be activated prior to commissioning the gear
unit. (Figures 1 & 2)
Some newer versions of the NEMA (or IEC) adapters also in-
clude a grease purge. The grease purge area is sealed for
transportation; however, it is recommended that the G1/4
sealing screw be removed and that the grease collection con-
tainer provided by NORD be installed just prior to activating
the automatic lubricant dispenser. (Figure 3)
Principle of Operation
First the activation screw is threaded into the lubrication can-

ister. Then the ring-eyelet on top of the activation screw is Figure 1 - PERMA® Automatic Lubrication Canister
tightened until its breaking point. This causes a zinc-molyb-
denum gas generator to drop into a citric acid liquid electro- NOTICE
lyte, which is contained within an elastic bladder. An electro-
chemical reaction slowly releases small amounts of hydrogen • To prevent premature bearing failure, the lubrication
gas and gradually pressurizes the bladder, pushing the piston dispenser must be activated prior to commissioning
towards the lubrication chamber. the gear reducer.
Grease is continuously injected into the lubrication point un- • The lubricator must only be used once and should
til the bearing cavity is full. Any back pressure from the bear- never be opened or taken apart or permanent damage
ing will cause the system to neutralize. The bladder inside the will result.
canister will continue to slowly build pressure so that once • Never unscrew the PERMA® canister from the lubrica-
the equipment resumes normal operation; the lubricator will tion point after activation or during the discharge
also resume its normal function. period. This would cause a permanent pressure loss in
the lubricator and would justify replacing the lubricator.
The lubricator contains approximately 120 cm3 or 120 ml
(4.8 oz) of grease. For reference, a single stroke of a typical
grease gun delivers approximately 1.0-1.2 cm3 (0.03–0.04 oz)
of grease. This means the canister contains approximately WARNING
100 strokes of grease. See Figure 1 for a detailed view of the
PERMA® Lubricator. • Avoid swallowing the gas generator, the liquid electro-
lyte, and the lubricant.
• Avoid contact of, the liquid electrolyte, and the lubri-
cant with the eyes, skin or clothing.
• Observe all applicable MSDS sheets.
• Follow applicable local laws and regulations concerning
waste disposal.
PERMA® Automatic Lubricator Options Supplied by NORD

NORD Part Number 28301000 28301010
Lubrication Option Synthetic (standard) Food Grade (optional)
PERMA® Classic Temperature Range ♦ 0 to 40 °C (32 to 104 °F) 0 to 40 °C (32 to 104 °F)
Lubrication Volume 120 cm3 or 120 ml (4.8 oz) 120 cm3 or 120 ml (4.8 oz)
Grease Lubrication Mfg. / Type Klüber / Petamo GHY 133 Lubriplate / FGL1
Lubrication Temperature Range ♦ -30 to 120 °C (-22 to 248 °F) -18 to 120 °C (0 to 248 °F)
♦ The temperature range values shown do not apply to other components and/or lubricants within the gear reducer.

Lubricator Service Interval Figure 2 - Activating the Automatic Lubricator

The Automatic lubricator should be inspected approximately
every 6 months. At the end of the lubrication period the pis- Attention!
ton becomes clearly visible through the clear nylon discharge
Screw in the activation screw until the lug breaks off
indicator cap located at the bottom of the PERMA® canister
(Figure 1); this helps indicate that the lubricant has been fully before commissioning the gear unit.
discharged at which time the lubricator should be replaced. Dispensing time: 12 Months
When operating the gear unit 8 hours/day or less a replace-
ment interval of 12 months or 1 year is possible. Ambient Activation Date
temperature will influence the discharge rate and may ex-
tend or shorten the replacement interval. Month Year
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 11 12 13 14 15
Ambient Considerations
The grease discharge rate is affected by the ambient tem-
perature. PERMA® indicates that the lubricator contents will
dispense for a 12 month period when the average tempera- Label 1250-1 1250-2 1252 1251 1250-2
ture is 20 °C (68 °F). Grease dispensing rates depend primarily Ring
on average ambient conditions and not extreme highs and Eyelet
lows. Lower ambient temperatures will lead to slower dis-
pensing rates and higher ambient temperatures will lead to
faster dispensing rates.
Average Ambient Temperature Discharge Period Months ♦

0 °C (32 °F) >18
10 °C (50 °F) 18
20 °C (68 °F) 12
30 °C (86 °F) 6
40 °C (104 °F) 3
♦ Values are approximate.
Discharge can also be influenced by type of lubricant, vi-

bration, and by the mating connecting parts in the lubrica-
1250-1 Automatic Lubricator
tion system.
1250-2 Activation Screw
1251 Socket Head Cap Screws
Activating the Automatic Lubricator
1252 Protective Cover
1. Loosen and remove the M8x16 assembly socket head cap
screws (1251).
2. Carefully remove the protective cover (1252) installed over
the automatic lubricator (1250-1).
3. Screw the activation screw (1250-2) into the automatic
lubricator (1250-1) and twist the ring-eyelet until it
reaches its breaking point.
4. Re-fit the cartridge cover (1250-1) and re-install and
tighten the assembly screws (1251).
5. Mark the activation date on the adhesive label that is
provided.

Grease Purge and Grease Drain Cup Grease Cup Servicing

Some versions of the NEMA (or IEC) adapters also include a NORD suggests that with every second replacement of the
grease purge and a grease drain cup (1299) for collecting old automatic lubricator, the grease collection cup (NORD Part
grease. The grease purge area is sealed for transportation.
No. 28301210) should be emptied or replaced with a new
It is recommended that the G1/4 sealing screw (1297) be re- one. Follow the steps below to service the grease cup.
moved and that the grease drain cup be installed after the 1. Unscrew the grease drain cup (1299) from either the
automatic lubricant dispenser is activated.
outlet port of the NEMA or IEC input cylinder or from the
The swivel fitting (1242) that NORD supplies allows the grease extension (1243) that is secured to the NEMA or IEC
cup to be positioned at a 90° angle from its typical mounting. input cylinder.
The swivel fitting allows the grease cup to be rotated so that
it remains clear of any gear unit mounting obstructions. 2. To empty the grease drain cup (1299) insert a stiff rod
through the hole in the grey cap-end of the drain cup
and push the internal plunger towards the thread-end
Figure 3 – Grease Purge and Grease Cup Assembly
of the drain cup. Please note that the dark gray end cap
is bonded into place and cannot be removed.
3. Collect and properly dispose of the grease being pushed
out of the drain cup. Due to the design of the container
a residual amount of grease may remain in the container.
1311 4. After emptying and cleaning the grease cup it can be
1200 fitted back onto the grease outlet port of the NEMA or
1243 IEC adaptor.
G1/4
5. In the event the grease cup becomes damaged or it
should be replaced with a new container. Consider
replacing the grease cup (P/N 2830100) with every
1298 second replacement of the automatic lubricator.
1299
1297 Replacing the Automatic Lubricator
1242
A new automatic lubricator can be ordered from NORD by

1200 NEMA or IEC Input Cylinder specifying the appropriate Part Number from the table at
1242 Swivel Fitting (P/N) 22006359) the bottom of Page 1 of this manual. Reference Figure 2 and
1243 Extension* follow the steps below to replace the automatic lubricator.
1297 Screw Plug
1298 Seal Ring* 1. Loosen and remove the M8x16 socket head cap screws
1299 Grease Drain Cup (P/N 2830100) (1251) holding the protective cover (1252) in place.
1311 Bearing
2. Unscrew the automatic lubricator (1250-1) from the
* Supplied on certain input assembly sizes as needed. bearing cover area of the NEMA or IEC input cylinder.
Remove the screw plug to install either the grease drain 3. Install the new automatic lubricator and activate per the
cup or the swivel fitting with the grease drain cup. instructions on page 2.
4. Re-install the protective cover (1252) and the assembly
screws (1251).
5. Note the activation date of the newly installed automatic
lubricator

NEMA OR IEC INPUT ADAPTER
WITH GREASE FITTING
Application Service Instructions

NORD gear units listed in the table below that are supplied
with a NEMA 250TC or IEC 160 and larger input adapter, may WARNING
be supplied with an external grease fitting. The grease fit-
ting allows the user to service the outboard bearing of the • While working on the gear drive system, make sure
reducer’s input assembly the power from the prime mover is isolated or secured
on “lock-out” to prevent accidental start-up and to
safeguard against injury!
Helical Inline SK62, SK72, SK73, SK82, SK83, SK92,
SK93, SK102 and SK103 • Surfaces of motors and gear units may become hot
during operation or shortly after start-up. In some
Parallel-Shaft SK6282, SK7282, SK7382, SK8282, instances additional protection against accidental
CLINCHER™ SK8382, SK9282, SK9382, SK10282, contact may be necessary. Use caution to avoid burns or
SK10382, SK11282, SK11382 & serious injury!
SK12382
90.1 Series SK9072.1, SK9082.1, SK9086.1,
Helical-Bevel SK9092.1 & SK9096.1 1. It is best to re-grease the bearing within a short period
after the gear unit was operational because the old grease
will be more viscous and will flow easier.
The grease fitting is an option which must be specified upon
ordering, otherwise NORD will normally supply a PERMA
2. Ensure that the grease gun contains the right lubricant for
Automatic Lubricator (See User Manual U45250).
the bearing to be re-greased.
Factory Supplied Grease
3. Open the protective flip cover and clean the areas around
The bearing grease applied at the factory is as follows: the grease fitting to ensure that contaminants are not
introduced into the bearing cavity.
Brand Mobil Polyrex EP 2
4. Using a grease gun, apply 0.75 ounces (20-25 grams) of
Thickener Polyurea compatible bearing grease every 1,000 service hours.
NLGI Grade 2
Temperature Range 40°C to 120°C (-40°F to 250°F IMPORTANT NOTE
Re-greasing should be carried out while the bearing is still
warm from operation and/or while rotating (if it is safe).
IMPORTANT NOTE
It is the user’s responsibility to ensure that if replacement FLIP LID COVER GREASE ZERK AND
grease is used, that it is fully compatible with the factory EXTENSION
supplied grease.

SOLID INPUT SHAFT (W)
1. Solid Input Shaft (W) 3. Fitting drive elements onto the reducer solid shaft
The shaft will be inch or metric, depending on how the unit Solid input shaft extensions are provided with a drill and
was ordered. Measure and verify the shaft before mounting tap feature as indicated in Table 2. When installing drive
anything on the shaft. Below are the tolerances used for the elements such as coupling hubs, pulleys, sprockets, or gears,
solid shafts. NORD recommends using the threaded hole in the end of the
shaft, along with a suitable assembly device fitted into the
threaded hole.
Typical Assembly
Device
2. Solid shaft diameter tolerance

Table 2: Solid Input Shaft End - Threaded Holes
Reducer input shaft extensions have a diameter tolerance as Above To & Tap size & Depth
specified in Table 1. Including
Table 1: Solid Shaft Diameter Tolerance
0.375 0.500 10-24 x 0.43 in
Above To & Tolerance 0.500 0.875 1/4-20 x 0.59 in
Including 0.875 0.938 5/16-18 x 0.71 in
0.938 1.100 3/8-16 x 0.87 in
0.375 1.750 +0.0000 / -0.0005 1.100 1.300 1/2-13 x 1.10 in
1.750 2.750 +0.0000 / -0.0010 1.300 1.875 5/8-11 x 1.42 in
Above To & Tolerance 1.875 2.750 3/4-10 x 1.73 in
ISO 286-2
Including Above To & Tap Size & Depth
ø (mm) ø (mm) (mm) Fit Class Including
10 18 +0.012 / +0.001 k6 ø (mm) ø (mm) (mm)
18 30 +0.015 / +0.002 k6 10 13 M4 x 10 mm
30 50 +0.018 / +0.002 k6 13 16 M5 x 12.5 mm
50 70 +0.030 / +0.011 m6 16 21 M6 x 16 mm
21 24 M8 x 19 mm
24 30 M10 x 22 mm
30 38 M12 x 28 mm
38 50 M16 x 36 mm
50 70 M20 x 42 mm
NOTICE
DO NOT DRIVE or HAMMER the coupling hub, pulley,
sprocket, or gear into place. An endwise blow to the
reducer shaft can generate damaging axial forces and
cause damage to the reducer housing, bearings or internal
components.
WARNING
To avoid serious injury the user must provide suitable
safety guards for all rotating shafts and shaft compo-
nents such as couplings, chain drives, belt drives, etc. All
guarding must adhere to local regulations and safety
standards.

4. Installing interference-fit hubs to the reducer shaft Parallel (or offset) alignment
Prior to installing any interference-fit hubs to the reducer Mount a dial indicator to one coupIing hub, and rotate this
shaft, consult with the manufacturer to determine proper hub, sweeping the outside diameter of the other hub. The
assembly and fit. Interference-fits usually require heating the paraIIeI or offset misalignment is equal to one-half of the
coupling, sprocket or gear hub, per the manufacturer’s rec- total indicator reading. Another method is to rest a straight
ommendations. Coupling hub installation typically follows edge squarely on the outside diameter of the hubs at 90°
ANSI/AGMA 9002-A86. Always make sure the reducer shaft intervals and measure any gaps with feeler gauges. The maxi-
seals are protected from the heat source. Apply uniform heat mum gap measurement is the paraIIeI or offset misalignment.
to the drive element hub to prevent distortion. NORD does
not recommend heating the drive element hub beyond 212°F Check alignment
to 275°F (100°C to 135° C). After both angular and paraIIeI alignments are within speci-
fied Iimits, tighten aII foundation boIts securely and re-check
critical aIignment. If any of the specified Iimits for aIignment
WARNING are exceeded, realign the coupIing.
When using heat to mount a drive element hub, do not 6. Installing sheaves (pulleys), sprockets and gears
use open flame in a combustible atmosphere or near
flammable materials. Use suitable protection to avoid To avoid unnecessary bearing loads and additional shaft de-
burns or serious injury. flection, mount all power take-off devices (sprockets, pulleys,
gears, etc.) so that the applied load center is as close to the
gear housing as possible, as shown in Figure 2.
IMPORTANT NOTE
Figure 2: Pully or Sprocket Mounting
the reducer is sized so that the shaft and bearings have
adequate capacity. To avoid unnecessary bearing loads
and additional shaft deflection, mount all power take-off
center is as close to the gear housing as possible and check
component alignment and tension of any belts or chains Sprocket Hub
per the manufacturer’s recommendation. Do not over Sprocket
tighten the belts or chains.
Align the driver sheave or sprocket with the driven sheave

5. Coupling installation
or sprocket by placing a straight-edge length-wise across
The performance and life of any coupling depends upon how the face of the sheaves or sprockets. AIignment of bushed
well it is installed. Coupling hubs are typically mounted flush sheaves and sprockets should be checked only after bushings
with the shaft ends, unless specifically ordered for overhung have been tightened. Check horizontal shaft alignment by
mounting. Shaft couplings should be instaIIed according to placing one leg of a square or a level vertically against the
the coupling manufacturer’s recommendations for gap, an- face of the sheave or sprocket.
gular and paraIIeI aIignment. To help obtain critical shaft
alignment coupling hubs may be installed to the machine Always check component alignment and tension any belts or
shafts prior to final shimming or tightening of the founda- chains per the manufacturer’s recommendation. The ideal
tion bolts. Proper coupling alignment aIIows for thermaI and belt or chain tension allows proper wrap of the driver and
mechanicaI shaft movement during operation and ensures driven wheels, while maintaining the lowest possible tension
that only torque (no radial load) is transmitted between the of the belts or chain, so that no slipping occurs under load
mating shafts. conditions. Check belt or chain tension frequently over the
first 24 to 48 hours of operation.
Coupling gap and angular alignment
The shaft gap must be sufficient to accommodate any antici- IMPORTANT NOTE
pated thermal or mechanicaI axiaI movement. When setting
the coupling gap, insert a spacer or shim stock equal to the When using external chain or belt drives, make sure
required spacing or gap between the coupIing hub faces. the reducer is sized so that the shaft and bearings have
Measure the clearance using feeler gauges at 90-degree inadequate capacity. To avoid unnecessary bearing loads
tervals, to verify the angular alignment. and additional shaft deflection, mount all power take-off
center is as close the gear housing as possible and check
component alignment and tension of any belts or chains
per the manufacturer’s recommendation. Do not over
tension the belts or chains.

7. Service Guidelines for W-Shaft Input with Grease Fitting

On some solid shaft input (Type W) gear units, the outer roll-
er bearing needs to be re-greased at regular service inter-
vals. This is necessary for double-stage gearboxes sizes SK62
or SK6282 and larger, and triple-stage gearboxes from size
SK73, SK7382 or SK9072.1 and larger.
To lubricate the bearing of the input shaft, approximately

0.75 to 1.0 ounces (20-25 grams) grease should be added by
the grease fitting approximately after every 2,500 hours of
service or at least every 6 months. The W-shaft input is factory
assembled with the proper amount and type of grease. The
type of grease supplied depends upon the type of oil speci-
fied at time of order.
Bearing Grease Options

Reducer Oil Type NLGI Grade Grease Thickener Grease Base Oil Ambient Temperature Range Manufacturer Brand/Type
MIN-EP NLGI 2 Li-Complex MIN -30 to 60ºC (-22 to 140ºF) Mobil Grease XHP222
PAO NLGI 2 Li-Complex PAO -40 to 80ºC (-40 to 176ºF) Mobil / Mobilith SHC 220
FG or FG-PAO NLGI 2 Polyurea FG-PAO -30 to 80ºC (-22 to 176ºF) Mobil SHC Polyrex 222
NOTICE
Grease compatibility depends upon the type of thickener or soap complex used, the base oil type suspended within the
thickener, and the type of additives used. The user should check with the lubrication supplier before making substitutions
in brand and type in order to assure compatibility and to avoid causing damage to the extended bearing.

W-Type Input Parts List for UNICASE Gearboxes
SK 02 - SK 52
SK 03 - SK 63
SK 0182NB - SK 6382 SK 62 - SK 72
SK 73 - SK 93
SK 02040 - SK 42125
SK 13050 - SK 43125 SK 6282 - SK 7282 64 Circlip
SK 7382 - SK 9382 66 Key
SK 9012.1 - SK 9052.1 67 Shaft Seal
SK 9013.1 - SK 9053.1 SK 9072.1 68 Washer
69 Hexagon Screw
70 Circlip
71 Input Shaft Bearing
74 Ball Bearing
75 Input Shaft Bearing
76 Washer
77 Hexagon Screw
78 Key
79 Oil Flinger
80 Bearing Cover
81 Circlip
82 Shim
83 Input Shaft, Plain
84 Input Shaft, Gearcut
85 Drain Plug
86 Seal
87 Input Bearing Housing
88 Shaft Seal (Oil Flinger)
139 Shim
SK 82 - SK 102
SK 103
SK 8282 - SK 9282
SK 9082.1 - SK 9092.1 SK 10282 - SK 12382

W-Type Inputs for Parts List for Nordbloc / 92 Bevel Gearboxes
SK172 - SK673
SK92072 - SK92372
13 Pinion Shaft
14 InputShaft
38 IEC Adapter
57 Bearing
58 Bearing
62 Oil Flinger
70 Shaft Seal
71 Shaft Seal
160 Snap Ring
161 Key
162 Key
163 Shim
164 Snap Ring
165 Set Screw
166 Snap Ring
167 Snap Ring
168 Snap Ring
SK772 - SK973
SK92672 - SK92772

MOTOR MOUNT PLATFORM (MK)
Motor Mount Platform (MK)
For proper installation of the belt drive, consult the manufac-

turer. NORD MK motor mounts are adjustable in two ways. YOKE
Slotted holes are provided at the input cylinder for the ini- (FINE ADJUSTMENT)
tial height adjustment. There are two fine adjustments at
the yoke to increase/decrease tension. Two spanner head
wrenches will be needed to tighten/loosen the fine adjust-
ments. The four bolts holding the motor platform to the
input cylinder must be loosened in order to use the fine
adjustments.
BOLTS (4) SLOTTED HOLES (4)
The motor mounting platform has tapped holes to accept the
foot pattern of the standard footed NEMA or IEC motor. All
MK mounting input shaft diameters are metric.
Align the sheaves or sprockets square and paraIIeI by plac-

ing a straight edge across their faces. Alignment of bushed CAUTION
sheaves and sprockets should be checked after bushings have
been tightened. Check horizontal shaft alignment by placing NORD Gear does not furnish the safety guards for the belt
a IeveI vertically against the face of the sheave or sprocket. drive. It is the responsibility of the customer to install a
Adjust beIt or chain tension per the manufacturer’s specified safety guard to conform to OSHA standards.
procedure. After a period of operation, recheck alignment
and adjust as required.
IMPORTANT NOTE
the reducer is sized so that the shaft and bearings
have adequate capacity. To avoid unnecessary bearing
loads and additional shaft deflection, mount all power
take-off devices (sprockets, pulleys, etc.) so that the
applied load center is as close to the gear housing as
possible and check component alignment and tension
of any belts or chains per the manufacturer’s recommen-
dation. Do not over tighten the belts or chains.
In-Line Unit Clincher™ Unit
Bevel Unit Worm Unit

SUGAR SCOOP
Sugar Scoop
NOTICE
DO NOT DRIVE or HAMMER coupling hubs into place. An end-
wise blow to the reducer or motor shaft can generate damaging
axial forces and cause damage to the reducer or motor housing,
bearings, or internal components.
4. Let the coupling cool down before mounting the spider

into the jaws. The spider should not be under axial com-
Each scoop bracket includes the coupling for the motor and pression when installed.
the coupling guard.
5. Place the motor onto the scoop and engage the couplings
• NORD’s standard supplied coupling is the jaw-type together. The scoop has slotted holes to help accommo-
coupling with elastomeric spider element. date axial alignment. Secure the motor to the scoop bracket
but do not completely tighten the fasteners.
• The reducer-side (driven) coupling hub is mounted by
NORD.
• The motor-side (driver) coupling hub must be mounted IMPORTANT NOTE
by the party responsible for supplying or mounting the
motor. Before tightening the motor to the scoop bracket, the
alignment of the coupling must be checked. Shimming
• The supplied coupling guard must be mounted after cou- of the motor feet may be needed to properly align the
pling installation. couplings. Careful coupling alignment extends the life of
not only the coupling but all the components of the drive
Coupling Mounting Instructions train.
1. Make sure that the motor shaft is clean and free of burrs
or defects. 6. Check the parallel alignment by placing a straight edge
or level across the two coupling hubs, and measure the
2. Check the motor shaft, coupling hub bores, key and key maximum offset at various points around the circumference
seat dimensions to make sure they are the proper dimen- of the coupling, without rotating the coupling. The
sions. maximum parallel alignment should not exceed 0.015
inches (4 mm).
3. Mount the coupling onto the motor by placing the cou-
pling so that the inside face is flush with the end of the 7. Check the angular alignment of the coupling without
motor shaft and tightening the set screws to hold it in rotating the hubs. The maximum angular displacement
place (Figure 1). should not exceed 1.0°.
8. After both angular and parallel alignment is within

specified limits, tighten all motor mounting hardware to
the appropriate torque specification.
9. Re-check the critical alignment and repeat steps 6 and 7 if

needed.
Figure 1. Place coupling flush with end of 10. Mount the coupling guard to the scoop.
motor shaft and tighten setscrew.
CAUTION
IMPORTANT NOTE It is the customer responsibility to properly guard the ro-
tating shaft and coupling connection and make sure the
Heating the coupling hub slightly, up to 176°F (80°C) will system meets all local safety regulations.
help facilitate installation onto the motor shaft.
IMPORTANT NOTE
WARNING After a period of operation, it is suggested that the sys-
tem be checked to make sure coupling alignment is being
Wear appropriate safety gloves to handle the heated cou- maintained.
pling hubs to avoid serious burns or injury.

TOUCH-UP KIT
Items included in the touch-up kit 2. Prime Applicator Tip

I. No Rinse Alodine® Touch-N-Prep pen.
II. Color matched sealer pen
IMPORTANT NOTE
• Always wear Personal Protective Equipment (PPE),
including gloves and safety glasses with side shields.
• When opening individual pens, pull safety caps straight
out from pen. Do not twist or torque the cap to avoid
damaging the applicator assembly. To activate, hold the Touch-N-Prep® pen upright and pop off
the cap. Do not twist or turn to remove the cap, since this
• Do not use fingers to prime the applicator tip. Priming may result in the pen leaking. Hold the pen tip down onto a
takes 15-30 seconds. clean surface to begin the flow of solution to the tip.
• Make sure the surface is clean and dry.
3. Application
IMPORTANT NOTE
I. Metal temperature must be above 50º F
II. Do not excessively use abrasive pad while removing
surface oxidation. Oxidation only needs to be
removed from areas with exposed aluminum.
III. Use enough product to wet surface but avoid pooling.
IV. Do not rinse or wipe Alodine coating before the
product is allowed to dry. Press the pen tip down on the surface until solution fills the
V. Allow to air dry or use a blow dryer. Do not use a heat pen tip. Apply the Alodine® 871™ solution to the metal
gun. Maximum drying temperature is 140ºF. surface with firm, smooth, even strokes, covering all of the
edges. Overlap each stroke and allow to dry.
VI. Dry color will appear opaque.
Part I: Allodine® 871 Touch-N-Prep® Pen Instructions

Touch-N-Prep® pens are designed for easy and safe repair of
clean, bare, or previously painted aluminum surfaces. It is a
non-rinse, dry-in-place application that can be applied using
the following steps:
1. Surface Preperation
Frequent short jabs to re wet the application rip are preferred

to maintain constant coating weights and avoid over-wetting
the felt tip.
4. Re-Application
Before applying the coating, the treated surface must

be cleaned using the following process:
• If the scratch is more than 24 hours old use a moistened

abrasive pad to remove oxides from the surface of the
metal.
• Wipe substrate with a damp lint-free cloth to ensure
complete removal of soils and dislodged oxides Within 5 minutes of the first coat, apply a second coat at a
generated from the previous step. 90º angle to the first coat with the same smooth, firm stroke.
• Allow Surface to dry before Touch-N-Prep® application.

TOUCH-UP KIT
Part II: Sealer Application

5. Prepare the Pen for Storage 1. Prime Applicator Tip
Always immediately replace the cap when not in use to avoid To activate, hold the pen upright and pop off the cap. Do not
evaporation and contamination. twist or turn to remove the cap, since this may result in the
pen leaking. Hold the pen tip down onto a clean surface to
6. Drying begin the flow of solution to the tip.
2. Application
Allow the Alodine Touch-N-Prep® coating to air dry thoroughly.

Press the pen tip down on the surface until solution fills the
pen tip. Apply the sealer pen solution to the metal surface
with firm, smooth, even strokes, covering all of the edges.
Overlap each stroke and allow to dry.
3. Prepare the Pen for Storage
Always immediately replace the cap when not in use to avoid

evaporation and contamination.
4. Drying
Allow the sealer pen coating to air dry thoroughly.

NORD GEAR CORPORATION
CONDITIONS OF SALE WWW.NORD.COM
1. CONTRACT 8. BUYER’S REFUSAL OF DELIVERY
Any contract between Nord Gear Corporation, hereinafter designated as Seller, and the Buyer is subject to the terms and conditions of sale hereinafter If Buyer refuses to accept delivery of any goods tendered for delivery, then Seller, without prejudice to Seller’s other lawful remedies, may either
set forth. Any deviation from such terms and conditions must be specifically set forth in writing and consented to by Seller. Accordingly, the Buyer store or cause such goods to be stored in a warehouse, for buyer’s account and at Buyer’s cost, risk and expense, or sell such goods (without notice)
and Seller acknowledge and agree that the terms and conditions set forth below and on the face hereof shall govern Buyer’s purchase of the to any purchases at public or private sale, and hold the Buyer liable for any difference between (a) the contract price of the goods, and (b) the price
goods described on the face hereof and shall take precedence over and represents the final agreement between Buyer and Seller, notwithstanding at which goods are resold less the costs and expense of such resale including brokerage commissions, or restocking charges.
any inconsistent, contradictory or other prior or further conditions contained in any oral or written request or purchase order issued by Buyer or 9. GOODS IN TRANSIT
any other document furnished by Buyer in connection with its purchase of the Goods, regardless of whether such document or documents are If prior to delivery or while the goods are in transit, Buyer or Seller becomes bankrupt or insolvent, or any petition in bankruptcy or for the reorganiza-
exchanged simultaneously with this Invoice or prior or subsequent thereto. Any additional or different terms or conditions which may appear in tion or for a state court receivership is filed against Buyer or Seller, as the case may be, then the other party hereto may forthwith terminate this
any communicaiton, oral or written, from Seller, its officers, employees, agents or representatives, are hereby expressly rejected and shall not be contract by giving written notice of such termination. Such termination shall not affect any claim for damages available to the Buyer, provided that
effective or binding upon the Seller, unless specifically hereafter agreed to in writing by Seller and no such additional or different terms or conditions if Buyer is then indebted to Seller, the amount of any such damage claim shall be abated to the extent that the indebtedness of Buyer to Seller, as
in any document submitted to Seller by Buyer shall become part of the contract between Buyer and Seller, unless such written acceptance by Seller actually paid in money, is abated by any order of judgement entered or any plan adopted in any bankruptcy, reorganization, receivership, or similar
specifically recognizes and assents to their inclusion. Any objection by Buyer to the terms and conditions hereof shall be ineffective unless Seller is proceeding. Such termination shall not prejudice the Seller’s rights to any amounts then due under the contract. If Buyer becomes bankrupt or
advised in writing thereof within two (2) days of the date of this Invoice. insolvent or any petition in bankruptcy or for reorganizing or if a state court receivership is filed against Buyer, then, at its option Seller may take
2. CONFIRMATION possession of any goods theretofore sold to Buyer, in connection with which the full purchase price has not been paid, analogous to the terns and
An order shall be deemed accepted only when duly confirmed by Seller, at Nord Gear Corporation’s home office in Waunakee, Wisconsin, and upon provisions set forth in Paragraphs 11 and 12 hereinafter.
such confirmation the order shall become a contract binding upon the parties hereto, their successors and assigns. 10. DELIVERY
3. PRICES (a) Any indicated dates of delivery are approximate only, but NORD Gear will attempt to meet them whenever possible. (b) NORD Gear will not
Prices shown are list prices and may be subject to applicable discounts. Unless otherwise agreed upon in writing, prices are FOB factory Waunakee, be liable for any penalty clausess contained in any specifications or order submitted unless agreed to in writing by an authorized officer of NORD
Wisconsin. Prices and discounts are subject to change without notice until order is accepted. Seller’s prices do not include cost of any inspection Gear Corporation. (c) Unless otherwise agreed, delivery of the goods to any carrier shall constitute delivery to the Buyer, and thereafter the risk of
permits required. loss or damage to the goods shall be upon the Buyer. (d) If the Buyer does not give delivery instructions to the Seller at least (10) days prior to
4. LIMITED WARRANTY the delivery date ex factory confirmed by the Seller, the Seller may deliver the goods to a carrier of its own choosing, at Buyer’s cost and risk, or,
Seller hereby warrants that the goods sold hereunder shall be free from material defects in material and workmanship, if properly installed and used at Seller’s option, may store the goods on the pier or any warehouse, at Buyer’s cost and risk. Any purchase price in such event becomes due and
payable within ten (10) days of such storage.
under normal operating conditions, for a period of twelve (12) months from the date of installation or eighteen (18) months from date of shipment,
11. PAYMENT OF PURCHASE PRICE
whichever comes first (the “Warranty Period”). With respect to gears and housings only, the Warranty Period is extended to thirty-six (36) months
Time of payment is of the essence under the contract. Unless otherwise provided, terms of payment are 30 days net from the date of invoice
from the date of invoice or twenty-four (24) months from the date of installation, whichever comes first. The limited warranty shall not apply to any
with a 1% discount if paid within 10 days of date of invoice. Upon default in any of the terms of the contract, or failure to comply with any of the
components or parts which are subject to normal operational wear and tear, including, but not limited to, belts and traction discs. Should any goods
conditions thereof, or upon seizure of the property under execution or other legal process, or if the Buyer becomes bankrupt or insolvent, or any
fail to comply with the foregoing limited warranty, Buyer shall provide written notice to Seller of the claimed defect and all relevant details within
petition for reorganization or for a state court receivership is filed against Buyer, or if the Buyer makes any assignment for the benefit of it’s creditors
thirty (30) days of Buyer’s discovery of the claimed defect. Buyer shall return the allegedly defective goods to Seller at its facilities in Waunakee,
or otherwise sells, encumbers or disposes of the goods, or if for any other reason the Seller should deem itself insecure, the full amount of the
Wisconsin or to such other location within the USA as may be designated by Seller in its sole discretion, with all shipping and transportation charges purchase price then remaining unpaid shall at once become due and payable at the option of the Seller.
prepaid by Buyer. Seller shall then examine the returned goods to determine if the claimed defect is covered by the limited warranty. If the claimed 12. BUYER’S DEFAULT
defect is covered by the limited warranty, Buyer’s sole and exclusive remedy shall be to have Seller repair or replace, at Seller’s option, the defective Upon the Buyer’s default, the Seller may dispose of the merchandise in any manner that it deems fit and, if it desires to resell same, may do so at
goods or components in accordance with the terms of this limited warranty. Seller shall have a commercially reasonable time to make such repairs private or public sale, with or without notice, and with or without the property being at the place of sale, subject, however, to applicable laws. The
or replacements and may use new or reconditioned components. Any repair or replacement shall not extend the Warranty Period unless otherwise Seller or its assigns shall have the right to bid at such sale and may become the purchaser of the property. The proceeds of the sale shall first be
agreed by Seller. Buyer shall pay all shipping costs and any costs of removal and re-installation of goods or components. applied to the expenses incurred in retaking, repairing, storing and selling the goods, reasonable attorney’s fees included, and then shall be applied
The foregoing limited warranty shall not apply with respect to any goods or components (i) which are not installed, used, operated, serviced or to the payment of the balance due under the contract. Any surplus amount shall be paid to the Buyer. If a deficiency results after the resale, the
maintained in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions or which are otherwise not properly installed, used, operated, serviced or maintained, or Buyer agrees to pay such forthwith, together with reasonable attorney’s fees, for the recovery of the goods incurred by the Seller. If upon the
(ii) which are misused, neglected, damaged, altered, repaired, reconfigured or incorrectly wired. Seller makes no representations as to the specifica- Buyer’s default, the Seller elects not to resell any goods which it may repossess, then the cost of repossession, including reasonable attorney’s fees,
tions, capacity or performance of the goods sold hereunder, except as may be specifically set forth in the invoice’s written specifications, and any shall forthwith be due and payable from Buyer to Seller. Buyer agrees to pay all reasonable costs and reasonable attorneys’ fees incurred by Seller
such representations are expressly conditioned upon the accuracy and completeness of the data and information furnished by the buyer and upon in enforcing Seller’s rights against Buyer, including Seller’s right to payment of the purchase price of the goods and Buyer’s payment of all other
the goods being properly installed, used, serviced and maintained by Buyer. Any description or model of the goods is for identification or illustrative amounts owing to Seller required under this Invoice and Conditions of Sale.
purposes only and shall not be deemed to create any warranty, express or implied. 13. SECURITY INTEREST AND TITLE
THE FOREGOING LIMITED WARRANTY SHALL EXTEND SOLELY TO BUYER AND NOT TO ANY OTHER PARTY. THE FOREGOING LIMITED WARRANTY In states and localities which are governed by the Uniform Commercial Code, this contract shall serve as security agreement, reserving in Seller a
IS IN LIEU OF ANY AND ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. SELLER HEREBY EXCLUDES AND DISCLAIMS ANY AND ALL security interest until full payment of purchase price. The provisions of the Uniform Commercial Code regarding security interest shall have preference
OTHER WARRANTIES, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR and apply if inconsistent with other terms of the conditions of sale. In states and localities where the Uniform Commercial Code does not apply,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IF BUYER SHALL FAIL TO PAY WHEN DUE ANY PORTION OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OR ANY OTHER PAYMENT title to the goods shall remain in the Seller or its assigns until full payment of the purchase price. Buyer agrees to execute forthwith any and all
REQUIRED FROM BUYER TO SELLER UNDER THIS CONTRACT, ALL WARRANTIES AND REMEDIES SET FORTH HEREIN SHALL BE DEEMED NULL AND documents in such a way and form as Seller may need for filing or recording the security interest under the Uniform Commercial Code with the proper
VOID, AB INITIO. THE PARTIES ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY UNDER THE FOREGOING LIMITED WARRANTY SHALL registers or offices, or for filing or recording the conditional sales contract.
NOT HAVE FAILED OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE (AS THAT TERM IS USED IN THE UNIFORM COMMERCIAL CODE) PROVIDED THAT SELLER REMAINS 14. SALES AND USE TAX
WILLING TO REPAIR OR REPLACE DEFECTIVE GOODS WITHIN A COMMERCIALLY REASONABLE TIME. BUYER SPECIFICALLY ACKNOWLEDGES AND Buyer agrees to bear and pay any sales or use tax in connection with the purchase herein, and to hold the Seller harmless from payment. At the
AGREES THAT THE PRICE CHARGED BY SELLER FOR THE GOODS IS BASED UPON THE LIMITATIONS OF SELLER’S WARRANTY OBLIGATIONS AND option the Seller, Buyer shall give evidence of payment or of exemption certificate.
OTHER LIABILITIES AS SET FORTH HEREIN. 15. INSURANCE
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY OTHER PROVISION HEREOF, IN NO EVENT SHALL SELLER BE LIABLE TO BUYER OR TO ANY OTHER The Buyer shall keep the goods insured against damage by fire, water or other casualty as required by Seller, with a company acceptable to Seller,
PARTY FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, LOST PROFITS, OR FOR ANY LOSSES, CLAIMS OR DAMAGES RELAT- with loss payable to Seller for the total purchase price until the Seller is fully paid. Seller, if it so elects, may place said insurance at Buyer’s expense;
ING TO OR ARISING FROM THE USE OR OPERATION OF THE GOODS, AND IN NO EVENT SHALL ANY CLAIM OR RECOVERY OF ANY KIND EXCEED THE Seller may cancel such insurance at any time and without notice and may receive the return premium, if any.
PURCHASE PRICE OF THE GOODS IDENTIFIED IN THE RELATED INVOICE. 16. MODIFICATION BY SELLER
5. SHORTAGE AND NONCONFORMITY Any contract may be assigned or transferred by the Seller, or the time for the making of any payment due by Buyer may be extended by Seller
Any claim of shortage or that the goods do not conform with the specifications of the order or model must be made in writing within ten (10) days without derogation of any of the rights of the Seller or its assigns. Waiver by any party of any default shall not be deemed a waiver of any
after delivery of the goods (as to which such claim is made) to Buyer or its nominees, but in no event shall the claim be later than within the time subsequent default.
limit provided by the carrier or insurance company, otherwise such claim shall be deemed waived. Buyer may not return any goods claimed to be in 17. RETURNED GOODS
non-conformity without Seller’s prior written authorization. Goods returned without permission will not be accepted, including for credit, and will be No goods will be accepted for return unless authorized in writing by Seller. In all cases, transportation and restocking charges will be borne by Buyer.
returned to Buyer, F.O.B. Sellter’s plant. Any claim based on the receipt of damaged Goods must be filed with the carrier which delivered the goods. 18. PACKING
The samples, measurements, dimensions and weights contained in the Seller’s catalogs, sales manuals, photographs and drawings constitute only The Buyer will be charged for export packaging or other special packing desired. Cost for cartage to ship or transfer express will be added to the
an approximate guide. The Seller reserves the right to make any change which the Seller, in its absolute discretion, considers necessary. While the invoice. No credit will be allowed if no packing is required.
19. CHANGES/CANCELLATION
goods will be delivered principally according to specifications or standards or quantities agreed upon, insignificant deviations or insignificant changes
NORD Gear will not accept changes in specifications to a confirmed order unless such changes are requested in writing and confirmed back in writing.
in construction are permissible. The same applies to partial deliveries, In the event that Buyer has a verified claim of shortage or nonconformity
In addition, the purchaser must to agree to any additional charges that may arise from the change. Placing orders on hold or cancellation of orders
of the goods to the specifications of the order or the model, and if such claim has been submitted within the required time limit as set forth above,
require Seller’s written approval, and are subject to cancellation and/or restocking charges.
the Seller shall, at its own expense, make up for the shortage of the goods, or replace or repair the goods, as the case may be, but in no event
20. BUYER’S RESPONSIBILITY AS TO MAINTENANCE
shall Seller be or become liable to Buyer or to any other person or persons for any loss in damage, direct or indirect, arising out of or caused by
Buyer shall use and shall require its employees and agents to use all safety devices and guards and shall maintain the same in proper working order.
such incidents or for the loss of profits, business or good will. The liability of the Seller to Buyer, if any hereunder, for breach of warranty, contract,
Buyer shall use and require its employees and agents to use safe operation procedures in operating the equipment and shall further obey and have
negligence or otherwise, shall in no event exceed the amount of the purchase price of the goods sold with respect to which any damages are claimed. its employees and agents obey safety instructions given by Seller. If Buyer fails to meet the obligations herein, Buyer agrees to defend, indemnify
Shipping dates are estimates unless parties expressly agree on time of the essence. and save Seller harmless from any liability or obligation with regard to any personal injuries or property damages directly or indirectly connected
6. FORCE MAJEURE with the operation of the equipment. Buyer further agrees to notify Seller promptly and in any event not later than ten (10) days after notice or
The obligation of the Seller shall be modified or excused, as the case may be, for reasons of Acts of God, war, governmental law regulations, strikes knowledge of any accident or malfunction involving Seller’s equipment which has caused personal injury or property damages and to cooperate fully
or lock-outs, fire, breakdown of machinery, whether in its own business enterprise, or if for any other cause beyond Seller’s control, the goods cannot with Seller in investigating and determining the causes of such accident and malfunction. In the event that Buyer fails to give such notice to Seller
be delivered or their delivery becomes delayed in whole or in part. In the above instances time for delivery shall be extended for the period of the or to cooperate with Seller, Buyer shall be obligated to defend, indemnify and save Seller harmless from any such claims arising from such accident.
delay caused, with the proviso, however, that either party may cancel in writing the undelivered portion of the order or contract if the delay exceeds 21. MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
six (6) months from the delivery date originally confirmed by Seller. In no event shall Seller become liable in the aforesaid instances to Buyer or (a) If for any reason a provision of a contract is legally invalid, then in such event the rest of the contract shall remain in full force and affect, except
any third party for consequential damages or business loss. that the parties shall try to replace such invalid provision closest to their original mutual intentions. (b) This Invoice and these Conditions of Sale
7. SHIPMENT AS UNIT constitute the entire agreement between the parties regarding the subject matter hereof and supercedes all prior agreements, understandings and
Each shipment by Seller shall be treated as a separate and distinct unit with respect, but only with respect to forwarding, terms of payment, and statements, whether oral or written, regarding such subject matter. No modification to, change in or departure from, the provisions of this Invoice
the making of claims by the Buyer: provided, however, that if the Buyer defaults in the payment of any obligation to Seller or any installments and Conditions of Sale shall be valid or binding on Seller, unless approved in writing by Seller. No course of dealing or usage of trade shall be
thereof, under any agreement between Buyer and Seller, or if Buyer refuses to accept any goods when tendered for delivery, the Seller may, on applicable unless expressly incorporated into this Invoice and Conditions of Sale. Any amendments to any contract or contracts between the parties
fifteen (15) days written notice to the Buyer, without prejudice to Seller’s other lawful remedies, either defer further performance until the defaulted shall be valid only upon the written consent of both parties.
payments are made in full, or make future deliveries for cash in advance only, or treat the entire contract or contracts with Buyer as breached by 22. NON ASSIGNMENT BY BUYER
the Buyer and pursue its remedies for breach. Contract or contracts may not be assigned by the Buyer without prior written consent of the Seller.
23. APPLICABLE LAW AND VENUE
All contracts and their interpretation are governed by the applicable, substantive laws of the State of Wisconsin. Any litigation brought by the Buyer
regarding this Invoice or goods purchased hereunder may only be brought in the Circuit Court for Dane County, Wisconsin.
NORD Gear Corporation

Toll Free in the United States: 888.314.6673 Nord Gear Company Terms 09/14
NORD GEAR LIMITED
TERMS & and
Terms CONDITIONS
ConditionsOF SALE
of Sale WWW.NORD.COM
1. CONTRACT 11. PAYMENT OF PURCHASE PRICE
Any contract between Nord Gear Limited, hereinafter designated as “Seller”, and the party or parties accepting Time of payment is of the essence under the contract. Upon default in any of the terms of the contract, or failure
these terms and conditions of sale and any agent, officer, servant, employee or subcontractor of such party or to comply with any of the conditions thereof, or upon seizure of the property under execution or other legal
parties, hereinafter designated as “Buyer”, is subject to the terms and conditions of sale hereinafter set forth. Any process, or if Buyer becomes bankrupt or insolvent, or any petitions for reorganization or for appointment of a
deviation from such terms and conditions must be specifically set forth in writing and consented to by Seller. receiver is filed against Buyer, or if Buyer makes any assignment for the benefit of its creditors or otherwise sells,
encumbers or disposes of the goods, or if for any other reason Seller should deem itself insecure, the full
2. CONFIRMATION amount of the purchase price then remaining unpaid shall at once become due and payable at the option of
An order shall be deemed accepted only when duly confirmed by Seller, at Nord Gear Limited’s home office in Seller. Interest on the delinquent payment from the due date thereof until paid shall be at a rate of two (2%)
Brampton, Ontario, and upon such confirmation the orders shall become a contract binding upon the parties hereto, percent per month.
their successors and assigns.
12. BUYER’S DEFAULT
3. PRICES Upon Buyer’s default, Seller may dispose of the merchandise in any manner that it deems fit and, if it desires to
Prices shown are list prices and may be subject to applicable discounts. Unless otherwise agreed upon in writing, resell same, may do so at private or public sale, with or without notice, and with or without the property being at
prices are FOB factory Brampton, Ontario. Prices and discounts are subject to change without notice until the order the place of sale, subject, however, to applicable laws. Seller or its assigns shall have the right to bid at such
is accepted. Seller’s prices do not include cost of any inspection permits required. sale and may become the purchaser of the property. The proceeds of the sale shall first be applied to the
expenses incurred in retaking, repairing, storing and selling the goods; reasonable solicitor’s fees included, and
4. LIMITED WARRANTY then shall be applied to the payment of the balance due under the contract. Any surplus amount shall be paid to
Seller warrants the goods sold hereunder to be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use Buyer. If a deficiency results after the sale, Buyer agrees to pay such forthwith, together with reasonable
and service not arising from misuse, negligence, or accident, including but not limited to the use, installation, and solicitor’s fees, for the recovery of the goods incurred by Seller. If upon Buyer’s default, Seller elects not to resell
transportation of the goods by Buyer, its agents, servants, employees, or by carriers. This warranty shall pertain to any goods which it may repossess, then the cost of repossession, including reasonable solicitor’s fees, shall
any part or parts of any goods to which Buyer or its assigns has within one year from date of delivery given written forthwith be due and payable from Buyer to Seller.
notice of claimed defects to Seller. Buyer shall be required to furnish Seller with details of such defects and this
warranty shall be effective as to such goods which Seller’s examination shall disclose to its satisfaction to have 13. SECURITY INTEREST AND TITLE
been defective and which at Seller’s option shall promptly thereafter be returned to Seller or its nominees. EXCEPT In provinces which are governed by a Personal Property Security Act, this contract shall serve as a security
FOR THE EXPRESS WARRANTIES SET FORTH ABOVE, SELLER HAS MADE NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS, agreement, reserving in Seller a security interest until full payment of the purchase price. The provisions of the
IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, AS TO THE GOODS SOLD HEREUNDER, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO Personal Property Security Act regarding security interest shall have preference and apply if inconsistent with
THEIR MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE. ANY DESCRIPTION OR MODEL other terms of the conditions of sale herein. In provinces where a Personal Property Security Act does not apply,
OF THE GOODS IS FOR IDENTIFICATION OR ILLUSTRATIVE PURPOSES ONLY AND SHALL NOT BE title to the goods shall remain in the Seller or its assigns until full payment of the purchase price. Buyer agrees to
DEEMED TO CREATE AN EXPRESS WARRANTY. The Buyer’s exclusive remedy for claims arising from defective execute forthwith any and all documents in such a way and form as Seller may need for filing or recording the
or nonconforming goods shall be limited to the repair or replacement thereof at the Seller’s sole option. THE security interest under a Personal Property Security Act with the proper registers or offices, or for filing or
SELLER SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE OR LIABLE FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF OR recording the Conditional Sales Contract herein.
IN CONNECTION WITH THE SALE, DELIVERY, USE, PERFORMANCE, OR SERVICE OF THE GOODS SOLD
UNDER THIS AGREEMENT. SELLER SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR FOR ANY CLAIM 14. SALES AND USE TAX
OR DEMAND AGAINST SELLER BY ANY PARTY. IN NO EVENT WILL SELLER BE LIABLE FOR SPECIAL, Seller’s prices do not include sales, use, excise or other taxes payable to any governmental authority in respect
INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, EVEN IF SELLER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF of the sale of Seller’s goods. Buyer shall pay, in addition to Seller’s price, the amount of any such taxes or shall
SUCH DAMAGES. SELLER’S AGGREGATE LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES UNDER THIS AGREEMENT, reimburse Seller for the amount thereof that Seller may be required to pay. At the option of Seller, Buyer shall
WHETHER ARISING FROM OR BASED UPON BREACH OF WARRANTY, BREACH OF CONTRACT, TORT OR give evidence of payment or of exemption certificate.
OTHER CAUSE OF ACTION, SHALL IN NO CASE EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE THAT BUYER PAYS FOR
THE PARTICULAR GOODS INVOLVED. Seller shall in no event be liable to any person or firm (including any 15. INSURANCE
assignee or Buyer) except Buyer and its successors. Unless specifically authorized by Seller in writing, Seller shall Buyer shall keep the goods insured against damage by fire, water or other casualty as required by Seller, with a
not become responsible for any repair work done by Buyer or any other party on any goods sold. Any costs of the company acceptable to Seller, with loss payable to Seller for the total purchase price until Seller is fully paid.
return of such goods to Seller shall be borne by Buyer. Goods sold but not manufactured by Seller are being Seller, if it so elects, may place said insurance at Buyer’s expense; Seller may cancel such insurance at any time
warranted as to defects in material and workmanship consistent with the limited warranty policy of the original and without notice and may receive the return premium, if any.
manufacturer of the goods and if there is not such a limited warranty policy, the warranty shall be limited to the
provisions of Article 4 herein. Standards for the operating characteristics of the gearboxes and the gear motors are 16. MODIFICATION BY SELLER
in conformity with Seller’s tests. THIS WARRANTY IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED Any contract may be assigned or transferred by Seller, or the time for the making of any payment due by Buyer
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY may be extended by Seller without derogation of any of the rights of Seller or its assigns. Waiver by any party of
PARTICULAR PURPOSE SELLER DOES NOT ASSUME, NOR DOES IT AUTHORIZE ANY PERSON TO any default shall not be deemed a waiver of any subsequent default.
ASSUME, ON ITS BEHALF, ANY OTHER OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY.
17. RETURNED GOODS
5. SHORTAGE AND NONCONFORMITY No goods will be accepted for return unless authorized in writing by Seller. In all cases, transportation and
Any claim of shortage or that the goods do not conform with the specifications of the order or model must be made restocking charges will be borne by Buyer.
in writing within ten (10) days after delivery of the goods (as to which such claim is made) to Buyer or its nominees,
but in no event shall the claim be later than within the time limit provided by the carrier or insurance company, 18. PACKING
otherwise such claim shall be deemed waived. The samples, measurements, dimensions and weights contained in Seller does not charge for standard packaging for domestic shipment. Buyer will be charged, however, for export
Seller’s catalogs, sales manuals, photographs and drawings constitute only an approximate guide. Seller reserves packaging or other special packing desired. Cost for cartage to ship or transfer express will be added to the
the right to make any changes which Seller, in its absolute discretion, considers necessary. While the goods will be invoice. No credit will be allowed if no packing is required.
delivered principally according to specifications of standards or quantities agreed upon, insignificant deviations or
insignificant changes in construction are permissible. The same applies to partial deliveries. In the event that Buyer 19. EXPORT ORDER
has a verified claim of shortage or nonconformity of the goods to the specifications of the order or the model, and if Export orders are to be accompanied by a confirmed irrevocable Letter of Credit in Seller’s favor, in Canadian
such claim has been submitted within the required time limit as set forth above, Seller shall, at its own expense, currency, with an accredited Canadian bank, subject to Seller’s draft, with shipping documents attached.
make up for the shortage of the goods, or replace or repair the goods, as the cause may be, but in no event shall
Seller be or become liable to Buyer or to any other person or persons for any loss in damage, direct or indirect, 20. CANCELLATION
arising out of or caused by such incidents or for the loss of profits, business of good will. Shipping dates are Placing orders on hold or cancellation of orders require Seller’s written approval, and are subject to cancellation
estimates unless parties expressly agree on time of the essence. and/or restocking charges.
6. FORCE MAJEURE 21. BUYER’S RESPONSIBILITY AS TO MAINTENANCE

The obligation of Seller shall be modified or excused, as the case may be, for reasons of Acts of God, war, Buyer shall use and shall require its employees and agents to use all safety devices and guards and shall
governmental law regulations, strikes or lock-outs, fire, breakdown of machinery, whether in its own business maintain the same in proper working order. Buyer shall use and require its employees and agents to use safe
enterprise, or if for any other cause beyond Seller’s control, the goods cannot be delivered or their delivery becomes operating procedures in operating the equipment and shall further obey and have its employees and agents
delayed in whole or in part. In the above instances time for delivery shall be extended for the period of the delay obey safety instructions given by Seller. If Buyer fails to meet the obligations herein, Buyer agrees to indemnify
caused, with the proviso, however, that either party may cancel in writing the undelivered portion of the order of and save Seller harmless from any liability or obligation with regard to any personal injuries or property damages
contract if the delay exceeds six (6) months from the delivery date originally confirmed by Seller. In no event shall directly or indirectly connected with the operation of the equipment. Buyer further agrees to notify Seller promptly
Seller become liable in the aforesaid instances to Buyer or any third party for consequential damages or business and in any event not later than ten (10) days after notice or knowledge of any accident or malfunction involving
loss. Seller’s equipment which has caused personal injury or property damages and to cooperate fully with Seller in
investigating and determining the causes of such accident and malfunction. In the event that Buyer fails to give
7. SHIPMENT AS UNIT such notice to Seller or to cooperate with Seller, Buyer shall be obligated to indemnify and save Seller harmless
Each shipment by Seller shall be treated as a separate and distinct unit with respect, but only with respect to from any such claims arising from such accident.
forwarding, terms of payment, and the making of claims by Buyer; provided, however, that if Buyer defaults in the
payment of any obligation to Seller or any installments thereof, under any agreement between Buyer and Seller, or 22. MISCELLANOUS PROVISIONS
if Buyer refuses to accept any goods when tendered for delivery, Seller may, on fifteen (15) days written notice to (A)If for any reason a provision of a contract is legally invalid, then in such event the rest of the contract shall
Buyer, without prejudice to Seller’s other lawful remedies, either defer further performance until the defaulted remain in full force and affect, except that the parties shall try to replace such invalid provision with a provision
payments are made in full, or make future deliveries for cash in advance only, or to treat the entire contract or closest to their original mutual intentions. (B) Any amendments to any contract or contracts require the consent
contracts with Buyer as breached by Buyer and pursue its remedies for breach. in writing by both parties. Headings in this document are for ease of reference only.
8. BUYER’S REFUSAL OF D ELIVERY 23. NON ASSIGNMENT BY BUYER

If Buyer refuses to accept delivery of any goods tendered for delivery, then Seller, without prejudice to Seller’s other Contract or contracts may not be assigned by Buyer without prior written consent of Seller.
lawful remedies, may either store or cause such goods to be stored in a warehouse, for Buyer’s account and at
Buyer’s cost, risk and expense, or sell such goods (without notice) to any purchaser at public or private sale, and 24. APPLICABLE LAW
hold Buyer liable for any difference between (A) the contract price of the goods, and (B) the price at which goods This agreement shall be governed by the laws of the Province of Ontario and the applicable laws of Canada.
are resold less the costs and expense of such resale including brokerage commissions, or restocking charges. Buyer and Seller agree that any judicial proceeding with respect to this agreement must be brought and
maintained in the City of Toronto, In the Province of Ontario.
9. GOODS IN TRANSIT
If prior to delivery or while the goods are in transit, Buyer or Seller becomes bankrupt or insolvent, or any petition in 25.
bankruptcy or for the reorganization or for appointment of a receiver is filed against Buyer or Seller, as the case may This instrument sets forth the entire understanding and agreement of the parties hereto in respect of the subject
be, then the other party hereto may forthwith terminate this contract by giving written notice of such termination. matter hereof, and all prior undertaking between the parties hereto, together with all representations and
Such termination shall not affect any claim for damages available to Buyer, to Seller, as actually paid in money, is obligations of such parties in respect of such subject matter, shall be superseded by and merged into this
abated by any order of judgment entered or any plan adopted in any bankruptcy, reorganization, receivership, or instrument.
similar proceeding. Such termination shall not prejudice Seller’s rights to any amounts then due under the contract.
If Buyer becomes bankrupt or insolvent or any petition in bankruptcy or for reorganization or if a state court 26.
receivership is filed against Buyer, then, at its option, Seller may take possession of any goods theretofore sold to The provisions of this agreement shall bind and ensure to the benefit of the parties hereto and their respective
Buyer, in connection with which the full purchase price has not been paid, analogous to the terms and provisions set heirs, executors, administrators, successors and (subject to any restrictions or assignment herein above set
forth in Paragraphs 11 and 12 hereinafter. forth) assigns, as the case may be.
10.DELIVERY 27.
(A)Unless otherwise agreed, delivery of the goods to any carrier shall constitute delivery to Buyer, and thereafter the The parties acknowledge that they have requested this document and all notices or other documents relating
risk of loss or damage to the goods shall be upon Buyer. (B) If Buyer does not give delivery instructions to Seller at thereto be drafted in the English language.
least ten (10) days prior to the delivery date ex factory confirmed by Seller, Seller may deliver the goods to a carrier
of its own choosing, at Buyer’s cost and risk, or, at Seller’s option may store the goods on the pier or on any Les parties reconnaissent qu’ils ont requis que ce contrat et tous les avis ou autres documents qui s’y rapportent
warehouse at Buyer’s cost and risk. Any purchase price in such event becomes due and payable within ten (10) soient rédiges en langue anglaise.
days of such storage.
“Terms and Conditions in French available upon request.”

For Increased Satisfaction
Global Availability
NORD 911
From Shanghai to Charlotte, and all points between, NORD reaches
Trouble? Just call 715-NORD-911 customers around the world. Deliveries, service, and product support are
(in Canada, 905-796-3606). Emergency close at hand, regardless of your location.
service is available 24 hours a day,
7 days a week. We’ll answer your call,
ship the parts, or build a unit and have
it shipped directly to you to provide what
you need, when you need it.
Online Tools
NORD offers comprehensive, searchable product

information online. The Internet makes it possible
for our customers to reach us anytime, anywhere —
365 days a year, 24 hours a day.
• Online order tracking

• Parts list and maintenance schedules
• Online drive selection software
• DXF scale drawing
Worldwide Standards
NORD products are designed and manufactured

based on the latest North American and global
standards.
342
Product
Overview
UNICASE ™ SPEED REDUCERS UNICASE ™ SPEED REDUCERS
HELICAL IN-LINE MINICASE™ RIGHT ANGLE WORM
- Foot or Flange Mount - Foot, Flange or Shaft Mount
- Torque up to 205,000 lb-in - Torque up to 3,540 lb-in
- Gear ratios – 1.82:1 to over 300,000:1 - Gear ratios – 5:1 to 500:1
NORDBLOC®.1 HELICAL IN-LINE FLEXBLOC™ WORM

- Foot or Flange Mount - Modular bolt-on options
- Torque up to 26,550 lb-in - Torque up to 4,683 lb-in
- Gear ratios – 1.88:1 to over 370:1 - Gear ratios – 5:1 to 3,000:1
PARALLEL HELICAL CLINCHER™ MAXXDRIVE™ LARGE INDUSTRIAL

- Shaft, Flange or Foot Mount GEAR UNITS PARALLEL HELICAL
- Torque up to 797,000 lb-in - Modular bolt-on options
- Gear ratios – 4.26:1 to over 300,000:1 - Torque up to 2,027,000 lb-in
- Gear ratios – 5:1 to 1,600:1
SCP SCREW CONVEYOR PACKAGE
MAXXDRIVE™ LARGE INDUSTRIAL
- Shaft, or Flange Mount
GEAR UNITS HELICAL-BEVEL
- Torque up to 53,100 lb-in - Modular bolt-on options
- Gear ratios – 4.32:1 to over 1500:1 - Torque up to 2,027,000 lb-in
- Gear ratios – 5:1 to 1,600:1
RIGHT ANGLE
HELICAL-BEVEL 2-STAGE NORDAC
- Foot, Flange or Shaft Mount AC VECTOR DRIVES
- Torque up to 5,840 lb-in
SK180E FAMILY
- Gear ratios – 4.1:1 to 70:1
- Distributed, simple speed control
- 380-480V, 3-phase to 3.0 hp
RIGHT ANGLE HELICAL-BEVEL
- 200-240V, 3-phase to 1.5 hp
- Foot, Flange or Shaft Mount
- 200-240V, 1-phase to 1.5 hp
- 100-120V, 1-phase to 0.75 hp
- Gear ratios – 8.04:1 to over 300,000:1
SK200E FAMILY
RIGHT ANGLE HELICAL-WORM
- Distributed, high performance
- Foot, Flange or Shaft Mount
- 380-480V, 3-phase to 30 hp
- 200-240V, 3-phase to 15 hp
- Gear ratios – 4.40:1 to over 300,000:1
- 200-240V, 1-phase to 1.5 hp
- 100-120V, 1-phase to 1 hp
HIGH PERFORMANCE
MOTORS & BRAKEMOTORS SK500E FAMILY
INVERTER/VECTOR DUTY - Compact, cabinet mount, high performance
- Standard or Energy Efficient - 380-480V, 3-phase, to 125 hp
- Integral, NEMA or Metric IEC - 200-240V, 3-phase, to 25 hp
- 1/6 to 250 hp - 200-240V, 1-phase, to 3 hp
- 100-120V, 1-phase, to 1.5 hp
NORD Gear Corporation NORD Gear Limited

National Customer Service Toll-Free: 888.314.6673 Toll-Free in Canada: 800.668.4378
www.nord.com [email protected] [email protected]
WEST MIDWEST EAST CANADA

Corona, CA (Los Angeles) Waunakee, WI (Madison) Charlotte, NC Brampton, ON (Toronto)
Phone: 951.393.6565 Phone: 608.849.7300 Phone: 980.215.7575 Phone: 905.796.3606 343
344
B 1091 – en
Motors
Operating and Assembly Instructions
345
Motors – Operating and Assembly Instructions
Safety and operating instructions for electric motors

(according to: Low Voltage Directive2006/95/EEC (as of 20/04/2016: 2014/35/EU
1 General The devices must be protected against impermissible loads.

During operation, devices may, depending on their protection class, Especially during transport and handling, components must not
have live, bare, moving or rotating parts or hot surfaces. be deformed and/or insulation distances must not be changed.
Unauthorised removal of covers, improper use, incorrect installation or Electrical components must not be mechanically damaged or
operation causes a risk of serious personal injury or material damage. destroyed (this may cause a health hazard!).
Further information can be found in this documentation. 5. Electrical Connection
All transportation, installation commissioning and maintenance work When working on live devices, the applicable national accident
must be carried out by qualified personnel (compliant with IEC 364 or. prevention regulations must be complied with (e.g. BGV A3,
CENELEC HD 384 or DIN VDE 0100 and IEC 664 or DIN VDE 0110 formerly VBG 4).
and national accident prevention regulations). The electrical installation must be implemented according to the
For the purposes of these basic safety instructions, qualified personnel applicable regulations (e.g. cable cross-section, fuses, earth
are persons who are familiar with the assembly, installation, lead connections). Further instructions can be found in the
commissioning and operation of this product and who have the relevant documentation.
qualifications for their work. Information regarding EMC-compliant installation – such as
2. Proper use in Europe shielding, earthing, location of filters and installation of cables –
The devices are components intended for installation in electrical can be found in the documentation for the devices. These
systems or machines. instructions must be complied with even with CE marked
devices. Compliance with the limiting values specified in the
When installed in machines, the devices must not be commissioned (i.e.
EMC legal regulations is the responsibility of the manufacturer
commencement of the proper use) until it has been ensured that the
of the system or machine.
machine meets the provisions of the EC Directive 2006/42/EEC
(Machinery Directive); EN 60204 must also be complied with. 6. Operation
Commissioning (i.e. implementation of proper use) is only permitted if Where necessary, systems in which the devices are installed
the EMC directive (2004/108/EEC) is complied with (as of must be equipped with additional monitoring and protective
equipment according to the applicable safety requirements, e.g.
20/04/2016: 2014/30/EU)).
legislation concerning technical equipment, accident prevention
Devices with a CE label meet the requirements of the Low Voltage
regulations, etc.
Directive 2006/95/EEC (as of 20/04/2016: 2014/35/EU). The stated
The parameterisation and configuration of the devices must be
harmonized standards for the devices are used in the declaration of
conformity. selected so that no hazards can occur.
All covers must be kept closed during operation.
Technical data and information for connection conditions can be found
on the rating plate and in the documentation, and must be complied 7. Maintenance and repairs
with. The following applies in particular for operation with frequency
The devices may only be used for safety functions which are described inverters:
and explicitly approved. After the devices are disconnected from the power supply, live
3. Transport, storage equipment components and power connections should not be
touched immediately, because of possible charged capacitors.
Information regarding transport, storage and correct handling must be
Observe the applicable information signs located on the device.
complied with.
Further information can be found in this documentation.
4. Installation
The installation and cooling of the equipment must be implemented
according to the regulations in the corresponding documentation.
These safety instructions must be kept in a safe place!
2 B 1091 en-2319
346
Documentation
Documentation
Title: B 1091
Order – No.: 6051302
Series: Asynchronous motors / Synchronous motors
• 1 and 3-phase asynchronous motors
SK 63*1)/*2) *3) up to SK 315*1)/*2) *3)
1) Power code: S, SA, SX, M, MA, MB, MX, L, LA, LB, LX, R, X, Y, A, W
- optionally supplemented with: H, P
2) Pole number labelling: 2, 4, 6, 8, …
3) further options
• 3-phase synchronous motors

SK 63*1)*2)/*3) *4) up to SK 132*1)*2)/*3) *4)
1) Winding version: T, F, …
2) Power number: 1 to 9
3) Pole number labelling: 4, 6, 8, …
4) further options
• Three-phase asynchronous motors

SK 63*1)/*2) 2D *3) up to SK 200*1)/*2) 2D *3)
1)
Power code: S, SA, SX, M, MA, MB, MX, L, LA, LB, LX, R, X, Y, A, W
2)
Pole number labelling: 2, 4, 6
3) Options
with ATEX labelling II 2D Ex tb IIIC T . . . °C Db
SK 63*1)/*2) 3D *3) up to SK 200*1)/*2) 3D *3)

1)
2)
3) Options
with ATEX labelling II 3D Ex tc IIIB T . . . °C Dc
SK 63*1)/*2) 2G *3) up to SK 200*1)/*2) 2G *3)

1)
2)
3) further options
with ATEX labelling II 2G Ex eb IIC T3 Gb
SK 63*1)/*2) 3G *3) up to SK 200*1)/*2) 3G *3)

1)
2)
3) further options
with ATEX labelling II 3G Ex ec IIC T3 Gc
B 1091 en-2319 3
347
Version list
Title, date Order number Comments
B 1091, 6051302 / 0215 -
January
2015
B 1091, 6051302 / 1016 • General corrections
March 2016 • Structural adjustments to document
December
2016
B 1091, 6051302 / 2417 • Technical supplements
June
2017
B 1091, 6051302 / 3517 • Technical supplements
August 2017
June 2018 • Update of EU/EC Declaration of Conformity 2D/3D
August 2018 • Section for operation with frequency inverter removed
• Section for special operating conditions, permissible surrounding
area supplemented
• Ignition protection type labelling and type plates updated
• Update of EU/EC Declaration of Conformity 2G/3G
Copyright notice
As an integral component of the device described here, this document must be provided to all
users in a suitable form.
Any editing or amendment or other utilisation of the document is prohibited.
Publisher
Getriebebau NORD GmbH & Co. KG
Getriebebau-Nord-Straße 1 • 22941 Bargteheide, Germany • http://www.nord.com/
Fon +49 (0) 45 32 / 289-0 • Fax +49 (0) 45 32 / 289-2253
Member of the NORD DRIVESYSTEMS Group
4 B 1091 en-2319
348
Publisher
B 1091 en-2319 5
349
Table of Contents
1 General ......................................................................................................................................................... 8
1.1 Safety and installation notes .............................................................................................................. 9
1.1.1 Explanation of labels used .................................................................................................... 9
1.1.2 List of safety and installation notes ..................................................................................... 10
1.2 Field of use ...................................................................................................................................... 11
1.3 Correct handling of electric motors................................................................................................... 12
1.3.1 Transport, storage .............................................................................................................. 12
1.3.2 Installation .......................................................................................................................... 13
1.3.3 Balancing, drive elements .................................................................................................. 13
1.3.4 Alignment ........................................................................................................................... 14
1.3.5 Output shafts ...................................................................................................................... 14
1.3.6 Electrical connection........................................................................................................... 15
1.3.7 Operation with frequency inverter ....................................................................................... 16
1.3.8 Checking the insulation resistance ..................................................................................... 17
1.3.9 Commissioning ................................................................................................................... 17
1.3.10 Disposal .............................................................................................................................. 18
2 Maintenance and servicing ...................................................................................................................... 19
2.1 Safety measures .............................................................................................................................. 19
2.2 Bearing replacement intervals .......................................................................................................... 20
2.3 Maintenance intervals ...................................................................................................................... 21
2.4 General overhaul.............................................................................................................................. 21
3 ATEX Explosion hazard areas .................................................................................................................. 22
3.1 Motors with increased ignition protection, type Ex eb ...................................................................... 22
3.1.1 Cable gland ........................................................................................................................ 23
3.1.2 Cable connections .............................................................................................................. 23
3.1.3 Terminal box cover seals .................................................................................................... 24
3.1.4 Motor position – special features for IM V3, IM V6 ............................................................. 24
3.1.5 Further operating conditions ............................................................................................... 25
3.1.6 Protective devices .............................................................................................................. 25
3.1.8 Repairs ............................................................................................................................... 27
3.1.9 Painting .............................................................................................................................. 27
3.1.10 Type plate for NORD Ex eb motors according to EN 60079 ............................................... 28
3.1.11 Applied standards ............................................................................................................... 28
3.2 Motors with ignition protection class Non Sparking Ex ec ................................................................ 29
3.2.1 Cable gland ........................................................................................................................ 30
3.2.2 Cable connections .............................................................................................................. 30
3.2.6 Protective devices .............................................................................................................. 32
3.2.7 Repairs ............................................................................................................................... 33
3.2.8 Painting .............................................................................................................................. 33
3.2.9 Type plate for NORD Ex ec motors according to EN 60079 ............................................... 34
3.2.10 Applied standards ............................................................................................................... 34
3.3 Motors for use in Zone 21 and Zone 22 according to EN 60079-0 and IEC 60079 .......................... 35
3.3.1 Commissioning information / Field of application................................................................ 36
3.3.3 Electrical Connection .......................................................................................................... 37
3.3.4 Cable and wiring glands ..................................................................................................... 37
3.3.5 Permissible ambient temperature range ............................................................................. 39
3.3.6 Painting .............................................................................................................................. 39
3.3.7 IEC-B14 motors .................................................................................................................. 39
3.3.10 Structure and method of use .............................................................................................. 40
3.3.11 Minimum cross section of bonding conductors ................................................................... 40
3.3.12 Maintenance ....................................................................................................................... 41
3.4 Options for motors for use in Zone 21 and Zone 22 ......................................................................... 42
6 B 1091 en-2319
350
Table of Contents
3.4.2 External fan ........................................................................................................................ 43
3.4.3 Second temperature sensor 2TF ........................................................................................ 44
3.4.4 Back stop ............................................................................................................................ 44
3.4.5 Brake .................................................................................................................................. 44
3.4.6 Overview of brake installation for NORD ATEX motors ...................................................... 45
3.4.7 NORD Ex motor type plate (Ex tb, EX tc) according to EN 60079 for operation with a
frequency inverter ............................................................................................................... 46
3.5 Explosion protected motors according to TP TC012/2011 for the Eurasian Economic Union .......... 47
3.5.1 Type plates / Labelling........................................................................................................ 47
3.5.2 Standards ........................................................................................................................... 48
3.5.3 Service life .......................................................................................................................... 48
3.5.4 Special operating conditions (X-labelling)........................................................................... 48
4 Synchronous motors – special information ........................................................................................... 49
4.1 Type designation .............................................................................................................................. 49
4.2 Connection ....................................................................................................................................... 49
4.3 Encoders .......................................................................................................................................... 50
4.4 Commissioning ................................................................................................................................ 50
4.5 Maintenance and servicing .............................................................................................................. 50
5 Replacement parts .................................................................................................................................... 51
6 Declarations of Conformity ...................................................................................................................... 52
B 1091 en-2319 7
351
1 General
These operating instructions must be read before NORD motors are transported, installed,
commissioned, serviced or repaired. All persons who are involved in these tasks must observe these
operating instructions. In order to prevent injury or damage, all of the safety information in these
operating instructions must be strictly observed.
The information and instructions in the instructions, safety and commissioning information which is
supplied, as well as all other instructions must be observed.
This is essential to prevent injury and damage.
The applicable national, local and plant-specific regulations and requirements and regulations must be
observed.
Technical details may vary for special designs and constructions. In case of doubt, we urgently
recommend that the manufacturer is contacted, giving details of the type designation and the
motor number.
Qualified personnel are persons who due to their training, experience and instruction, and their
knowledge of the relevant standards, accident prevention regulations and operating conditions are
authorised to carry out the necessary activities.
This also includes knowledge of first aid measures and the local emergency services.
It is assumed that the work for transport, assembly, installation, commissioning, maintenance and
repair will be performed by qualified staff.
In particular, the following must be observed:
• Technical data and information regarding permissible use, installation, connection, ambient and
operating conditions, which are contained in the catalogue, the order documents and other
documentation for the product.
• Local and plant-specific regulations and requirements
• Correct use of tools, lifting and transportation equipment
• Use of personal protective equipment
For reasons of clarity, the operating instructions do not contain detailed information about possible
versions and therefore do not consider all possible cases of installation, operation or servicing.
Because of this, these operating instruction essentially only contain the information which is necessary
for proper use by qualified personnel.
In order to prevent faults it is necessary that the prescribed service and inspection work is carried out
by appropriately qualified personnel.
• For the operation on an inverter, the planning guideline B1091-1 forms a part of these operating
instructions.
• The supplementary operating instructions must be observed if an external fan is present.
• For braking motors, the supplementary brake operating instructions must be observed..
If the operating instructions or the planning guide are lost for any reason, these documents must be
obtained from NORD.
8 B 1091 en-2319
352
1 General
1.1 Safety and installation notes

The devices are operating materials intended for use in industrial high voltage systems, and are
operated at voltages that could lead to severe injuries or death if they are touched.
The device and its accessories must only be used for the purpose which is intended by the
manufacturer. Unauthorised modifications and the use of spare parts and additional equipment which
has not been purchased from or recommended by the manufacturer of the device may cause fire,
electric shock and injury.
All of the associated covers and protective devices must be used.
Installation and other work may only be carried out by qualified electricians with strict adherence to the
operating instructions. Therefore keep these Operating Instructions at hand, together with all
supplementary instructions for any options which are used, and give them to each user.
Local regulations for the installation of electrical equipment and accident prevention must be complied
with.
1.1.1 Explanation of labels used
DANGER Indicates an immediate danger, which may result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a possibly dangerous situation, which may result in death or

WARNING serious injury.
Indicates a possibly dangerous situation, which may result in slight or

CAUTION minor injuries.
Indicates a possibly harmful situation, which may cause damage to the

NOTICE product or the environment.
Note Indicates hints for use and useful information.
B 1091 en-2319 9
353
1.1.2 List of safety and installation notes
DANGER! Electric shock

The motor is operated with a dangerous voltage. Touching certain conducting components (connection terminals
and supply cables) will cause electric shock with possibly fatal consequences.
Even when the motor is at a standstill (e.g. due to the electronic block of a connected frequency inverter or a
jammed drive unit) the connection terminals and supply cables may carry a dangerous voltage. A motor standstill
is not identical to electrical isolation from the mains.
Even if the drive unit has been disconnected from the mains, a connected motor may rotate and possibly
generate a dangerous voltage.
Installation and work must only be carried out when the motor is at a standstill and is disconnected (all phases
disconnected from the mains).
Follow the 5 Safety Rules (1. Switch off the power, 2. Secure against switching on, 3. Check for no voltage, 4.
Earthing and short circuiting, 5. Cover or fence off neighbouring live components).
WARNING Hazard due to heavy loads

The large weight of the motor must be taken into account during any transportation or installation work.
Incorrect handling may cause the motor to fall or swing without control and therefore cause severe, and possibly
fatal injuries due to impact, crushing and other physical injuries. In addition, severe damage to the motor and its
surroundings are possible.
Therefore:
– Do not stand under suspended loads
– Only use the attachment points provided
– Check that lifting equipment and lashings have and adequate load capacity and are undamaged
– Avoid hectic movements
– Use personal protective equipment
WARNING Injury due to movement

Under certain conditions (e.g. switching on the power supply, releasing a holding brake) the motor may start to
move. The machinery which it drives (press / chain hoist / roller / fan etc.) may then make an unexpected
movement. This may cause various injuries, including to third parties.
Before switching on, secure the danger area by warning and removing all persons from the danger area.
WARNING Hazard due to loose parts

Care must be taken that there are no loose parts on the motor. Otherwise, these may cause injury during
transportation and installation work, or when the motor in in operation.
Loose carrying or lifting eyes may cause the motor to fall during transportation.
Parallel keys on the motor shaft may be thrown out when the motor shaft rotates.
Fasten or remove loose parts and carrying or lifting eyes; secure or remove free parallel shaft keys on the motor
shaft(s).
10 B 1091 en-2319
354
1 General
CAUTION Danger of burns

The surface of the motor may heat up to temperatures in excess of 70°C.
Touching the motor may cause local burns to the affected parts of the body (hands, fingers, etc.).
To prevent such injuries, allow sufficient time for cooling down before starting work - the surface temperature
should be checked with suitable measuring equipment. In addition, keep sufficient distance from adjacent
components during installation, or install protection against contact.
1.2 Field of use

Use of the motors:
The motors may only be used for their intended purpose (to drive machinery).
The motors are constructed with at least protection class IP55 (for the protection class: see rating
plate). They may be installed in dusty or damp environments.
In principle the conditions of use and the ambient conditions determine the necessary protection class
and any other additional measures. For outdoor installation and vertical versions, e.g. V1 or V5 with
the shaft pointing downwards, Getriebebau NORD recommends the use of the double fan cover option
[RDD].
Motors must be protected against intensive sunlight, e.g. by the use of a protective cover. The
insulation is tropicalised.
Installation altitude: ≤ 1000 m
Ambient temperature: -20°C...+40°C
For standard motors an extended ambient temperature range from -20°C...+60°C is permissible.. In
this case, the rated power must be reduced to 82% of the value stated in the catalogue. If the
maximum ambient temperature is between +40°C and +60°C, the power output should be inversely
linearly interpolated between 100% and 82%.
The motor connection cables and the cable glands must be suitable for temperatures ≥ 90°C.
B 1091 en-2319 11
355
1.3 Correct handling of electric motors

All work must only be carried out with the power to the system switched off.
1.3.1 Transport, storage
WARNING Danger of falling

Incorrect handling during transport may cause the motor to fall or swing without control and therefore cause
severe, and possibly fatal injuries due to impact, crushing and other physical injuries. In addition, severe damage
to the motor and its surroundings are possible.
Therefore:
– Use all available carrying eyes on the motor during transport
– Do not attach any additional loads The lifting eyes are only designed for the weight of the motor
– Only use the intended carrying eyes or bolts for transporting attached machinery (e.g. gear unit
attachments)
– Sets of machinery must not be lifted by suspension from the individual machines.
To prevent damage to the motor, the motor must always be used with suitable lifting equipment. The
roller bearings should be replaced if the time from delivery to commissioning of the motor exceeds 4
years in good conditions (storage in dry, dust and vibration-free areas). This time is greatly reduced in
case of unfavourable conditions. If necessary, unprotected machined surfaces (flange surfaces, shaft
ends) must be treated with corrosion inhibitors. If necessary, the insulating resistance of the windings
must be checked ( 1.3.8 "Checking the insulation resistance").
Changes in comparison with normal operation (higher current consumption, higher temperatures or
vibrations, unusual noises or smells, triggering of monitoring devices, etc.) are indications that the
function is impaired. To prevent injury and damage, the responsible maintenance personnel must be
informed of these changes.
In case of doubt, switch off the motor as soon as the state of the plant permits.
12 B 1091 en-2319
356
1 General
1.3.2 Installation
• After installation, screwed-on lifting lugs must be tightened or removed.
• Smooth running: Precise alignment of the clutch and a well-balanced drive element (clutch, pulleys,
fan, etc.) are prerequisites for smooth vibration-free running.
• Complete balancing of the motor and the drive elements may be necessary.
• The top section of the terminal box and the position of the terminal box can be rotated by 4 x 90
degrees.
• Even if not required, on IEC B14 motors all four fixing screws, must be screwed into the flanged
bearing plate! The fixing screw threads must be inserted with a sealant, e.g. Loctite 242.
WARNING Electric shock

The maximum depth for screwing into the type plate is 2 x d. There is a danger that the motor windings may be
damaged if longer screws are used. This creates a danger of potential transfer to the housing and danger of
electric shock if touched.
• The motor must be inspected for damage before installation and commissioning. A damaged motor
must not be commissioned.
• Rotating shaft ends and unused shaft ends must be protected against contact. Unused parallel
shaft keys must be secured against being thrown out.
• The motor must be suitable for the installation location. (requirements prescribed by standards,
ambient conditions, installation altitude)
• Motor surfaces may become very hot during operation. Suitable protective measures must be
taken if there is a danger of contact or a hazard to the vicinity of the installation.
1.3.3 Balancing, drive elements

The fitting and removal of drive elements (clutch, pulley, gear wheel,…) must be performed with
suitable equipment. As standard the rotors are balanced with half key balancing. The appropriate
form of balancing must be observed if drive elements are installed on the motor shaft. Drive
elements must be balanced according to ISO 1940.
The generally required measures for protection against touching the drive elements must be observed.
If a motor is started without a drive element, the parallel key must be secured against being thrown
out. This also applies for any second shaft end. Alternatively, the parallel shaft key must be removed.
B 1091 en-2319 13
357
1.3.4 Alignment
In particular with direct coupling, the motor shafts and the driven machine must be axially and radially
aligned to each other. Incorrect alignment may result in damage to the bearings, excessive vibration
and breakage of the shaft.
1.3.5 Output shafts

The maximum permissible axial (FA) and radial forces (FR) for the A side end of the motor shaft can be
obtained from the table below. Getriebebau NORD should be consulted if the radial force (FR) is
applied at a distance which is greater than the length E/2.
Type FR [N] FA [N]
63 530 480
71 530 480
80 860 760
90 910 810
100 1300 1100
112 1950 1640
132 2790 2360
160 3500 3000
180 .X 3500 3000
180 5500 4000
200 .X 5500 4000
225 8000 5000
No axial (FA) and radial forces (FR) are permissible for the B side shaft end.
NOTICE! Attachments must not cause rubbing (danger of excessive temperatures and sparking) or
impair the necessary flow of cooling air.
14 B 1091 en-2319
358
1 General
1.3.6 Electrical connection

The connection cables must be passed through the cable glands in the terminal box. The terminal box
must be sealed against dust and water. The mains voltage and frequency must conform to the data on
the rating plate. ±5 % voltage or ±2 % frequency deviations are permissible without reduction of the
power. The connection and configuration of the jumpers must be made according to the circuit
diagram in the terminal box.
Please refer to the following table for the labelling of the auxiliary terminals
Auxiliary terminal designation

Additional equipment Labelling of auxiliary terminals Comments
New: EN 60034-8
Thermistor TP1 – TP2 Switch-off
1TP1 – 1TP2 Warning Winding 1
2TP1 – 2TP2 Switch-off Winding 1
3TP1 – 3TP2 Warning Winding 2
4TP1 – 4TP2 Switch-off Winding 2
Option: TF 5TP1 – 5TP2 Brake
1TB1 – 1TB2 Warning Winding 1
Bi-metal temperature sensor
2TB1 – 2TB2 Switch-off Winding 1
Normally closed
3TB1 – 3TB2 Warning Winding 2
Option: TW
4TB1 – 4TB2 Switch-off Winding 2
Bi-metal temperature sensor, 1TM1 – 1TM2 Warning Winding 1
normally open 2TM1 – 2TM2 Switch-off Winding 1
3TM1 – 3TM2 Warning Winding 2
4TM1 – 4TM2 Switch-off Winding 2
PT100 1R1 – 1R2 Winding 1 (Phase U)
2R1 – 2R2 Winding 1 (Phase V)
3R1 – 3R2 Winding 1 (Phase W)
KTY (+) 4R1 – 4R2 (-) Winding 1
Silicon temperature sensor (+) 5R1 – 5R2 (-) Winding 2
Standstill heating 1HE1 – 1HE2 Motor heater
Option: SH 2HE1 – 2HE2 Brake heater
Capacitor 1CA1 – 1CA2 with operating capacitor 1
Motor version: 2CA1 – 2CA2 with operating capacitor 2
EAR/EHB/EST 3CA1 – 3CA2 with starting capacitor 1
4CA1 – 4CA2 with starting capacitor 2
Direct current brake BD1 – BD2
Option: BRE...
Option: DBR… Brake1: BD1-BD2
Break2: BD3-BD4
B 1091 en-2319 15
359
1.3.7 Operation with frequency inverter

Type SK 63 ./. – SK 225 ./. three phase asynchronous motors are qualified for operation with link
circuit inverters according to DIN EN 60034-18-41 (2014).
Please also observe the operating instructions for the frequency inverter which is used.
The insulation system used by NORD consists of suitable varnished copper wire, phase insulation,
homogeneous impregnation and groove lining as insulation against earth, and in the standard version
is designed for the increased requirements for link circuit inverters.
The maximum permissible FI input voltage is 500 V +10%. Link circuit voltages in excess of 750 V DC
are not permissible. When the motor is warm due to operation, the peak voltages due to the system,
the inverter, the cable or the motor must not exceed the following values.
Permissible impulse voltages depending on voltage rise-time

Impulse voltage [V]
Voltage rise time [µs]
If the values are outside of the permissible range, du/dt or sine wave filters may be used (not the
additional voltage drop).
The cable lengths shown in the diagram are for guidance only and may deviate according to the
specific conditions.
For additional information for operation with a frequency inverter, especially with regard to information
about the maximum speed, thermal design and possible torques, please refer to the current NORD
motor catalogue M7000.
16 B 1091 en-2319
360
1 General
1.3.8 Checking the insulation resistance

Prior to initial commissioning of the motor after a long period of storage or standstill (approx. 6
months) the insulation resistance of the windings must be checked. During and immediately after the
measurements, the terminals have voltages which can be dangerous, and must not be touched.
Insulation resistance
The insulation resistance of new, cleaned, repaired windings against the housing and against each
other is > 200 MΩ.
Measurement
The insulation of the windings against the housing for operation voltages up to 400 V must be
measured with 500 V DC. For operating voltages up to 725 V the measurement must be made with
1000 V DC. The temperature of the windings should be 25°C ± 15°C.
Testing
If the minimum insulation resistance of the winding against earth is less than 50 MΩ, this may be due
to moisture. The windings must then be dried.
The insulation resistance may reduce after long periods of operation. As long as the measured value
does not fall below the calculated value for the critical insulation resistance of < 50 MΩ, operation of
the motor may continue. If the value is less than this, the cause must be established and if necessary
the windings or parts of the windings must be repaired, cleaned or dried.
1.3.9 Commissioning
Information Electromagnetic compatibility

NORD motors comply with the EU-Directive 2014/30/EU. Assembly or installation work must not cause
impermissible interference. Immunity from interference must still exist.
Production of interference: In cases of large differences of torque (e.g. when driving a piston
compressor) a non-sine wave motor current is induced, whose harmonics can cause an impermissible
effect on the mains and therefore impermissible production of interference.
With supply by frequency inverters, various strengths of interference are produced according to the
design of the frequency inverter (type, interference suppression, manufacturer). The EMC information
of the inverter manufacturer must be observed. If a shielded motor supply cable is recommended, the
shielding is most effective if a large area is electrically connected to the metal terminal box of the
motor (with metal EMC cable gland). With motors with integrated sensors (e.g. thermistors)
interference voltages due to the inverter may be produced in the sensor cables.
B 1091 en-2319 17
361
Interference immunity: For motors with integrated sensors (e.g. thermistors) the operator must
ensure adequate immunity to interference by the selection of a suitable sensor cable (possibly with
screening, with connection as for the motor supply cable) and evaluation device. The information and
instructions in the operating instructions for the inverter and all other instructions must be observed
before commissioning. After installation of the motor, it must be checked for correct functioning. In the
case of brake motors, the correct function of the brake must also be checked.
1.3.10 Disposal
NOTICE Environmental damage

Incorrect disposal of the product may cause damage to the environment.
• Ensure correct disposal
• Comply with current local regulations
Content: aluminium, iron, electronic components, copper

Please observe the additional documentation for the attachments
18 B 1091 en-2319
362
2 Maintenance and servicing

WARNING Injury due to movement

Under certain conditions (e.g. switching on the power supply, releasing a holding brake) the motor may start to
move. The machinery which it drives (press / chain hoist / roller / fan etc.) may then make an unexpected
movement. This may cause various injuries, including to third parties.
Before switching on, secure the danger area by warning and removing all persons from the danger area.
2.1 Safety measures

Before starting any work on the motor or the device, but especially before opening the covers of active
components, the motor must be isolated according to regulations. In addition to the main power
circuits, any additional or auxiliary circuits must be taken into account.
The usual "5 Safety Rules" e.g. according to DIN VDE 0105 are:
• Disconnect
• Secure to prevent reactivation
• Check for no voltage on all poles
• Earth and short circuit
• Cover or cordon off adjacent live components
These measures may only be removed when the maintenance work is complete.
B 1091 en-2319 19
363
Motors must be properly inspected at regular intervals; current national standards and regulations
must be complied with. In particular, special attention must be paid to any mechanical damage, free
path of the cooling air, abnormal noises and correct electrical connection.
Only original parts may be used as spare parts with the exception of standardised, commercially
available and equivalent parts.
Swapping parts between motors of the same type is not permissible.
Information Condensation outlets

If the motors are designed with closed condensation outlets, these must be opened occasionally in order to allow
any accumulated condensation to drain off. Condensation outlets must always be located at the lowest point of
the motor. During installation of the motor care must be taken that the condensation outlets point downwards and
are closed. Open condensation outlets cause a reduction of the protection class.
2.2 Bearing replacement intervals

Under normal operating conditions, with horizontal installation of the motor, depending on the coolant
temperature and the motor speed, the bearing replacement interval [h] for IEC motors is:
25°C 40°C 60°C
up to 1,800 rpm approx. 40,000 h approx. 20,000 h approx. 8,000 h
up to 3,600 rpm approx. 20,000 h approx. 10,000 h approx. 4,000 h
Under special operating conditions, e.g. vertical motor installation, large stresses due to vibration and
shock, or operation with frequent reversing, the operating hours stated above are significantly
reduced.
20 B 1091 en-2319
364
2.3 Maintenance intervals

The motor must be checked weekly, or every 100 operating hours for unusual running noise and/or
vibrations.
Please check the roller bearings at an interval of at least 10,000 h and replace them as required. In
addition, the electric connections, cables and wires as well as the fan are firmly fastened and free from
damage. Furthermore, the function of the insulation system must be checked.
Replace the shaft sealing rings every 10,000 hours.
The surface of the motor must not have any dirt deposits which could impair cooling.
A general overhaul of the motor must be carried out every 5 years.
2.4 General overhaul

For this the motor must be dismantled. The following work must be carried out:
• All components of the motor must be cleaned
• All components of the motor must be examined for damage
• All damaged components must be replaced
• All roller bearings must be replaced
• All seals and shaft sealing rings must be replaced
The general overhaul must be carried out by qualified personnel in a specialist workshop with
appropriate equipment. We urgently recommend that the general overhaul is carried out by NORD
Service.
If the drive unit is subjected to special operating conditions, the intervals stated above may be
considerably reduced.
B 1091 en-2319 21
365
3 ATEX Explosion hazard areas
3.1 Motors with increased ignition protection, type Ex eb
DANGER! Explosion hazard

All work must only be carried out with the machine at a standstill and the power to the
system switched off.
Higher temperatures than the maximum permitted surface temperature of the housing may be
present inside the motor. The motor must therefore never be opened in an explosive
atmosphere!
Failure to comply with this may result in the ignition of an explosive atmosphere.
WARNING Explosion hazard

Excessively heavy dust deposits must be avoided, as these impair the cooling of the device!
Impairment or obstruction of the flow of cooling air, for example due to partial or large area
coverage of the fan cover or the entry of foreign bodies fall into the fan must be avoided in
order to ensure adequate cooling.
Only cable glands and reducers which are approved for use in explosion hazard areas may be
used.
All cable glands which are not used must be closed with blind screw plugs which are approved
for potentially explosive areas.
Only the original seals may be used.
Failure to comply increases the risk of ignition of an explosive atmosphere.
The following supplementary or special information applies for these motors.

The motors are suitable for use in Zone 1 and correspond to Device Group II, Category 2G and may
be used at an ambient temperature from -20 °C to +40 °C.
Type suffix: 2G e. g.: 80 L/4 2G TF

Labelling: II 2G Ex eb IIC T3 Gb
0102
If the motor is attached to a gear unit, the EX labelling of the gear unit must also be observed!
Explosive gas mixtures or dust concentrations may cause severe or fatal injuries in combination with
hot, electrically live and moving components of electrical machines.
22 B 1091 en-2319
366
The increased danger in explosion hazard areas requires especially strict observance of the general
safety and commissioning information. The person responsible must be qualified according to the
national and local regulations.
Explosion protected electrical machines with ignition protection class Ex eb correspond to the
standard series EN 60034 (VDE 0530), as well as EN 60079-0:2014 and EN 60079-7:2015. The
degree of the explosion hazard determines the zone categorisation. DIN EN 60079, Part 10 A
provides information with regard to this. The operator is responsible for the categorisation of the
zones. The use of motors which are not certified for explosion hazard areas in explosion hazard areas
is prohibited.
3.1.1 Cable gland

The cable glands must be approved for explosion hazard areas. Unused openings must be closed
with approved blind plugs. When connecting the installation cables, the connections to the motor
terminals and to the earth lead must use U shaped bent cables placed under the relevant terminals so
that the clamping bars and the terminal bolts are equally loaded and are not deformed in any way.
Alternatively, the connections may be made with a cable lug. If increased thermal requirements are
made for the cables, these must be obtained from the information plate on the rotor.
For Sizes 63 to 132 an insulated cable lug must be used, if this is used to connect the earth lead in the
terminal box.
The nuts of the terminal board bolts must be tightened according to the following table.
Tightening torques for terminal board connections
Thread diameter M4 M5 M6 M8
Tightening torque (Nm) 1.2 2.0 3.0 6.0
Use of aluminium connecting wires is not permitted.
3.1.2 Cable connections

All motors with ignition protection class Ex eb are delivered with a certified cable gland.
If the supplied cable glands are used, cables with a circular cross-section must be used. The clamping
nuts of the cable gland must be tightened to the torque specified in the following table.
Clamping nut tightening torques
Cable gland M20x1.5 M25x1.5 M32x1.5 M40x1.5
Use of reduction adapters according to Directive 94/9 EEC or 2014/34/EU and/or cable glands with
ignition protection class Ex eb is permissible. For this, a minimum certified temperature of 80°C is
necessary.
When connecting, care must be taken that the permissible air gaps of at least 10 mm and the
permissible leakage tracks of at least12 mm between the electrically live components and components
with the same potential as the housing, or between live components are maintained.
Check that the terminal nuts and the screw for the earth lead are tight before closing the terminal box.
The terminal box seals and the seals of the cable glands must be correctly seated and must not be
damaged.
B 1091 en-2319 23
367
3.1.3 Terminal box cover seals

The terminal box cover gasket is captively mounted on the terminal box cover. Please only use an
original seal when replacing the seal.
If the terminal box is opened during installation, maintenance, repair, troubleshooting or overhaul, the
terminal box cover must be re-fitted after the work is complete. There must be no dirt on the surface of
the seal or the sealing surface of the terminal box frame.
The screws for the terminal box cover must be tightened with a torque according to the list below.
Tightening torques for terminal box cover screws
Tightening torque (Nm) 0.8 - 1.2 1.2 - 1.8 1.5 - 2.5 3.0 – 5.0
3.1.4 Motor position – special features for IM V3, IM V6

If the end of the shaft faces upwards, e.g. version IMV3, IMV6, a cover must be provided by the
operator / installer, which prevents foreign bodies from falling into the fan cover of the motor (see
DIN EN 60079-0). This must not obstruct the fan from cooling the motor. If the end of the shaft faces
downwards (AS), e.g. versions IMV1, IMV5, the motors are normally provided with a protective cover
on the fan cover. A hand wheel on the second end of the shaft is not permitted.
24 B 1091 en-2319
368
3.1.5 Further operating conditions

The motors are designed for continuous operation and normal, non recurring starting, in which no
significant starting heat occurs.
Range A in EN 60034-1 (VDE 0530 Part 1) - Voltage ± 5%, Frequency ± 2%, curve form, mains
symmetry - must be complied with so that the development of heat remains within the permissible
limits. Any major deviations from the rated values can cause an impermissible increase in the
development of heat in the motor.
The motor temperature class stated on the type plate must at least conform to the temperature class
of any combustible gas that may occur.
3.1.6 Protective devices

Each machine must be protected against excess heating by means of a current-dependent delayed
protection switch whose function is tested by a designated facility, with phase failure protection
according to VDE 0660 or an equivalent device. Protective devices must be adjusted to the rated
current. For windings with a delta circuit, the triggers are connected in series with the windings and
adjusted to 0.58x the rated current. If this circuit is not possible, additional protective measures are
necessary (e.g. thermal protection of the machine).
In case of a jammed rotor, the protective device must switch of within the specified tE-time for the
relevant temperature class.
Electrical machines with heavy starting (start-up time > 1.7 x tE-time) must be protected by means of
starting monitoring according to the details in the EEC type test certificate.
Thermal protection of the machine by means of direct temperature monitoring of the windings with a
thermistor temperature sensor is permissible, if this is certified and stated on the rating plate.
Do not apply voltages greater than 30 V to the thermistor temperature sensor.
If the only protection is a PTC thermistor temperature sensor, a performance-tested, PTC tripping
device certified by a designated body must be used. The PTC triggering device must be equipped with
the following protection class label:
II (2) G
B 1091 en-2319 25
369
Information for motor protection

Type plate example: Type plate example:
No sole means of protection via temperature sensor Sole protection via temperature sensor
Notice! Danger! If the time tA is not stated on the A thermistor is permissible as the sole
type plate, the thermistor is not permissible as the sole
means of protection
It is essential that the motor is protected with a
motor protection relay which has been approved
by a testing facility. The motor protection relay must
be approved for the ignition protection class which is
stated on the motor.

Operation with a frequency inverter must be explicitly certified. The separate manufacturer's
information must be observed. The EMC Directive must be complied with.
26 B 1091 en-2319
370
3.1.8 Repairs
Repairs must be carried out by Getriebebau NORD or by an officially recognised expert. The work
must be indicated with an additional repair plate. With the exception of standard, commercially
available and equivalent components, only original spare parts (see spare parts list) may be used. The
particularly applies for seals and connecting components.
For motors with closed condensation outlets, the threads of the closing screws must be coated with
Loctite 242 or Loxeal 82-21 after the condensation has been drained. The closing screws must be re-
inserted immediately. The electrical connections must be checked at regular intervals.
Check that the connection terminals, and the electrical bonding terminal are firmly fastened. Check
that the cable gland and the terminal box gasket are in good condition
All work on electrical machinery must be performed when the machine is at a standstill and with all
poles disconnected from the mains.
The motor must be removed for any measurement of the insulation resistance. The measurement
must not be performed in the explosion hazard area. As soon as measurement has been completed,
discharge the connecting terminals again immediately by shorting them in order to prevent any spark
discharges occurring in the explosive area.

Insulation measurements may cause sparks and therefore ignition of an explosive
atmosphere.
• Only perform insulation measurements outside of an explosive atmosphere.
• Discharge the connection terminals by short circuiting them after the measurement and
before returning to an explosive atmosphere.
3.1.9 Painting
Motors are provided with suitable painting ex-works. Subsequent painting may only be carried out
after consultation with Getriebebau NORD or a workshop which is approved for the repair of explosion
protected motors. Compliance with the valid standards and regulations is mandatory.
B 1091 en-2319 27
371
3.1.10 Type plate for NORD Ex eb motors according to EN 60079

1 Data Matrix Code
2 Identification number of designated body
3 Number of phases
4 Type designation
5 Order number / motor number
6 Year of manufacture
7 Thermal class of the insulation system
8 IP protection class
9 Operating mode
10 Standard specifications
11 Nominal frequency
12 Nominal voltage
13 Permissible voltage range
14 EC prototype test certificate number
15 Power factor
16 Speed
17 Explosion protection marking
18 Starting current / nominal current
19 tE times
20 Note: TMS with specification of tA time only with
PTC triggering device in accordance with
II (2)G PTC DIN 44082
21 Notice! Pay attention to operating instructions

B1091
22 Rated power (mechanical power delivered to shaft)
23 Nominal current
24 Individual serial number
25 Efficiency
Before commissioning, the type plate must be compared with the requirements of the aforementioned
declaration, which result from the local regulations and operating conditions.
Explanation of standard specification in rating plate
EN 60034 (H), (A)/ EN 60079

Used range of standards for explosion protection
(Please pay attention to conformity declaration.)
Voltage range A in accordance with EN 60034-1
Half key balancing in accordance with EN 60034-14
Product standard
3.1.11 Applied standards

EN Standard Edition IEC Standard Edition
EN 60034-7 2001-12 IEC 60034-7 2001-02
EN 60034-6 1996-08 IEC 60034-6 1991-10
EN 60079-0 2014-06 IEC 60079-0 2011, modified; cor.:2012; cor.:2013
EN 60079-7 2015 IEC 60079-7 2015
EN 60529 2014-09 IEC 60529 1989 +A1:1999 + A2:2013
28 B 1091 en-2319
372
3.2 Motors with ignition protection class Non Sparking Ex ec

atmosphere!

used.

The motors are suitable for use in Zone 2 and correspond to Device Group II, Category 3G and may
be used at an ambient temperature from -20 °C to +40 °C.
Type suffix: 3G e. g.: 80 L/4 3G TF

Labelling: II 3G Ex ec IIC T3 Gc With indication of the temperature
class
Explosive gas mixtures or dust concentrations may cause severe or fatal injuries in combination with
hot, electrically live and moving components of electrical machines.
The increased danger in explosion hazard areas requires especially strict observance of the general
safety and commissioning information. The persons responsible must be qualified according to the
national and local regulations.
Explosion protected electrical machines with ignition protection class Ex n correspond to the standard
series EN 60034 (VDE 0530), as well as EN 60079-0:2014 and EN 60079-7:2015. The degree of the
explosion hazard determines the zone categorisation. DIN EN 60079, Part 10 A provides information
with regard to this. The operator is responsible for the categorisation of the zones. The use of motors
which are not certified for explosion hazard areas in explosion hazard areas is prohibited.
B 1091 en-2319 29
373
3.2.1 Cable gland

The cable glands must be approved for explosion hazard areas. Unused openings must be closed
with approved blind plugs. When connecting the installation cables, the connections to the motor
terminals and to the earth lead must use U shaped bent cables placed under the relevant terminals so
that the clamping bars and the terminal bolts are equally loaded and are not deformed in any way.
Alternatively, the connections may be made with a cable lug. If increased thermal requirements are
made for the cables, these must be obtained from the information plate on the rotor.
For Sizes 63 to 132 an insulated cable lug must be used, if this is used to connect the earth lead in the
terminal box.
The nuts of the terminal board bolts must be tightened according to the following table.
Use of aluminium connecting wires is not permitted.
3.2.2 Cable connections

If the supplied cable glands are used, cables with a circular cross-section must be used. The clamping
nuts of the cable gland must be tightened to the torque specified in the following table.
Cable gland M20x1.5 M25x1.5 M32x1.5 M40x1.5
Use of reduction adapters according to Directive 94/9 EEC or 2014/34/EU and/or cable glands with
ignition protection class Ex ec is permissible. For this, a minimum certified temperature of 80°C is
necessary.
When connecting, care must be taken that the permissible air gaps of at least 10 mm and the
permissible leakage tracks of at least12 mm between the electrically live components and components
with the same potential as the housing, or between live components are maintained.
Check that the terminal nuts and the screw for the earth lead are tight before closing the terminal box.
The terminal box seals and the seals of the cable glands must be correctly seated and must not be
damaged.
30 B 1091 en-2319
374


B 1091 en-2319 31
375

The motors are designed for continuous operation and normal, non recurring starting, in which no
significant starting heat occurs.
Range A in EN 60034-1 (VDE 0530 Part 1) - Voltage ± 5%, Frequency ± 2%, curve form, mains
symmetry - must be complied with so that the development of heat remains within the permissible
limits. Any major deviations from the rated values can cause an impermissible increase in the
development of heat in the motor.
The motor temperature class stated on the type plate must at least conform to the temperature class
of any combustible gas that may occur.
3.2.6 Protective devices

Protective devices must be adjusted to the rated current. For windings with a delta circuit, the triggers
are connected in series with the windings and adjusted to 0.58x the rated current.
Alternatively, the motors can be protected with thermistor temperature sensors. Protection with
thermistor temperature sensors is mandatory for inverter operation.
Do not apply voltages greater than 30 V to the thermistor temperature sensor.
We recommend the use of a functionally tested, certified PTC trigger device for protection with a
thermistor temperature sensor.
The following standards must be observed for the installation of electrical systems in
explosion hazard areas in Germany: DIN EN 60079-14 (VDE 0165-1), the Technical Rules for
Operating Safety (TRBS), the Operating Safety Regulations (BetrSichV), the Hazardous
Substances Regulation (GefStoffV) as well as the Explosion Protection Regulations (Ex-RL).
Other regulations must be observed if applicable. The applicable national regulation must be
observed outside of Germany.
32 B 1091 en-2319
376
3.2.7 Repairs
Repairs must be carried out by Getriebebau NORD or by an officially recognised expert. The work
must be indicated with an additional repair plate. With the exception of standard, commercially
available and equivalent components, only original spare parts (see spare parts list) may be used. The
particularly applies for seals and connecting components.
For motors with closed condensation outlets, the threads of the closing screws must be coated with
Loctite 242 or Loxeal 82-21 after the condensation has been drained. The closing screws must be re-
inserted immediately. The electrical connections must be checked at regular intervals.
Check that the connection terminals, and the electrical bonding terminal are firmly fastened. Check
that the cable gland and the terminal box gasket are in good condition
All work on electrical machinery must be performed when the machine is at a standstill and with all
poles disconnected from the mains.
The motor must be removed for any measurement of the insulation resistance. The measurement
must not be performed in the explosion hazard area. As soon as measurement has been completed,
discharge the connecting terminals again immediately by shorting them in order to prevent any spark
discharges occurring in the explosive area.

Insulation measurements may cause sparks and therefore ignition of an explosive
atmosphere.
• Only perform insulation measurements outside of an explosive atmosphere.
• Discharge the connection terminals by short circuiting them after the measurement and
before returning to an explosive atmosphere.
3.2.8 Painting
B 1091 en-2319 33
377
3.2.9 Type plate for NORD Ex ec motors according to EN 60079

1 Data Matrix Code
3 Number of phases
4 Type designation
9 Operating mode
11 Nominal frequency
12 Nominal voltage
13 Permissible voltage range
15 Power factor
16 Speed
18 Starting current / nominal current
21 Notice! Pay attention to operating

instructions B1091
22 Rated power (mechanical power delivered to
shaft)
23 Nominal current
25 Efficiency
Explanation of standard specification in rating plate
EN 60034 (H), (A)/ EN 60079

Used range of standards for explosion protection
(Please pay attention to conformity declaration.)
Voltage range A in accordance with EN 60034-1
Half key balancing in accordance with EN 60034-14
Product standard
3.2.10 Applied standards

EN Standard Edition IEC Standard Edition
EN 60034-7 2001-12 IEC 60034-7 2001-02
EN 60034-6 1996-08 IEC 60034-6 1991-10
EN 60079-0 2014-06 IEC 60079-0 2011, modified; cor.:2012; cor.:2013
EN 60079-7 2015 IEC 60079-7 2015
EN 60529 2014-09 IEC 60529 1989 +A1:1999 + A2:2013
34 B 1091 en-2319
378
3.3 Motors for use in Zone 21 and Zone 22 according to EN 60079-0 and IEC
60079

atmosphere!

used.

Motors which comply with EN 60079 and IEC 60079 are suitable according to their labelling for use in
Zone 21 or Zone 22 - non-conductive dust.
Type supplement:
according to Zone 21 2D e. g.: 80 L/4 2D TF
EN 60079
Zone 22 3D e. g.: 80 L/4 3D TF
according to Zone 21 EPL Db e. g.: 80 L/4 IDB TF
IEC 60079
Zone 22 EPL Dc e. g.: 80 L/4 IDC TF
Labelling:
according to II 2D Ex tb IIIC T125°C Db for category 2 (Zone 21)1)
IEC 60079 and
0102
2014/34 EU
(94/9 EC old)
II 3D Ex tc IIIB T125°C Dc for category 3 (Zone 22 –
non-conducting dust)1)
according to EX tb IIIC T125°C Db for category 2 1)

IEC 60079
Ex tc IIIB T125°C Dc for category 3 (Zone 22 –
non-conducting dust)1)
1) The details of the surface temperature may deviate from 125 °C and may be obtained from the type plate.
B 1091 en-2319 35
379
DANGER Explosion hazard

The increased danger in areas with inflammable dust demands the strict observation of the
general safety and commissioning information. Explosive concentrations of dust may cause
explosions if ignited by hot or sparking objects. Such explosions may cause serious or fatal
injuries to persons or severe material damage.
The persons responsible must be qualified according to the national and local regulations.
3.3.1 Commissioning information / Field of application

If the motors are required for use with frequency inverters, this must be stated in the order. The
supplementary operating instructions B1091-1 must be observed. The motors must be protected
against overheating with suitable monitoring equipment! The thickness of dust deposits must not
exceed 5 mm! The motors are designed for the voltage and frequency range B of EN 60034 Part 1.
Exception: Size 132MA/4 2D, 132MA/4 3D, 132LH/4 2D, 132LH/4 3D motors comply with the voltage
and frequency range A.
Motors for use in Zone 21 and Zone 22, with labelling TF may be thermally monitored via the built-in
PTC in combination with a suitable triggering device as the sole protection.
Electrical equipment for use in areas with inflammable dust comply with the standards DIN EN
60079-0, IEC 60079-0, EN 60079-31, IEC 60079-31, as well as DIN EN 60034 and IEC 60034.
The valid version of the standard can be obtained from the EC Declaration of Conformity or the IECEx
CoC. The degree of the explosion hazard determines the zone categorisation. The operator /
employer is responsible for the assignment of zones (in Europe: RL 1999/92/EC).
If the certification is supplemented with an "X" the special conditions in the EC prototype certification,
the IECEX CoC and/or the relevant documentation must be observed. The use of standard motors
which are not certified for explosion hazard areas in explosion hazard areas is prohibited.
36 B 1091 en-2319
380

3.3.3 Electrical Connection

The electrical connections of the terminal board are protected against twisting. The voltage supply to
the terminal board must be made by means of suitable ring terminals. The ring terminals are installed
between the two brass washers below the lock washer. The nuts must be tightened with a torque
according to the table below. The contact pressure is permanently maintained by means of the
specified torque and the lock washer. In addition, twisting of the ring terminals of the voltage supply is
prevented. The connection elements are corrosion-proof.
Tightening torque (Nm) 0,8 - 1,2 1,8 - 2,5 2,7 - 4,0 5,5 - 8,0
Exploded diagram of electrical connection
Cable lug provided by Brass nut

customer Lock washer
Brass washer
Brass nut
Ring terminal
Brass thread with collar
Mechanical protection against twisting
3.3.4 Cable and wiring glands

For Zone 21, the cable glands must be approved for Ex areas (minimum protection class IP 66) and
must be secured against accidental loosening. Unused apertures must be sealed with authorised
plugs (minimum protection class IP 66).
For Zone 22, the cable glands which are implemented according to EN 60079-0 and IEC 60079-0
must as a minimum correspond to the protection type specified on the type plate. Unused openings
must be closed with plugs, which as a minimum correspond to the protection class of the motor and
B 1091 en-2319 37
381
the requirements of EN 60079-0 and IEC 60079-0. The cable glands and blank plugs must be suitable
for a temperature of at least 80 °C.
The motor must not be opened under hazardous atmospheres to connect the electrical cables or for
any other work. The voltage must always be switched off and secured against being switched on
again before opening the motor!
The motors are equipped with cable glands according to the following overview.
Assignment of Cable Glands to Motor Size
Cable glands for standard motors Cable glands for brake motors
Type Numbe Thread Number Thread Number Thread Number Thread Number Thread Number Thread
r
63 2 M20x1.5 4 M20x1.5 2 M12x1.5
71 2 M20x1.5 4 M20x1.5 2 M12x1.5
80 2 M25x1.5 4 M25x1.5 2 M12x1.5
90 2 M25x1.5 4 M25x1.5 2 M12x1.5
100 2 M32x1.5 4 M32x1.5 2 M12x1.5
112 2 M32x1.5 4 M32x1.5 2 M12x1.5
132 2 M32x1.5 4 M32x1.5 2 M12x1.5 2 M16x1.5
160/ 2 M40x1.5 2 M12x1.5 2 M16x1.5 2 M40x1.5 2 M12x1.5 2 M16x1.5
180/..X
180/ 2 M40x1.5 2 M12x1.5 2 M16x1.5 2 M40x1.5 2 M12x1.5 2 M16x1.5
200/..X
225 2 M50x1.5 2 M12x1.5 2 M16x1.5 2 M50x1.5 2 M12x1.5 2 M16x1.5
250 WP 2 M63x1.5 2 M12x1.5 2 M16x1.5 2 M63x1.5 2 M12x1.5 2 M16x1.5
If the motor is supplied with a certified cable

gland, the clamping nuts of the cable gland
must be tightened to the torque specified in
the following table.
Cable gland
38 B 1091 en-2319
382

Cable gland M20x1.5 M25x1.5 M32x1.5 M40x1.5 M50x1.5 M63x1.5
Tightening torque (Nm) 5.0 5.0 10.0 13.5 20.0 20.0
3.3.5 Permissible ambient temperature range

For all motors, the permissible ambient temperature range is -20 °C...+40 °C. For motors for operation
in Zones 21 and 22, an extended ambient temperature range from -20 °C...+60 °C is permissible. In
this case, the rated power must be reduced to 72% of the value stated in the catalogue.
If the maximum ambient temperature is between +40 °C and +60 °C, the power output should be
inversely linearly interpolated between 100% and 72%. In this case thermal protection of the motor by
means of a thermistor sensor is essential. The motor connection cables and the cable glands must be
suitable for temperatures of at least 80 °C.
The extended ambient temperature range does not apply for optional conversions such as a brake
and/or external fan. Contact the manufacturer in case of doubt with regard to permissibility!
3.3.6 Painting
3.3.7 IEC-B14 motors

Please comply with the information in Section 1.3.2. Otherwise, explosion protection is not ensured.

B 1091 en-2319 39
383

Unless otherwise specified for operating modes and tolerances in the test certificate, the power rating
plate or in IECEx CoC, electrical machinery is designed for continuous operation and normal
infrequent start-ups where insignificant start-up heating occurs. The motors may only be used for the
type of operation stated on the name plate.
The installation instructions must be strictly observed.
3.3.10 Structure and method of use

The motors are self-cooling. Shaft sealing rings are fitted both on the output side (DS) and on the
ventilation side (VS). Motors for Zone 21 and Zone 22 have metal fans. Motors with brakes for Zone
22 (Category 3D, non-conducting dust) have a special plastic fan. The motors have protection class
IP55, optionally protection class IP 66 (Zone 22 . non-conducting dust, EPL Dc) or IP 66 (Zone 21,
EPL, Db). Under normal operating conditions, the surface temperature does not exceed the surface
temperature stated on the name plate.
3.3.11 Minimum cross section of bonding conductors

Cross section of the phase conductor Minimum cross section of the associated
of the installation S [mm2] protective conductor SP [mm2]
S ≤ 16 S
16 < S ≤ 35 16
S > 35 0.5 S
40 B 1091 en-2319
384
3.3.12 Maintenance
The voltage must always be switched off and secured against being switched on again before
opening the motor!
Notice! Higher temperatures than the maximum permitted surface temperature of the housing
may be present inside the motor. The motor must therefore never be opened in hazardous dust
atmospheres! The motors must be checked and tested regularly for functional safety! The
applicable national standards and regulations must be complied with!
Impermissibly thick dust deposits > 5 mm must not be allowed to build up! If functional safety cannot
be ensured, the motor may not be operated! When the ball bearings are replaced, the rotary shaft
seals must also be replaced. FKM rotary shaft seals as specified by Getriebebau NORD must be
used. Ensure that they are fitted correctly! The rotary shaft seals must be lubricated on the external
rings and on the seal lips. If an explosion protected gear is flanged dust-tight to the motor, an NBR
rotary shaft seal can be used on the drive side of the motor if the gear oil temperature does not
exceed 85°C. Only original parts may be used as spare parts with the exception of standardised,
commercially available and equivalent parts. This particularly applies to seals and connection
components. Parts for terminal boxes or spare parts for external grounding must be ordered as per the
spare parts list in the operating instructions.
The functionality of seals, rotary shaft seals and cable glands must be regularly checked!
Maintaining dust protection for the motors is of paramount importance for explosion
protection. Maintenance must be carried out by qualified personnel in a specialist workshop with
appropriate equipment. We urgently recommend that the general overhaul is carried out by NORD
Service.
B 1091 en-2319 41
385
3.4 Options for motors for use in Zone 21 and Zone 22

atmosphere!

used.

The design of the insulation of NORD ATEX motors with ignition protection class tb and tc is suitable
for operation with a frequency inverter. Due to the variable speed range, temperature monitoring by
means of thermistors or temperature sensors is necessary. For safe planning and use, the planning
guide for the operating and installation instructions B1091-1 must be observed. The planning guide
provides information regarding the necessary conditions for inverter operation and the approved
speed ranges. Option Z (additional high inertia cast iron fan) is not permitted for inverter operation.
If the frequency inverter is not approved for operation within the explosive atmosphere, the frequency
inverter must be installed outside of the explosive atmosphere.
42 B 1091 en-2319
386
3.4.2 External fan

Motors with the additional labelling F (e.g. 80S/4 3D F) are equipped with an external fan and must be
monitored with the integrated temperature sensor.

The motor must only be operated together with the external fan. Failure of the external fan
may cause the motor to overheat and therefore cause damage and/or injury up to and
including ignition of the explosive atmosphere.
The operating instructions for the external fan must be observed.
The power supply to the external fan is provided separately via the terminal box of the external fan.
The supply voltage of the external fan must comply with the voltage which is stated on the type plate.
The external fan must be protected against overheating with suitable monitoring equipment! The IP
protection class of the external fan may differ from that of the motor. The lower protection class
applies for the drive unit. The cable glands must as a minimum correspond to the protection class
which is specified on the type plate. Unused openings must be closed with plugs, which as a minimum
correspond to the protection class of the motor.
External fans and motors for use in explosion hazard areas have Ex labelling according to RL 94/9
EEC or 2014/34/EU. The labelling must be present on both the external fan and the motor. If there is a
difference between the labelling on the external fan and the motor, the lower labelled explosion
protection applies for the entire drive unit. The details of surface temperatures apply for the entire
drive unit; the stated max, temperature applies for the individual components. Any gear unit which is
present must also be taken into account. Please contact Getriebebau NORD in case of doubt. If any
component of the entire drive unit is not provided with Ex labelling, the entire drive unit may not be
used in an explosion hazard area.
B 1091 en-2319 43
387
3.4.3 Second temperature sensor 2TF

Category 3D motors (Zone 22, non-conducting dust) can be supplied with a second temperature
sensor (2TF). This option can be used to implement a warning signal (overheating in the winding). It
should be noted that the temperature sensor with the lower trigger temperature should be used for the
warning; the temperature sensor with the higher trigger temperature must be used to evaluate the
switch-off signal.
3.4.4 Back stop

Motors with the additional code RLS (e.g. 80S/4 3D RLS) are equipped with a back stop. For motors
with a back stop, the direction of rotation is indicated by an arrow on the fan cover. The head of the
arrow points in the direction of the drive shaft. When connecting the motor and during motor control, it
must be ensured that the motor can only operate in the rotation direction, e.g. by means of a rotary
field test. Switching of the motor into the blocked direction of rotation, i.e. the wrong direction of
rotation may cause damage.
Back stops operate without wear above a speed of approx. 800 rpm. To prevent excessive heating
and premature wear of the back stop, back stops must not be operated below a speed of 800 rpm.
This must be observed for motors with a frequency of 50 Hz and pole numbers ≥ 8 as well as for
motors with a frequency inverter.
3.4.5 Brake
Motors with the additional labelling BRE (e.g. 80S/4 3D BRE 10) are equipped with a brake and must
be monitored with the integrated temperature sensor. Triggering of the temperature sensor of one of
the components (motor or brake) must result in the safe shut-down of the entire drive unit. The motor
and brake thermistors must be connected in series.
If the motor is operated with a frequency inverter, an external fan must be used for stator frequencies
less than 25 Hz. Operation with stator frequencies of 25 Hz is not permissible without an external fan.
The brake may be used as a holding brake with up to 4 activations per hour.
An optional manual release (with a lockable manual release lever) may only be used if no explosive
atmosphere is present.
NOTICE! The operating instructions for the brake must also be observed.
The DC supply for the brake is via a rectifier in the motor terminal box or via a direct DC supply. The
brake voltage which is stated on the type plate must be complied with.
The power supply cables must not be laid in the same cable as the temperature sensor lines. The
function of the brake must be checked before commissioning. No rubbing noises may occur, as
impermissibly high heating could occur.
44 B 1091 en-2319
388
3.4.6 Overview of brake installation for NORD ATEX motors

Permissible brake sizes for Category 3D motors
Size LKZ Braking torque [Nm]

63 S, L 5
71 S, L 5
80 S, SH 5 10
80 L, LH 5 10
90 S, SH 10 20
90 L, LH 10 20
100 L, LH 20 40
100 LA, AH 20 40
112 M, SH, MH 20 40
132 S, SH 60
132 M, MH 60
132 MA 60
160 MH 100 150 250
160 LH 100 150 250
180 MH 250
180 LH 250
200 XH 250
225 SP, MP 400
250 WP 400
B 1091 en-2319 45
389
3.4.7 NORD Ex motor type plate (Ex tb, EX tc) according to EN 60079 for operation
with a frequency inverter
1 Data Matrix Code
Code number of the designated facility (only for
2
Ex tb)
3 Number of phases
4 Type designation
9 Operating mode
11 Stator frequency
12 Stator voltage
14 EC prototype test certificate number
15 Power factor
16 Speed
Notice! Pay attention to operating instructions
21
Type plate example Ex tb B1091
Rated power (mechanical power delivered to
22
shaft)
23 Rated current at operating point
25 Efficiency
26 Weight
27 Brake information (option only for Ex tc)
28 Note: Supply by frequency inverter
29 Maximum permissible stator frequency
30 Minimum pulse frequency of frequency inverter
31 Frequency inverter modulation method
32 Data field for operation with frequency inverters
33 Data field for mains operation
34 Rated torque on the motor shaft
46 B 1091 en-2319
390
3.5 Explosion protected motors according to TP TC012/2011 for the Eurasian

Economic Union
In addition to the information which is stated in the operating and maintenance instruction B1091, the
following information must be noted for EAC EX motors. If the motor is supplied with further
components or devices, the associated operating and maintenance instructions must also be
observed.
3.5.1 Type plates / Labelling

Motors with the labelling listed below have EAC Ex approval according to TP TC 012/2011 for the
Eurasian Economic Union.
These motors have two type plates. One type plate complies with ATEX Directive 2014/34 EU and the
relevant standards from the standard series EN 60079; the second type plate contains the additional
specifications according to Directive TP TC 012/2011.
The motors may only be operated in areas in which the ignition protection type stated on the motor
type plate is permissible. In addition, compliance with the temperature class and the maximum surface
temperature as stated on the type plate is mandatory.
B 1091 en-2319 47
391
3.5.2 Standards
ГОСТ Standard IEC Standard
ГОСТ 31610.0-2014 IEC 60079-0:2011
ГОСТ Р МЭК 60079-31-2013 IEC 60079-31:2013
ГОСТ Р МЭК 60079-7-2012 IEC 60079-7:2006
ГОСТ 31610.15-2014 IEC 60079-15:2010
3.5.3 Service life

In addition to the service intervals which are stated in the operating and maintenance instructions, it
should be noted that the use of motors which are more than 30 years old is not permitted.
The year of manufacture of the motor is stated on the type plate.
WARNING Danger to persons

The motors must be disconnected from the mains before opening the terminal box.

Opening the terminal box in an explosive atmosphere is prohibited.
3.5.4 Special operating conditions (X-labelling)

Permissible ambient temperature range
For all motors with ignition protection type tb or tc, the permissible ambient temperature range is -
20°C...+40°C. For motors for operation in Zones 21 and 22, an extended ambient temperature range
from -20°C...+60°C is permissible. In this case, the rated power must be reduced to 72 % of the value
stated in the catalogue.
If the maximum ambient temperature is between +40 °C and +60 °C, the power output should be
inversely linearly interpolated between 100 % and 72 %. In this case thermal protection of the motor
by means of a thermistor sensor is essential. The motor connection cables and the cable glands must
be suitable for temperatures of at least 80 °C.
The extended ambient temperature range does not apply for optional attachments such as a brake
and/or external fan. Contact the manufacturer in case of doubt with regard to permissibility!
48 B 1091 en-2319
392
4 Synchronous motors – special information
4 Synchronous motors – special information

4.1 Type designation

80 D 1 /4
Number of poles
Package length: The 1..9 code depends on the axis height and the length of
the active component
Winding type: T=2100 rpm in Y circuit, 3000 rpm in ∆ circuit
Axis height: 80, 90, 100
4.2 Connection
Notice! Hazardous voltages occur at the motor terminals when the motor shaft is rotating!
The motors must only be operated with suitable inverters For energy-efficient operation, the inverter
must detect the position of the rotor. Various methods both with and without encoders are available for
this. See also TI80_0010
Motors are normally supplied with a star circuit. Some operating points can only be used in a delta
circuit. For this, the bridges must be changed according to the circuit diagram in the terminal box
cover.
B 1091 en-2319 49
393
4.3 Encoders
Incremental encoder with zero track
The incremental encoder is located under the fan cover and is attached to this. After installation, the
zero point offset is measured in the final test. The offset is provided with an adhesive label in the
terminal box.
Absolute encoders
The synchronisation of the encoder is adjusted by NORD prior to delivery of the geared motor and
does not require determination of the offset.
If the encoder is not synchronised, or has come out of adjustment due to an impact or removal of the
motor, the zero track of the encoder must be synchronised to the rotor position.
4.4 Commissioning
The choice of inverter must be checked with regard to the motor allocation. In addition to the
information in Section 1 "General" the operating manual for the frequency inverter must be observed.
Further information can be obtained from TI80_0010.
4.5 Maintenance and servicing

CAUTION! The motors contain magnetic components Dismantling without specialist knowledge and
suitable aids may result in injuries. This type of work must only be carried out by trained personnel.
50 B 1091 en-2319
394
5 Replacement parts
5 Replacement parts
Please note our spare parts catalogue PL 1090 under www.nord.com.

We will be pleased to send you the spare parts catalogue on request.
B 1091 en-2319 51
395
6 Declarations of Conformity
52 B 1091 en-2319
396
B 1091 en-2319 53
397
54 B 1091 en-2319
398
B 1091 en-2319 55
399
400
6051302 / 2319
401
SEEPEX GmbH
Scharnhölzstraße 344
46240 Bottrop
Postfach 10 15 64
46215 Bottrop
Germany
Tel +49.2041.996-0
Fax +49.2041.996-400
[email protected]
www.seepex.com
Great Britain Austria Belgium Denmark

SEEPEX UK Ltd. SEEPEX GmbH SEEPEX GmbH SEEPEX Nordic A/S
3 Armtech Row Vertriebsbüro Österreich Bureau België Krakasvej 7C
Houndstone Business Park Obermüllergasse 18 Industriezone Klein Gent-Link 21 3400 Hillerød
Yeovil Somerset BA22 8RW 3003 Gablitz Welvaartstraat 14-1 bus 15 Tel +45.49.192200
Tel +44.1935.472376 Tel +43.2231.61085 2200 Herentals Fax + 45.49.193200
Fax +44.1935.479836 Fax +43.2231.6108520 Tel +32.14.501471 [email protected]
[email protected] [email protected] Fax +32.14.501461
[email protected]
France Hungary Irland Italy

SEEPEX France SARL SEEPEX GmbH SEEPEX UK Ltd. SEEPEX Italia S.r.l.
1, Rue Pelloutier Magyarországi iroda Branch Office Ireland Via Alberto da Giussano 23
77183 Croissy Beaubourg Hecskó Tamás okl.vill.mérn. 29 Lackenfune 20145 Milano (MI)
Tel +33.1.64114450 Éva utca 5. Dungarvan Tel +39.02.36569360
Fax + 33.1.64114489 7632 Pécs Co. Waterford Fax +39.02.92877855
[email protected] Tel +36.205806134 Tel +353.860450439 [email protected]
Fax +36.72952587 [email protected]
[email protected]
Poland Sweden Spain The Netherlands

SEEPEX GmbH SEEPEX Nordic A/S SEEPEX GmbH SEEPEX GmbH
Przedstawicielstwo w Polsce Hamndalsvägen 58 Officina de Representación en España Bureau Nederland
ul. Romana Maya 1 61633 Åby C/Copenhague, 12 Visbystraat 13
61-371 Poznan Tel +46.1166940 Edif. Tifan Oficina 207 7418 BE Deventer
Tel +48.61.6469270 Fax +46.1166941 28232 La Rozas Tel +31.570.516644
Fax +48.61.6469271 [email protected] Madrid Fax +31.570.516077
[email protected] Tel +34.91.6361353 [email protected]
Fax +34.91.6409371
[email protected]
Russia USA China India

SEEPEX Ltd. Ugreshskaya SEEPEX Inc. SEEPEX Pumps (Shanghai) Co., Ltd. SEEPEX India Pvt. Ltd.
Str. 2 Bldg. 23 511 Speedway Drive Xuanzhong Rd. 399, Building 13 Office No. 305.
115088 Moscow Enon Nanhui Industrial Area Raheja Arcade Building
Tel +7.495.2874830 Ohio 45323 201300 Shanghai Sector 11, C.B.D. Belapur
Fax +7.495.2874830 Tel +1.937.8647150 Tel +86.21.38108888 Navi Mumbai 400614
[email protected] Fax + 1.937.8647157 Fax +86.21.38108899 Tel +91.22.40240434/35
[email protected] [email protected] Fax +91.22.40240436
[email protected]
Japan Malaysia Australia

日本シーペックス株式会社 SEEPEX (M) Sdn. Bhd. SEEPEX Australia Pty. Ltd.
German Industry Park No. 2, Jalan 51/203A Unit 3, 4 Bounty Close
1-18-2 Hakusan, Midori-ku Kaw. Perindustrian Tiong Tuggerah Business Park
Yokohama 226-0006 Nam Seksyen 51 NSW 2259
Tel +81.46.2595931 46050 Petaling Jaya Selengor Tel +61.2.43554500
Fax +81.46.2595941 Darul Ehsan Fax +61.2.43554022
[email protected] Tel +60.3.88009988 [email protected]
[email protected]
More SEEPEX sales partnes in *874659*

Europe, America, Asia, Africa and
Oceania you willl find on our website.
402

Bomba

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Bomba

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Bomba

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operating and Assembly Instruction

Progressive Cavity Pump

Read instructions before Always keep instructions

2 Description of the machine ................................................................................................................... 5

3 Technical Data ......................................................................................................................................

4 Transport, Intermediate storage, Disposal ..........................................................................................

5 Assembly / Installation ........................................................................................................................ 15

5.6 Dimensional Drawing............................................................................................................. 17

6 Commissioning / De-Commissioning ..................................................................................................

8 Malfunctions, causes, rectification ...................................................................................................... 25

9 Dismantling / Reassembly .................................................................................................................. 27

10 Spare parts ......................................................................................................................................... 62

10.2 Sectional drawing ................................................................................................................... 67

11 Special tools ....................................................................................................................................... 69

12 Related documents .............................................................................................................................

1.2.1 Warning notes

Caution for people and machine!

Warning for people!

Danger for people!

Ausgabe Dokument Blatt

Warning: Warning: Warning: Warning:

Warning: Warning: Warning: Warning:

1.2.3 Information symbols

Observe operating Ensure environ- Disconnect power Wear eye protection.

Ausgabe Dokument Blatt

1.4 Qualification of the personnel

1.5 Authorized people

The owner is responsible for:

1.5.1 Tasks and information for the owner/operators

1.5.2 Safety notes for maintenance, inspection and assembly work

Ausgabe Dokument Blatt

1.7 Safety and protective devices

1.8 Foreseeable misuse

1.9 Designated use

Type SEEPEX Inc.

Ausgabe Dokument Blatt

2.1 General description

2.2 Mode of action and pumping principle of the seepex pump

2.3 Constructive design

Ausgabe Dokument Blatt

3.1 Data sheet

3.2 Characteristic Curves

Ausgabe Dokument Blatt

Application data U 495 SLB002

Conveyed product inorganic sludge

Tolerances according to SEEPEX standards.

Flange diameter 160 mm

Norm Min Max

Damage to property/injuries due to incorrect transport.

4.2.1 Dimensions, weight and centre of gravity

Top Fragile Against moisture Centre of gravity Lashing points

4.2.3 Lashing points (AP) for lifting devices

Warning of suspended load.

Lifting machine Industrial trucks

4.2.4 Unpacking the machine

Ausgabe Dokument Blatt

Ausgabe Dokument Blatt

5.1 Mounting tools / lifting gear

Pump falling over.